Home

Maple T.A. User Guide

Contents

1. Class Details instructor Courtney Jones Change Instructor Instructor Email courineyjones mmaplesoft com Course 1D Class Name Class Short Name School Registration Locked Featured Class LI Inhent content from Default Role In Class Student Default Student role Description URL Link destination http www maplesoft com A hyperlink to be displayed on the class homepage Link text Maplesoft Figure 2 1 Inherit Content From A Featured Class See Also Shared Classes page 15 9 Creating and Managing Classes Create a Child Class In addition to inheriting content from a featured class you can create a copy of any class for which you are the instructor To create a child class to create that class that includes questions and pre populated assignments from the parent class 1 Click the class you want to share This will take you to the Class Homepage 2 From the Class Homepage under the Class Details tab select Add Child Class 99 If desired click Change Instructor and select a new instructor from the system users Select the radio button beside the appropriate user and click Update to change the instructor Complete the class registration form For more details see Required Registration Information page 9 Click Submit to save changes The class is added to System Homepage under the the list of Classes where my role is Instructor if you are the instructor
2. Algorithm a range 2 5 poly maple randomize randpoly x degree a Edit the code for your algorithm displaypoly maple printf MathMWL ExportPresentation poly y inthe text box below or click show Designer to use the algorithm designer The algorithm designer tool allows you to define algorithms for your Li Value question by completing a form 3 A Show Designer poly Ath de Fy 3 51 42 28 x B7 displaypoly Art 472 5102 28 2 87 Figure 5 65 Numeric Example 3 Algorithm 6 Enter the following for the Question Text What is the degree of displaypoly 7 Enter the following for the Correct answer In the Number field enter a e Leave the Units field blank since units are not required with this answer 216 Authoring Question Types 8 Leave Precision and Input format as their default settings 9 Click Finish 10 Click Preview to view the question as shown in Figure 5 66 You can test the question by selecting various responses ManteTA Preview Question Degree of polynomial Whatis the degree of 9 ya 2l r 45 Number Figure 5 66 Numeric Example 3 Example 4 Numeric Question with Units and Algorithmic Variables 1 From the Class Homepage select the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 On the Question Type list click Numeric 4 Enter the following title for the Question Name Area of rectangular solid At the bottom of the page click the add icon Si and
3. 20 2 andreturns 2 870 s sum i 1 n i 2 calculates the sum of the squares of the integers from 1 to n Note Do not use a character for the dummy variable in the summation switch n a b C Given a whole number 0 1 2 and a list of items returns the nth item in the list the first item is in position 0 the second in position 1 and so on For example prime switch rint 5 2 3 5 7 11 sets prime to a random choice from the first 5 primes switch 1 P red green j yellow 275 Authoring Mathematical Questions returns green See Also Tutorial List based Variables page 283 rank n a b c d page 271 Random Integer Generation rint n rint m n rint m n k page 272 6 19 Mathematical and Logical Operators in Algorithms and Answers This is a list of mathematical and logical operators functions that you can use in internal directives within questions Some of these operators are also available to students in their responses to math questions in the system unreserved operations while others are reserved for instructor or question authoring use only Unreserved Operations These functions are available for use in both internal directives in variable definitions and statements and for use by students when expressing their responses to math questions Each command performs the expected mathematical function in a formula or algorithm Table 6 15 Mathematica
4. 8 Enter the following for Correct answer n x n 1 9 In the Type of expression accepted list select Formula 10 Click Finish 11 Click Preview to view the question See Figure 5 26 Preview Question Find the derivative Lety r16 whatis the derivative ofy withrespectto x Enter only the expression for the derivative omitting y This question accepts numbers or formulas Help Switch to Equation Editor Preview Refresh Figure 5 26 Formula Example Preview Example 2 Formula without Logs and Trig Subtype When using the formula without logs and trig subtype a response is graded correct if it is algebraically equivalent to the correct answer The correct answer is a formula that uses only basic operations for example arithmetic operations and sqrt If you want the answer to contain more advanced operations for example trig log etc you have to use the formula subtype 141 Authoring Question Types To create a Formula without Logs and Trig subtype question 1 From the Class Homepage click the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 In the Question Type list click Mathematical Formula 4 Enter the following for Question Name Evaluate trig expression O Enter the following for Question Text Evaluate tan j Enter the following for Correct answer 1 3 3 1 2 In the Type of expression accepted list select Formula without logs and trig Click Finish
5. 21 The Edit Adaptive Section dialog opens a Under the Section heading set Attempts to 3 This gives the student three attempts to answer section one correctly b Under the Section heading select Allow Skip This presents the Next Part option alongside Verify If a student does not want to attempt the question three times they can move to the next section by clicking Next Part c Under the Correct heading select Question Complete This means that the question is finished if this section is answered correctly d Click OK to return to the question 22 Insert the second section division in the desired location by clicking Insert Edit Adaptive Section 2 23 The Edit Adaptive Section dialog opens a Under the Section heading set Attempts to 2 This gives the student two attempts to answer this section correctly b Also under the Section heading set the Passing Score to 0 6 Under the Correct heading set the Weight to 0 4 QQ O Under the Correct heading select Display This means that if this section is answered correctly the answers given in this section remain displayed when the question progresses to the final section e Under the Incorrect heading select Display This means that if this section is answered incorrectly the answers given in this section also remain displayed when the question progresses to the final section Click OK For more information on all the options on this screen see Sections of an Adaptive Q
6. Advanced Authoring Chapters 6 Appendix These chapters offer more advanced authoring help providing guidelines for creating AAA questions in Plain Text Script Authoring Administering Maple T A Chapter 8 This chapter covers editing your profile updating your password and managing student accounts The Maple T A User Guide is available for instructors from the Documentation Center on the Maplesoft web site http www maplesoft com documentation center You can also visit the Maple T A Content Center at http www maplesoft com tacontent to download additional Maple T A resources What s New in Maple T A 10 Y ManleTA Release 10 Maple T A 10 incorporates customer feedback from students instructors and administrators to provide increased scope usability and flexibility for testing and assessment in an online environment New Question Types Graph Sketching With the new Sketch question type instructors can ask students to sketch graphs and Maple T A grades those graphs automatically xvi Preface e Students answer a question by sketching a plot e Parabolas exponentials asymptotes lines points piecewise open and closed intervals and regions are all supported e Students create plots by simply clicking on key points of the plot in the graph area such as specifying two points to draw a line or the vertex and one other point to create a parabola e Plot control points can be moved interac
7. Formula with Physical Units Subtype page 141 Formula that Matches Responses to within C Subtype page 142 Equation Subtype page 144 Unordered List of Formulas Subtype page 146 Ordered List of Formulas Subtype page 148 Vectors of Formulas page 149 O OND vn A QU N e Chemical Equation Subtype page 151 The online authoring module allows you to include complex content such as tables and other display formatting by using HTML in question files Important For information about system time outs and loss of data see Avoiding System Time outs during Authoring Sessions page 61 When creating and editing question banks clicking Finish does not permanently save a copy of a question to a hard drive You must save your question bank to your hard drive as a qu plain text source file or install the question bank on the class web site hard drive For more information see Exporting Work to Your Hard Drive page 88 See Also Creating a New Question or Editing an Existing Question page 60 Question Types Available in the System page 91 64 Managing Questions Question Designer The Question Designer is a powerful and flexible question container that can hold one or more graded answer regions or Response Areas A variety of grading behaviors can be combined and placed anywhere within the formatted HTML that defines the question For example questions can be placed inside tables formatted text bullete
8. Maple Formula questions Maple graded Formula Question Source Script page 347 Plain Text Script Authoring Maple Syntax questions Maple Syntax Question Source Script page 349 Multipart questions Multipart Question Source Script page 352 Multiple Choice questions Multiple Choice Question Source Script page 354 Multiple Selection questions Multiple Selection Question Source Script page 354 Numeric questions Numeric Mathematical Questions Source Script page 337 Question Designer questions Question Designer Question Example using Various Embedded Questions page 355 True or False questions True or False Question Source Script page 358 To use the example of a source script 1 Save the question definition as a text file with the extension qu 2 Import the text file Algorithmic Mathematical Formula Question Source Script The following example source script creates a mathematical Formula question that has algorithmically generated variable data 1 topic Formula Question Example Script 1 1 mode Formula 1 1 name lt b gt Traditional formula lt b gt 1 1 editing useHTML 1 1 algorithm int rint 20 2 LE qu 1 1 question Let lt math gt lt mi gt y lt mi gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt msup gt lt mi gt x lt mi gt lt mn gt n lt mn gt lt msup gt lt math gt What is the derivative of lt math gt lt mi gt y lt mi gt lt math gt with respect to lt math gt lt mi gt x lt mi
9. YN A Nn A To access the newly created class click the link to the class to bring you to its Class Homepage Required Registration Information The following information is requested when you register a new class in the system Instructor The instructor s name An instructor is selected from the database of system users at the time of initial class registration and setup The user selected to be the instructor does not need to have the default system role of Instructor any user in the system can be made an instructor This is useful because a student user can be made the instructor of a tutorial class for example Then the student will have student privileges in those classes in which he or she is enrolled as a student and he or she will have instructor privileges in the class that he or she 1s instructing Instructor Email The instructor s email address When you select the instructor for the class the email address associated with the user you selected is automatically used in this field and cannot be changed The email address will be shown on the Class Homepage Course ID optional A combination of letters and numbers to identify the course for example stats 0J Class Name The displayed name for the class The class name appears on the Class Homepage and in other administrator lists The Class Name is created at the time of initial registration by the instructor or the system administrator An administrator can rename
10. 4 Enter the following for Question Name Differentiation Product Rule 5 Enter the following for Question Text Differentiate sin x x with respect to x 6 Enter the following for Correct answer diff sin x x x 7 By default the following Grading code is provided evalb ANSWER RESPONSE 0 Important Do not change the default Grading code SRESPONSE is a system variable that corresponds to the response the student entered and SANSWER refers to the correct answer entered in step 5 8 Ensure that the Accepted expression type is Formula 9 Select Student can choose for Text Symbolic entry 10 Click Finish 11 Click Preview to view the question as shown in Figure 5 39 VManteTA _ Preview Question Differentiation Differentiate sin x a2 with respectto Product Rule This question accepts numbers or formulas Plot Help Switch to Equation Editor Preview Figure 5 39 Maple graded Example 1A Formula 161 Authoring Question Types Example 1B Maple graded Formula and Plotting Note This question is a modification of Maple graded Example 1A Formula page 160 1 In the Preview Question window click Edit 2 We are going to plot the student s response as well as the correct derivative If the student is correct the plot region will display a plot with a single curve 3 Enter the following for Plotting Code plot SRESPONSE diff sin x x x x 10 10 4 Click Finish to save the questio
11. O CO N Q Click Preview to view the question See Figure 5 27 Y MapleTA Preview Question Evaluate trig Evaluate tan 4 expression als This question accepts numbers or formulas Help Switch to Equation Editor Preview Figure 5 27 Formula without Logs and Trig Example Preview Example 3 Formula with Physical Units Subtype When using the formula with physical units subtype correct answers can include algebraic formulas unit dimensions numeric responses or any combination of these Use this question type for any formula where you require the student to specify the physical l l m k l N units for the expression for example Ea or a Where the formula is not an equation When you give the units with the answer C you must use the units that are recognized by the system The system can convert between units of the same type For example if you type 30 s the student can give the answer as 30 s 0 5 min or 5 hour In each case the system grades the response correct To create a Formula with Physical Units subtype question 1 From the Class Homepage click the Questions menu 142 Authoring Question Types 2 Click New Question 3 In the Question Type list click Mathematical Formula 4 Enter the following for Question Name Particle s velocity 5 Enter the following for Question Text A particle moves along the x axis such that its position X after t seconds s is meters m
12. Optional Enter code to enable plotting of the student response Use RESPONSE to represent the student response in your code Before your code is processed by Maple SRESPONSE is replaced by the student response The last line must be a Maple plot command Note You can copy content from a Maple worksheet or a Maple code text file to be used in a Maple graded question See Copying Content from the Maple Worksheet to Maple T A below d To edit Hints and question details see Adding and Editing Hints page 74 and Editing Question Details in the Question Respository page 84 for more details e Click Finish to place a copy of your question in the web site cache and to preview your question For more information on Maple code refer to your Maple system documentation For specific examples using the Maple graded question type see the examples provided Maple graded Example 1A Formula page 160 Copying Content from the Maple Worksheet to Maple T A 1 From a Maple worksheet select the code to be copied 2 From the Maple menu select Copy 3 In Maple T A right click Control click on Macintosh and paste the contents into the appropriate box 160 Authoring Question Types 4 Rename the response value to SRESPONSE 5 Add to all algorithmic variables Example 1A Maple graded Formula 1 From the Class Homepage click the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 In the Question Type list click Maple graded
13. SUNW returns a real time quote for Sun Microsystems Inc stock assuming that the class QuoteFunction had been suitably programmed Isu n x lsu n x Returns the unit in the nth significant place of x This is called the least significant unit of x in the nth place For example lsu 3 3 14159 returns 0 01 the unit in the third significant place This operation is designed to be used when setting the tolerance for correct answers For example to accept an answer to within a tolerance of one unit in the third significant digit use Sans lt formula gt Stoel lsu 3 ans and set the answer field to Sans Stol maple text Pass text to the Maple kernel and return the value of the last line processed For example maple ithprime 12 returns 37 268 Authoring Mathematical Questions maple diff sin x x x returns cos x x sin x See Also Mathematical and Logical Operators in Algorithms and Answers page 275 mathml f Returns a string consisting of the formula typeset in MathML Note The system renders MathML the MathML tags do not appear on the screen when the value of the string is displayed Instead the rendering appears For example mathml x Sn returns a By default mathml automatically simplifies the formula To prevent auto simplification use the nosimplify option For example mathml x 2 4 8 nosimplify returns pit
14. Y MathAppfiles fi MathAppDetiningihy_sitParamsProcedure mw MathAppExploreQu Upload file s to this point Vino _ iii Class File Manager Upload files Enter the complete path of the file you wish to upload Choose File InteractivePlot mw Save into as Single file with file name nteractivePlot mw Zip archive Class File Manager View File S Demo Maple T A Class InteractivePlot mw Chapter Demo files Flash b b H ImportedQuestions b _thumbs Cancel Select the type of grading used Grading Algorithm in Math App The Math App contains a grading procedure called Actions Grade 9 Grading Algorithm in Maple T A Use the following Maple code to grade the student response if Actions CenX lt O and Actions CenY lt O then return 1 else return 0 end if 196 Authoring Question Types To see how the question works click Preview a 5 11 Multipart Questions Description A Multipart question can contain a variety of related question materials data even case scenarios for different types of assessment and learning A Multipart question is built out of a number of individual questions which can be any question type except the adaptive question type Note The Question Designer is the recommended method for authoring Multipart questions This is because Multipart questions cannot be modified once they are created whereas questions authored in the Question D
15. For example to generate numbers between 2 73 and 7 91 to two significant figures use rand 2 73 7 91 2 Note In this definition the dummy variable k represents the number of significant figures not the step size as it indicates in defining range and rint To generate random numbers that vary an order of magnitude and have the same number of decimal digits use the decimal function in conjunction with the rand function For example to generate a random number between 2 and 20 with one decimal place use decimal 1 rand 2 20 3 Note Numbers posing a possible ambiguity are returned using scientific notation See Also decimal n x sig n x int x page 264 Random Integer Generation range n range m n range m n k page 271 Random Integer Generation rint n rint m n rint m n k page 272 Generating Random Numbers in Questions page 262 271 Authoring Mathematical Questions Random Integer Generation range n range m n range m n k The range function returns random integers from a range defined with a step size range n The range n function where n gt 1 generates a random integer in the range 1 floor n inclusive There are floor n numbers in that range Hence it is a selection of one number from a choice of floor n range m n The range m n function where n m gt 0 generates a random integer in the rangem m 1 m q inclusive where q is the floo
16. Homework or Quiz 40 Mastery 43 Proctored exam 42 Setting 48 Study session 44 Assignment visibility 52 Assignments 1 Creating 23 Deleting questions 46 Forced grading 23 307 Header 45 List order 29 Managing 23 Reviewing Details 56 set prerequisites 54 Authoring Applet Questions 339 Mathematical 222 multipart 196 Pathways 322 Authoring Questions 62 Using Script Files 334 With Question Designer 64 Authoring Questions in the Question Designer 95 Authoring Tips 94 Authors Question Repository 85 Axes Sketch Questions 114 Background Functions Sketch Questions 115 Background Image Free Body Diagram Questions 111 Backing up questions 88 Index Backslash symbol Displaying 282 Blanks 130 328 Blanks Questions 131 C C 247 Canceling assignment 56 Case sensitivity 131 131 Changing grades 294 Changing the Total Points for an Assignment 294 Checkmark icon 95 Chemical Equation 137 Child classes Gradebook 292 Choose Name tab Assignment Instructions 45 Assignment name 29 Text to show at the head of each page 45 Text to show on the results page 45 Class Homepage 2 Guidelines 4 Class Homepage and Rubric Tables 305 Class Info Edit 11 Class Name 9 Class Registration Locking and unlocking 11 student 10 Class roster Creating and uploading 12 File type 12 Class User Manager 2 Class web site Uploading multiple files 21 Uploading single files 20
17. Host names can be entered using wildcards also for example maplesoft com For assistance with entering appropriate IP addresses or Host Names contact your system administrator ira sare System defined groups Names Restrictions JLab 1 Only allow computers with matching IP masks or Host Name Pattems to complete the assignment You can choose from groups defined by the system 7 administrator or enter custom Custom IP masks and Host Names groups Leave all groups unchecked and custom ranges empty to allow all IPs and Host Names Enter IP patterns etther with Netmask format or Wildcards 10 10 2 Enter Host Names with Wildcards maplesoft com Your current IF address is 199 71 183 2 Your current Host Name is 199 71 183 2 Limiting Student Access to Assignments Setting Assignment Requirements You can restrict access to an assignment so that only students meeting certain criteria can take it You can also create assignment requirements that refer to the current assignment even if you are working with a new assignment that has not yet been saved The assignment on which you are working is now listed along with all other available assignments in the Criterion specification box This is useful when you want to ensure minimum competencies in prerequisite topics For example you can limit access to students who have already passed an earlier assignment To restrict assignment access 1 From the Assignment Editor screen i
18. consistently on W3C compliant browsers To generate MathML tags that encode a specific character use one of the following authoring methods Plain Text Script Authoring e MathML Authoring with MathType page 238 e Editing with the Equation Editor page 231 For other special characters for example non English characters you can use any acceptable HTML tabs employing the Unicode expression for the character Note that some platforms and browsers that are non standard do not map Unicode HTML expressions correctly so results can be unpredictable Therefore it is recommended that you use MathML tags for all math and science content For more information see http www unicode org Important In other question fields not listed here you must avoid HTML and MathML tags and limit field content to plain text only Specifically HTML and MathML tags in the answer and algorithm field values are rejected by the system Typically these fields are used to provide commands to the system for processing the question or grading Hence they must be formatted according to the system command syntax A 3 Using Script Files to Author Questions You can author and edit all question types using the system plain text script file syntax To create advanced questions and other problems that use the system API to produce interactive content you cannot use the Question Editor To create or edit script files for a question bank use e A text e
19. e The inverse trigonometric functions use the standard abbreviated names arcsin x arccos x and arctan x Note The variable e should not be assigned as a global variable in Maple code It can be used however as a local variable See Also Editing with the Equation Editor page 231 Mathematical Functions amp Operations page 246 Maple graded Question Type Overview page 154 6 3 Understanding the Math Capabilities in the System The Maple T A system has powerful question types and capabilities designed for technical and scientific educators It grades responses that contain symbolic or numeric answers There are many restrictions and extensions to the type of answers that instructors accept which determine the variety of question types in the system Learn more about the system s math capabilities e How are questions with algebraic and numeric math authored Authoring Mathematical Questions page 222 e Why are there so many varieties of mathematics questions Mathematical Formula Question Types Comparison Table page 137 e How can I control margin of error and tolerance Setting a Margin of Error in Non numeric Questions page 227 e Can the system display WYSIWYG mathematics Mathematical Formula Question Types Comparison Table page 137 e Does the system accept graphing calculator style math entry Using Formula Syntax page 231 e What syntax constraints are placed on the processing of math expressions Basic
20. e You might choose to raise a student s grade based on effort improvement or other subjective measure e You might choose to apply a curve based on the performance of the entire class As you change grades keep in mind the total and passing scores you have set for the assignment To change a student s grades 1 From the Class Homepage select Gradebook and click Class Grades 2 Select the assignment with the grade s you want to change a If there are ungraded essay questions in the assignment then in the Filter Results Panel under Progress select To Be Reviewed b If the assignment is fully graded and you want to change a grade then in the Filter Results Panel under Progress select Completed 3 Click Search 4 From the resulting report do one of the following e Click the name of a student that requires grade changes In the Student Assignment Details view click the Details link beside the assignment that requires changes to view the student s responses The icon appears beside the Details link if there are ungraded essay questions that need your attention e Click the name of a question that requires grade changes to view the Question Responses 5 Each question is displayed along with the student s response If a question is algorithmic you will see the instance of the question that the student received e To update one grade e Locate the grade to be changed In the corresponding New Question Grade text box
21. p p Value q 1 p O standard deviation for assignment grades Y r Biserial The r Biserial is a correlation coefficient relating performance on an item and performance on the total assignment The r Biserial correlation coefficient is an index of discrimination that measures the extent to which students who score high on the assignment tend to get the item correct and those who score low tend to get the item incorrect Caos Oy ri where Y mean grade of assignments on which this item was answered incorrectly Y mean grade of assignments on which this item was answered fully correctly p p Value q l p O standard deviation for assignment grades Y height of the standardized normal distribution at the point z where P z lt z q and P z gt z p Note Since the r Biserial is scaled by a parameter that is based on a normal distribution it can result in values outside of 1 to 1 if the scores are not normally distributed 7 5 Working with Grade Reports You can create grade reports that reflect your class grading policy provide a snapshot of up to date grades test out alternative methods for weighing assignments and so on A grade report is defined by selecting assignments putting them into report groups and defining the weighting for each group You can control the grading policies that determine how grades are allocated 300 Working with the Gradebook Creating a New Grade Report To create a gr
22. show the question comment Always vw show the question comment _ Restrict feedback until clear lf you have chosen to display feedback details this option will delay their display until the specified date You can restrict access to an assignment to specific IP addresses You can require students take an assignment from a restricted set of IP addresses by selecting from a list of predefined groups set up by your system administrator or creating a custom IP address restriction IP addresses can be given individually with wildcards or using Netmask format Enter only one IP address or pattern per line 38 Creating and Managing Assignments IP Address Host eye a rei Names Restrictions ayaa eee ee JLab 1 Only allow computers with matching IP masks or Host Name Pattems to complete the assignment You can choose from groups defined by the system Custom IP masks and Host Names administrator or enter custom groups Leave all groups unchecked and custom ranges empty to allow all IPs and Host Names Enter IP pattems either with Netmask format or Wildcards 10 10 2 Enter Host Names with Wildcards maplesoit com Your current IP address is 199 71 133 2 Your current Host Name is mhx maplesof_com Figure 3 11 Restrict Access to Specified IP Addresses Advanced Options in Assignments Optional You can restrict access to an assignment so that only students meeting certain criteria can take the assignment From the S
23. 10 10 10 10 style point symbol solidcircle if type CenX symbol then DocumentTools Do ClickPlot P1 CenX round DocumentTools else Do 4GlickPlot clickx EndX round DocumentTools Do ClickPlot clickx CenY round DocumentTools EndY round DocumentTools Do 32ClickPlot clicky Do ClickPlot clicky P1 plots pointplot CenxX CenY DocumentTools Do ClickPlot plots display P1 plottools view 10 10 10 10 style point symbol solidcircle circle Cenk Cent sqrt Endx Cenx 2 EndY CenY 2 DocumentTools Do ClickPlot P1 end if else end proc Click a EndX round DocumentTools Do ClickPlot clickx ClearPlot proc EndY round DocumentTools Do ClickPlot clicky DocumentTools Do ClickPlot plots display P1 plottools circle CenX CenY sqrt EndX CenX 2 EndY CenY 2 end 1f end proc Click ClearPlot proc DocumentTools Do ClickPlot plots pointplot NULL CenxX Cenx end proc ClearPlot 194 Authoring Question Types end module Actions Initialize components proc Actions ClearPlot end proc Go to File gt Save to save the startup code Go to File gt Exit Click Restart Server 55 to re initialize your Math App The Math App 1s now complete and you can click the plot component to create circles Clear Plot 10 Example 8 Making the Interactive Plot of
24. 12 Click Preview to view the question See Figure 5 17 128 Authoring Question Types Manier AS Preview Question Region of Graph Click a negative region on the graph Clickable rare Figure 5 17 Clickable Image Example Question See Also Clickable Image Ouestion Source Script page 341 Images and Reference Files in Ouestions page 77 Uploading Images and Reference Files to the Class Web Site page 77 Next Steps To edit further details in the Question Repository within the Question Designer see Editing Ouestion Details in the Ouestion Respository page 84 129 Authoring Question Types 5 5 Essay Description The Essay question type is typically used for a long answer response in Maple T A which could include mathematical proofs long answer questions and essays Note The Question Designer is the recommended method for authoring Essay questions See Also Question Designer Questions page 92 Adaptive Question Designer Questions page 121 Grading An essay question is not automatically graded by the system Student responses are sent to the instructor who scores them traditionally and assigns a grade in Maple T A s Gradebook feature No answer or feedback is immediately available upon submitting an essay question For information on grading Essay questions see Changing Grades and Adding Feedback page 294 Instructions To create an Essay question 1 From the Class Homepage sele
25. Finish page 39 Cleanup performs a full cleanup of the question repository for the current class The Cleanup action will e permanently delete all deleted questions e permanently delete all unused old revisions of all questions including earlier versions of active questions Note A question that is referenced by an assignment or by test results will not be removed Previewing a Question 1 find the question you want to preview by searching for it in the Question Repository 2 In the right frame in the search results click the drop down menu next to the question and click Preview Alternatively click the name of the question to preview it 88 Managing Questions You can also preview a question when you are editing it by clicking Preview in the Question Text area In Preview Mode you can interact with the question as a student for example enter a response to the question in the input cells or use check boxes and radio buttons To test the grading of the question select Grade Exporting Work to Your Hard Drive You can back up questions by downloading them to your hard drive The questions are saved in a zip file To export a copy of your work on the local hard drive on your computer 1 From the Question Repository find the questions you wish to save 2 Select the check boxes beside the questions you wish to export 3 Click Export as shown in Figure 4 7 This exports them as a course module The files are saved as
26. Operations page 246 Editing with the Equation Editor page 231 169 Authoring Question Types Plotting a Student Response page 230 Using the Comment Field in a Maple Question page 348 Example 7 Maple graded Using the InertForm Package to Avoid Simplification 1 From the Class Homepage click the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 In the Question Type list click Maple graded 4 Enter the following for Question Name Fraction Addition without simplification 5 Enter the following for Question Text What is 3 8 1 8 don t simplify 6 Leave Correct answer field empty 7 Enter the following for Grading code evalb 4 8 InertForm Parse RESPONSE 8 Select Formula as the Accepted expression type 9 Under Text Symbolic entry select Student can choose 10 Click Finish 11 Click Preview to view the question as shown in Figure 5 48 below Y MapleTA Preview Question Fraction Addition What is T don t simplify without 8 simplification This question accepts numbers or formulas Plot Help Switch to Equation Editor Preview Figure 5 48 Maple graded Example 7 Using the InertForm Package to Avoid Simplification 170 Authoring Question Types Next Steps To edit further details in the Question Repository within the Question Designer see Editing Question Details in the Question Respository page 84 5 9 Matching Questions Description Matching questions disp
27. See Also Class Rosters page 12 8 4 Security Issues to Consider It is important to protect your Gradebook and test questions Review the following security suggestions for Instructor Passwords Student Account Management and Proctored Exams Instructor Password Security page 311 e Changing Your Password page 310 e Student Account Management page 311 e Secure Proctored Exams page 311 e Secure Proctored Browser page 311 310 311 Administering Maple T A Instructor Password e Change your password often e Never allow a student to see it The instructor password grants access to all the grades in your class and enables you to change grades Use caution when entering it in front of students e Your password is stored on the server in plain text This means that the system administrator can read it Therefore do not use a password that cannot be disclosed to a third party e When you log in the time of your last login is given under your user profile Check this every time to determine if there are any unaccounted logins Access your profile by clicking the Your Name Role link next to Logout See Also Changing Your Password page 310 Student Account Management 1 Some students will log in to an assignment once or twice and click Submit Assignment without attempting any questions to make a printout of the feedback Using this feedback they complete the assignment There are three main solutions e Re
28. Switch to Equation Editor Preview Figure 5 38 Chemical Equation Example Preview See Also Entering Chemistry Expressions page 229 Next Steps To edit further details in the Question Repository within the Question Designer see Editing Question Details in the Question Respository page 84 See Also Algorithmic Mathematical Formula Question Source Script page 335 5 8 Maple graded Questions Description The Maple graded question type uses the Maple computer algebra system to generate algorithmic variables in questions plots and evaluate student responses The Maple graded question type gives you access to the computational power of Maple It includes facilities for algebra calculus differential equations discrete mathematics graphics numerical computation and many other areas of mathematics Note The Question Designer is the recommended method for authoring Maple graded questions See Also Question Designer Questions page 92 154 Authoring Question Types Adaptive Question Designer Questions page 121 Maple graded Question Type Overview The Maple graded question type uses the Maple computer algebra system to generate algorithmic variables in questions generate plots and evaluate student responses The Maple graded question type gives you access to the computational power of Maple It includes facilities for algebra calculus differential equations discrete mathematics graphics numerical comput
29. There are only two differences 1 When creating an adaptive assignment you can only choose between three assignment types Anonymous practice Homework or Quiz and Proctored exam 2 There is no passing score in an adaptive assignment For more information on the Set Policies tab see Set Policies Tab page 48 Review amp Finish Tab The Review amp Finish tab is the same as when creating a regular assignment For information about reviewing adaptive assignment details see Review amp Finish Tab page 56 4 Managing Questions Navigating the Question Repository page 60 Question Authoring in the Question Editor page 60 4 1 Navigating the Question Repository The Question Repository is used to create organize and search for questions You can also access the Maple T A Cloud through the Question Repository to import and export questions To open the Question Repository e Select the Questions menu from the Class Homepage The Questions menu provides the following options e Select New Question to start a new question e Course Modules For more information see Course Modules page 314 e Select Import Question Bank to upload a question file from your hard drive e Select Filter questions to help you search the Question Repository For more information on the Question Repository see Question Repository page 82 4 2 Question Authoring in the Question Editor Creating a New Question or Editing an Existi
30. click Delete 4 and then click on the object you want to delete 5 To save changes in the Edit Response Area click OK To graph an exponential curve l Click Draw Exponential a This enables you to plot two points and a horizontal asymptote 2 Plot two points on the exponential curve 3 Plot the horizontal asymptote for the curve Click the location on the coordinate grid where you want to place the horizontal asymptote A dashed horizontal line is automatically drawn through the point on the grid where you clicked If you would like to move this horizontal asymptote simply drag it to 1ts new location To delete the exponential curve click Delete ti and then click on the object you want to delete 5 To save changes in the Edit Response Area click OK To graph a logarithmic curve l Click Draw Logarithmic th 1 This enables you to plot two points and a vertical asymptote 2 Plot two points on the logarithmic curve 3 Plot the vertical asymptote for the curve Click the location on the coordinate grid where you want to place the vertical asymptote A dashed vertical line is automatically drawn through the point on the grid where you clicked If you would like to move this vertical asymptote simply drag it to its new location To delete the logarithmic curve click Delete 4 and then click on the object you want to delete 5 To save changes in the Edit Response Area click OK Indicating a region of the
31. enter the new grade The grade should be a number between 0 0 and 1 0 with 1 0 meaning fully correct e You can add a comment in the Comment on Grade text box This region becomes writable after a new grade has been entered This comment is for your reference and is not seen by the student Click the Save Question Details icon 4 beside the new question grade to save the grade e To update multiple grades at once e Select the questions using the check boxes on the left e Enter the new grade in the Update selected grades as field e Click Update Grades 6 You can view a summary of the item s grade changes together with the accompanying feedback by clicking View History beside the Comment on Grade text box 7 You can add a comment for the student in the Instructors Comment text box if desired 296 Working with the Gradebook 8 Click Save Question Details at the top of the page 9 Use the crumb trail to return to the Assignment Grades screen e An asterisk appears beside the assignment name if you have edited the details of the assignment for example adding a comment or changing a grade e If the assignment is the original graded by the system no asterisk appears beside the assignment name Adding Essay Annotations You can add any number of annotations anywhere in a student s essay by dragging a symbol from the Essay Annotations palette on to the student s essay Descriptions for each annotation symbol can be found
32. entry cells e Graders can be set to exact or the more lenient relaxed style Grading Graders e Default grader exact 98 Authoring Question Types e Option relaxed set grader relaxed e Option regex set grader regex This provides access to the student response set as a regular expression for interacting with custom graders Input Display Style e Default display textbox e Option menu To change the order of menu entries set display permute false Sizing of Textbox Blanks e Blanks sizing based on max of answer length Full and Partial Credit e At least one answer field must give full credit e All other answers can be set for credit from 0 1 specified in decimal numbers Grading Algorithm Grading is done by comparing the student response with each answer in order until a match is found and the corresponding credit is then returned If no match is found the credit is zero The emphasis on comparing in order is necessary because someone writing regular expression questions might start with a very specific criteria for full credit and then allow more vague criteria for low credit Updating Example 1 on List Question Source Script if the answers and credits are changed to answer 1 E e instein credit 1 1 0 answer 2 Ele Q credit 2 0 1 coe then Einstein and einstein receive full credit and any other response beginning with E or e receives 10 If the order of the two criteria
33. gt lt btn gt OPERATORPALETTE lt btn gt lt sub cols 1 gt lt btn gt plus lt btn gt lt btn gt minus lt btn gt lt btn gt plusmn lt btn gt lt btn gt times lt btn gt lt btn gt middot lt btn gt lt btn gt divide lt btn gt lt sub gt lt sep gt lt btn gt SUBSUP lt btn gt lt sub cols 2 gt lt btn gt FRAC lt btn gt lt btn gt SORT lt btn gt lt btn gt SUB lt btn gt lt btn gt SUP lt btn gt lt btn gt SUBSUP lt btn gt lt btn gt UNDER lt btn gt lt btn gt OVER lt btn gt lt btn gt UNDEROVER lt btn gt lt sub gt lt sep gt 237 Authoring Mathematical Questions Palette Definition Palette lt btn gt TRIGPALETTE lt btn gt lt sub cols 3 gt sue lt btn gt SIN lt btn gt lt btn gt COS lt btn gt lt btn gt TAN lt btn gt sin a cos a tan a lt btn gt SEC lt btn gt lt btn gt CSC lt btn gt lt btn gt COT lt btn gt lt btn gt ARCSIN lt btn gt 1 1 lt btn gt ARCCOS lt btn gt SIn ii COS if Lar if lt btn gt ARCTAN lt btn gt lt sub gt lt btn gt ARROWPALETTE lt btn gt lt sub cols 2 gt lt btn gt rarr lt btn gt lt btn gt larr lt btn gt lt btn gt harr lt btn gt lt btn gt rlarr lt btn gt lt btn gt lharu lt btn gt lt btn gt rharu lt btn gt lt sub gt secla escla cot a Example Header Toolbar Palette Definitions qu env palette operator lt tb gt lt btn gt OPERATORPALETTE lt btn gt lt sub cols 1 g
34. lt i gt lt p gt lt p gt In the following question the student picks from a lt b gt drop down menu lt b gt of choices Partial credit can be set for some options full credit for others lt br gt Who first developed the General Theory of Relativity lt 6 gt lt br gt lt font face arial size 1 gt lt i gt In this case you get full credit for Albert Einstein and 1 2 credit for Stephen Hawking lt font gt lt i gt lt p gt See Also Mathematical Formula Formula Subtype page 139 Numeric Questions page 209 List Questions in the Question Designer page 97 Question Designer Questions page 92 Plain Text Script Authoring Question Modes Question Types page 328 Short Phrase Question Source Script The short phrase question type has been deprecated Use the List question type instead For an example List question see List Question Source Script page 346 See Also Question Modes Question Types page 328 True or False Question Source Script The following example source script creates a True False question topic True or False Question Example Script mode True False name Quantum Tunneling editing useHTML question The phenomenon of quantum tunneling has a counterpart in classical physics answer 2 choice 1 True choice 2 False eee ee ee See Also True False Questions page 220 Question Modes Question Types page 328 Index Symbols dollar Sig
35. mark non attempts as 0 or ignore e Use if an assignment is attempted multiple times specify whether to use the best most recent earliest or average grade e Bonus mark a group as extra credit If a group is marked as Bonus its weight is not used to reach the cumulative weight of 100 for the grade report In a grade report bonus assignments are indicated with the bonus icon P 6 When finished click Save to save the group settings 7 Add more groups as needed e Within a grade report an assignment can only be in one group Thus any assignments that were already placed in a group will not appear in the Available Assignments list for other groups e The weightings of the groups in a grade report excluding any bonus assignments should add to 100 8 You can change the order of the groups listed in a grade report To change the order select a new position number from the drop down menu of the assignment you want to reposition as shown in the image below R a i Nowe A gebra 2 al e of L Class User Manager Proctor Tools Assignments Questions Gradebook Grade Reports Edit Grade Report epa m i Algebra Basics Visible testing Weight 0 0 Bonus 0 0 Group Name Weight Remove Use Weight Empty Grades Bonus Assignments midterm 0 0 0 Best Equally Mark as 0 0 Assignments Figure 7 7 Re ordering Assignments Once selected all affected assignments will adjust their position accordingly 9 To publi
36. opens f Fi Explore Parameter Controls Basics Overrides Enter 5 for the lower end of a and 5 for the upper end When you are aii placement animate finished click Explore default y default y default placement never v animate return command Cancel 185 Authoring Question Types A new table is created inline with a math container for the expression and a slider for a Move the slider back and forth to see how it changes the expansion Example 5 Creating the Quadrant Game Math App With this Math App a user is shown a 2 D plot window that contains a red dot The user has to use radio buttons to choose the quadrant containing the red dot Credit for the correct answer is given to somebody if they get it right on their first attempt If they require multiple attempts to get the answer correct they are not given any credit After the user gets 10 correct answers the total time elapsed and the user s score are displayed The user can click Restart to reset the game and try it again Copy and paste the table that you see to the right to a new worksheet This table will make it easy to position all the components that will be in this example Math App From the Components palette add these components to your table so adn Wi they look as they do in the image on the right 1 Plot component 6 Radio button components 3 Text Area components 2 Label components 1 Button component ee e e os a
37. option is available for Homework Quiz and Proctored Exam assignment types 50 Creating and Managing Assignments To display a grade and or feedback for each question while the student is taking the assignment select Allow students to check grades and feedback To display the final grade after the assignment is graded select Show the final grade Notes Some caution should be used in pairing some of these feedback options Examples are given here 1 Selecting Allow students to resubmit answers to questions and Allow students to check grades and feedback provides students with the equivalent of a solution manual while taking the assignment Students can check the feedback and change their response to the question 2 Selecting Show current grade at top of assignment and Allow students to resubmit answers to questions will enable students to get immediate feedback on questions and then retry the questions You can show feedback during the assignment or after it is graded Under Feedback select from Always If correct If incorrect or Never condition options for displaying the correct answer and question feedback You can edit the grading message and feedback messages if you want to use custom messages instead of the default messages Receiving Email Notification You can opt to receive an email whenever a student completes the assignment in Homework and Proctored Exam mode giving the name of the student and their grade To receive e
38. page 294 8 Administering Maple T A Deleting Student Records page 310 Security Issues to Consider page 310 8 1 Editing Your Profile 1 From the System Homepage click Your Name Instructor located in the top right corner 2 Click the Edit User button 3 From here you can change your First Name Last Name Display Name Student ID and Email You cannot change your User Privileges Class Privileges or User Login 4 To save the changes you have made push the Submit button Otherwise push the Cancel button to cancel any changes you have made Note You cannot edit your profile if Maple T A has been connected to BlackBoard Moodle or any other management system through the Maple T A API 8 2 Changing Your Password 1 From the System Homepage click Your Name Instructor located in the top right corner 2 Click Password Update in the left pane 3 Enter your new password confirm your new password and click Submit to save the changes 8 3 Deleting Student Records To delete a student record 1 From the Class Homepage select Class User Manager 2 Select Remove Users 3 Search for the user s login first name last name email student ID or student role Click Search For a more specific search use Advanced Search 4 Select the check box next to the user you want to remove from the class Click Remove Important Removing a user from your class removes all of that student s records from Gradebook
39. zip extension e If you attempt to upload a ZIP file that is not a course module the system generates the following error message and you must make another attempt This file does not appear to be course module it has no manifest file e Each server has a maximum file size setting for uploads that is established by your system administrator The system default setting is to allow uploads of up to 1 MB If your file upload repeatedly times out or if you receive a message informing you that your upload exceeds the server limit contact your system administrator Additional Notes The most common element that will be flagged as a duplicate is the base class web site folder web_ folders This is a common default destination for many web resources however because it is a folder name established for every course you may already have saved your own resources to the class web site folder in the destination course If this is the case you can either e Create a new subfolder in your destination class web site and reinstall your resources in that subfolder e If you have access to the source class for the course module you can return to the course module s source class and move the resources in the base folder of that class web site to a subfolder and then recreate the course module so that it will not overlap with your destination class folders upon upload 9 5 Viewing Details of a Course Module View Details allows you to inspect the indi
40. 0 025 specifies a margin of error of 2 5 The system grades correct any response between 1 444 and1 596 Example 5 50 1 1 1 specifies a margin of error of 110 The system grades correct any response between 5 and 105 Algorithmic Variables You can use a margin of error with answers that are algorithmic variables Consider a question in which the correct answer is assigned to Sanswer Note The operator cannot be used in an algorithmic variable definition or other algorithmic statement Example 6 To specify an absolute margin of error of 0 1 use Sanswer 0 1 Example 7 To specify a percentage margin of error of 3 use Sanswer 1 0 03 Using the Operator in Complex Expressions You can use the operator in complex expressions It is an arithmetic operator 258 Authoring Mathematical Questions Example 8 2 127 0 01 matches any response between 2 11 and 2 13 and 2 2 12 0 01 matches any response between 4 22 and 4 26 Example 9 The ordinary rules of arithmetic for example the distributive rule apply 2 2 12 0 01 1s equivalent to 2 2 12 2 0 01 Example 10 You can specify very complicated ranges of numbers 2 17 0 01 e 1 07 2 03 1 0 5 Important If the exact answer is an expression not a simple formula number or variable ensure that you use parentheses to generate the correct answer Example 11 2 2 1 0 05 which defi
41. 4 On the Question Details screen a In the text box enter the question statement b In the URL text field enter the URL where the GIF image is located To upload or browse files you have already uploaded to your class web site Click Browse in the Question Editor Follow instructions in Uploading Images and Reference Files to the Class Web Site Entering the path and image name populates the Enter the URL of an Image field c When you have located and identified the URL for your graphic image enter the text of the question and select Next d To edit Hints and question details see Adding and Editing Hints page 74 and Editing Question Details in the Question Respository page 84 for more details 4 On the Define Correct Regions screen use the system s graphics tools to define the regions of the correct answer and any other responses a Define the approximate region of the correct answer Select New Region to engage the define tool and click one corner of your answer target Insert additional outlying points with mouse clicks and drag the connector lines to shape the final highlighted region Note The define tool essentially works like a peg board with rubber bands Place the pegs with a click of the mouse then click and drag the connecting lines while the system paints the interior of the shape you have created 125 Authoring Question Types b When you are satisfied with the shape of the region you have defined click
42. Browser mode 1 Log onto Maple T A and go to the Class Homepage 2 Click on an assignment to start it If an assignment s properties require the use of Proctored Browser clicking on the assignment will produce a message that a Proctored Browser must be used 3 Authorize the message shown in Figure 3 17 to enter full screen Proctored Browser mode Proctored Browser This assignment requires the browser to be full screen If you switch applications during the assignment you will need proctor authorization to continue the assignment Go full screen and begin assignment Figure 3 17 Authorization for Proctored Browser 4 During the assignment the Proctored Browser will be in full screen mode This means that other computer programs or web sites cannot be accessed unless the student presses a combination of keystrokes that will exit the full screen Ctrl Alt Delete Esc etc If this happens the student sees an on screen message and an email is sent to the class instructor The student must then be re authorized into the assignment by a proctor or instructor 5 When the assignment is complete click Submit Assignment This automatically exits Proctored Browser mode Notes 1 As an instructor if you start an assignment with Proctored Browser you will be given the same access privileges as a student allowing you to preview the student experience with the Proctored Browser 2 We recommend that the Proctored Browser
43. Choose Worksheet section click Choose Worksheet to upload your Math App 8 Click upload file s to this point 9 Click Choose File to find the Math App on your machine 10 Select Single File and provide a name for the Math App 11 Click OK 12 Click the worksheet name to select the file to use in your question 13 Under the heading Select the type of grading used select Grading Algorithm in Maple T A Insert the following command into the input box if DocumentTools GetProperty Slider0 value 2 then return 1 else return Us end if 14 Click Finish to save the question 15 To see how the question works click Preview z Initializing Parameters in a Math App Question In Maple T A you can declare static or algorithmic variables to be used in a Math App question These declared variables are initialized by the Math App when the question is loaded Working With Math App Variables in Maple T A 1 Open the Maple worksheet that contains the Math App 2 In the Startup Code for the Math App you must have an InitParams procedure defined within the Actions module Also you must export the InitParams procedure 3 Log in to Maple T A 4 Create or edit a Math App question 5 Edit the value you are passing to the Math App as a parameter in the Initialization Parameters text field The variable name in Maple T A must match the parameter declaration in the InitParams procedure in the Math App If you want to pass an a
44. Click Register Now the added user will be able to access your Class Homepage and will have instructor privileges in the class User Search Last Name Search for system users to User Login register in this class Email Records Per Page 25 Match Case Sensitive C Match Case Reset Fields Basic Search Advanced Search Instructor Select users to add User Login First Name L 1111 9005 C 11111 5555 Figure 2 4 Add an Instructor to Your Class Deleting an Instructor To delete an instructor 1 From the Class Homepage select Class User Manager Choose Remove Users Click Search nA A U N 2 3 Manage Proctors 17 Creating and Managing Classes Register Users in this Class Cy Starting with O Anywhere O Exact First Name Student ID User Role _ Any Role w E Last Name Email Student ID mempty email empty studentid 555555555555 123123 sss com 123123123 5555 111111 gmail com 111111 Click Advanced Search and select Instructor as the User Role from the drop down menu Select the check box next to the user you want to remove and then click Remove You can add a proctor to your class to ensure security in exam settings Proctors can log in to their own computer and perform proctoring duties using the Proctor Tools utility from the Class Homepage Proctors can authorize students to start a test as well as authorize grading of a test To authorize a student the proctor must first v
45. Customizing how angles are matched When comparing the angles of a student s force and a correct answer force Maple checks whether the angles agree to within the question wide angle tolerance described above This default behavior can be overridden for each force There are three angle tolerance options available to each correct answer force They are as follows e default specifies a question wide tolerance on the angles which is five degrees by default e collinear ensures that the student s forces lie along the same line as the answer force within the question wide angle tolerance e any matches the name of any student force against the name of the answer force regardless of angle The author specifies how angles are matched by 1 Click Edit Source 2 Complete the angleCriteria field by specifying default collinear or any For example suppose the correct answer consists of three forces a default angle matching for the first collinear for the second and any for the third This would be specified as angleCriteria default collinear any Alternatively the instructor could supply their own Maple comparison procedure rather than saying collinear or any This procedure must accept exactly three input arguments two angle values in the range from 0 to 360 followed by a nonnegative tolerance value and it must return either true meaning that the angles are considered equivalent or false For example the following pro
46. DocumentTools Do STextArea0 value DocumentTools Do STextAreal value return NULL end proc end module Actions randomize Actions RestartGame Save the code and close the code editor 189 Authoring Question Types Startup Code For QuadrantGame mw 4 ae File Syntax Save Syntax Actions module export QuadrantSelect RestartGame num incorrect local Y StartTime Num DoPlot QuadrantSelect proc quad integer if Num gt 10 then return end if if StartTime 1 then Start the clock when the user makes first choice StartTime time real end if it quad 0 and x y 0 or member quad signum 0 x 0 signum 0 y t 3 1 1 2 1 1 3 1 1 4 1 1 then DocumentTools SetProperty RadioButton5 value true DocumentTools Do STexztArea2 value j Correct 190 Authoring Question Types Right click the table and select Table gt Properties from the context The Quadrant Game oe sensitive menu Change Exterior Borders to None Change Interior si Quadrant 1 Borders to None Click OK Quadrant 111 5 Quadrant IV No Quadrant Click the Restart Server button 1 5 to re initialize your Math App The Math App 1s now complete and you can play the game RestartGame Game Go Example 6 Making the Quadrant Game Math App Gradeable through Maple T A In the following example you
47. Edit Response Area The Edit Response Area is shown below in Figure 5 11 Edit Response Area Choose Question Type Sketch question Essay Free Body Diagram Weight 1 List Maple graded Axes 10 10 10 10 Math App Tickmarks 4545 Mathematical formula Multiple Choice true Numeric Background Sketch functions Group plots No Update Figure 5 11 Edit Response Area for a Sketch Question Weight Specify the weight of this response area in the overall question Axes Define the ranges for the x axis and y axis in the Axes field Numerically these numbers represent the x axis minimum value x axis maximum value y axis minimum value and y axis maximum value respectively Tickmarks These values define the tickmarks on both axes Numerically these numbers represent x axis major tickmarks x axis minor tickmarks y axis major tickmarks and y axis minor tickmarks respectively Labels are placed at major tickmarks When gridlines are drawn they are drawn through all the tickmarks 115 Authoring Question Types Example setting tickmarks Therefore setting the axes to 20 20 10 10 and tickmarks to 4 5 4 5 would result in the following X axis The x range is from 20 to 20 It is divided into four equally spaced intervals resulting in major tickmarks and labels at 20 10 0 10 and 20 and Each interval is further divided into five equally spaced subintervals resulting in a minor t
48. Enter a name in the Group Name text field Note For a Mastery assignment these names are shown to the student in the progress report shown after each question is graded 5 Click Add as group to add the questions into your assignment as a group or question pool W BY Multiple Choice E BY Short Phrase Exact Match C El Dynamic Figure Labels Economics iv BY Maple Formula Plot Question Add as items Add as group See Also Mastery Assignments page 43 Delete Questions from Assignments To delete questions that have been selected for inclusion in an assignment 1 In the right frame of the Select Questions tab select questions using the check boxes next to the question names 2 Click Delete Merge Questions into Question Groups 47 Creating and Managing Assignments You can merge individual questions or question groups into a single question group in an assignment To merge questions 1 Select the questions or question groups you want to merge 2 Click Merge to combine all the selected questions into a single question group Assignment Questions Delete UnMerge Generate a new question order L Never 1 w Determinant Question C 2 Binomial Coefficient Total Points Total Questions Previewing Questions in Assignments Points aa nie Within the Assignment Editor questions can be previewed any time by clicking on the question Configuring Question Weighting By d
49. For example x 0 is x e Addition of a negative number on the right becomes subtraction For example x 2 becomes x 2 e Subtraction of a negative number on the right becomes addition For example x 2 becomes x 2 e Multiplication by a number always comes first For example x 2 becomes 2x e Multiplication by 0 becomes 0 For example 0 x becomes 0 e Multiplication by 1 and 1 handled correctly For example 1 x becomes x e Division of two numbers simplified e Denominator is always positive For example 3 2 becomes 3 2 e Quotient of two integers is always put in lowest terms For example 3 6 becomes 1 2 and 6 3 becomes 2 The best place to use these functions is in in line expressions For example consider the algorithm Sa range 10 10 Sb range 10 10 c range 10 10 Sd range 10 10 condition ne a c Sb Sd You can set the question as follows Solve the simultaneous linear equations mathml Sa x b y 0 and mathml c x S d y 0 Exceptions to Automatic Simplification There may be situations in which the simplifications performed by mathml f may go beyond what you want For example you might want to typeset 2 3 4 x literally Automatic simplification is the system default To override the system defaults use the optional numeric arguments for the mathm1 f function which indicates that it is not to simplify math as follows 242 Authoring Mathematical Questions There are t
50. Grade reports 299 Gradebook 1 Add External Assignment 305 Assignment grades 293 Class grades 292 Deleted results 27 Importing External Grades from a File 305 Item statistics 298 Overview 288 Search 289 Security 310 snapshots 299 Student statistics 294 Graded Free response 222 Grades 1 Changing 294 Grading Customizing How Angles Are Matched 109 Customizing Tolerance in Sketch Questions 113 Essay questions 294 Fill in the Blanks Questions 131 Math Input 224 Multiple selection question 204 204 Rubrics 303 Testing 76 Grading policy Grade report 299 Grading Questions Question Designer 94 Graph Sketching Question Source Script 344 Graphics Creating popups 80 Graphing 76 Greater than condition 266 Greek Letters 333 Grid Sketch Questions 115 Group Plots Sketch Questions 115 Group Questions in the Question Repository 87 Groups Question Repository 86 Gt 266 H Hide assignment 27 52 from view 27 Hints 325 331 332 Adding or Editing 74 Deleting 75 Question Repository 85 Hints during assignment 49 Homework or Quiz 40 HTML 94 333 HTML Content Importing 320 HTML Formatting 76 Hz 247 if 266 Images 64 124 file names 77 With Labels 79 Img src 77 Importing and Installing Course Module 317 indexof 266 Info Field 331 Information Fields Index Adding or Editing 74 Deleting 75 Question Repository 86 Inherit Content From 9 Inherited Questions 89
51. Gradebook 299 ex 222 F F 247 Factorial 265 Featured Class 9 Features xvi Feedback 36 49 325 331 Adding or Editing 75 Deleting 75 Question Repository 85 Feedback for Maple graded questions 154 Feedback Options Configuring 332 Field Type 325 Fill in the Blanks 131 Drop down List Questions 130 Drop down menus 132 Menus 130 132 Question Authoring 130 Question Editor 130 132 134 Textboxes 130 134 Fill in the Blanks Question 130 Source Script 343 Final grade 49 Finishing assignments 56 Flash movie 80 Flash Questions 343 Source Script 343 Folders 21 Force grade 307 Index Formatting 94 Formula 137 222 231 253 260 270 275 281 335 Multipart 351 restrict form of response 344 Formula Form Variant 344 Source Script 344 Formula List 328 Formula Questions Multipart 351 Formula that Matches Responses to within C 137 328 Formula with Physical Units 137 328 Formula without Logs and Trig 137 Formula without Simplification 137 frac 265 Free Body Diagram Question Designer Questions 97 Free Body Diagram Questions Add a Force 111 Adding Control Points 111 Angle Tolerance 111 Background Image 111 Creating 108 Question Editor 108 Select forces 111 Show instructions 111 Weighting 111 Free Body Diagrams Customizing How Angles Are Matched 109 Functions within Algorithms 260 G G 247 gcd 266 Getting help 4 GIF 77 283 Global proctor 42
52. Homepage select the Questions menu 2 Click New Question The Question Editor is displayed 3 On the Question Type screen Select Adaptive Question Designer a b Enter the Question Name O Within the Question Text section create the question including all adaptive subquestions See Step 4 for more details Qs You can add algorithms or feedback For more details see Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 and Adding and Editing Feedback page 75 e Click Finish 4 On the Question Editor screen within the Question Text section a Enter the question statement and response areas the same way you would in a Question Designer question Add multiple sections to a question by inserting additional subquestions and response areas For more information see Question Designer Questions page 92 b Insert divisions between the sections by clicking Insert Edit Adaptive Section 2 66 Managing Questions e Attempts determines the number of attempts allowed for the section e Allow Skip determines whether Next Part appears for the section allowing students to move on without completing all attempts at this section e Passing Score determines the passing grade for the section e Penalty determines the penalty to apply for each incorrect attempt at the section e The properties for Correct and Incorrect fields determine how the section behaves depending on the correctness of the student response e Weight determines
53. ID you should use the value lt NULL gt 14 Creating and Managing Classes To upload an updated roster for a class You can update profile information through roster uploads Follow the same steps as for creating and importing a roster To update a roster only the login username field 1s required To remove students from a class From the Class Homepage select Class User Manager Choose Roster then click Remove Users Using Roster Select the file containing the users you want to remove from your class roster To export a roster 1 From the Class Homepage click the Class User Manager 2 Click Search for Users and then click Search 3 Click Export options CSV in order to export a roster Y MapteTA ah an 6 of Vs a Class User Manager Proctor Tools Assignments Questions Gradebook Class User Manager User Search Search Search for users registered in this Records Per Page 25 y class Reset Fields Basic Search Advanced Search Users that are registered in this class User Login Last Name First Name Email Student ID Role courtineyjones Jones Courtney courineyjones 2maplesoft com courtneyjones Instructor ckent Kent Clark ckent email edu 20593920 Student pparker Parker Peter pparker email edu 20239501 Student bwayne Wayne Bruce bwayne emiail edu 20491849 Student 4 items found displaying all items 1 Export options CSV Figure 2 3 Exporting a Class Roster The User Manager You can select students
54. In this question the randomized variables are mass m which varies between 0 5 and 1 0 and velocity v which varies between 10 and 15 The decimal argument is used to truncate the values of the numeric variable data The answer field holds two statements one corresponding to each part of this multipart formula question Statements in the answer field are evaluated by the system grader so must be expressed using proper math syntax Also note that in this question we use the comment field to display the computed value of the answer rather than answer definition Displaying Answers See Also Overview of Algorithmic Question Capabilities page 258 6 24 Tutorial List based Variables You can use the algorithmic syntax to manage multiple scenarios or sets of randomized data in questions Using list based variables you can use the same question statement but substitute corresponding sets of data throughout the question answer comment hints and solution statements 284 Authoring Mathematical Questions Example Consider the case in which you want to create a chemistry problem that uses one of several sets or scenarios of data related to distinct elements Each set contains a visual depiction GIF file and related data linked to various properties of the distinct elements To create a single problem that randomly chooses an element and substitutes its individualized properties into the question statement and other fields use algorit
55. Math Syntax in the System page 222 e What functions and operators are supported Mathematical Functions amp Operations page 246 e What units does the parser understand Default Table of Physical Unit Equivalents page 247 e Does the system support MathML MathML in the Questions page 239 6 4 Student Responses and Grading This section provides detailed information related to grading of student responses Student Responses On an assignment students can opt to enter their responses in Text Mode or Symbol Mode The system default is Text Mode in which students enter symbolic or numeric math expressions in simple keyboard notation much like a graphing calculator Symbol 225 Authoring Mathematical Questions Mode allows students to enter responses using the Equation Editor This setting applies to any question type that supports both modes See Figure 6 1 and Figure 6 2 Question 1 Differentiate sin x 2 with respectto z 1 point This question wears TT seus Plot Help Switch to Equation Editor Preview Figure 6 1 Students Can Change Entry Mode for Responses Equation Editor a sima oo a amp This question accepts numbers or formulas Plot Help Switch to Text Entry Figure 6 2 Students Can Use the Equation Editor for Responses For other question types a specialized input field is presented to the students For more information on the input field for a specific question type see the se
56. Modules page 314 Creating a Shared Class page 15 5 Authoring Question Types 5 1 A Summary of the Question Types Available in Maple T A There are many different question types available The most used are described in Table 5 1 Table 5 1 Different Question Types Available in the System Question Type Description of Question Type Question Designer Questions page 92 The Question Designer is a powerful and flexible question container that can hold multiple response areas The response areas are answer regions supporting various question types all in a single question The Question Designer also provides a flexible layout environment making it easy to include images tables and so on in your question For a detailed list of supported question types see Question Types Supported in the Question Designer page 93 To author questions in the Question Designer see Authoring in the Question Designer page 95 Adaptive Question Designer Questions page An Adaptive Question Designer can be used to create an adaptive multipart question Rather than 121 presenting with all the parts of the question at once as in a question designer or multipart question you can present just one part of the question and then only show the second part if the student gets part one incorrect or correct Clickable Image Questions page 124 A Clickable Image question presents an image with a number of hot spots Students are required to identify the
57. Numeric 209 328 Question Editor 209 Numeric and Algorithmic Variables 215 Example 215 Numeric Question Source Script 355 Numeric Question Types 222 Numeric Question with Units Example 214 Numeric Question with Units and Algorithmic Variables 216 Example 216 Numeric Question with Units in Question Designer 214 Numeric Questions 222 256 355 Controlling Answer Format 225 Example 213 Question Editor 209 numfmt 269 O Online Help 4 Operations 275 Order Assignment list 29 Ordered List 137 328 Overview xvi Course Modules 314 P p Biserial 298 p Value 298 Palette Grader Rules 131 Palette Questions 217 Question Editor 217 Palette based Symbolic Editor Questions 217 Palettes 94 Partial credit 29 Maple graded questions 158 Multipart Questions 196 197 198 Partial Credit Adaptive Questions 123 Partial marks 29 Pascals 247 Password 310 Forgotten 312 Penalties in Mastery assignments 49 Performance Feedback 331 332 Permuting Answers Multiple Choice 104 198 Multiple Selection 204 Phrase Questions 345 Source Script 345 Physical Unit Equivalents Table 247 Physics engineering 226 Plain Number 209 328 Plain text question bank files 322 334 Planning Your Question Bank Project 323 plotmaple 242 269 Plotting 76 242 269 2 D options 277 3 D options 278 Adding a Label 242 Displaying a Plot 242 in Maple 242 Student Response 230 PNG 77 Points column 47
58. PPP PP WW WW Ww no question What is the sum of Sa and b mode Formula name Maple based Variables in Formula answer Sanswer editing useHTML 3 algorithm a maple randomize rand 100 200 Sb rint 10 50 Sanswer int a Sb Notes 1 This question uses both Maple based for a and Maple T A random variables for b 2 When referencing negative random variables in a maple variable definition be sure to place the negative variable in parentheses otherwise an error message will return Sc maple a b See Also Maple graded Formula Question Source Script page 347 Maple graded Question Type Overview page 154 Maple Syntax Question Source Script page 349 Maple Plots page 76 7 Working with the Gradebook Overview of the Gradebook page 288 Performing Gradebook Searches page 289 Searching for Class Grades page 292 Item Statistics page 298 Working with Grade Reports page 299 RubricTables page 302 Adding an External Assignment page 305 Forced Grading page 307 7 1 Overview of the Gradebook The Gradebook has five primary functions e Viewing and analyzing scores and statistics for students assignments and question items e Reviewing student results e Creating customized grade reports that reflect your grading policy These grade reports can be saved or published for student viewing e Exporting grades to a file e Using customized rubrics to
59. Popup HTML reference 80 Precision 212 226 Previewing Assignments 28 Questions in assignments 28 47 Printing assignments 28 Privacy Question Repository 86 89 Proctor Adding 19 Deleting 20 Managing 17 Overview 17 Proctor authorization Override assignment policies 51 Proctored Browser For taking assignments 52 Proctored exams Proctor types 42 ProctoredBrowser Compatibility 52 311 Full Screen Mode 311 Full Screen Mode 311 Profile Edit 310 Public Questions 89 Publish Question 86 89 Index Q Qu x topic 323 Qu x y algorithm 260 Qu x y answer 253 Qu x y comment 253 Qu x y mode 328 Qu x y name 330 Qu x y solution 333 Question Adding 60 Deleting 87 Duplicating 90 Permanently Deleting 87 Previewing 87 Question Bank File Exporting 82 Opening 324 Question Bank File Format Plain text script files 322 334 Question Banks 88 322 322 323 329 Open 324 Question Chaining Variables 275 Question Descriptions 330 Question Designer 64 Essay Questions 95 Example with List Questions 355 Formula without Simplification 103 Formula without Simplification Example 103 Free Body Diagram Questions 95 List Questions 95 Maple graded Questions 95 Mathematical Formula 95 Multiple Choice Questions 95 Numeric Questions 95 Sketch Questions 95 Supported Questions 96 97 97 101 102 103 104 106 108 Question Designer Question Types Chemical Equation 93 Equation 93 E
60. Review amp Finish tab of the Assignment Editor If you begin to create an assignment and then abandon it without clicking Finish your additions and changes will be lost e Ifthe server shuts down before you click Finish your changes will be lost When the server resumes it will use the last saved version of your assignment data and any unsaved changes you had made will be lost e To reduce the risk of this during long assignment editing sessions you may want to periodically use Finish then select your assignment from the main Assignment Editor list of assignments to start a new editing session If you do this it is recommended that you mark the assignment as hidden so that students cannot access it To hide assignments from the main Assignment Editor page click on the assignment name in the list and select hide e After clicking Finish you are returned to the Assignment Editor list of assignments for your class where your new assignment is displayed in the list of all class assignments Canceling Assignment Creation To cancel assignment creation 1 In the Review amp Finish tab of the Assignment Editor click Cancel 2 You are asked to confirm that you want to discard the assignment and modifications you have made To discard the assignment click OK The assignment is not saved To continue editing the assignment click Cancel Reviewing Assignment Details In the Review amp Finish tab of the Assignment Editor you can revie
61. Set Correct to identify it as a the correct response The system highlights the correct answer region in red c Use New Region to define additional regions When you have completed each individual region select New Region to disengage the define tool Note Use Delete to clear individual regions 1f you make a mistake d When you have completed the identification of regions within your image click Finish to place a copy of your question in the web site cache and to preview your question Example 1 From the Class Homepage click the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 In the Question Type list click Clickable Image 4 Enter the following for Question Name Region of Graph Clickable 5 Enter the following for Question Text Click a negative region on the graph 6 Click Browse under the Image URL 7 Click on the image you want to be used as the clickable image If the image is not yet uploaded please do so by clicking upload file s to this point 8 Click Next 9 Define the correct region of the graph as shown in Figure 5 15 126 Authoring Question Types Select the region choices 1 0 5 1 Figure 5 15 Clickable Image Figure with Correct Regions 10 Then define the incorrect region of the graph as shown in Figure 5 16 127 Authoring Question Types Select the region choices New Region Set Correct Figure 5 16 Clickable Image Figure with Incorrect Regions 11 Click Finish
62. T3 If you want to include the function in another function use the notags option sum0 infty var mathml 1 a x 2 b notags See Also Inline Display of Formatted Math Expressions page 237 Simplified Math Expressions page 241 max a b c d min a b c d max a b c d Returns the largest of the arguments For example max 3 5 7 4 8 1 returns 7 min a b c d Returns the smallest of the arguments For example min 3 5 7 4 8 1 returns 1 not a not a Returns 1 0 if a 1s equal to 0 0 Otherwise 1t returns 0 0 numfmt fmt x Returns the value of x formatted according to the template fmt For example numfmt 00 20 9 returns 20 90 plotmaple text 269 Authoring Mathematical Questions Maple T A uses Maple plotting features to display plots Maple provides many ways of representing data and mathematical p p p 8 expressions graphically using plots You can display a plot with any question type The plotmaple command can be used anywhere an algorithmic variable can be used that is in text hints feedback and more plotmaple plotstatement libname filename lib plotdevice gif jpeg plotoptions options Where e plotstatement plot expression and plot options e libname optional specifies path to user Maple libraries e plotdevice optional gif produces a GIF ANIMATED GIF or jpeg produces a 24 bi
63. Use your web browser s built in printing controls typically a print button icon or menu to print the assignment 4 If you want to return to the Assignment Editor click your web browser s Back button Controlling the Sequence of Listed Assignments The list of assignments that is displayed in the Assignment Editor is also displayed to students in your Class Homepage You can change the order of assignments listed in the Assignment Editor These changes are reflected in the order of assignments in your Class Homepage To order the list of assignments e In the Assignment Editor select the new position number from the drop down menu of the assignment you want to reposition Once selected all affected assignments will adjust their position accordingly Assigning Partial Credit You can administer partial credit within assignments for partial answers alternate answers or alternate forms of answers Maple graded Questions Adaptive Questions and Multipart Questions offer you flexible ways to assign partial credit Maple graded Questions and Partial Credit Maple graded Questions allow you to specify partial credit for certain answers See Maple graded Questions page 153 Adaptive Questions and Partial Credit Adaptive Question Designer Questions incorporate a number of ways to assign partial credit You can specify penalties for incorrect answers as well as credit for incorrect answers See Partial Credit in an Adaptive Question page 1
64. Viewing or deleting files 21 Working with folders 21 Class Web Site Flash movie 80 Uploading images and references files 77 Clickable Image 328 Clickable Image Questions 124 Images for 77 Question Editor 124 Source script 341 Clone Question 82 Cloned Questions 89 Coaching 331 Comment Field 332 Comment Field for Maple graded 70 153 154 Comments 253 Condition 263 Controlling Answer Format 225 Copy From Maple Worksheet 153 Copying Assignments 26 Copying Questions 90 Copyright xix Cos 275 Course Grade Computation of 299 Course ID 9 Course Modules 314 Creating 315 Deleting 319 Exporting 317 Importing and installing 317 Relative web references 320 Viewing Details 318 Created Question Repository 86 Creating Course Module 315 multipart 196 New Class 6 New question from source 61 Popup References 80 Shared Class 15 Creating assignment 25 Csc 275 D d Value 298 Decimal 137 255 264 Decimal places 281 Default Role in Class 9 Define Response Area 64 Defining Answer Region 95 Response Area 64 Deg 247 Deleted Gradebook results 27 Deleting Assignment 27 Course Module 319 Files using the Class File Manager 21 Instructors 17 Proctors 20 Question 87 Questions from assignments 46 Roster from Class 12 Student record 310 Description Question Repository 85 Description URL 9 Index Difficulty Question Repository 85 Digits in Maple Questions 228 Dimensio
65. a Circle Math App Gradeable through Maple T A In the following example you will use the Interactive Plot of a Circle Math App created in the previous section You will make the Quadrant Game gradeable through Maple T A Log in to your Maple T A server and then go to your Class Homepage able TA Class 8 y P amp y P amp Manier A dl sil i eee Assignments From the Questions menu select New Question Math App In the Question Type list select Math App Question Name Interactive Plot Enter a description in the Question Text field Question Text Click Next Enter the text for the question and then click Choose Worksheet to upload your Math App Click upload file s to this point Click Choose File to find the Math App on your machine Select Single File and provide a name for the Math App Click OK Click the worksheet icon next to the Math App you want to use in your question Select Grading Algorithm in Maple T A Insert the following command into the input box if Actions CenX lt 0 and Actions CenY lt 0 then return 1 else return 0 end if Click Finish to save the question 195 Authoring Question Types Demo Maple T A Class Class User Manager Proctor Tools Assignments Questions Gradebook Math App Question Name Interactive Plot Question Text E Source Oa pe a He Ho B Z U x x 222 8 Ar A Font S BOBE QI Draw a circle whose center is contained in Quadrant Ill
66. a Maple command to calculate the answer 229 Authoring Mathematical Questions The following example scripts illustrate code that allows and prevents potential cheating by the student using Maple commands Examples The student is required to factor x 2 1 The expected correct response is x 1 x 1 In this example question code the student could easily use the Maple factor command to obtain the answer question Factor x 2 1 maple evalb SRESPONSE factor x 2 1 type maple mode Maple allow2d 0 name Allow Cheating editing useHTML In this example the code verifies if the factor command has been used in the answer The student response will be marked incorrect if the Maple factor command is used question Factor x 2 1 maple evalb 0 StringTools Search factor SRESPONSE and evalb RESPONSE factor x 2 1 type maple mode Maple allow2d 0 name Prevent Cheating editing useHTML If you are concerned about students using Maple commands to calculate answers consider using Maple graded Formula to create your question Students respond with a limited number of expressions and functions As such you do not need to explicitly check that the student response is a Maple command For details see the Syntax and Student Response subsections of Maple graded Formula page 156 See Also Maple graded Question Type Overview page 154 Maple Syntax page 157 Entering Chemistry Expressions The
67. a Maple plot in any question type including non mathematical question types For more information see Plotting Using Maple page 242 For a complete list of questions types non mathematical and mathematical and their modes see Question Modes Question Types page 328 5 2 Question Designer Questions Description Question Designer questions are a more flexible and extensible form of free response questions which can include multiple question types and response areas It also provides a flexible layout environment making it easy to include images tables and so on in your question In this way Question Designer questions are similar to multipart questions in that they provide a shell structure in which to embed other questions Question Designer questions support the following features e Questions can contain multiple response cells for example Fill in the Blanks questions 93 Authoring Question Types e Any number of response areas Parts of your question can require text numeric or formula answers while other parts can require multiple choice essay answers all in a single question You can even create a question designer question without any response areas This allows you to have questions that are purely informational e Response areas can anywhere in the body of a question e Standard HTML elements You can include character formatting HTML tables embedded images and media objects To import an entire HTML
68. a o ds e do ht 318 9 6 Adding and Deleting Elements within a Course Module ooooccccncccoconcncnnononcncnnoncncnnononcnnononcnnoncnnnnnncnnnnoncnnnnancnnnos 319 Adding Course Module COMTERtS a A AAA NAAA ASAS 319 Weletimore ourse Mod le Cond dd 319 Why Delete Only Partof a Course Module iS di 319 O Bes a i ay a Course Modales 319 9 3 Relative Web References im Course MOGUIES nin ada SA SARA ESE AT AS 320 99 Imporine HIME Content for Question Creaton AS ate tand bites 320 ARI Tex SCM pt AUN OLIN ft cece ant A idas 322 Prod Project Plements oa ltda ia 322 Authoring When to Use the Question Ed dd AA AAA AAA A AS 322 Authoring When to Use Maple TA Plain Text Script Files 0 cti 322 Arz QUES HOM ES ATK Se is as ti aia 322 What 1s a Question Dala A A ad 322 Planning Your Question Bank Project id AAA A AAA AA aad ee Siete 323 Topic Structure witht Question BASS A a 323 Opening a saved Question Bank ls SS ES 324 Caine and Openine Modules id idolos 325 QUESO E eld S neersien ie SRA AS RARA ASA AAA ASA AAA 325 Question Modes Question Types rores at ee lett Laer itt Cae eat a Mato alla Sete etd Coen Dera 328 Required Cuestion Eleme NIS O O a neato pees 329 The name Field Using Question Descriptions aa 330 Enc ane wen Blond A a a R T A 330 ic a a a a a a a a nea ae ee 331 Pints Oachines and Performance Fecdback oct teats t cate Auccies eea a nl aah tence da 331 Comments and Pertormatico Feedback radiata 332 Using Complete Soluti
69. an will display all names that start with an that are in the LDAP directory but not in Maple T A These searches are not case sensitive so an produces the same results as An Once you have created a list of users in this way you can select those you want to add to Maple T A User Manager Import with LDAP When you import users in an LDAP Maple T A environment user information is verified and updated from the LDAP directory The roster import file must follow the specifications for Roster File Upload The usernames in the import file are used to match users to the LDAP directory When you import users with LDAP 1 The LDAP server is consulted to verify each user is in the LDAP directory Users that are not in the directory will not be imported 2 Matching of users is done by username 3 Profile information from the LDAP directory will override any corresponding information in the import file 4 Require User Validation 1f included 1s ignored with LDAP No validation is necessary on the user s next login 9 Course Modules Course Modules allow you to share your class content with others including related assignments and any web resources for example images used by your questions and assignments 9 1 Course Modules Overview When you create a course module the system packages the class elements you have identified producing a single ZIP file that can be archived or redistributed to other instructors using the system Th
70. and Quiz assignment are recorded in the Gradebook for the class Reuse Previously Generated Algorithmic Variables To present an exact version of an assignment each attempt Select the Reuse previously generated algorithmic variables check box e Individual students will always return to the exact version of the assignment they were initially presented with even on repeated attempts regardless of whether the question was authored with algorithms for any attempt during the assignment s scheduled availability If questions contain randomly generated variable data the system instantiates the variables exactly one time To vary questions for each assignment attempt default setting Leave the Reuse previously generated algorithmic variables option cleared e Students rework the assignment with newly randomized variables inserted in questions each time they attempt the assignment This enables instructors to create a template assignment and lets students rework it repeatedly with each session generating a different version of the algorithmic variables within the assignment but still covering the same skills Notes The system records graded results for every repeated attempt and instructors can control the grading policies taking the best score average score or another option You can view results from all sessions including the unique randomized variable data for each assignment attempt a student makes The system records the student s bes
71. angle brackets in the form lt gt where corresponds to the sequentially numbered part This question includes individual response objects embedded questions as follows e Blank 1 Formula question Acc PRP RPRPRPPP PPP PP RPP RPP RPP RPP PP PP PP PPP PPP PPP PPP PPP PP PP PPP PRP PRP PRP PPP Rp PRP RPRPRPPRPPRPP PRP RPP RPP RPP RPP PP PP PP PP PP PPP PP PP PP PP PP RPP PPP RPP PPP PPP Pp Blank 2 Numeric question Blank 3 Numeric question with required units Blank 4 List question text input relaxed grading multiple answers partial credit Blank 5 List question text input exact grading multiple answers partial credit Blank 6 List question menu input exact grading partial credit part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part part 1 O 01 0101 0 01 OY OY OY OY OY OY O Os O1sOsAOSAOSAOSAOAO1I01I0OIAaAaaaa aaa Oy yy yu YN NN NN NNN APAAPRIEPA topic Question Designer Question Example mode Inline editing useHTML weighting 1 1 1 1 1 1 numbering alpha editing useHTML tolerance 1 0E 9 question xx answer n x n2 Q mode Formul
72. below From the Class Homepage select the Gradebook Click Search and select Class Grades Select the Assignment name From the Progress drop down menu select In Progress NN nA A WO N e In the search results click the assignment name link as shown in the figure below Class Grades tem Statistics Page 1 011 Rows 1 10f11 Jon Summary Data Total Total Points 63 0 63 0 Last Given Grade Total Jones John 5 5 Page 1 of 1 Rows 1 10f1 Jon Click Search to perform the search An in progress assignment is indicated by the symbol beside the grade 7 In the Demonstration of Question Types panel click the Force grade active assignments link Demonstration of Question Types Current Total Points 63 0 Class Average Original Total Points 63 0 Last Modified Active Assignments 2 ltem Statistics Histogram of Student Assignment Scores Attempts 1 6 7 14 2 17 44 PM EDT Average Attempts 1 308 Working with the Gradebook 8 The users that are currently taking the assignment are displayed Click Force Grade as shown below To be graded Login ID Last Action jj i Jun 06 15 40 39 201 The following users hawe an a detalla active version of this assignment courineyjones Fn Jun 06 15 38 26 EDT 2014 that will be graded Cannot grade Nothing found to display The following users have an active version of this assignment but are currently active in the system The assignment will
73. blanks questions with options for text or menu input styles exact or relaxed graders and the ability to specify multiple correct or incorrect responses as well as partial credit for each response Math App Questions in the Question Designer page 102 allow an instructor embed a worksheet that a student will interact with The worksheet itself will be graded by the final state the student leaves it in Mathematical Formula Questions in the Question Designer page 103 provide full access to the formula mode math grading behaviors including configurable grading of equivalent symbolic algebraic and equation expressions The six sub modes within the Question Designer are Mathematical Formula Formula Subtype page 139 Formula that Matches Responses to within C Subtype page 142 Vectors of Formulas page 149 Equation Subtype page 144 Formula without Simplification Subtype page 103 Chemical Equation Subtype page 151 Note For specific information on each subtype see Mathematical Formula Question Types Comparison Table page 137 6 Maple graded Questions in the Question Designer page 101 include facilities for algebra calculus differential equations discrete mathematics graphics numerical computation and many other areas of mathematics You also have access to the plotting capabilities of Maple You can plot a student response or a function derived from a student response for example the definite integral of th
74. choose Drop down Menu e Enter the following answer choices in the Item and Weight fields as shown in Figure 5 3 below Weight Rene Descartes dt Leonardo Fibonacci Marcel Duchamps Oo O 100 Authoring Question Types Note As you add expected answers the system assigns them a default credit value of 0 0 in the right column Edit the Weight as desired using 1 0 fully correct or any decimal value between 0 0 and 1 0 for partially correct answers See Figure Edit Response Area a Choose Question Type Li t asia IST Free Body Diagram iahti y Mag Weighting 4 List Maple graded Matching Type ignore case text match Math App Mathematical formula Display Type Drop down Menu Textfield y Permute list Multiple Choice Choices Numeric Sketch Add Item ltem Weight Rene Descartes Leonardo Fibonacci Marcel Duchamps Figure 5 3 List Response Area in the Question Designer 6 Click OK to see Figure 5 4 Question Designer Question Name Question Designer List x Question Text Who introduced the Arabic number system to Europe List Edit Figure 5 4 List Question in the Question Designer 101 Authoring Question Types 7 To add an Algorithm or Feedback see Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 and Adding and Editing Information Fields page 74 8 Click Finish to save the question 9 Click Preview to view the question and test it by selecting various responses
75. classes e The maximum number of characters allowed is 255 e The system ensures that class names are unique If you or an instructor select a name that exists the system requests that you select another name e Clicking the Class Name link opens the Class Homepage in the related class 10 Creating and Managing Classes Class Short Name optional A shortened name for the class which is displayed only when space is limited for example on the System Homepage School optional The name of your school Registration Locked Registration is locked by default This prevents students from enrolling themselves in the class Open registration allows students in the system to enroll themselves in the class The instructor can manually change the Registration Locked feature to allow open or limited registration based on his her needs for that class Allow Anonymous Access Allow Anonymous Access is only visible if it is enabled by the administrator When enabled this feature allows anonymous users to take a test without logging into Maple T A by giving them access to the system homepage This page will only show classes that are also set to allow anonymous access Any practice type assignments will automatically be available for anonymous users Featured Class Marking a class as a featured class allows for the creation of child classes that can inherit content from this class Inherit Content From You can inherit content from
76. create a Math App question l Ze From the Class Homepage select the Questions menu Click New Question On the Question Type list click Math App On the Edit Response Area screen Enter a Question Name Enter the Question Text enter an appropriate description of the question To include complicated mathematical expressions click the Equation Editor 2 icon In the Choose Worksheet section click the button to choose or upload a new worksheet to use in the question In the Initialization Parameters section declare any variables that you want the worksheet you chose above to initialize when the question loads This is not a requirement you can leave it blank if there are no variables to initialize in the worksheet In the Select the type of grading used section choose which type of grading is going to be used to grade the final state of the worksheet To add an Algorithm or Feedback to the question see Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 and Adding and Editing Feedback page 75 for more details To proceed to the Question Details page click Finish On the Question Details screen To edit Hints and question details see Adding and Editing Feedback page 75 and Editing Question Details in the Question Respository page 84 for more details Click Finish to place a copy of your question in the web site cache and to preview your question Next Steps To edit further details in the Question Repositor
77. default ranges for a and b Tip You can control whether the sliders vary through decimal values or only integer values To see numerical rather than symbolic results enter the endpoints using decimals such as 10 0 instead of 10 then the corresponding slider will explore decimal values 4 A new table is created inline with the expression and sliders for a and b Move the slider back and forth to see its effect on the computation For more details on floating point values and the other options for the Exploration Assistant see the Explore help page in the Maple help system Example 3 Exploring a 2 D Plot Enter the command plot cos a Xx sin b x X 2 n 2 1 Right click the expression and select Explore The Explore dialog box opens Enter 1 for the lower end of a and b When you are finished click Explore Anew table is created inline with a math container for the expression and sliders for a and b Move the sliders back and forth to see how they change the plot Tip If you are going to explore a 2 D plot it is not necessary to define the range for x However if you do not define x then you must select skip for x Default values will then be used for the range Example 4 Exploring a 3 D Plot Enter the command plot3d x cos a y x y 5 X T NM Y T T T T plot3d cos a y x2 y 5 X TD MY T T Right click the expression and select Explore The Explore dialog box
78. demonstrate the required level of mastery by answering the minimum number of questions correctly the system allows them to move ahead to the next learning objective s material 44 Creating and Managing Assignments The Student must complete Question 1 before attempting Question Delete complete Question 1 v before attempting Cuestion 2 v Add The student will go back to an earlier question after 3 Y wrong answer s to Question 1 4 Add Requirements Question Required Description Question 1 Pt Determinant Question Question 2 ft Binomial Coeficient Figure 3 14 Policies for Mastery Assignments If students demonstrate a lower level of mastery through repeated incorrect responses you can establish penalties so that the system moves the student backwards to the previous learning objective until minimal proficiency is established again Requirements e Assignment results are recorded in the Gradebook for the class e Mastery assignments can be attempted multiple times for credit If you want to limit the number of attempts a student can make on a particular assignment configure the assignment properties e As students work through a Mastery assignment they are shown information about their progress along with the requirements for the learning objective and the assignment This information is shown in a Progress Report box that updates each time they complete and grade a question Study Session Assignment
79. e The answer is displayed in the form 7 3 5 for example This provides an indication of the method for obtaining the answer which may be inappropriate e The above format can return answers of the form 7 7 5 which is more complicated than the simplified form 0 To avoid these issues rewrite this example as follows using a new variable ans so that you return only the final answer to 3 decimal places Example 5 qu 1 5 mode formula qu 1 5 algorithm Sa rint 12 1 Sb rint 12 1 c rint 12 1 Sans decimal 3 c Sb Sa qu 1 5 question Find the solution of the linear equation S a x b S c qu 1 5 answer Sans See Also Adding and Editing Feedback page 75 6 12 Tutorial Formatting Integers and Reals This tutorial demonstrates the effect of applying various formatting options to the same expression in a question 256 Authoring Mathematical Questions Consider a question that contains the text A dog weighs m kg The following table shows how different assignments of values to m are interpreted Table 6 11 Formatting Numbers with m m sig 3 15 27375491 A dog weighs 15 3 kg A dog weighs 15 kg A dog weighs 15 3 kg m decimal 0 15 27375491 A dog weighs 15 kg decimal n x Returns x expressed as a floating point number rounded to n decimal places sig n x Returns x expressed as a floating point number rounded to n significant digits int x Returns the integer p
80. each question or question group for each student is displayed Assignment Grades includes a summary of information on the assignment Table 7 1 Assignment Summary Assignment Name The name of the assignment Click this link to collapse the details view Last modified The date and time the assignment was last modified Attempts The total number of assignments taken by students This number might be greater than the number of students if the assignment allows for multiple submissions of work Average Attempts The average number of attempts per student Item Statistics Click this link to view the item statistics for the assignment Histogram of Student Click this link to view a histogram of the assignment results Assignment Scores The histogram opens in a new window From the Assignment Grades you can e Change the options in View Panel and refresh the view without performing another search e Export any generated table of grades to a file by clicking Export to CSV e Go to the Item Statistics for the assignment e View a histogram of student assignment scores e Change the total points on the assignment e View assignment results for a question group in the assignment e Preview a question on the assignment e Access question details for a question in the assignment e Access details for a question group in the assignment 294 e Working with the Gradebook If the assignment includes question groups these are indic
81. editor Embedded Plot Window Plot Properties Name Tooltip Plot Expression Width in Pixels Height in Pixels Animation Delay milliseconds Action When Drag ends Action When Clicked Action When Dragged Options ClickPlot Visible _ Continuous Animation Mode 4 Make execute code the default manipulator 193 Authoring Question Types Right click the Button component and select Component Properties s Button Properties Change the Name of the component to Button and the Caption to Clear Plot Click OK Clear Flot Acton Wen idet Remove any existing text in this component code editor and change it to Image none selected say Right click the Plot component again and select Edit Click Action Scale to a specific size Width 300 Height 200 Actions ClearPlot Options Visible Save the code and exit the code editor Enabled Draw border From the Edit menu select Startup Code A Fon Inte ere Insert the following commands into the Startup Code editor File Syntax Save Syntax Actions module export Click ClearPlot CenX Cent local Endx EndY Pl Click proc Actions module if type CenX symbol then export Click ClearPlot CenX CenY CenX round DocumentTool1s Do ClickPlot clickx local EndX Endy Pl CenY round DocumentTools Do ClickPlot clicky P1 plots pointplot CenX Cent Click proc Wiew
82. enter the following Algorithm h rint 10 50 w rint 10 50 d rint 10 50 vol h w d 5 Click Refresh algorithm preview to preview the variables you defined as shown in Figure 5 67 Algorithm h rint 10 50 Sw rint 10 50 Edit the code for your algorithm d rint 10 50 in the text box below or click Svol h w 5d Show Designer to use the algorithm designer The algorithm designer tool allows you to define algorithms for your l l Variable Value question by completing a form Show Designer h 23 Refresh algorithm preview w 2 d 17 vol 7820 Figure 5 67 Numeric Example 4 Algorithm 217 Authoring Question Types 6 Enter the following for Question Text What is the volume of a rectangular solid h cm high w cm wide and d cm deep 7 Enter the following for the Correct answer In the Number field enter vol In the Units field enter cm 3 Leave Precision and Input format as their default settings 6 7 Click Finish 8 Click Preview to view the question as shown in Figure 5 68 You can test the question by selecting various responses VManleTA 8 Preview Question Area of rectangular What is the volume of a rectangular solid 48 cm high 36 cm wide and 11 cm deep solid Number Units Grade Refresh Close Figure 5 68 Numeric Example 4 Next Steps To edit further details in the Question Repository within the Question Designer see Editing Ouestion Det
83. expression in x The Maple grading code is plot SRESPONSE x 0 10 e You can access your personal Maple library archives from within your Maple questions You must first upload your archive files into the class file space on the server When you create a Maple graded question you specify the location of the archive as part of the question definition When executing the Maple code associated with that question the Maple libname variable is set automatically to access the archive files specified Click the blank field in the Maple repository row and enter the library location To edit further details in the Question Repository within the Question Designer see Editing Question Details in the Question Respository page 84 Math App To create a Math App question 1 Enter a title for the question under the Question Name panel 2 Enter a question in the Question Text Optionally enter the question using symbolic math by clicking the Equation Editor jicon The Equation Editor opens See Formatting Tips page 94 103 Authoring Question Types Click Insert Edit Response Area 153 Select the Math App question type in the Edit Response Area dialog In the Choose Worksheet section click the button to choose or upload a new worksheet to use in the question In the Initialization Parameters section declare any variables that you want the worksheet you chose above to initialize when the question loads This is not a requirement
84. field where you want to include the link question text feedback or hints click the link icon B from the menu bar 3 Under the Link Info tab click Browse Server and select the file 4 Click OK to add the link To use an HTML reference to the file you have uploaded to your class web site use lt a href classes myclassurl filename gt where myclassurl is the unique identifier in your class URL and filename is the name of the file If you have created subfolders in your class web site use lt a href classes myclassurl subfolder filename gt where subfolder is the subfolder or subfolders specifying the subfolder path External Images or Reference Sources You can use any URL that points to a resource to reference provided the URL will be continuously available to you and your students However it is recommended that you use only images and references on your class web site For external resources enter the full URL Notes e File names can consist of only alphanumeric characters and a single period e To include an image in a question comment or hint you must first upload the image file to the class web site on your server e Ifthe image is not uploaded to the class web site the question text appears with a lost image icon You cannot check the appearance and behavior of the question properly until you upload the files to your class web site e You can browse and tag images in your class web site during Cl
85. filled option is set to true the region between the surface and the xy plane is displayed as solid This option is valid only with the following commands plot3d contourplot3d and listcontplot3d grid m n This option specifies the dimensions of a rectangular grid on which the points are generated equally spaced gridstyle x This option specifies a grid x as either rectangular or triangular This option is not available for all 3 D plot objects labeldirections x y z This option specifies the direction in which labels are printed along the axes The values of x y and z must be horizontal or vertical The default direction of any labels is horizontal The value can be in lowercase or uppercase The axes option must be set to boxed frame or normal filled truefalse labels x y z This option specifies labels for the axes The value of x y and z must be a string The default labels are the names of the variables in the original function to be plotted The strings must be entered using left single quotes light phi theta r g b This option adds a directed light source from the direction phi theta in spherical coordinates with red green and blue intensities given by r g and b The values of r g and b must be numeric in the range 0 to 1 lightmodel x This option chooses a predefined light model to illuminate the plot Valid light models include none light light2 light3 and light4 The value must be in lowerc
86. for the roots omitting a r gi This question accepts lists of numbers or formulas separated by semicolons E g 2 4 6 or x 1 x 1 The order of the list doesnt matter but be sure to separate the terms with semicolons Help Preview Refresh Grade Figure 5 34 Unordered List of Formulas Example Preview Example 7 Ordered List of Formulas Subtype The ordered list of formulas subtype accepts a list of numbers or formulas separated by commas The response 1s graded correct if the list of formulas matches the exact order of the list in the correct answer If the correct answer is 1 2 3 then only 1 2 3 is accepted To accept an unordered list of formulas use the unordered list of formulas subtype For more details see Unordered List of Formulas Subtype page 146 To create an Ordered Lists of Formulas question 1 From the Class Homepage click the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 In the Question Type list click Mathematical Formula 4 Enter the following for Question Name Compute exact values w y 5 Enter the following for Question Text Compute the exact values of sin gt 0os tan 6 Enter the following for Correct answer sqrt 3 2 1 2 sqrt 3 7 In the Type of expression accepted list select Ordered lists of formulas 8 Click Finish 9 Click Preview to view the question See Figure 5 35 149 Authoring Question Types Preview Question Pi F Comput
87. found displaying all items 1 Authorize Figure 2 5 Proctor Tools For a list of proctors in your class select the Class User Manager and then select Search for Users Click Advanced Search and select Proctor as the User Role from the drop down menu Click Search A list of proctors 1s displayed See Also Proctored Exams page 42 19 Creating and Managing Classes Adding a Proctor To add a proctor to your class 1 From the Class Homepage select Class User Manager Choose Register Users Click Search to find all users eligible for registration hh WwW N To filter the results set the User Role on the drop down menu to Any Role to find all users You can also use other search criteria for example Last Name to search for a specific individual in the class Click Search Under the Roles tab use the drop down menu to select Proctor as shown in Figure 2 6 Under Select users to add in the left pane choose users to register by clicking the check box Click Register o N DN Ul Now the added user will be able to access your Class Homepage and use the Proctor Tools utility Register Users in this Class User Search Last Name First Name Search for system users to User Login student ID register in this class ole Email User Role __ Any Role e Records Per Page 25 v Match IO Starting with O Anywhere O Exact Case Sensitive O Match Case Reset Fields Basic Search Advanced Se
88. grade at the top of the assignment Show the correct answer Show the question s feedback if specified during question creation Allow or prevent students from resubmitting answers to questions This is available for Homework Quiz and Proctored Exam assignment types Allow students to check grades and receive feedback After the assignment is graded Show the final grade and show the correct answer are default settings 37 Creating and Managing Assignments Other options for after the assignment include e Receiving email reports whenever a student completes an assignment of type Homework Quiz or Proctored Exam The email will contain the class name assignment student name and their grade e Showing restricting the question s feedback if it exists Note Restricting feedback until the assignment due date is useful if you want to prevent students who finish the assignment early from giving answers to other students Feedback Figure 3 10 Feedback Options IP Address Restrictions During the assignment _ Show hints Show one hint at a time Show current grade at top of assignment Ww Allow students to resubmit answers to questions Ww Allow students to check grades and feedback For each question Never Iv show the correct answer After the assignment is graded W Show the final grade Edit grading message For each question Always Iv show the correct answer Send email reports to Never
89. gt lt i gt lt font face arial size 1 gt Most standard equivalent unit dimensions are graded correctly by the system or you can specify your own table of unit equivalents to apply to a question lt p gt lt font gt lt i gt lt p gt This next question grades input in the form of a lt b gt text string lt b gt and can also be set to accept multiple correct answers so Einstein lt i gt or lt i gt einstein will be graded as correct as will Albert Einstein lt i gt or lt i gt aLbeRt einSTEIN lt br gt Who first developed the General Theory of Relativity lt 4 gt lt br gt lt br gt lt i gt lt i gt lt font face arial size 1 gt This question lt b gt also lt b gt awards partial credit if you answer Stephen Hawking lt font gt lt i gt lt i gt lt p gt lt p gt This is the same question with the grader set to accept only an lt b gt exact match lt b gt of the answer text string however it too can be set to accept multiple correct answers so Einstein lt i gt or lt i gt Albert Einstein will be graded as correct but einstein or aLbeRt einSTEIN will be graded wrong lt br gt Who first developed the General Theory of Relativity lt 5 gt lt br gt lt br gt lt i gt lt font face arial size 1 gt This type of question also allows you to give some partial credit for certain responses so if you enter einstein or albert einstein you will get 1 2 credit for this question lt font gt
90. gt r s gt s t rplus int r 1 splus int s 1 tplus int t 1 a rint 2 20 b rint 2 20 c rint 2 20 143 Authoring Question Types Click Refresh algorithm preview to preview the variables you defined as shown in Figure 5 29 Algorithm Edit the code for your algorithm in the text box below or click Show Designer to use the algorithm designer The algorithm designer tool allows you to define algorithms for your question by completing a form show Designer Refresh algorithm preview r rint 2 10 s rint 2 10 t rint 2 107 condition gt Sr s gt s St rplus int Sr 1 splus int s 1 Stplus int t 1 Sa rint 2 207 Sb rint 2 20 7 c rint 2 20 Variable Value r g S 5 t 3 rplus 10 splus 5 tplus A a 12 b 7 a 16 Figure 5 29 Formula that Matches Responses to within C Example Algorithm 6 Enter the following for Question Text Evaluate a x r b x s c x t dx 7 Enter the following for Correct answer a rplus x rplus b splus x splus c tplus x tplus 8 In the Type of expression accepted list select Formula that Matches Responses to within C 9 Click Finish 144 Authoring Question Types 10 Click Preview to view the question See Figure 5 30 Preview Question Integral of polynomial evaluate 9 29 4 15 2 4 2 oe This question accepts numbers or formulas Do not include a constant of integration in your answer
91. i Right click the Plot component and select Component Properties Plot Properties Name Ensure the Name of the component is Plot0 and select Make execute code the default manipulator Plot Expression Click OK on the Plot Properties window sh ORES Height in Pixels Animation Delay milliseconds Options Tooltip 186 Authoring Question Types 400 400 100 Y Visible 7 Continuous Animation Mode W Make execute code the default manipulator 42 Draw border Right click the first Radio Button component and select Component Edad AGE Winn Properties Ensure the Name of the component is RadioButton0 and change the Caption to Quadrant I Click OK Right click the first Radio Button component and select Edit Click Action Replace the existing code in this code editor by Actions QuadrantSelect 1 Save the code and close the code editor Do this for the other Radio Buttons but edit them as follows e The second Radio Button component has Name RadioButton and Caption Quadrant II Insert the following code for Edit Click Action Actions QuadrantSelect 2 e The third Radio Button component has Name RadioButton2 and Caption Quadrant III Insert the following code for Edit Click Action Actions QuadrantSelect 3 e The fourth Radio Button component has Name RadioButton3 and Caption Quadrant IV Insert the following code for Edit Click Action Quadran
92. in the sketch section provided in Figure 5 12 116 Authoring Question Types Correct Answer Figure 5 12 Sketching the Correct Response Creating Basic Sketch Questions The sketch board is a set of tools that can be used to create and or operate on various sketch types Table 5 2 summarizes the different types of graphs available in Maple T A Table 5 2 Different Types of Graphs Available in Maple T A Graph Type Tool s Used How to Use Them 117 Authoring Question Types Line Draw two points F Parabolic function Draw the vertex and then a second point Absolute value function A Draw the vertex and then a second a point Exponential function Draw two points and then the horizontal asymptote Logarithmic function Draw two points and then the vertical ue asymptote Solution set region for a system of linear f Draw the line s make certain line s inequalities A gt dashed as needed and finally specify a the correct region by clicking inside it Note Currently a region can be created with at most two lines drawn on the sketch board To remove any unwanted graphs click Delete ti At any point in the creation of a graph you can abort by simply clicking J in the toolbar Graph types and graphing instructions This section provides detail on each graph type and how to specifically graph it To graph a line l Click Draw a Line a This enables you to plot points on the coordinate grid 2 Plot two poi
93. letter User Data The User Data shown in Figure 7 3 page 291 specifies what student identification information to display Clicking the User Data check box enables you to search all the categories Once all the criteria has been specified click Search _ Class Name _ Ml _ Login _ Email Lastname Student ID _ Given Name _ Custom Fields Figure 7 3 User Data Search Grade Data The Grade Data shown in Figure 7 4 page 292 displays assignment details such as the date and time the assignment was started and finished the time used to complete the assignment and the number of attempts 292 e Working with the Gradebook Clicking the Grade Data check box enables you to search all these categories Once all the criteria has been specified click Search _ Start Date Start Time End Date End Time Attempts Duration Figure 7 4 Grade Data Search Summary Data The Summary Data shown in Figure 7 5 page 292 displays the assignment summary data such as the mean median total points number of students number of attempts and number of attempts per student for the assignment Clicking the Summary Data check box enables you to search all these categories Once all the criteria has been specified click Search _ Mean _ Students Median _ Attempts _ Total Points _ Attempts Student Figure 7 5 Summary Data Search Note The mean and median are calculated based on
94. list of numeric values then tickmarks are placed only at the specified values If m is a list of equations v t where v is a numeric value and t is a name or string then a tickmark with the label t is placed at v If m is the name default then the default tickmark placement is applied Similarly n specifies the placement of y axis tickmarks and p specifies the placement of z axis tickmarks This option specifies a title for the plot The value of t must be a string The default is no title You can create multi line titles for standard plots Use the characters n to denote the start of a new title line The strings must be entered using left single quotes view zmin zmax This option indicates the minimum and maximum coordinates of the surface to be displayed on the screen The default is the entire surface or xmin xmax ymin ymax zmin zmax See Also plotmaple text page 269 6 22 Details on Using Algorithmic Variables The Answer Field Evaluation and Requirements The answer field specifies internal directives or instructions to the system for how to grade the question It operates like a command line statement when processed by the system The answer field accepts only values that can be system evaluated numbers formulas algorithmic variables or numbers and or formulas with required physical units The system recognizes e Equivalent numeric and algebraic expressions e Equivalent standard physical units e
95. logarithmic curves They are each graded out of two points one point for the curve and one point for the asymptote The final result is divided by two to achieve the final grade Customizing tolerance in Sketch questions For Sketch questions Maple T A uses a built in tolerance to determine how close the instructor and the student s curves must be to one another for the response to be deemed correct The closer the value is to zero the more accurate the response must be to be graded correct Note After the question has been created the grading code can be modified by clicking Edit Source and adding a tolerance option to the command Grading GradePlot The default grade code is op 1 Grading GradePlot SANSWER RESPONSE PLOTVIEW To specify the tolerance change the grading code to op 1 Grading GradePlot ANSWER RESPONSE PLOTVIEW tolerance __ where is a numeric value between 0 0 and 1 0 with 1 0 being the most lenient For more details on this option refer to the Grading GradePlot help page in the Maple help system 114 Authoring Question Types Instructions To create a Sketch question 1 From the Class Homepage select the Questions menu Click New Question On the Question Type list click Question Designer 2 3 4 Enter the question in the text box 5 Click Insert Edit Response Area 6 Under the menu options Choose Question Type select Sketch The Edit Response Area window appears
96. must reduce to the base SI units m meter kg kilogram s second A amp K kelvin and ed candela Units can be derived in terms of other units for example micron 0 0001cm provided that you include the line cm 0 01m or otherwise relate cm with the base SI unit m in your table Include Table specific Help Optionally there can be a line qu env numeric tablename help http myhelpurl where myhelpurl is the URL of a page with help information on the units in the table Using a Custom Table of Unit Equivalents in a Question To use a table of units include the following statement in the question definition of any Numeric question in your question bank qu lt topic_number gt lt question_number gt units lt tablename gt Replacing Derived Units with Custom Units in Units Table When custom units are used in a question the custom units are automatically appended to the table of base and derived units available to students To instead replace the derived units in this table with the custom units base units are always displayed include the following statement in the question definition qu lt topic_number gt lt question_number gt appendUnits false 253 Authoring Mathematical Questions See Also Using a Table of Units page 247 Numeric Questions page 209 6 11 Tutorial Displaying Answers vs Formulas for Answers After grading for questions answered incorrectly you can display the e ca
97. not be published to the Maple T A Cloud If you lower the privacy level from all Maple T A instructors to either all instructors at this school or class instructors the question will be unpublished from the Maple T A Cloud automatically For more detailed information see Sharing Questions page 89 Language You can view the language of the question You can also choose a language for this question using the drop down menu When using the Filter questions feature in the question repository the language can be filtered Sort Weight You can view the sort weight of the question You can also choose a sort weight for this question using the drop down menu Questions with lower weights appear earlier in the question repository Created You can view the date for when the question was created Modified You can view the date that the question was last modified Subjects You can view the subject s of the question You can also choose the subject s for this question by clicking Edit and then selecting the boxes for the subject s you want associated with this question Click Done when you have chosen the subject s you want associated with the question When using the Filter questions feature in the question repository the subject s can be filtered Groups You can view the question groups of the question You can also choose the question groups for this question by clicking Edit and then selecting the boxes for the question groups you
98. num 104 1 answer units 1 showUnits false 1 info 1 grading exact_value CIC See Also Questions with Labeled Images page 79 Question Modes Ouestion Types page 328 List Question Source Script Example 1 List Question Textbox Display Exact Grader Options Sets a question with a text response cell that uses the exact grader to enforce capitalization and punctuation in the answer Specifies three expected responses with credit for each qu 1 1 question Who first developed the General Theory of Relativity grader exact display text answer 1 Einstein credit 1 1 0 answer 2 Albert Einstein credit 2 1 0 answer 3 Stephen Hawking credit 3 0 25 mode List editing useHTML III Example 2 List Question Textbox Display Relaxed Grader Options Sets a question with a text response cell that uses the relaxed grader to ignore case sensitivity and punctuation in student responses Specifies three expected responses with credit for each and a comment for each Plain Text Script Authoring qu 1 2 question Who first developed the General Theory of Relativity grader relaxed f display text answer 1 Einstein credit 1 1 0 comment 1 Yes but you should specify his first name too answer 2 Albert Einstein comment 2 Exactly correct credit 2 1 0 answer 3 Stephen Hawking credit 3 0 25 1 2 comment 3 Your answer is partially correct Hawking helped to ex
99. of your class including your questions and assignments by creating a new class and choosing your class from the Inherit content from list To remove class sharing de From the Class Homepage select Class Info 2 Click Edit 3 Clear the Featured Class check box 4 Click Submit to save your changes See Also Creating a New Class page 6 Course Modules page 314 2 2 Manage Instructors You can add additional instructors to your class if you would like other users to have the ability to assist in managing your class For a list of instructors in your class select the Class User Manager and then select Search for Users Click Advanced Search and select the Instructor User Role from the drop down menu Click Search A list of instructors 1s displayed Adding Additional Instructors To add another instructor to your class l OO N DN Ul From the Class Homepage select Class User Manager Next choose Register Users 2 3 4 Click Search to find all users eligible for registration To filter the results set the User Role on the drop down menu to Any Role to find all users You can also use other search criteria for example Last Name to search for a specific individual in the class Click Search Under the Roles tab use the drop down menu to select Instructor as shown in Figure 2 4 Under Select users to add in the left pane choose users to register by clicking the check box
100. or through the Class User Manager Instructors access the Class Homepage to e Use pre existing question banks e Create publish and manage assignments e Manage student interactions e Manage proctors and authorization of assignments through Proctor Tools e Access Gradebook which records student work and assignment results After you have created your class you can upload a student roster or allow students to register themselves in your class The Class Homepage is used by the instructor students and proctors involved in that particular class My Homepage Help Courtney Jones Instructor Logout Algebra 2 Class User Manager Proctor Tools Assignments Questions Gradebook Class Details Courtney Jones courtneyjones maplesoft com Class Info Add Child Class Class File Manager Assignme nts Assignment Name Availability Attempts Best Score Maple graded policies Unlimited Unlimited Practice test Demonstration of Question Types policies Unlimited 0 Unlimited Not yet completed Figure 1 2 Class Homepage With Assignment List See Also Creating a New Class page 6 1 3 Getting Help The Help menu in the top right hand corner of Maple TA provides help manuals for all users Instructor Proctor Student and Administrator Access Technical Support from Maplesoft e Email your questions to support maplesoft com e Call Maplesoft Technical Support 1 800 267 6583 ext 413 Y MapleTA Maplesoft http www ma
101. page 196 A Multipart question can contain a variety of related question materials data and even case scenarios for different types of assessment and learning A Multipart question is built out of a number of individual questions which can be of any question type except adaptive Multiple Choice Questions page 198 A Multiple Choice question can have any number of choices and has exactly one correct answer You can add additional incorrect choices after the question is initially created The choices can be presented in static or random order Multiple Selection Questions page 204 A Multiple Selection question is similar to Multiple Choice questions but the question can have more than one correct answer The choices can be presented in static or random order Students must select all correct answers to get full credit Otherwise the score is calculated using a formula that takes into account the number of correct and incorrect answers A Numeric question compares a student s response to a given number with or without units You can require the student response to a certain precision or within a certain margin of error 217 for the entry of student responses A Sketch question can be used to create and or operate on various sketch types This question type is available through the Question Designer question type A True or False question is treated as a class of multiple choice questions featuring only two choices Note You can include
102. page as a base for creating a question see Importing HTML Content page 320 e Any number of images tables algorithmic variables and inline math expressions as required e From the Question Designer screen you can view add edit or delete algorithms hints and feedback For more details see Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 Adding and Editing Hints page 74 and Adding and Editing Feedback page 75 respectively Similar to a multipart question each subpart of the Question Designer question must itself be a well formed question The only exception is that when used to define a blank inside a Question Designer question any of the above question types may omit the question field because this is actually defined inline in the body of the larger question statement Note The Question Designer question type supersedes the Blanks and Inline question types See Also Question Types Supported in the Question Designer page 93 Authoring in the Question Designer page 95 Introduction Question Types Supported in the Question Designer Essay Questions in the Question Designer page 96 can be used for a long answer response Free Body Diagram Questions in the Question Designer page 97 can be used to ask a student to draw forces from one or more starting points called control points over a background image These forces are automatically graded List Questions in the Question Designer page 97 are fill in the
103. palettes containing an assortment of layout templates Templates are highlighted as you move the mouse over them a a lat a a a a a 234 Authoring Mathematical Questions Expression templates The second section of the standard toolbar consists of popup palettes containing expression templates ay sin a a Ar 2 2 sin a cos a tana sec a csc a cotta ain a Ci el a tan 1 a Relational palettes The third section of the standard toolbar consists of popup palettes containing relational templates Symbol palettes The fourth section of the standard toolbar consists of popup palettes containing symbol templates 235 Authoring Mathematical Questions Or a 0 ii T A E A El II I y Y P pr 0 See Also Palette based Symbolic Editor Questions page 217 Editing with the Equation Editor page 231 Equation Editor Requirements and Syntax When creating an Equation Editor for Palette based questions below is a list of possible palette entries Note All entries are case sensitive If the palette 1tem syntax is not correct the text will display on the button instead of the proper symbol To create a new toolbar definition you need to create a question bank in plain text script format and add the toolbar definition at the beginning of the file using the qu env palette toolbarname structure see below You can define one or more toolbar definitions at a time A toolbar definition can define one or more palet
104. past results for the assignment in the Gradebook Important Deleting an assignment causes you to lose all results for that assignment from the Gradebook Disabling an Assignment To disable an assignment so that students cannot see it you can make it hidden Clear the Visible check box under Assignment Properties in the Set Policies tab of the Assignment Editor Another option is to hide assignments from student view in the Assignment Editor by clicking the assignment and selecting hide If an assignment is flagged as hidden the Class Homepage does not include it in the list of assignments offered to students However a student can view past results for the assignment in the gradebook For more information on hiding an assignment see Assignment Visibility page 52 Alternatively you might schedule the assignment to be available for a specific time period Before and after the indicated availability window the assignment is shown in the assignment list on the Class Homepage but cannot be selected Deleting Shared Assignments The system does not allow you to delete an inherited assignment that appears in your assignment list as part of a shared class or a template To disable a shared assignment e In the Set Policies tab of the Assignment Editor clear the Visible check box under Assignment Properties For more information see Assignment Visibility page 52 Restoring a Hidden Assignment To make an assignment available 1 Return t
105. the Gradebook Creating and Removing Essay Annotation Symbols Creating Symbols To create essay annotation symbols 1 Expand the Essay Annotation palette 2 In the Symbol text field add characters you want displayed as a symbol 3 In the Description field enter a description for the symbol 4 Click Add The new symbol is added to the symbol palette Removing Symbols To remove an essay annotation symbol 1 Expand the Essay Annotation palette 2 Click and drag the symbol you want to remove down to the Drag here to remove box 3 The symbol is removed when you release the mouse button Adding Feedback to Individual Graded Questions You can add a comment for a student in the Instructors Comment text box Students see the feedback when the review their performance on the test You can add personalized feedback to help individual students understand their score and master the material To add feedback to graded assignment questions 1 From the Class Homepage select Gradebook and click Class Grades Select the assignment for which you want to add a comment Click Search From the resulting report click the name of a student or the name of a question Each question is displayed along with the student s response Under each question is a Instructors Comment text box Add a comment for the student in the desired box Click Save Question Details DD A Dd na A Q N You return to the student s record
106. the Precision 227 Authoring Mathematical Questions For the numeric question type you can specify that the student response exactly match the correct answer or specify that in addition to matching the value of your correct answer the student response have a specified number of significant digits Student responses that are correct up to the specified number of significant digits receive 50 credit For information on setting the precision for a numeric question in the Question Editor see Setting the Answer Tolerance in Numeric Questions page 212 For related plain text script file examples see Answer Tolerance Source Script page 336 For other formula questions unless a margin of error is specified the value of the student response must match that of the correct answer up to the tolerance specified by the tolerance field which is by default is the system floating point limit 1 OE 9 Setting a Margin of Error You can specify a margin of error in one of two ways e Percentage x This requires the student response to be within a specified percentage of the correct answer e Absolute x This requires the student response to be within a specified number of the correct answer For information on setting a margin of error for a numeric question in the Question Editor see Setting the Answer Tolerance in Numeric Questions page 212 For information on setting a margin of error for other question types see Setting a Margin o
107. the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 On the Question Type list click Palette based Symbolic Editor 4 Enter the following for Question Name Evaluate to exact value 5 Enter the Question Text Pi l E Evaluate tan ra Provide the exact algebraic expression do not round your answer 6 5 Enter the following for Correct Answer 1 3 sqrt 3 6 Change the Grading Mode to Equivalence Grading Maple graded 219 Authoring Question Types 7 Click Finish 8 Click Preview to view your question as shown in Figure 5 69 Via le lA Preview Question Evaluate to exact a tan value Provide the exact algebraic expression do not round your answer Equation Editor Help This question uses exact grading Figure 5 69 Palette based Symbolic Editor Question Example Example Toolbar Definition Provide a toolbar definition by including qu env palette toolbarname lt toolbar def gt Example Palette Definition Provide palette definition s by including qu env palette subsup lt btn gt FRAC lt btn gt lt btn gt SORT lt btn gt lt btn gt SUB lt btn gt lt btn gt SUP lt btn gt qu env palette greek lt tb gt lt btn gt SYMBOLPALETTE lt btn gt 220 Authoring Question Types lt sub cols 3 gt lt btn gt alpha lt btn gt lt btn gt beta lt btn gt lt btn gt gamma lt btn gt lt sub gt lt tb gt Example Question qu 1 1 mode palette qu 1 1 question lt
108. the comment field in your question definition 2 Create a variable Sans that holds the formula for the answer 3 Use the Sans variable in the answer field instead of the formula for the answer Example 2 If a student gives the wrong answer to the question 254 Authoring Mathematical Questions mode Formula name Show only final calculated answer editing useHTML algorithm mass rand 4 8 2 Svelocity rand 10 20 2 Sans sig 2 1 2 mass S velocity 2 2292 g gt qu 1 2 question What is the kinetic energy of a body of mass mass kg moving at velocity m s qu 1 2 answer Sans the system displays the correct answer as Correct answer 900 assuming that the algorithmically generated variables set mass 4 5 and velocity 20 In this case an incorrect response by the student shows only the correct numerical answer to 2 significant figures Displaying Both the Formula for the Answer and the Final Calculated Answer To show the student both the correct formula and the calculated answer combine these methods and use the comment field 1 Create a variable Sans that holds the formula for the answer 2 Use the Sans variable in the comment field along with the formula for the answer Example 3 If a student gives the wrong answer to the question qu 1 3 mode Formula qu 1 3 name Shows both calculated and formula answers qu 1 3 comment lt br gt This answer is derived according to the general f
109. the formatted question statement including within tables lt br gt Response cells can consist of any individual question mode including response cells that handle text lenient or stringent string matching numbers formulas or any other question variety lt br gt Partial credit can be allowed for exact graded text or menu style entry cells lt font gt lt i gt lt p gt lt p gt Here is a question using a lt b gt symbolic formula lt b gt blank lt br gt Let lt math gt lt mi gt y lt mi gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt msup gt lt mi gt x lt mi gt lt mn gt n lt mn gt lt msup gt lt math gt What is the derivative of lt math gt lt mi gt y lt mi gt lt math gt with respect to lt math gt lt mi gt x lt mi gt lt math gt lt 1 gt lt br gt lt font face arial size 1 gt lt i gt Enter only the expression for the derivative omitting y lt b gt Try it lt b gt The answer is mathml n x n2 lt i gt lt font gt lt p gt lt p gt Here is a lt b gt numeric lt b gt blank style of question lt br gt 3 8 lt 2 gt lt br gt lt br gt lt i gt lt font face arial size 1 gt Numeric questions can specify margin of error and significant figure precision lt font gt lt i gt lt p gt lt p gt The following numeric blanks question requires a lt b gt number and a unit dimension lt b gt in its response lt br gt If a cat walks 20ft in 2min how fast is the cat walking lt 3 gt lt br
110. the precision and tolerance or margin of error required in student responses The easiest way to set these modes is by using the Question Editor to author numeric questions e You can specify whether arithmetic is allowed in student responses Important When creating questions that have a specific number of significant digits in the correct answer it is recommended that you use the sig function to create algorithmic variables By using these variables in the question statement feedback hints and solution you ensure that values are displayed with the correct number of significant digits e Single or multiple numeric questions can be included along with other response objects within a Question Designer question Note The Question Designer is the recommended method for authoring Numeric questions See Also Question Designer Questions page 92 Adaptive Question Designer Questions page 121 Grading Using the grading mode you can control the precision or margin of error in the student responses graded correct Precision exact_sigd The numeric value of the student response must match answer num The number of significant digits in the student response must match digit For example if answer num 2 5andthe digit 3 only 2 50 is correct In particular 2 5 is incorrect exact value The numeric value of the student response must match answer num 210 Authoring Question Types For example if answer num 2 5 2 50 and 2 5 ar
111. the question groups assignments and web folders holding resources for example image files for your class See Figure 9 2 Select the course components to be included in your new course module e You can highlight multiple items in a list using Shift click for contiguous selections or Ctrl click for multiple individual selections Use the gt button to add your Selections to the list of included elements for your new course module e You can include any combination of question groups assignments and web folders in your selected list 316 Course Modules e To select web resources for example images and other files that are referenced by your questions and assignments select the folders that contain your resources Subfolders are automatically selected 4 When you are satisfied that the list on the right contains all the elements to be included in your new course module click OK 5 Specify a name for your course module Optionally you can enter descriptions for each course component You can also select descriptive names for any web folders you have selected Question and assignment names cannot be changed 6 Click OK to create your Course Module according to the specifications you have indicated You return to the Course Modules main screen and your new Course Module has been added to the bottom of the list of installed course modules for your class Note Click Cancel at any time to return to the Course Modules main p
112. the search For example if the search is for the best score for each student the median computation is computed from those grades only Rows allows you to control the number of rows of students displayed per page In addition you can export any generated table of grades to a file by clicking Export to CSV 7 3 Searching for Class Grades Search for class grades to show the results of specified assignments For each assignment the grade for each student is displayed You can search for class grades for just the current class or including any child classes After performing a search you can change the options in View Panel and refresh the view without performing another search You can export any generated table of grades to a file by clicking Export to CSV Comma delimited CSV format and can be opened in a variety of applications for example Microsoft Excel and can easily imported into many third party gradebook programs 293 Working with the Gradebook From the Class Grades you can e View Assignment Grades by clicking on the name of an assignment e View Student Grades by clicking on the name of a student e View Student Assignment Details by clicking on any grade in the search results e View Item Statistics e Change the total points for an assignment Viewing Assignment Grades From the Class Grades click the name of an assignment to access Assignment Grades This lets you view the question by question scores The grade for
113. the session Important When creating questions that have a specific number of significant digits in the correct answer it is recommended that you use the sig function to create algorithmic variables By using these variables in the question statement feedback hints and solution you ensure that values are displayed with the correct number of significant digits Example qu x y mode formula qu x y question What is the derivative of x lt SUP gt 2 lt SUP gt 3x 1 X y answer 2x 3 x y hint 1 Differentiate the expression term by term x y hint 2 The derivative of x lt SUP gt 2 lt SUP gt is 2x x y hint 3 The derivative of the constant term is zero x y solution d dx x lt SUP gt 2 lt SUP gt 3x 1 d dx x lt SUP gt 2 lt SUP gt d dx 3x d dx 1 2x 3 gad j Special Characters in Questions The system supports the use of text HTML and MathML for the display of special characters and formatting in the following question fields topic name question choice hint solution e Comment For maximum compatibility use only character tags from the HTML 4 0 specification MathML tags are recommended for special scientific characters such as e Algebraic symbols e Greek letters and other variable labels e Equation elements including operators and arrows The system uses a cross platform MathML rendering technology to ensure that special characters rendered in MathML appear
114. to preview and test your created assignments in Proctored Browser mode to ensure they behave as expected See Also Using Proctored Browser page 52 Assignment Properties Optional You can set a passing score time limit the number of questions on a page for the assignment and the maximum number of attempts allowed You can set a default start and end date and time for each assignment The default is no scheduled start and end date Clearing the Visible check box temporarily excludes the assignment from the list of assignments displayed to students on your Class Homepage Assign ment Max attempts allowed Iw 36 Creating and Managing Assignments Properties _ Assignment is only visible to students when the advanced policies are met Passing score out of 2 0 Edit feedback messages lf you have set a passing score the defined feedback will be displayed to the student Always Time limit minutes Questions per page 1 Scheduling Eastern Standard Time _ Start clear a clear _ Assignment is only visible to students when the date time restrictions are met Visibility i 7 Visible Assignment is visible to students when this box is checked Figure 3 9 Assignment Properties See Also Limiting Student Access to Assignments Setting Assignment Requirements page 54 Advanced Options in Assignments page 38 Feedback During the assignment you can Provide hints Show the current
115. to register in your class from a list of system users All the students you want to register must already have an account in the system You can search for users that satisfy particular criteria 15 Creating and Managing Classes To register users using search criteria 1 From the Class Homepage click the Class User Manager Select Register Users 2 Enter search criteria to narrow the list of users down or to search for a particular student 3 Select the check boxes beside the students you want to register in your class 4 Click Register Shared Classes You can share your questions resources and assignments with other instructors Class sharing is an ideal way to manage multiple class sections of a large course using common questions and assignments ranging from practice sessions to exams Shared classes can also contain unique questions and assignments that are not part of the parent class When you share a class you create a single parent class whose content and assignments are distributed to child classes The content and assignments are inherited by each child class when a new class is created and the Inherit content from option is selected in the class registration form Use class sharing to administer a large course with many individual class sections With class sharing you can draw assignments from a common pool of questions or administer common homework practice assignments or exams Even though content and assignments c
116. value to specify a margin of error or degree of tolerance in a student response For more information see Setting a Margin of Error in Non numeric Questions page 227 Numeric questions The value of the answer field must contain answer num and answer units definitions You can assign null to the answer units field that is answer units for answers without units For Numeric questions use the specialized answer tolerance fields See Numeric Questions page 209 For general information on tolerance see Controlling Answer Tolerance page 226 Multiple Choice Multiple Selection True False The value of the answer field indicates which response s are correct and Clickable Image questions Free response questions with text fields for The value of the answer field must be a text string that is used to evaluate the correctness of example Key Word and List questions a student response Plain Text Script Authoring Question Type Answer Field A ee A For more information see Rules for Grading Fill in the Blanks Questions page 131 Maple graded questions do not contain an answer You must specify Maple code to evaluate the student response For Maple Formula questions the system parses the student response and then passes the parsed result to Maple For Maple Syntax questions with the text entry response option the student response is passed unparsed to Maple For more information see Matching questions do not conta
117. various statistics for the question For a description of what each statistic means see Jtem Statistics page 298 Algorithm You can view any algorithms for the question or click Edit to create or revise an existing algorithm You can also select click here to add one to create or revise an existing algorithm For an overview of creating algorithms in questions see Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 Hints You can view any hints for the question or click Edit to create or revise an existing hint You can also select click here to add one to create or revise an existing hint For an overview of creating hints in questions see Adding and Editing Hints page 74 Feedback You can view feedback for the question or click Edit to create or revise existing feedback You can also select click here to add one to create or revise existing feedback When searching the question repository the feedback is included in what is searched For an overview of creating feedback for a question see Adding and Editing Feedback page 75 Revisions You can view the revision history for the question For each revision you can click the date or View to see a preview of what that revision looked like Also clicking Clone will clone the revision into a new question Question type You can view the question type of the question When using the Filter questions feature in the question repository the question type can be filtered For an overview of all t
118. want associated with this question Click Done when you have chosen the question groups you want associated with the question When browsing the question repository you can view different question groups For an overview of organizing questions in the question repository see Organizing Questions in the Question Repository page 87 Information Fields You can view information fields for the question or click Edit to create or revise an existing information field You can choose to be shown all the questions with that information field in the question repository When using the Filter questions feature in the question repository the right side of an information field can be filtered For an overview on adding and editing information fields in a question see Adding and Editing Information Fields page 74 Report this question to administrators 87 Managing Questions You can report a question to an administrator to review by clicking the Report this question to administrators link You need to fill out a message explaining what is wrong with the question and then click Send to send it to the administrators to review Alternatively click Cancel to cancel the report to administrators Organizing Questions in the Question Repository In the question repository questions are organized into groups You can add a new group rename a group add a child group or delete a group You can also add questions to other groups or subjects by doing the fo
119. will be shown at the top of each page of the assignment 5 Optional Text to show on the results page Text that will be shown after the assignment is submitted test class Class User Manager Proctor Tools Assignments Questions Gradebook Assignment Editor 1 Choose Name 2 Select Questions 3 Set Policies 4 Review amp Finish Assignment name gt short name gt Description Text to show at the S head of each page Text to show on the results page Figure 3 3 Step 1 Choose Name Proceed to Step 2 Select Questions Assignment Editor Step 2 Select Questions In the Select Questions tab of the Assignment Editor you can e Add questions individually e Select by search criteria e Select groups of items and add them all at once either as individual items or groups of questions 1 To add questions to an assignment select a source question group from the Groups tab 31 Creating and Managing Assignments Assignment Editor Subjects Groups Assignments r All Questions eee Select all Filter questions Sort by Weight Questions not in groups Es Maple Formula Plot Question O BY Multiple Selection O BY Mathematical Forenamermula Ol BY Equations Figure 3 4 Selecting Question Groups 2 Expand the groups and select the questions you want using the check boxes on the left Preview the question if necessary 3 To add individual questions e Select several questions using the check
120. will see the question in the Maple T A Cloud through the question repository If you click Publish it will automatically set the privacy to all Maple T A instructors and publish the question to the Maple T A Cloud If you set the privacy to all Maple T A instructors but you do not click Publish then the question will not be published to the Maple T A Cloud If you lower the privacy level from all Maple T A instructors to either all instructors at this school or class instructors the question will be unpublished from the Maple T A Cloud automatically 90 Managing Questions This method works well when you are sharing a limited number of questions Other methods for sharing content include using question banks and course modules and making your class a feature class Cloning Questions To add a question that is similar to an existing question in the repository you can save time by cloning the existing question and then editing the clone To clone a question 1 In the Question Repository find the question you want to clone 2 Select Clone from the drop down menu next to the question The question has now been cloned which means it can now be edited To clone multiple questions 1 In the Question Repository find the questions you want to clone and select the check boxes next to them 2 Click Clone at the bottom of the page The questions have now been cloned and the cloned questions can now be edited See Also Course
121. x 10 total points 1 43 points Part 3 1 7 x 10 total points 1 43 points Total 10 00 points See Also Multipart Questions Sequencing Parts page 197 Next Steps To edit further details in the Question Repository within the Question Designer see Editing Question Details in the Question Respository page 84 See Also Multipart Question Source Script page 352 5 12 Multiple Choice Questions Description A Multiple Choice question can have any number of choices You can also add incorrect choices after questions are initially created The choices can be presented in static or permuting order Note The Question Designer is the recommended method for authoring Multiple Choice questions 199 Authoring Question Types See Also Question Designer Questions page 92 Adaptive Question Designer Questions page 121 Grading Multiple Choice questions have exactly one correct answer and therefore questions are graded correct or incorrect There are no partial marks allotted Instructions To create a Multiple Choice question 1 From the Class Homepage click the Questions menu Click New Question In the Question Type list click Multiple Choice Enter the Question Name 2 3 4 5 Enter the Question Text 6 In the Choices for the answers boxes enter the possible choices Three choices is the default number of choices 7 To insert additional choice text fields click the Add Choice button 8 Select
122. you have multiple archives in the same directory you must specify the directory name and not the mla file To specify the directory edit out the mla file name in the path that populates the LIB File Location field Note Maple libraries are not available for use in algorithm variable definition statements See Also Maple graded Questions page 153 4 4 Organizing and Sharing Questions Question Repository To access the question repository from the Class Homepage select Questions The question repository is used to create organize and search for questions You can also access the Maple T A Cloud through the Question Repository to import and export questions with other users The default view of the question repository shows your all the questions in your current class organized by groups and subgroups You can also view questions in all of your classes your entire institution or from the Maple T A Cloud Searching for Questions in the Question Repository You can search for questions by keyword language difficulty question type or information fields To view questions in a group click the Groups tab on the left side of the question repository and then select a group You can also search for questions by Subjects or Assignments by clicking the tabs respectfully By default the Groups tab is selected Some questions may not belong to any group To search for these questions select Questions not in groups Quest
123. 1 y 0 1 y 6 12 arrows THIN linecolor green thickness 21 Edit the code for your algorithm in the text box below or click Show Designer to use the algorithm designer The Variable Value algorithm designer tool allows you to define algorithms for your question by completing a form Show Designer 2 7 7 7 j f i f f i f PILI uN Refresh algorithm preview oe ey Ff d i i d 4 nee se oe N Wp 7 SPE PEPER PF FLO ON FREER LEELA ELL 77 BPA LALE EP ae 2 ATN OPS PEALE BET J bP OOO aN yt PAZZ SS E AR eS Ff of i fi of Leo Be ET Oe ee RR de p ATAR bP PF he PoP PP FP es A A A ee A AA A A _ AAA AAA A a A ean A a a ee IMM AAA 2 Eann ee o ee a a y o y a AL a a AAA HA Fe a a y O y y y a ES EA JO Ty Ty O O O O UR UO 7 BHA NNN AA Figure 5 50 Matching Slope Fields Preview Algorithm 7 Enter the following for Question Type Sp The figure above shows the slope field for a DE Match the solution to the IVP 8 Enter the following four Matches y 0 2 yC gt y 0 1 y 2 10 y 0 yes ll ys yO Note By default you will see three matching response areas Click Add Match to add an additional matching response area 9 Ensure that Number of columns to display the question is set to 2 174 Authoring Question Types 10 To edit the Algorithm or add Feedback to the question see Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 and Adding and Editing Information Fields Hints or Feedback page 7
124. 10 In the Question Text field enter the following text beginning on a new line Differentiate the function x cos x in the following steps e apply the product rule e apply the power rule e apply the cosine rule 11 Insert the cursor after the first bullet item and click Insert Edit Response Area 53 12 The Edit Response Area dialog opens a Select the Maple graded question type b In the Answer region enter the following Diff x x cos x x Diff cos x x c In the Grading Code region ensure the grading code is is SANSWER SRESPONSE 0 d In the Expression Type field select Maple Syntax e In the Text Symbolic entry field select Text entry only Click OK mh 68 Managing Questions 15 Insert the cursor after the second bullet item and click Insert Edit Response Area 23 14 The Edit Response Area dialog opens a Select the Maple graded question type b In the Answer region enter the following cos x x Diff cos x x c In the Grading Code region ensure the grading code is is SANSWER SRESPONSE 0 d In the Expression Type field select Maple Syntax e In the Text Symbolic entry field select Text entry only f Click OK 15 Insert the cursor after the third bullet item and click Insert Edit Response Area 16 The Edit Response Area dialog opens a Select the Maple graded question type b In the Answer region enter the following diff eq
125. 2 b x Sbottomrange Stoprange plotoptions width 250 height 250 algorithm designer The algorithm designer tool allows you to define algorithms for your question by completing a form Variable Value show Designer Refresh algorithm preview d 2 b g bottamrange 0 toprange A 1 12 plot 11 1 3 Figure 5 36 Vectors of Formulas Example Algorithm 7 Enter the following for Question Text Find the minimum point of the given function below plot 8 Enter the following for Correct answer a b 9 In the Type of expression accepted list select Vectors of formulas 10 Click Finish 11 Click Preview A to view the question See Figure 5 37 151 Authoring Question Types Preview Question Find the minimum Find the minimum point of the given function below point 6 This question accepts answers that are in a form like 1 3 or 3 7 32 The entries can be numbers or formulas Help Preview Refresh Figure 5 37 Vectors of Formulas Example Preview Example 9 Chemical Equation Subtype In the chemical equation subtype instructors can use the following characters in their answers superscripts subscripts _ arrows gt dot operator sign ion changes and physical states Table 5 6 describes the keys in more detail In the chemical equation question type student responses require a formula that matches the correct answer 152 Authoring Question Types Table 5 6 Rules an
126. 23 Multipart Questions and Partial Credit Multipart questions allow you to create problems with many steps and to grade intermediate responses at the completion of each step Assigning partial credit in multipart questions is closely related to establishing point values for the individual simple question parts during construction of the multipart complex question in the Question Editor By carefully structuring and considering the weighting of your questions you can control partial credit in multipart questions very specifically You must set the value of each component part at the time of question creation See Multipart Questions page 196 and Working with Multipart Questions page 197 Related Approaches Many related approaches offer instructional advantages e Using Question Groups within assignments e Controlling Question Weighting within assignments e Using Mastery Mode assignments 3 2 Tutorial Using the Assignment Editor Assignment Editor Step 1 Choose Name To name your assignment 1 In the Assignment name field enter an appropriate name for your assignment The assignment name is displayed to students on the Class Homepage 2 Optional Short name Include a short name for the assignment This is only displayed when space is limited 30 Creating and Managing Assignments 3 Optional Description Include a short description for the assignment 4 Optional Text to show at the head of each page Text that
127. 275 Tabler6 Options 6 2D OS a a Re eae eT en en eT 21 Table Ge 5016 C0 pe 16 ies DOS dla cial 279 Paes ls ASSIEME EOUM e cca cists Veecestn ia ias 293 Able 727 Mene ALISICS errada read 298 Tables eating Columns Fora RUI PAG ease aco rcs esc sa eaters E e bea tetas dein E EA 302 Table 74 Creating ROWS Lota Rubio ADI dy acres a eas Ae va panic ae cast A A eave nea Ae ees 302 Table OUEStOn TOS sir sox go crate ANA A Sivas te st Ni 326 Table A 2 Eistof Question lypes and Corresponding Mod s meets ic aia 328 Table A p Answer Field Requirements Dy Question id 330 XV Preface Overview of the Instructor Help VManteTA Release 10 Maple T A has three components e Question Repository collection of questions e Assignments tests containing questions from the question repository with policies that control their form and availability e Gradebook results of student assignments For more information see the Introduction to Questions Assignments and Gradebook in Maple TA page 1 The Class Homepage is the starting point for instructors students and proctors To learn more about the Class Homepage see The Class Homepage page 4 The Instructor Help System in Maple T A includes information on Instructor Tasks Chapters 1 5 Chapter 7 and Chapter 9 These chapters provide guidelines for creating and managing classes assignments and questions as well as querying the Gradebook and using the system tools
128. 30 242 242 269 Maple Questions 154 156 RESPONSE variable 153 Boolean value 153 Digits 228 e 157 262 Feedback in Basic Question 348 Maple Formula Source Script 347 Maple Syntax 157 Maple Syntax Source Script 349 Maple graded Formula Questions 156 Partial Credit 153 Preventing Cheating 228 Question Editor 153 Unevaluated forms 157 Using a Maple Repository 81 Maple Repository 81 Maple Syntax 157 Preventing Cheating 228 Index Maple T A Cloud And Privacy Settings 86 89 maple text 267 Maple graded Formula 160 Question Editor 160 Maple graded Questions Creating 158 Margin of error 212 224 226 227 256 Margin of tolerance 212 226 227 256 Marks 1 Mastery assignments 43 Edit mastery policies link 49 Setting policies 49 Study Session and Mastery 43 Matching 170 Matching Questions Source script 350 Math App Question Editor 176 Math capabilities 224 Math Expressions 94 Authoring 239 From the Equation Editor 231 Using MathML 237 Math Functions 246 Math Grader Rules 131 Math Input Grading 224 Math Question Types Comparison Table 137 Math Syntax Basic 222 Math Syntax in Questions 222 Mathematical Formula 137 Chemical Equation Subtype 151 Equation Subtype 144 Formula that Matches Responses to within C Subtype 142 Formula with Physical Units Subtype 141 Formula without Logs and Trig Subtype 140 Formula without Simplification 103 Formula without Simplification Exam
129. 351 6 2 Basic Math Syntax in the System e Mathematical Expression Syntax page 223 Variable Names Syntax page 223 Operator and Function Syntax page 223 222 223 Authoring Mathematical Questions Writing Mathematical Expressions The basic syntax for entering mathematical formulas or expressions in the system enables you to quickly enter expressions using symbolic math You can type formulas using standard mathematical notation similar to that used for a graphing calculator and in general the system correctly interprets it For example the following formula is acceptable x 2 2x 1 2sin x x 2 1 e x 2 Note If a product includes one or more variables always use an asterisk For example specify 2 x y or 2 A For a Maple question you must always include an asterisk x 2 2 x 1 2 sin x x 2 1 e x 2 The most common mistake is to forget parentheses For example the expression 1 x 1 is different from 1 x 1 which the system interprets as di X Alternatively you can use MathML expressions which are supported for both display and content within the system Variable Names You can use any letter for a variable name Note The grading system is case sensitive with respect to variable names So if the correct answer is t 1 2 then the response T 2 2T 1 is graded wrong but t 2 2t 1 is correct Note Be certain that the case of letters li
130. 37 6 Maple graded Questions page 153 include facilities for algebra calculus differential equations discrete mathematics graphics numerical computation and many other areas of mathematics You also have access to the plotting capabilities of Maple You can plot a student response or a function derived from a student response for example the definite integral of the student response for a Maple graded question type or display a plot for any question type You can also use functions and routines that are contained in a separate Maple Repository Maple Library You can access your personal Maple library archives from within your Maple questions 7 Multiple Choice Questions page 198 one answer can be authored in a fixed order or randomized Multiple Selection Questions page 204 multiple answers can also be authored through the Question Designer Multiple Choice option Answer choices can be displayed horizontally or vertically 8 Numeric Questions page 209 can be defined to require a number and a unit dimension or simply a number as the answer You can set grading tolerance and answer precision 9 Sketch Questions page 113 can be used to create and or operate on various sketch types Using the Question Designer you can enter the question text and the correct answers wherever they appear Questions can contain multiple response cells that may all be different types In addition to flexible question and response areas the
131. 38 MaA miis OUCSTIONS iii 239 Simplified MathrEXpPTESSION SA A AA ad 241 6 Plot Use Map cda 242 iis Olay moras Maple POE id o da o ee ee 242 6 9 Mathematical E nctions amp Operations da 246 TO Usine a Table OL UNES SA AAA EAS AAA AA AAA idas 247 Default Table of Physical Unit Eq O 247 Custom Table of Equivalencia OS A a a 252 6 11 Tutorial Displaying Answers vs Formulas for Answers ii 253 Displayme the answer Field FOr lay sss crs ARS lw A aE 253 Displayino the Calculated Pita Ans WEI Aa 253 Displaying Both the Formula for the Answer and the Final Calculated Answer cccccccccecececeeeeen ease eeneneneeeenes 254 6 12 Tutorial Formattine Integers and Reals cio 255 6 13 Tutorial Setting Margin of Tolerance in Non numeric Questions cc cece cence cece eee e reece eee eee e eee seen eee e need ease EE EES 256 Contents PSO WITS Me POS eri e ahh om be teccehs hareah erat eect tole om lho tne rec ine E E E een me naceatane nonin ge 256 Percentage We TL OLS uno A Od Sebati NSO aided base Bx cen ache nd a Seater tan an tor mscleatdiee 231 in AA O O II O e neat eat oe ented 251 Usine the 7 Operator in Complex Ex pressions iris ss 257 6 14 Overview f Alsonthmic Question Capabilities das 258 6 15 How Does an Algorithmic Question Work in an Assignment nsonnsonnssnnssnnssrnsssresreesrerssresseresoresrressressersser gt 259 O 259 ASS ds e a a daa 259 ASSE NENE U S A chs rare a a ater a a easels occas n
132. 4 11 Click Finish 12 Click Preview to view the question See Figure 5 51 175 Authoring Question Types Y MapleTA Preview Question Matching Slope Fields ae PP PP PE PER Po Am ALE P ELE EL AP AC Apes 0 77 SP PEP EER fF a PPLE EE ELEM EL FAR ga FS FPP PEE FPR ZAAIEN ae a ae ae ae a aF ISE SR RAS N yt gp ENS PF AG FF AO oF E I af Fo FOO OO eG ATA SF e Pi eee oe eee AS A Fo Fo FF Fo a AAA O SE AE E E a GA A ee AGO JE O TO UE E E GE AA O A A AAA A A ne LA LA a E AA AAA AA A MMMM AAA A a e A A A A A A AAA AAA E SS i ne ee 8 an y y y ag en a o AA HA gt a a o y y y y a e AHS AF F La y y y O O O a a Se OO O Ee 7 Above is the slope field for a DE Match the solution to the IVP T 01 TO 2 y 0 1 Vlywoy 0 1 y 2 3 2 y 2 1 3 y 2 6 4 y 2 10 pete Figure 5 51 Matching Slope Fields Example Question 176 Authoring Question Types Next Steps To edit further details in the Question Repository within the Question Designer see Editing Question Details in the Question Respository page 84 See Also Matching Question Source Script page 350 Multiple Choice Questions page 198 Multiple Selection Questions page 204 Question Types Available in the System page 91 5 10 Math App Questions Description Math App questions display a worksheet that the student has to interact with The Math App question type allows an instructor to embed a Maple wor
133. 46 6 6 Using the Equation Editor to Create Formatted Math Expressions The equation editor shown in Figure 6 3 provides an easy way to create formatted math expressions Editing with the Equation Editor Using the Equation Editor you can add symbolic math expressions and symbols to the question text and answer regions in all question types available through the Question Editor 232 Authoring Mathematical Questions Equation Editor a Equation Editor b a ar gt oo i a an 1 2 T 2 gz r cr 1 hi r t1 Figure 6 3 Equation Editor Adding Editing an Expression Using the Equation Editor l Click the question text region or the answer text region and select the Sigma icon Y in the toolbar 2 In the Equation Editor dialog click on the editor region Then click on any 2 D expression to insert it into the editor region 3 Click OK Note You also have the option to insert 2 D expressions using MathML or LaTeX To do so lafter you click the Sigma icon 2 in the toolbar click the MathML LaTeX tab In this window you are free to enter in your MathML or LaTeX code to display 2 D expressions A preview is shown based off of your MathML or LaTeX code Keyboard Shortcuts The Equation Editor accepts keyboard shortcuts Table 6 2 Keyboard Shortcuts for the Equation Editor 233 Authoring Mathematical Questions Shortcut Characters Subscript _ underscore key Pre superscript Pre subscript Tem
134. 7 Click Search to perform the search For each question item statistics are displayed number of correct partially correct and incorrect responses as well as success rate p value d value p biserial and r biserial Important The system allows a variety of possible assignment applications for each question in the question repository which means calculating traditional item analysis on questions may produce unexpected results Remember that the analysis and statistics produced in the Item Statistics reports here are based on the limited use of question items in the specific context of the assignments you specify If you specify assignments that are of more than one assignment mode or that do not have identical assignment settings item statistics calculated here are unreliable To produce reliable item analysis results select only one assignment for Item Statistics or ensure that all selected assignments have identical rules and policies Table 7 2 Item Statistics Success Rate The Success Rate of an item is the average normalized score on that item With each item graded between 0 0 and 1 0 that is normalized the average score is computed over the set of all scores recorded for that item in the current assignment p Value The p Value of an item measures the proportion of students who got the item correct It is defined as the ratio of the number of fully correct responses to the total number of responses in the data set That is
135. 73 259 Formula question 335 Labels on Images 79 Multiple selection question 335 Variables 285 Algorithmically Generated Plot 242 Algorithms 73 259 260 262 275 282 283 325 Defined in the Algorithm Designer 70 allow2d 157 Allowing Anonymous Access 9 Angle Tolerance Free Body Diagram Questions 111 Anonymous Access 2 2 Anonymous practice 43 Answer Field 330 evaluation 280 Answer Region 95 Answers 76 227 253 256 275 280 325 329 330 Defining correct responses 224 Applet 80 328 Applet Questions Authoring 339 Source Script 339 Arccos 222 275 Arcsin 222 275 Arctan 222 275 Assigning partial credit 29 Assignment access Restrict to IP addresses and host name 53 Restrict to Proctored Browser 52 Assignment Editor 23 29 Choose Name tab 45 Create a New Assignments 25 Creating Assignments 25 Details 45 Options 25 Review amp Finish tab 39 Select Questions tab 30 Set Policies tab 33 Assignment Editor Main Menu Backup option 56 Delete assignments 27 Move Up Move Down buttons 29 Print Assignments 28 Shared content icon 23 359 Assignment grades 293 Assignment name Choose Name tab 29 Student Menu 45 Assignment Options Feedback 49 Final grade 49 Hints during assignment 49 Send email reports 49 Assignment policies Proctor override 51 Assignment properties Passing score 50 Questions per page 50 Time limit 50 Assignment types 40 Anonymous practice 43
136. 83 Authoring Mathematical Questions qu 1 1 question A ball of mass 0 8 kg is thrown at a speed of 12 m s lt br gt a What is its momentum lt br gt b What is its kinetic energy qu 1 1 answer 9 6 m s 46 08 J The plain text script for this question created algorithmically 1s qu 1 1 mode Multipart Formula qu 1 1 algorithm m decimal 1 rand 0 5 1 0 Sv decimal 0 rand 10 15 Sansa decimal 2 m v Sansb decimal 2 1 2 m v 2 qu 1 1 question A ball of mass m kg is thrown at a speed of v m s lt br gt a What is its momentum lt br gt b What is its kinetic energy qu l 1 answer Sansa Sansb qu 1 1 comment Sansa kg m s is its momentum lt br gt Sansb J is its kinetic energy Note that the algorithm field and variable definitions have been added e The variables are represented by alphanumeric names that must start with a followed by an alphanumeric sequence that consists of at least one letter e The first character in the name of the variable must be a letter not a number e Variables are defined in a series of statements resembling equations of the form Svariable lt formula gt e Each variable definition is separated by a semicolon the final semicolon in a series of variable definitions is optional e The syntax of the formula is similar to the standard graphing calculator syntax used throughout by the system with the addition of some new functions
137. 9 Ensure that the Accepted expression type is Formula 10 Under Text Symbolic entry choose Student can choose 11 Click Finish 12 Click Preview to view the question See Figure 5 44 165 Authoring Question Types Manier Ay gt Preview Question Determinant Calculate the determinant a 4 This question accepts numbers or formulas Flot Help Switch to Equation Editor Preview Refresh Close Figure 5 44 Maple graded Example 4 Determinant of a Matrix Example 5 Maple graded Coefficient Matrix This example will create a question that asks for the coefficient matrix of a linear system of equations Students will use the Equation Editor to construct their response 1 From the Class Homepage click the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 In the Question Type list click Maple graded 4 Enter the following for Question Name Coefficient matrix 5 At the bottom of the page click the add icon and enter the following Algorithm ans maple Matrix 1 2 3 7 1 2 Click Refresh algorithm preview to preview the variables you defined as shown in Figure 5 45 166 Authoring Question Types Algorithm ans maple Matrix 1 2 3 7 1 2 Edit the code for your algorithm in the text box below or click Show Designer to use the Variable Value algorithm designer The Matrix 2 3401 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 3 2 1 7 2 2 1 2 3 2 datatype algor
138. Active Order Assignment Points Type Availability Modified a 5 7 14 2 05 39 PM New Assignment 0 1 BY Maple graded 1 0 Practice Unlimited i EiT Mew Adaptive Assignment Import Content Demonstration of Question Homework or Krita 2 05 39 PM 0 2N BB 63 0 Unlimited i Types Quiz EDT Show all assignments Hide all assignments Figure 3 1 Assignment Editor Overview The Assignment Editor Screen Options in the Assignment Uses Editor main window New Assignment Allows you to create new assignments Creating New Assignments page 25 Assignment Allows you to open and modify existing assignments Editing Assignments page 27 23 24 Creating and Managing Assignments Options in the Assignment Uses Editor main window Edit Allows you to edit existing assignments Editing Assignments page 27 Copy Allows you to copy existing assignments Copying Assignments page 26 Delete Allows you to erase existing assignments Deleting Assignments page 27 Allows you to hide the assignment from student view in the Class Homepage Assignment Visibility page 52 Print Generates a version of your test that is suitable for printing and distributing to students as a pencil and paper assignment Printing Assignments page 28 Allows you to view a summary of the assignment properties Force Grade Allows you to force grading of an active assignment Forced Grading page 307 Drop down Arrow Use to sequence your
139. Details Instructor Couriney Jones Change Instructor Instructor Email courtneyjonestmmaplesoft com Course ID Class Name Class Short Name School Registration Locked w Featured Class LJ inherit content from None Default Role In Class Student 5 Your class is added to the System Homepage next to the list of Classes where my role is Instructor 6 To access this class click the link of the newly created class to bring you to the Class Homepage Create a Copy of a Shared Class To create a copy of a shared class to create that class that includes questions and pre populated assignments from the parent class 1 From the System Homepage select the Class Manager menu Click Add Class Complete the class registration form For more details see Required Registration Information page 9 Click the Inherit content from drop down menu See Figure 2 1 Click Submitto save changes 2 3 4 5 Select a class 6 7 Your class is added to the System Homepage next to the list of Classes where my role is Instructor 8 To access your class click the link to your newly created class to bring you to the Class Homepage 8 Creating and Managing Classes The classes that appear on the list that you can inherit content from are called featured classes My Homepage Help Courtney Jones Instructor create Logout A E m Manla ad Class Manager system User Manager System Admin Administer Classes
140. Do not change the default 10 The default option for Allow more than one selection is yes Do not change the default 11 To add an Algorithm or Feedback to the question see Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 and Adding and Editing Information Fields Hints or Feedback page 74 12 Click Finish 13 Click Preview to view the question as shown in Figure 5 58 VManteTA _ Preview Question Fictitious forces Which of the following are examples of fictitious forces Centripetal force A force experienced by an observer in a non inertial reference frame Coriolis force GO GO u Frictional force a E Centrifugal force Partial Grading Explained Grade Figure 5 58 Multiple Selection Example 1 See Also Algorithmic Multiple Selection Question Source Script page 335 Multiple Selection Questions page 204 Multiple Selection Question Source Script page 354 207 Authoring Question Types Example 2 Using an Algorithm for a Multiple Selection Question To create a simple Multiple Selection question 1 From the Class Homepage click the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 In the Question Type list click Multiple Selection 4 Enter the following for Question Name Even numbers 5 Enter the following for Algorithm a 2 rint 10 2 b 2 rint 10 2 c 2 rint 10 2 d 2 rint 10 2 e 2 rint 10 1 f 2 rint 10 1 condition ne a b n
141. E 23 Options IINE ASsioniment ELOR or arar AE AEE AT A a Ae ane 25 pl TOE Name NR A EA OM E ANO 30 BElECIING OUCSIION CLOUDS AMA T NE E ETA 31 Addr Questions tone A SSI OMIM tla sete ada 31 Select Questions Specify Order and Weighting Of QUESTIONS ccc cece eee e cence ence cece nent eee eens ease ees ed eee EEE EEE 33 Settino TINS ASSE nnen Ye ace as iets ese sec E E ici 34 Enablino Proctored as GOwser sirada a abana teuettiatesacead sl de elo 35 Fa ROA DELS A Re te eed ore ne RETEST eRe moe T eee Sn A ENE en ERAT ne eae MeN A TEER eT ene eae 36 TGC CLD AC K OPON A A A AE 37 Resti ACCESS 10 PECHO IP Addresses A A A a gis oes 38 SCENA Or ASS aE easa aE A Mate nbadeanpadedabu abet dereneadeat 38 TRCN LGW AS OMNES ANI aa E ON 39 Policies Tor MASAS OIG IES oie 44 Saine a Time LIMt ASS MAS A A a Aci 51 Proctored Browser Compatible o el o RL bo ad E 52 AHOZ or LOL PROCLOLEE BOW aa 53 Ds MEM A A A AA 58 Demne Branch Switc mie Pro cod IS A sale Wane eens A A SA 59 OUESTIONN DES Inero CCE ra a a a o laa e 65 Specify Set nes fora Section inan Adaptive QUESTION lia 66 Adaptive Question nih Tiree SSC OMS creient EEN ATE EN EE E EE E A O eee ameeke 69 Create a Random Number Narria Dle iei na A A E a 70 POOR BONO td e E al Oe 73 Search Results the Oucstiom REPOSO adas 83 EXPONE a da OS 88 Access the Equation Editor in the Question Designet a ais 94 EUA RARO PES ro e la la 95 Ert Responce arca inte ONES ion Dese Ne E E a a e 100 E
142. ES Set Oe Nery Pees ee 285 Usine TN Question Te AU OI oe toca cableado 285 divido o Comene ere O 285 A A A 287 dy Wolke wii Grade DOOR A ee 288 Tol ONES OL he Gradebook ula is 288 Viewing Scores and Performing Gradebook Searches AAA AAA AAA AAA AAA AAA 288 CEG Fatih AR EOS e dl 288 Mon TaD ir se tai 289 External ASSIER tl alice ee 289 12 Pertornmine Gradebook SO CAME a cales 289 SS O A A O a O ee CS nna ape en 290 Seto Vie Cta ri o o cis 291 Vo Searchmo for Class Grades cola 292 VG WVIAC nt Grades AA AR AAA AAA A E T AAA 293 Changing Grades and Addins A dd a 294 Changing the Total Points for an ASIAN reiii ar e a EEE I A aa EE EEA 297 Jk Seat Cine Got Mem Statist CS i sce ape a arid ch ates A A 298 To WVOEKIN OWA Grade TRIG ORES zs bcm enter ih A ig len RS cuneate sae O nani aca tee 299 Creatine a New Grade REPOR cit 300 WAC WIT a ado REPON 6s hte a acia 301 Publishing a Grade Report for otudents ita 301 TORUDE Table Sonnan AS SO AA TA NS A Aa 302 PCC CSS TIN RUDO asic 8 ae Ce ie ete EU la ela ac e Ca ead 302 ica E NEw RUDO ne ee PRE SPT ene ne Neer eee io OT Ee rere 302 Earimerar TE 1S 010s RUC aia 302 Using a Rubric to Grade an Assi mini AA A AAA E a beheld SE a Se RBs ERLE Se nd eed wean 303 Linkainoan ASsicament anda RODIO aid 304 Using a Rubric Table to Assign the Student a Grade ads 304 Class Homepage and Rubric Tables bai 305 TI Adding an External AVS ROOMS ING cette ctr cs sence neta ean ae aan Ae Sp secede nate isa etna a a
143. Edit Value Changed Action 10 You will see some existing code already in the new window This code is purely instructional and will not have any affect on what you append to it Right above the end use statement add the following code to the component code editor Do Plot0 plot x 2 Slider0 x 4 x 5 5 y 5 10 11 Save and exit the Code Editor 12 Save the Maple worksheet The Math App is now complete As you move the Slider component notice how the Plot component is updated 180 Authoring Question Types Example A Math App Question gradeable through Maple that asks students to display a plot of a specific quadratic expression This Math App question asks students to display a plot of e 2x 4 1 Open the Math App worksheet that you created in the previous section Example Explore a Quadratic Expression 2 From the Edit menu select Startup Code You will notice that the Startup Code is currently blank In order to have Maple T A communicate with your Math App document you will need to export any variables you want Maple T A to be able to read For this example insert the following code into the Startup Code window Actions module export Grade Grade proc if DocumentTools GetProperty Slider0O value 2 then return 1 else return 0 end 1f end proc end module From the Startup Code File menu save the code and close the Code Editor Save and then close your worksheet Log in to y
144. Example aida a a bla 204 Multiple Selection Example Lira A A AA A ees A id 206 Multiple Selection Example 2 Ale orithint A s 207 Multiple Selecione xample 2 ir ena Lente hates Laces a an acita leached Seated ae es 208 Specify Acceptable Answer Format in a Numeric Question ccccc cece eee e eee ence een e eee e enced ea eee ee ease EE EE EEE 211 Specify Answer Precision and Tolerance in a Numeric Question cece cece eee e eee e nee e cece eee e a eee ee ease eben eee es 212 Numero Ex e e een ol 214 Nunca dd Pe RE Mere tee 215 Numeric Example Alo Oc ibas 215 Nume tio Example Ds tet cee tase A AAA A aida 216 Numenc Example 4 dd 216 Namene Exile A ea nt acces a Paes eee eee ahaha ah eee cane ah echt io E 217 Palette based Symbolic Editor Question Example cccccccccccececececeeeacnceceaesseseaenseseaenseseaenseseaenseseaenen 219 True Fale Example QUESO AAA AAA AAA 221 List of Figures Figure 6 1 Students Can Change Entry Mode for Resposta 225 Figure 6 2 Students Can Use the Equation Editor for Responses oocococcccccononcncononcncnnonononnononcnnnnonnnnnnonnnnnnonnnnononnnnnnonnnnnnss 229 fsb oak Oor wire o AAA e e E a a E E N E E a 232 Fistre 6 4 Plot wii Atomic varia Dl iia si a ias 243 Figure 0 PO Witla pels a ios 244 Pistte 7 1 Filter Results 10 rad EDO tr AA ATA AAA AS AA ein tie olden A ens 290 Fiore 72 Custom User Field Caro ese ctl ets alae BN crcl cl Ree dle VON recede ae ect le ate ae Sarac
145. Formula Question Types Comparison Table page 137 Using Maple Code to Prevent Cheating in Maple Syntax Questions page 228 Plotting a Student Response page 230 Displaying a Maple Plot page 242 Mathematical Functions amp Operations page 246 Tutorial Maple based Algorithmic Question Authoring page 285 Using the Comment Field in a Maple Question page 348 Maple Syntax Question Source Script page 349 Maple graded Formula Guidelines e The student should not use Maple commands in the response For an explanation see Syntax and Student Responses below e The instructor must write code such that the student does not have to use a trailing semicolon in the response For example evalb SRESPONSE factor x 2 1 as a single line of code allows the student to respond with x 1 x 1 omitting the trailing semicolon This is especially important as questions created using the Maple graded Formula question subtype are not obvious Maple questions from the student s perspective A non Maple student user can answer a Maple graded Formula question type without knowing Maple syntax Syntax Maple T A verifies the student response using a basic syntax checker e Ifthe answer is entered in Text mode the formula syntax checker assesses the response changes expressions to Maple syntax for example 2x becomes 2 x and reports errors if the expression is not a formula It then generates a Maple statement e Ifthe answer is created using th
146. From the Class Homepage click the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 In the Question Type list click Maple graded 4 Enter the following for Question Name Derivative of Secant 5 Enter the following for Question Text Compute the derivative of sec x 6 Enter the following for Correct answer diff sec x x 7 Enter the following for Grading code evalb simplify ANSWER RESPONSE 0 Important The default grading code evalb ANS WER SRESPONSE 0 would only give credit for sec x tan x and reject all other responses This is because the evalb command does not perform simplification It is strongly recommended that you test your Maple code in a Maple worksheet for any Maple graded questions 8 Ensure that the Accepted expression type is Formula 163 Authoring Question Types 9 Under Text Symbolic entry choose Student can choose 10 Click Finish 11 Click Preview to view the question See Figure 5 42 Y MapleTA Preview Question Derivative of Secant Compute the derivative of sec x This question accepts numbers or formulas Plot Help Switch to Equation Editor Preview Figure 5 42 Maple graded Example 3 Designing a Maple graded Question to Accept Mathematically Equivalent Responses Example 4 Maple graded Determinant of a Matrix This example will create a question that generates a random matrix and asks students to find the determinant 1 From the Class Homepage click th
147. Give the expression for the particle s velocity at time t 6 Enter the following for Correct answer 2t m s 7 In the Type of expression accepted list select Formula with physical units 8 Click Finish 9 Click Preview to view the question See Figure 5 28 ManteTA Preview Question po eR ai 7 Particle s velocity A particle moves along the x axis such that its position x after t seconds s is t meters m Give the expression for the particle s velocity at time t Numeric part Units Close Figure 5 28 Formula with Physical Units Example Preview Example 4 Formula that Matches Responses to within C Subtype The formula that matches responses to within C subtype should be used when you want the question to have an answer with an additive constant For example a constant of integration in indefinite integration questions This enables the question to have many valid answers that differ by the addition of a constant quantity This subtype accepts all such answers as equivalent To create a Formula that Matches Responses to within C subtype question 1 From the Class Homepage click the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 In the Question Type list click Mathematical Formula 4 Enter the following for Question Name Integral of polynomial 5 At the bottom of the page click the add icon and enter the following Algorithm r rint 2 10 s rint 2 10 t rint 2 10 condition
148. HTML editor Note You can edit the script file for a question not question bank in the system by using the New question from source functionality It is recommended that you use New question from source only for minor editing To edit a question bank that was created in the Question Editor in a text or HTML editor export the question bank to your hard drive You can export any question bank in its plain text script format as a file with a qu file extension After editing the plain text script file import it and save the question bank into your class web site See Also Topic Structure within Question Banks page 323 Exporting Work to Your Hard Drive page 88 Opening a Saved Question Bank File page 324 A 4 Library of Source Scripts This section provides examples of source script files for Algorithmically generated math fomulas A gorithmic Mathematical Formula Question Source Script page 335 Algorithmically generated multiple selection questions Algorithmic Multiple Selection Question Source Script page 335 Questions with embedded applets Applet Questions page 339 Questions with tolerance in answers Answer Tolerance Source Script page 336 Clickable Image questions Clickable Image Question Source Script page 341 Essay questions Essay Question Source Script page 342 Key word or phrase questions Key Word or Phrase Question Source Script page 345 List questions List Question Source Script page 346
149. Help Switch to Equation Editor Preview Refresh MA Figure 5 30 Formula that Matches Responses within C Example Preview Example 5 Equation Subtype The equation subtype question requires responses in mathematical equation form An equation question is different from a formula question because it contains an sign in the response Any equation that is algebraically equivalent to the correct answer is graded correct Authoring Note For a formula response question with the equation subtype for the correct answer one side of the equation must be in the form of a single variable The student response does not need to be in this form Any equivalent equation is graded correct To create an Equation subtype question 1 From the Class Homepage click the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 In the Question Type list click Mathematical Formula 4 Enter the following for Question Name Equation of a straight line 5 Click the add icon Si and enter the following Algorithm xone rint 10 10 Syone decimal 1 rand 10 10 m rint 2 10 6 Click Refresh algorithm preview to preview the variables you defined as shown in Figure 5 31 Algorithm xone rint 10 10 yone decimal 1 rand 10 10 Edit the code for your algorithm m rint 2 10 in the text box to the right or click show Designer to use the algorithm designer The algorithm designer tool allows you to define algorithms for
150. Inline Display of Formatted Math Expressions 237 Inline Variable Expressions 261 Insert Edit Adaptive Section 65 121 Insert Edit Response Area 95 Insert Edit Response Area button 96 Inserting MathML 94 Instructor Adding 16 Changing your password 310 Deleting 17 Login 2 Managing 16 Name 9 Overview 16 Password security 310 Instructor Help xvi Advanced 60 Integer part 264 Integers Formatting 255 Random 272 Integration 328 Internal Directive 325 Introduction to Maple T A 1 Inverse Cosine 246 Inverse Sine 246 Inverse Tangent 246 IP Address and Host Name Assignment properties 53 Item statistics 298 J J 247 java 266 JPEG 77 K Kelvin 247 Key Word 345 Source Script 345 Key Words 328 KHz 247 KiloHertz 247 KiloJoules 247 KiloWatts 247 KJ 247 KW 247 L Labels On Images 79 79 On Images in Questions Source Script 346 On Plots 242 Language Question Repository 86 LDAP 312 312 Add user 313 Import 313 Least significant unit 226 267 Linking an Assignment and a Rubric 304 List Question Source Script 346 List based variables 274 282 283 Lm 247 Ln 275 Load 324 Local proctor 42 Lockdown Access during assignment 52 Locked assignment icon 23 Locking class registration 11 Logical Operators 275 Login 2 Instructor 2 Using university logins 312 Lsu 226 267 Lux 247 Lx 247 M Managing Instructors 16 Managing Proctors 17 Maple 2
151. LoS 34922232244 1 e e e e eE pa pp H B question Click a lt b gt sign lt b gt region on the graph lt font gt lt p gt imageURL questionbanks physio ClickableImage gif answer Sregion width 373 height 568 region 1 0 284 187 284 187 0 0 0 region 2 372 285 372 567 187 567 188 285 region 3 187 283 220 133 242 63 260 27 267 18 278 14 287 18 296 25 308 47 323 89 337 134 372 285 region 4 1 286 14 348 39 454 60 519 68 535 79 549 93 555 102 552 107 548 118 533 132 499 151 434 186 286 region 5 0 286 25 398 42 465 63 525 77 546 89 554 104 551 121 526 148 447 187 282 185 567 0 567 region 6 372 0 301 0 187 0 187 15 187 119 187 154 186 283 212 165 225 117 236 81 252 38 264 19 272 14 280 13 Plain Text Script Authoring Note The above question has the image defined by this line qu 1 1 imageURL questionbanks physio ClickableImage gif You will have to replace the image path with the correct one for your server Please upload the image below to your server and use that path instead 1 See Also Clickable Image Questions page 124 Question Modes Question Types page 328 Essay Question Source Script The following example source script creates an Essay question topic Essay Question Example Script 1 mode Essay 1 name Friction 1 editing useHTML 1 question Contrast lt i gt kinetic lt i gt and lt i gt static lt i gt friction 22992 S
152. Maple T A User Guide Copyright Maplesoft a division of Waterloo Maple Inc Maple T A User Guide Contents PP A e Un A A II eee TE E xvi EE E TE E a 6 EE E AE A AE E A A E TAE RE AEE EESE EAE A T EEEE ET Se AE ET AA l De Mia Gh OCC CLOT AO Maple LA as dea es l Introduction to Questions Assignments and Gradebook in Maple T A cece cece cece e cence cece cece cee ee eee eee eee eeeeaeneneeaens l NP A ESTEE E E T l EZ TON INA EA WO a o mcrae OE N 2 E OOS o O EA E EAO T E E IO 2 TOS Sy O o a A A EAE E E A E 2 EEE ATER OND OI E eE A EE E E TE E ET E ENE P T A EE S 4 A a an M ana E a SEa E A Ra A E E E a Soe 6 PES NA AAA E AAE E ASEA E E A E E AE 6 Creatine sa NEN CSE a EE E E E E E E E 6 Editino am Pasto C aS S e ad T da edad 10 Reitero sc Sd e 10 A A A A A E E A A akon neane tape 15 AE O A A A A E E E 16 Addme Additional istuciorso dd at e 16 DE A e A A A A Meare Tet wan et Ree 17 E A A A A A A A enna Sid wireless T7 AdU O e A E E EE E E E E E E a E 19 Das A E II E E EEA EE E 20 Ta NE C S Gall ond Nt de ea 20 UplosameS mole TS E EA E NE TA SAE N E TAE EA ON eee 20 Uploadine IVI Wie Piles E E EE A EO 21 Vie wile Or Dele ino les a le so ceda o td 21 Workme wih Folders in Une Class Web SE dida 21 5 Creatine and Wanadoo SSI OMIM CHS Sr wcities dana ec faces sen A A A es estes a deste 23 A ANS SU men O reece sets A 23 Overview Lhe Assioiment Edon SChCeM cutre baracca dalla lbn tabrale 23 Optuons bela davone a Wi Cea n
153. Next Steps To edit further details in the Question Repository within the Question Designer see Editing Question Details in the Question Respository page 84 See Also Rules for Grading Fill in the Blanks Questions page 131 Question Designer Question Example using Various Embedded Questions page 355 Algorithmic Multiple Selection Question Source Script page 335 Multiple Selection Question Source Script page 354 Maple graded To create a Maple graded question 1 Enter a question in the Question Text panel 2 Click Insert Edit Response Area 0 3 Select the Maple graded question type in the Edit Response Area dialog 4 Select an Expression type Formula or Maple Syntax 5 Using Maple code enter the correct answer in the Answer field For example if the question is find the indefinite integral of sin x then the Answer field must contain the Maple code int sin x x 6 By default the Maple code to grade the student answer is given as is ANSWER RESPONSE 0 7 Click OK and then Finish to save and preview the question 102 Authoring Question Types referenced when grading as SANS WER Grading Code is ANSWER RESPONSE 0 Expression Type Text Symbolic entry Optional Maple Repository Plotting Code Custom Previewing Code Figure 5 5 Maple graded Response Area in the Question Designer Options e You can enter Maple code to plot the student answer For example enter an
154. Question Designer provides an environment similar to a word processor See Figure 4 1 You can apply character formats such as bold italics and fonts using toolbar buttons You can also insert images tables or links to other file resources When you are satisfied with the appearance of the question insert answer regions and then apply grading and other behaviors 65 Managing Questions Question Text E Source I O R BN He Goa B 7 U xx iii TE Gij E it m ll il MI i ie p 4 O Figure 4 1 Question Designer Screen Adaptive Question Designer Description Adaptive Question Designer questions can be used to create an adaptive multi part question in which the student is presented with one subquestion or section at a time and the question behavior depends on whether the student answers the subquestion correctly For more information on how adaptive questions work see Adaptive Question Designer Questions page 121 Adaptive questions are created in a similar way to Question Designer questions and support all features of Question Designer questions except for Essay type questions as described in Question Designer Questions page 92 Grading For Adaptive Question designer questions the instructor organizes the questions by difficulty The questions students see are dependent on the correctness of their previous responses Instructions To create an Adaptive Question Designer question 1 From the Class
155. Questions 111 Question 47 What s New xvi WYSIWYG 94 Y Your Question Bank Project Planning 323
156. Questions page 212 Using a Question Bank specific Table of Units To use a table of units include the following statement qu lt topic_number gt lt question_number gt units lt tablename gt where lt tablename gt is a table of unit definitions in the question bank For more information see Using a Table of Units page 247 See Also Numeric Question Source Script page 355 Controlling Answer Format in Numeric Questions page 225 Controlling Answer Tolerance page 226 Instructions To create a Numeric question 1 From the Class Homepage select the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 211 Authoring Question Types 3 On the Question Type list click Numeric 4 On the Edit Response Area screen e Enter the Question Name e Enter the Question Text e To add an Algorithm or Feedback to the question see Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 and Adding and Editing Feedback page 75 for more details e To proceed to the Question Details page click Finish 5 On the Question Details screen e Enter the question statement In the Number text field enter the numeric part of the correct answer in symbolic math syntax This is required e Ifthe correct answer has physical units in the Units text field enter the units for the correct answer To use units in addition to the default system units you must add a custom table of units If you do not specify units by default the system does not disp
157. Scientific notation e The operator as a representation of a margin of error The answer 3 75 0 05 kg grades all responses in the range 3 70 to 3 80 kg inclusive correct Note You cannot use the operator in the numeric answer answer num field for a numeric question You must use the specialized tolerance fields 281 Authoring Mathematical Questions Variable definitions must reduce to one of the above You can round a variable value to any number of significant digits and then specify the variable as the answer Controlling Display of Numbers within Questions All random numbers generated by the system from variable definitions are floating point variables By default they are expressed to about 8 significant digits To control the display of numeric variables enclose expressions in an int statement to make them integers for example Sm int 14 5 5 or in double quotes to make them strings for example s 380 You can also control the appearance of numeric variables by enclosing random number generating statements and arithmetic operations with decimal n statement to express the result to n decimal places or by using the sig n statement structure to express the result to n significant digits See Also Random Integer Generation rint n rint m n rint m n k page 272 decimal n x sig n x int x page 264 Variables within Variable Statements You can use variable
158. Students will see this feedback when they review their performance on the test You can add personalized feedback to help individual students understand their scores and master the material Note The feedback you enter in this way are sent to individual students and not provided as a part of question feedback To enter question level feedback even response specific feedback for multiple choice items you must use the Question Editor See Also Configuring Feedback Options page 49 Changing the Total Points for an Assignment To modify the total points for an assignment e In the search results in the Gradebook click Total points in the left column 298 Working with the Gradebook e Enter the new total points for an assignment in the Overridden column e Click Submit to save the change 7 4 Searching for Item Statistics To perform a gradebook search 1 From the Class Homepage select Gradebook from the menu bar 2 Select Search 3 Click Item Statistics 4 In the Select Assignments tab select the assignments you want to include in the search All the listed assignments are already selected by default e To unselect all assignments click Clear Selection under the Select Assignments tab e To reselect assignments hold down the Ctrl key Command on Macintosh to select more than one assignment 5 Specify additional search criteria 6 In the View Panel tab select the data to include in the search results
159. Syntax question you must specify whether the response area is a text entry area or a symbolic entry area Maple Syntax with Text Entry Response Option qu x y mode Maple type maple allow2d 0 Guidelines Student Use of Unevaluated Forms of Maple Commands Some Maple commands take unevaluated forms For example Diff is the inert form of di ff In Maple T A students are directed to answer questions using the unevaluated forms of Maple commands Your code should accept these forms Semicolon Usage The instructor should specify to the student in the question text whether a trailing semicolon is required or alternatively write code such that the presence or absence of a trailing semicolon has no bearing on the evaluation of the response For example evalb SRESPONSE factor x 2 1 as one line of question code does not allow a student response with a semicolon such as x 1 x 1 The response is marked as incorrect If the question code contains two lines completed with semicolons such as A SRESPONSE evalb A factor x 2 1 the student can answer with or without a semicolon and the response is marked as correct Syntax Maple T A does not check the syntax of the student response e Ifthe answer is entered in Text mode it is sent directly to Maple for parsing The student is expected to enter syntactically correct Maple expressions Shortcuts such as 2x are marked incorrect As the author you can verify whether t
160. To save changes in the Edit Response Area click OK 120 Authoring Question Types Removing a Portion of a Line or Parabola between Two Points To remove the portion of a line or parabola between two points 1 Click Snip Between Ga This enables you to remove a portion of a parabola between two selected points 2 Select two points on the parabola by clicking on them A solid green point indicates each selected location The portion of the parabola between these two solid green points is automatically removed 3 To save changes in the Edit Response Area click OK Note The pa operation creates two graphs or subcurves Recall that two graphs are treated as two separate mathematical relations by default To have them treated as belonging to one relation instead such as a piecewise function choose Yes under the Group plots option as described in Adding Multiple Graphs to the Sketch Board page 118 Including or Excluding Endpoints To indicate the position of endpoints on the graph 1 Click Toggle Filled Hollow This enables you to toggle back and forth between filled included and open excluded endpoints 2 Click on the endpoint that you want to include or exclude If the endpoint 1s filled included click on it to make it open excluded Similarly if the endpoint is open excluded click on it to make it filled included 3 To save changes in the Edit Response Area click OK Examples To view Sketch question
161. W 8 5 In the Question Type list click Multiple Choice Enter the following for Question Name Simple multiple choice Enter the following for Question Text What is 17 9 Click Add Choice two times under Choices for the answer Enter the following five choices 25 26 27 28 29 Select the radio button next to the answer In this case the correct answer is 26 10 The default option for Allow more than one selection is no Do not change the default The default option for Change the order of the choices is yes Do not change the default 11 To add an Algorithm or Feedback to the question see Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 and Adding and Editing Information Fields Hints or Feedback page 74 12 Click Finish 13 Click Preview to view the question as shown in Figure 5 53 ManleTA Preview Question simple multiple What is 17 92 choice 28 27 29 26 Figure 5 53 Multiple Choice Example 1 Example 2 Creating a Multiple Choice Question with Algorithmic Addition To create an Algorithmic Addition question l From the Class Homepage click the Questions menu 201 2 Click New Question 3 In the Question Type list click Multiple Choice 4 Enter the following for Question Name Algorithmic addition 5 Enter the following for Algorithm Sa range 10 Sb range 10 condition ne a b sum at b product a b condition ne sum product 6 Click Refres
162. WW WW UY question Estimate pi to at least 3 decimal places answer num 3 141594 answer units showUnits false grading toler abs err 0 001 mode Numeric name Pi 0 001 editing useHTML Plain Text Script Authoring Example 2 4 To specify a precision and an absolute margin of error as a value in a significant digit use grading toler_sigd digit lt n gt and err lt tolerance gt where lt n gt is a positive integer specifying the number of significant digits required and lt tolerance gt is a floating point number specifying the tolerance value in the lt n gt th digit This question grades correct 3 141 and 3 142 because they contain 4 significant digits and are within 0 001 of 3 14159 All other responses are graded incorrect question Estimate pi to four significant digits to within a unit in the fourth significant digit answer num 3 141594 answer units showUnits false grading toler_ sigd digit 4 err 1 0 mode Numeric name Pi 1 in the 4th significant digit using four significant digits editing useHTML 2022999998 Notes The behavior of this question is different from that of Example 2 3 which has only a margin of error but no required precision e The margin of error is applied with respect to the value in the answer num field not the result of rounding the value in the answer num field to lt n gt significant digits For example 3 14159 round
163. When editing a question in the Question Editor you can add or edit the comment To add or edit a comment 1 On the Question Editor screen click Edit in the Feedback area 2 Enter or edit the comment in the Text Editor Feedback can include HTML formatted text J avaScript symbolic math expressions algorithmic variables inserted objects and more To add or edit HTML formatted text click Source source in the menu bar 3 Click Save to save all changes See Also Text Formatting in Questions page 76 Comments and Performance Feedback page 332 Using the Comment Field in a Maple Question page 348 Deleting Information Fields Hints or Feedback To remove an information field hint or feedback 1 Open an existing question from the Question Repository by clicking the black triangle 2 Click the Edit in the Information Fields Hints or Feedback 3 Delete the text in the entry region 4 Click Save The system returns to the default behavior when grading the question See Also Question Fields page 325 76 Managing Questions Text Formatting in Questions You can use HTML 4 0 tags to control the display of character formatting in most question fields For a list see Special Characters in Questions page 333 To do so click Source Source in the toolbar of the text editor region of the question and include the appropriate format tags Note This requires an HTML or text editor and know
164. a returns a random integer in the range O a 1 inclusive rand a b returns a random integer in the range a b inclusive For information on other Maple commands see your Maple documentation 4 The Maple command randomize is included so that a different value is generated for each question instantiation You must include the randomize command in every Maple based variable definition That is it is required in the definition of Sexponent and coeff 5 The Maple command int x exponent x calculates the correct answer which 1s displayed using the comment statement if the student response 1s incorrect 6 The examples in Tutorial 1 can be converted to Maple Syntax questions by changing the type field value from formula to maple and changing allow2d to 0 for text entry mode For Maple Syntax questions it is recommended that you attempt to 287 Authoring Mathematical Questions prevent a student from calculating the correct answer using Maple commands For more information see Using Maple Code to Prevent Cheating in Maple Syntax Questions page 228 For an example plain text script that defines a Maple question with Maple plotting of the student response see Plotting a Student Response page 230 Tutorial 2 You can also use Maple based algorithmic variables in other question types Formula Question The following plain text script defines a Formula question that uses Maple based variables 22292
165. a editing useHTML question xx answer num 11 mode Numeric ShowUnits false grading exact_value answer units ShowUnits true editing useHTML question xx grading exact_value answer units ft min mode Numeric answer num 10 grader relaxed editing useHTML question xx answer 3 Stephen Hawking answer 2 Albert Einstein answer 1 Einstein mode List display text Ccredit 3 0 54 credit 2 1 0 credit 1 1 0 grader exact editing useHTML question xx answer 3 Stephen Hawking answer 2 Albert Einstein answer 1 Einstein mode List display text credit 3 0 54 credit 2 1 0 credit 1 1 0 grader exact editing useHTML answer 4 Sir Isaac Newton question xx answer 3 Johannes Kepler answer 2 Stephen Hawking answer 1 Albert Einstein mode List display menuf credit 4 0 0 credit 3 0 0 credit 2 0 5 Plain Text Script Authoring Plain Text Script Authoring gqu 1 1 part 6 credit 1 1 0 gqu 1 1 algorithm n int rint 20 2 n2 n 1 qu 1 1 question lt p gt This single question demonstrates the power and flexibility of the inline question type There are 6 individual response cells included each of which requires a different type of student response lt p gt lt p gt lt i gt lt font face arial size 1 gt lt b gt Notes lt b gt lt br gt Response cells can appear anywhere within
166. a and Maple Syntax subtypes allow you to use Maple functions and expressions for example trigonometric functions log10 In abs sqrt diff int and LinearAlgebra Determinant In addition to the full range of Maple functions you can use programming constructs to evaluate responses Difference Between Maple Formula and Formula Question Types Formula questions are very useful when the correct response is a straightforward mathematical expression using standard common functions and when the correct answer is easy to describe and easy to evaluate The Maple graded Formula subtype differs from the Formula question type e When writing a Maple graded Formula question you can use Maple functions and expressions in the evaluation of the student response e When writing a Formula question type you cannot use Maple code in the evaluation of the student response Viewing your source code reveals that for Maple graded questions both Maple Formula and Maple Syntax subtypes mode Map1le while for Formula question types mode formulaf Note There is no difference for the student in syntax or range of expressions 155 Authoring Question Types Difference Between Maple graded Formula and Maple Syntax with Text Entry Mode in Student Response These two subtypes are distinguished by a student s response e A student should not use Maple commands and expressions in a response to a question generated using Maple graded Formula For details s
167. a ee ona tears Pekan a near oC E MeN SMe se ee nae ee eae ana oe ieee 124 I ISO 124 o O ye ae oe aramtaeneaetes 125 NEXE SPSS A AI ST RATAS 128 SES A al rca A ti E EA 129 PESCON A ent very ee RET PRR RESET roe TEN Te SRR e TRENT RE mene NENTS RE Nero EERE er ne Res 129 A A heats cutest nye sect asec eaten a a ahaa ted ae ne chee anand e a bout 129 MASS PLU CA TNS eS AA SAA ASA a sao T eRe a 129 Pampeana cece St ala aah Ne Se ta Nt eh cat ati Lace esha teste Clad A Sool aN all Cee a atte EN So atte 129 De Eon 0s ROTC RENE ae ORC PERSE TA Le EAT oe NEST lao 130 56 Fill ty the Banks QUESTIONS sida bea 130 DESCHDHON meee Are mee Ae ee enn Gee Ay Tene ne Teer nee ne eR E ee eee eee 130 SA A sed ce a te ct e a a ten ate acne ach ca eat Goatees ed hel ee 131 IOSTUCIOAS a A A A A A AA iii 132 Example 1 Mens il toi 132 Example 2r TeX OOK GS nt AA AAA AT AAA ea AS 134 List Ovestions and Blanks Questions ita A AI A OS 134 Neat dae cis 137 5 7 Mathematical Pormula QUESTIONS laa 137 DESCH DUON IS A Ss SCE ane SUSE ee te ess Ab cei E ae en ch Te se ela 137 A aeaa a a a e e a a a e lok cha E N 138 Dai oante 0a EE ESEA TTEA a a locals 139 Example Es Bomm ula SUDY PE ada 139 Example 2 Formula without Logs and Trig Subtypes rs AAA A AAA eee 140 Example o Formala With Physical Units SUDYPE cnet cet ice et ee Gite e SN cio 14 Example 4 Formula that Matches Responses to within C Subtype ccc cece eee c ence cece cence eee ences ea eee ee ea e
168. a featured class This gives you access to questions assignments quizzes and tests from the featured class Default Role in Class Choose a default role from the drop down menu Editing an Existing Class To edit an existing class 1 From the Class Homepage click Class Info 2 Click Edit 3 Class Details can be edited For more information on field descriptions see Required Registration Information page 9 4 There are three new fields viewable in the edit mode e Description URL Enter a hyperlink to be displayed on the Class Homepage e Class Description A brief description of the class shown in lists e Class Message A message to be displayed on the Class Homepage 5 To save all changes click Submit Registering Users in a Class You can register users in a class by e Allowing students to register themselves for your course 11 Creating and Managing Classes e Creating and uploading a class roster e Using the Class User Manager If you allow self registration students can register for your class using the Enroll in a Class link on the System Homepage Class rosters are an efficient way to add a large number of students to your course at once The Class User Manager can be used to search for and add selected students individually To register students in your course they must have an account in the system Generally your system administrator creates user accounts The system administrator can give inst
169. a that does not involve that variable on the right hand side That is you cannot specify an implicit formula This restriction does not apply to students entering their answers y 2 4 x 1 6 Unordered List of Formulas The Unordered List of Formulas subtype accepts an unordered list of numbers or formulas separated by semicolons A question that has a single formula answer is graded correctly if this type is used In other words the answer must match the terms of the list in any order It is recommended that you use the Unordered List of Formulas subtype for questions that have a single correct answer but in general have multiple correct answers because the Formula subtype indicates to students that there is only one solution 7 Ordered List of Formulas 8 Vector of Formulas 9 Formula without Simplification 10 Chemical Equation The Ordered List of Formulas subtype accepts an ordered list of numbers or formulas Parentheses accepted but not recommended The grading is same for an Ordered List of Formulas as it is for Vector of Formulas Explanatory text tells students to enter an ordered list of formulas or numbers separated by commas Vector of Formulas should be used for questions about Cartesian coordinates or vectors This question subtype accepts an ordered list of number or formulas separated by commas for example a Cartesian point or a vector Parentheses are recommended but not required Explanatory text te
170. ade report 1 From the Class Homepage select Gradebook 2 Select Grade Reports from the drop down menu 3 Click New to define a new report 4 Specify a name for the grade report 5 Then click Add Group a For Group Name specify a name for the report group b Use the check boxes to select the assignments for the group as shown below A an Algebra 2 e Class User Manager Proctor Tools Assignments Questions Gradebook Edit Group Grade Report Report Weight 0 0 Bonus 0 0 Group Name Midterm Weight Assignments Equally Weight 30 To Non Attempts Mark as O Drop Lowest 0 Grade s Use Best Grade s Bonus Available Assignments Assignment Name Points Type Calculus Assignment 20 Proctored Demonstration of Question Types 63 0 Homework or Quiz Figure 7 6 Grade Reports and Available Assignments c Specify the weight of this group in the overall grade computation d If desired adjust the additional settings For a report group you can set the following settings e Group Name the name of the group in the grade report e Weight set a weighting for the group in the overall grade for the report e Drop Lowest drop the lowest n grades in the group e Weight Assignments weight the assignments in the group equally normalized or by using the total points for each assignment summed scores are divided by the summed total 301 Working with the Gradebook e Non Attempts
171. age New Module Cancel OK Note Only local content can be included in a course module Exporting assignments that include questions from inherited question banks will make those questions unavailable when the module is imported to another server To ensure that this module will work as desired create a course module in the class from which this class was shared and import that content to the target class first Likewise exporting questions that reference static resources in the web folders requires that those resources be included in the module Otherwise the questions will not render correctly To selectiremove course components highlight the item and use the arrows to add remove the choice to from the list boxes on the right Available Selected Free Body Diagram Questions Functions Quadratic Equations sketching Questions Select all Clear all Available Assignment 1 Assignment 2 Assignment 3 select all Clear all Available web_ folders web_folders PiecewiseFunctions web folders RationalFunctions web_folders InverseFunctionsSection4 web _folders Lin arFunctions Select all Clear all Figure 9 2 Create Course Module 317 Course Modules See Also Exporting a Course Module page 317 Adding and Deleting Elements within a Course Module page 319 Viewing Details of a Course Module page 318 Course Module Creation and Shared Class Inheritance of Questions and Assignments Course modules
172. age 325 Question Modes Question Types page 328 Opening a Saved Question Bank File While editing a question bank it is recommended that you back up your work by exporting it to your hard drive You can upload the saved question bank file plain text script file and then continue editing or save it in your class web site To open a question bank file that is saved on your hard drive 1 On the Question Repository page select the Questions menu then Import Question Bank 2 Click the Browse button and navigate to the source file on your hard drive Click Open 3 Select how the questions will be organized into groups when importing 4 Click Import to import the question bank The questions from the question bank are imported to the question repository Important You may see the following message when you import questions Maple TA has populated your QU file with unique question identifiers to allow question updates during subsequence QU file imports Plain Text Script Authoring Please download the file and use it instead of the original one if you plan to modify and re import the questions you have just imported By using unique IDs for questions and assignments the system allows content updates through QU file and course module imports If you plan to import a modification of this file again click the message to download the QU file with generated unique identifiers Note When you upload a question bank file into the syst
173. ails in the Ouestion Respository page 84 See Also Authoring Mathematical Questions page 222 Controlling Answer Format in Numeric Questions page 225 Numeric Mathematical Questions Source Script page 337 5 15 Palette based Symbolic Editor Questions Description Palette based Symbolic Editor questions enable you to create your own customized palette for student response entries e Before creating a new palette definition you should get familiar with the Equation Editor requirements and syntax e To add a new palette definition you need to create a question bank in plain text script format and add the toolbar definition at the beginning of the file using the qu env palette toolbarname structure see below You can add one or more toolbar definitions at a time You can add one or more palette entries to a toolbar definition 218 Authoring Question Types Note Palette based Symbolic Editor questions should only be created using the Question Editor They work by using an Equation Editor to generate Presentation MathML for the student response and compare it with the Presentation MathML of the answer However because there are many different ways of making Presentation MathML for the same or almost same marked up expression creating the expressions outside the Equation Editor may generate unpredictable results Grading The default behavior for grading palette based symbolic editor question student responses is to perform str
174. al Mtn i a as 274 sum yamane Start GX PL di Das 274 AN E O aa a e O O ROT eee 274 6 19 Mathematical and Logical Operators in Algorithms and Answers ooooccconcnconononconononconononcnnononcnnnnnncnnnnoncnnnoncnnnnanoos 273 Unreserved Operat on s A ds 2193 Reson ed O DET ON irean a a a a cen eae da o 275 6 20 Question Chanine Variables a aea a a a a a re a 275 O 276 Details onr Question A ended ee de 276 OZE SCN ie ae ODIOS rc RENACE OO O 211 2 D FPlorstae men ODIOM colaci n 237 FDO Flot Statement IPHONE AA AAA E N T 278 622 Details on Usine Alsorithmi Variables dio 280 The Answer Field Evaluation and A e QUITE MES A aa a a a idee d a a Ei 280 Controlling Display of Numbers within Questions 05 3 02 95 held ind Abc tt 281 Variables within Variable Statements yA AAA ES AA E Gain A aes Beal 281 Contents Displayine the Dollar Sign im QUESOS ind 281 Displaying the Backslash Symbol in Questions c cece cece eee eee eee een eee ne EEE EERE EEE EDEL EEE EERE EEE EEE E EE EEE EE EEE EEE EES 282 Text Stanos an Variable Saleisha E os 282 62 gt hutonial Alone OESOTO e 282 0 24 Tutorials Lastebased Variables idad ias 283 E AA A ooo ee ne E ET Ne Yee ee Re on ee ee eRe oe ener Re ee eee ee nee 284 6 25 Tutorial Maple based Algorithmic Question Authoring cccc cece eee e eee ene eee e nen e en eee EE EE EEE REED EERE EE EE EEE E EEE E EEE EES 285 Usnama det or E ML ek cl toc Geen are mene RR er eee rere a PR
175. al formulas The system grades a student response by comparing it with the correct answer If the student response and the correct answer are algebraically or numerically equivalent the response is graded correct To require that the response have a specified form use the form subtype 139 Authoring Question Types Instructions To create a Formula question l 2 Click New Question 3 4 From the Class Homepage select the Questions menu On the Question Type list click Mathematical Formula On the Edit Response Area screen Enter the Question Name Enter the Question Text input the question statement To include complicated mathematical expressions click the Equation Editor icon gt in the toolbar This launches the Equation Editor For more details see Editing with the Equation Editor page 231 Enter the Correct answer input the correct answer in symbolic math Your answer must be in the correct format For example for a restricted formula question you cannot use sin Select a Type of expression accepted from the drop down menu This determines the question type Descriptions of each subtype of mathematical formula can be found at Mathematical Formula Question Types Comparison Table page 137 To add an Algorithm or Feedback to the question see Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 and Adding and Editing Feedback page 75 for more details To proceed to the Question Details page click Finish O
176. aluates to the correct answer solve 3 x 6 12 x Maple code to grade the student response if SRESPONSE 6 then 0 5 else evalb SRESPONSE SANSWER 0 end if Instructions To create a Maple graded question 1 From the Class Homepage select the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 On the Question Type list click Maple graded 4 On the Edit Response Area screen e Enter the Question Name e Enter the Question Text e To add an Algorithm or Feedback to the question see Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 and Adding and Editing Feedback page 75 for more details e To proceed to the Question Details page click Finish 159 Authoring Question Types 5 On the Question Details screen a Enter the text of the question To include complicated mathematical expressions click the Equation Editor icon 3 in the toolbar This launches the Equation Editor In the Enter Maple code that evaluates to the correct answer region The last line of code must evaluate to an expression that is stored to the variable SANSWER A Maple graded question must use valid Maple code to evaluate the answer Complete each line of code with a semicolon Add parentheses when appropriate for example x y 2 Use the long form name for all package functions for example VectorCalculus ArcLength In the Enter Maple code to grade the student response region A Maple graded question must use valid Maple code to evaluate
177. ame optional o No internal directive internal directive internal directive display no variables oo o answer required except in essay matching and Maple graded questions internal directive internal directive internal directive required in numeric questions answer number answer unit maple required in Maple graded questions plot optional internal directive internal directive Plain Text Script Authoring Description Function System command that identifies the question type Specifies subtype of Maple question For Maple Syntax questions itis maple For Maple Formula questions it 18 formula For Maple graded questions specifies the student entry mode Can be 0 1 or 2 For maple questions it can be 0 for text entry mode or 1 for symbol mode For formula questions 1t must be 1 Displays text that identifies the individual question Indicates use of HTML editing in the question Set directly or automatically by Question Editor The question statement Can contain any combination of text MathML HTML tables or references to images or objects Contains variable definitions for use in the question Must conform to the system formula and variable syntax Defines correct answer for use in grading If mathematical question must conform to the system math formula syntax Defines correct number and units of answers in numeric q
178. ample you must specify every choice for a multiple choice question as a choice 1 field whereas for a formula question you specify only the correct numeric answer e The question type is entered in the mode field The question type specification can be all lower case letters or have initial upper case letters For example the following line would designate the fifth question in topic 3 as multiple choice qu 3 5 mode multiple choice Table A 2 lists all the Maple T A question types and their corresponding mode strings Table A 2 List of Question Types and Corresponding Modes Question Type mode string qu x y mode lt question_type gt Adaptive Question Designer Question Designer X y mode Adaptive Inline Chemistry 50 x y mode Formula x y grading chemistry Clickable Image qu x y mode Clickable Image Constant of integration Formula that Matches qu x y mode Formula Mod Cf Responses to within C qu x y grading form qu x y mode Matrix8 S Matrices with numeric formula entries qu x y mode Matrix Multipart qu x y mode Multipart Plain Text Script Authoring qu x y mode lt question_type gt Multipart formula Multiple choice Multiple selection Short phrase This question type has been qu x y mode Short phrase deprecated True False qu x y mode True False Unordered list of formulas qu x y mode Multi Formula Vector qu x y mode Ntuple For more information on each question type see Authoring Question Types pag
179. an be managed in common each individual section can contain unique content and assignments Questions and assignments inherited from a parent class are always identified in lists by the shared content icon fM which appears beside the assignments and questions Shared Class Behaviors e Changes additions and deletions made to questions and assignment content in the parent class are automatically distributed to child classes e Inherited questions cannot be edited directly However you can clone an inherited question to make your own copy which you can edit e The content of an inherited assignment cannot be edited directly However you can copy an inherited assignment and then edit the content of the copy e You can set the policies of an inherited assignment Important In general changes to questions or assignment content in the parent class automatically update those questions or assignments in your child class This is not true about polices changes to assignment policies are not inherited You control the assignment policies for an assignment that you inherit from a parent class See Also Sharing Questions page 89 Creating a Shared Class To share the contents of your class with other instructors 1 From the Class Homepage select Class Info 2 Click Edit 3 Select the Featured Class check box 16 Creating and Managing Classes 4 Click Submit to save your changes Other instructors can create a copy
180. anager page 20 and Course Modules Overview page 314 Upload and manage reference files used in questions and assignments Course modules 1 2 How Maple T A Works User Roles Each user in the system has a default role as assigned by the administrator Users can have different roles in different classes For example an instructor can be a student in one class with student privileges in that class and he or she will have instructor privileges in the class he or she is instructing The System Login Using their user name and password all users log into Maple T A through the same login screen Once users are logged in they have access to different class homepages or menu items depending on their role in that particular class 3 Getting Started ManteTA Login User login Password Create an account Forgot your password For instructors the system administrator provides your username and password The administrator or instructor provides students with a username and password to log in Anonymous access allows anonymous users to take a test without logging into Maple T A 10 by giving them access to the System Homepage This feature must be enabled by an administrator Lastly Maple T A can be configured to allow for self registration If this feature is enabled users will see a link on the login page allowing them to register themselves Ask the Maple T A system administrator at your university about your con
181. and weighting of each category Rubric tables allow you to e Create a new rubric e Modify an existing rubric e Link an assignment to a rubric e Use a rubric table to assign a student a grade For more information see RubricTables page 302 External Assignments You can add external assignment grades to your Maple T A gradebook There are two ways to add external grades e Uploading a list of grades e Using the Gradebook interface and manually adding students grades Once grades are added they can also be modified For more information see Adding an External Assignment page 305 7 2 Performing Gradebook Searches The Gradebook provides two types of searches of assignment data class grades and item statistics e Class Grades search for any number of assignments For each assignment the total grade for each student is displayed e Item Statistics search for any number of assignments For each question item statistics are displayed number of correct partially correct and incorrect responses as well as success rate p value d value p biserial and r biserial To perform a gradebook search 1 From the Class Homepage select Gradebook from the menu bar 2 Select Search and the type of search Class Grades or Item Statistics 290 Working with the Gradebook 3 In the Select Assignments tab select the assignments you want to include in the search All the listed assignments are already selected by d
182. ans00 50 Sans01 16 Sans15 3 6 Sans switch k Sans2x00 Sans2x15 b Multiple Index Case It may be the case that your question requires multiple indexes to your data Consider the above case with only four elements moleculel to molecule4 where for each element there are four individualized sets of properties Assume that you have four images of molecules To avoid redundancy because moleculel has only four values but there are sixteen scenarios use two indices The first index i determines the element and image The second index k determines the scenario Depending on the value of i the value of k is in one of the four ranges 0 3 4 7 8 11 or 12 15 By using k Spropertyl and other properties and ans match with the appropriate moleculel To implement this use the following statements Si rint 4 j rint 4 k 4 i j 285 Authoring Mathematical Questions moleculelx0 moleculelxl moleculelx2 moleculelx3 Smoleculel switch i moleculelx0 moleculelxl property1x00 S property1x01 S property1x15 propertyl switch k property1x00 property1x15 Sans00 50 Sans01 16 Sans15 3 6 Sans switch k S ans2x00 S ans2x15 See Also switch n a b c page 274 6 25 Tutorial Maple based Algorithmic Question Authoring Algorithmically generated variables are used to generate random numbers in questions and create m
183. ar is a Blanks question with 5 blanks You can access the blanks individually using response foobar 1 S response foobar 5 In the case of a multipart question with parts a c each of which holds a Blanks question with 5 blanks you can access the responses using Sresponse foobar 1 1l Sresponse foobar 3 5 You can have as many levels of depth as are needed In addition to accessing the raw text of the student response you can also access the grade that is assigned to the current response using grade foobar or as appropriate grade foobar 3 5 This is a decimal number between 0 0 and 1 0 In the case 277 Authoring Mathematical Questions that the question has not yet been answered the grade is 1 0 You should be careful revealing grade information because that may undermine the intent of the instructor in setting the assignment Note response and grade can be used only in in line expressions You can use these variables inside only question statements and answer definitions and not inside algorithm statements because the algorithm field of the question is evaluated only once when the question is first loaded at the time of initial assignment creation To use the response object inside other variable calculations would require that the algorithm field be refreshed each time the question is presented which would incorrectly update the other variable values in the algorithm field Question How do I use the grade
184. arch Proctor User Login First Name Last Name Email Student ID C Mempty email imemnpty studentid 1111 s555 555555555558 1231230555 00M 123143123 C 11111 5555 5555 11111162gmall com 111111 Figure 2 6 Add a Proctor to Your Class Note A user with the role of Proctor set by an administrator or an instructor with additional privileges has proctor privileges in any class in which he or she is not registered as a student This means that such a user does not need to be registered into the class to perform proctor duties in your class 20 Creating and Managing Classes Deleting a Proctor To delete a proctor 1 From the Class Homepage select Class User Manager 2 Choose Remove Users 3 Click Advanced Search and select Proctor in the drop down menu under User Role 4 Click Search 5 Select the check box next to the user you want to remove and then click Remove 2 4 The Class File Manager In conjunction with your Class Homepage your class also has a web site folder on the system that you can use to store images and other resource materials used in your questions The Class File Manager provides a list of the contents of the web site and gives you options for uploading organizing and deleting files In the Class File Manager you can perform these actions e Uploading Single Files page 20 e Uploading Multiple Files page 21 e Working with Folders in the Class Web Site page 21 You can access the Cla
185. ares a dha ntee aetna a 259 6 16 Workme with Vatiable Dat ar AO ais SPN nA AD aS ptt aot sae waa 259 A Bag oy ch ol Variables ii 259 Punchions Vinin lO Or MINS tt A eens a E 260 Inline Variable Expression S ct dd 261 Rules tor Namnge Varah leS a AA AA AA ARA RAE 262 6 17 Generate Random Numbers QUESOS E OS 262 01S FUNC OMS and AL O da one e hae 263 o RO 263 decimal X 1D 11 5 IM dE AS A AT A AT E 264 gla Dir Pe fal rz A 0 MEA DA A a oe 264 CU A A A ii 265 A A A A II a A 265 ICA AAA E AAA AAA AAA 266 a 0 1 de Ha epee PE TO A Os Ra ae ene ean eae meen en ne en erent eee fe ee 266 LG DU ose OO 266 TANS LA ees ee ced caret cea eta a ace dd ENE E atc ahaa tener eo a Seatac N AANE 266 Java el D E da Sa A ss win cen ne ete Ss SpE cst cans a O RAN sls cla een ee Ciao O iia 266 A ia a a E S E E E E S E E E 207 MADE EE ea a a aa a N a a A 267 Matia aeai rea e a a a ar a AA 268 max DCs ds MIME ar CO RA A A Ai 268 TVG O 269 E o dd a do e 269 A E 269 tanda 1 rand n ra SA A A A A TA ES 270 Random Integer Generation range n range m n range M n K ooooococccccconcncncononcncononcncononcncnnononcnnnnoncnnnoncnnnnos 271 A E O A O PEE TE E A Sarr TORE SNOT ECT See Men RR 271 Random Integer Generation rint n rint m n rint M n K cece cc eee eee ence eee ee nA ee cE ee EE eee EE EG EEE EE EEE EE EE EES 212 Statistical CCT AIO INS hunters A A A AAA T AAA A E E T 212 SEL CAL de PI o E 0 o ye lsc Ie Care et ee Ml Na e
186. art of x 6 13 Tutorial Setting Margin of Tolerance in Non numeric Questions Note Use the Question Editor on screen dialog boxes for setting the margin of error in numeric and numeric with unit questions For more information see Setting the Answer Format in Numeric Questions page 211 For an introduction to the concept of margin of error see Controlling Answer Tolerance page 226 For basic information on the system plus or minus operator see Setting a Margin of Error in Non numeric Questions page 221 Absolute Errors You can specify an absolute error using the operator x yrepresents x y Example 1 2 12 0 01 specifies a margin of error of 0 01 in the answer The answer matches any response between 2 11 and 2 13 inclusive For example the system grades 2 114 or 2 123456789 as well as 2 11 and 2 13 correct 257 Authoring Mathematical Questions Example 2 2 13 0 257 specifies a margin of error of 0 25 The system grades correct any response between 1 85J and 2 35J The error must have the same dimension as the correct answer Example 3 cos pi 6 1000 specifies a margin of error of 1000 The system grades correct any response between cos pi 6 1000 and cos pi 6 1000 approximately between 999 1339746 and 1000 866025 Percentage Errors You can also specify a percentage error using the operator x 1 y representsx x y Example 4 1 52 1
187. as changing layouts and color schemes as well as adding images text links and videos Easy Access to Practice Tests Practice tests can be made easily accessible e Administrators can provide anonymous access to practice tests so the tests can be accessed without having to log in to Maple T A first e Students at your institution can test themselves even if they are not logged in e Instructors working on new questions can easily send their content out for review Administration Custom Roles Roles in Maple T A such as instructor and administrator give different types of users different abilities in the system Maple T A 10 lets administrators create new customized role definitions e Create customized roles that expand or limit access Maple T A functionality such as defining a new instructor role that includes the ability to create new users or a teaching assistant role that combines proctor level access with the ability to create assignments e Easily choose from the built in roles or the custom roles when setting up new accounts Expanded Proctored Browser Support The Proctored Browser which provides a controlled environment for high stakes student testing has been expanded to work with more browsers and in more environments Preface e Provides a controlled environment for high stakes testing e Available on Windows Mac OS X and Linux e Works with Firefox and Google Chrome e Integra
188. ase linestyle n This option controls the dash pattern used to render lines in the plot The linestyle can be specified as either an integer between 1 and 4 or a name from the following list SOLID DOT DASH and DASHDOT The value must be in uppercase numpoints n This option specifies the minimum total number of points to be generated default 625 252 The plot3d command uses a rectangular grid of dimension isqrt n 3 1 orientation theta phi This option specifies the theta and phi angles of the point in three dimensions from which the plot is to be viewed The default is at a point that is out perpendicular from the screen negative z axis so that the entire surface can be seen The point is described in spherical coordinates where theta and phi are angles in degrees with default 45 degrees in each case projection r This option specifies the perspective from which the surface is viewed where r is a real number between 0 and 1 The 1 denotes orthogonal projection and the 0 denotes wide angle perspective rendering r can also be the one of the names fisheye normal or orthogonal which correspond to the projection values 0 0 5 and 1 respectively The default is orthogonal The value can be in lowercase or uppercase scaling s This option specifies whether the surface should be scaled so that it fits the screen with axes using a relative or absolute scaling where s is either unconstrained or constrained The default is relative unc
189. assign grades to students In addition from the Gradebook you can grade essay questions add feedback create rubrics adjust grades add external assignments and force grade active assignments Viewing Scores and Performing Gradebook Searches The system automatically stores assignment session scores in the Gradebook The Gradebook stores a variety of information for each student such as the assignment start time the time spent on the assignment and the individual assignment question performance Use the Gradebook to view grade data organized by assignment by student or by question item View the results online or export them to use in programs such as Microsoft Excel You can download the results of any Gradebook search or report to a file in comma delimited format Search results are based on the data gathered by the system during student sessions including statistical analysis of student and class performance You start a search by selecting what information you want to include The Gradebook makes it easy to get to the level of detail you need For example you can begin by listing all student results on an assignment and then click a student s name to display only that student s data From the student record you can then change a grade or view the student s answers for each question on an assignment Generating Grade Reports You can define a grade report for your specified grading policy For instance you can group homework as
190. assignment list Controlling the Sequence of Listed Assignments page 29 Shared Content Icon El Indicates the assignment is an inherited assignment Appears next to an assignment in the list when the assignment originates in the parent class from which your class was created Creating New Assignments page 25 See also Shared Classes page 15 Indicates the assignment is locked because there is an active version of the assignment a student has started but not finished the assignment Locked Assignment Icon E Warnings and Locking Mechanism When an assignment is opened for edit the system checks whether the assignment has associated student records in the Gradebook or is currently in use by a student The number of students currently using the assignment is displayed in the Active field of the assignment list in the Assignment Editor 25 Creating and Managing Assignments If the assignment is in use the locked assignment icon is displayed beside its name The questions in the assignment are locked so that you cannot edit them You can only edit some of the policies such as the time limit e It is possible to force grade incomplete assignments so that you can edit them However if a student is actively in the process of taking an assignment you cannot force grade it e Ifthe assignment is currently inactive the assignment is locked for editing so that new active tests cannot be started during the editing proc
191. at bse tae ete een ste ee Gee a sh alo ce a Nac a eid ea Coe ane leat 209 DE gh 018 9 a MRE RR ten RRS ET PERE RM eT Orne ee RCT Er UENCE TeRTET NES eer ee em RRR ETCT TE NUTT Ree TTT ee ee ene 209 O ect mre alone tao cae ates 209 Using a Question Bankespecitic Table OL UNITS ra A Ar 210 E O 210 Example 1 Creating a Simple Numeric QUESOS A ia 213 Example 2 Creating a Simple Numeric Question with Units in the Question Designer cccccecec ese eeeeceeeeeesenenes 214 Example 3 Numeric and Algorithmic Variables igre AAA AA AAA eles meee 215 Contents Example 4 Numeric Question with Units and Algorithmic Variables o oooooccconcncncononcncononcnconononconononcnnononcnnanonoos 216 NEXT STEPS arde ist o iaa eo N 217 51 gt Palettesbased Symbole Editor QUESOS ee 217 PECON i E TTC IEE PNET Ie TU Ser SPR CS ee eee TT 217 A A knee sores A A ama boedane hou 218 TOSTEUCHONS Ha AAN AS a Se Pats oho nate Rm a 218 Example Exalead a 218 Netart clio 220 LO ue False OO WESTON S ica 220 MNS SCH PHON a 8 bee asec Ss an cea vn a Gon TRACE ean esas waco need a Eee a ected eae A 220 SA he Nel sed a ce a a a N a a ceed hel ee 220 Nisin ane Gf Gi denen re ReRNOeaT O aa 220 Example ct ooo a odds 221 NEXOS adri rn dns ds ai 221 6 Authors Mathematical USO tek Rh al WR at il alan Cah le et Coen fa ha eh Ce ite EAN Catala Es a 222 6 1 Au honne Mathematical QUESOS SS AS OS 222 Pundamental C apalie S culiaos 222 Mathematics Questions P
192. at expresses the fraction a b in its lowest terms For example frac 12 15 returns 4 5 frac 12 3 266 Authoring Mathematical Questions returns 4 Note frac a b can be combined with mathml s to produce nicely typeset fractions For example mathml frac 8 12 displays 2 3 gcd a b gcd a b Returns the greatest common divisor of a and b For example gcd 12 15 returns 3 gt a b It a b gt a b Returns 1 0 ifa is greater than b that is a gt b Otherwise it returns 0 0 lt a b Returns 1 0 ifa is less than b that is a lt b Otherwise it returns 0 0 if a b c if a b c If a is nonzero it returns b Otherwise it returns c indexof k a b c d Returns the index of an item within a list the first item is in position 0 the second in position 1 and so on For example indexof 3 2 3 5 7 11 returns 1 java cn a b c d java cn a b c d 267 Authoring Mathematical Questions Pass the arguments a b c d toa custom J ava evaluation engine and return the result The first argument cn must be a string giving the fully qualified name of a Java class that implements the interface gateway question random AlgorithmicFunction This interface has a single public method public String eval String args The arguments a b c d are passed to eval in a string array For example java com mycompany QuoteFunction
193. at the top of the Essay Annotations palette when you hover your mouse over the annotation symbol Note Essay annotations only apply to Essay type questions Adding and Removing Essay Annotations Adding Annotations To add annotations to an essay 1 From the Class Homepage select Gradebook 2 From Search click Class Grades 3 Select the assignment for which you want to add an annotation 4 Click Search 5 From the resulting report click the name of a student 6 Each assignment is displayed as a row in a table Click the Details link that corresponds to the assignment containing an Essay question you want to annotate 7 Scroll down to the Essay question you want to annotate 8 Expand the Essay Annotation palette on the left hand side of the window by clicking the symbol 9 Drag an annotation symbol on to desired location of the student s essay response 10 Repeat steps 7 8 for additional annotations 11 To save the annotated essay response click Save Students will see these annotations when they review their grade on their essay You can add personalized feedback to help individual students understand their scores and master the material Removing Annotations To remove annotations from an essay 1 Find the annotation symbol you want to remove in the student s essay 2 Click and drag the annotation from the essay on to the Drag here to remove box in the Essay Annotations palette 297 Working with
194. ated by a symbol after the question number such as Q1 Click this link to see details on the items within this question group Viewing Question Responses From the Assignments Grades you can access Question Responses e In the Assignment Grades click the name of a question such as Q1 to view the student responses to this question In the Question Responses view you can e View item statistics e View student responses for each question As part of this you can view the instance of the question that the student received for algorithmic questions e Add instructor feedback e Update student grades if desired Viewing Student Grades After performing a basic gradebook search you can click the name of a student to access the student grades for that student The student record report first shows a summary for the student including the number of completed in progress and passed assignments for the student along with the number of assignments that need to be reviewed For each assignment the student score and total points are shown You can opt to show all results or just the best average most recent or earliest For all of these except average additional information for each assignment session includes the session s start and end times and duration of the assignment You can click the Details link for any assignment to access the student assignment details Viewing Student Assignment Details After performing a ba
195. ation and many other areas of mathematics Since the Maple engine is used when grading student s responses Maple T A will give credit for any response that is mathematically equivalent to the correct answer Using the Maple graded question type you have access to many different kinds of mathematical objects not just simple expressions You can use Maple to create questions whose responses require sets differential equations unevaluated integrals groups and many other types of mathematical data The Maple graded question type allows for questions with complicated answers questions with different possible answers and questions requiring a powerful answer equivalence checker With the Maple graded question type you also have access to the plotting capabilities of Maple You can use Maple to plot a student response or a function derived from a student response for example the definite integral of the student response for a Maple graded question type or display a plot for any question type You can assign partial grades allowing you to find common errors and reward partial credit You can also use functions and routines that are contained in a separate Maple Repository Maple Library You can access your personal Maple library archives from within your Maple questions Maple graded Formula amp Maple Syntax Subtypes The Maple graded question type has two subtypes e Maple graded Formula e Maple Syntax Both the Maple graded Formul
196. automatically generated passwords will be lost Attributes e Login must be at least one alphanumeric character and must be unique e First Name must be at least one alphanumeric character e Middle Initial must be no more than one alphanumeric character e Last Name must be at least one alphanumeric character e Email must be a unique address e Student ID must be at least one alphanumeric character and must be unique e Password must be at least five characters e Role can be one of student guest proctor instructor or administrator If roles are specified they cannot exceed the level of the current user The default 1f not specified 1s student e Require User Validation can be yes or no If yes the next time the user logs in to Maple T A they will be asked to validate their profile The default is yes The corresponding header row values are login first initial last email student password role validate The headers are not case sensitive so first and First are both recognized The other fields are optional If no password is provided the system generates a password which is displayed on the next page If you have a null field for example a student did not provide a middle initial use two consecutive delimiters However if the header row includes email and student ID you cannot have empty values for those fields in the rows of student data If there are some students who do not have either an email or a student
197. avior You can enter commands to define actions to be performed in three scenarios e Action When Clicked performs an action when the mouse is clicked in the plot area e Action When Dragged performs an action when the mouse is dragged in the plot area e Action When Drag Ends performs an action when the mouse is released from dragging To interact with the plot you need to use the Click and Drag manipulator 192 Authoring Question Types i This allows you to add or drag points on the plot area You can access this manipulator from the Plot Toolbar or by right clicking the plot area and selecting Manipulators gt Click and Drag For this Math App you will be creating an interactive plot of a circle First you will click on a point to define its center then define its radius by clicking on a point that will be on the circle To set up this interactive plot you will edit the Action When Clicked section of the plot component From the Components palette click the Plot gt and Button components to add them to your document Right click the Plot component and select Component gt Component Properties Change the Name of the component to ClickPlot and select Make execute code the default manipulator Click OK Right click the Plot component again and select Edit Click Action Remove any existing text in this component code editor and change it to say Actions Click Save the code and exit the code
198. be used in a monitored setting such as an on campus computer lab where the use of other devices or materials is controlled See Security Issues to Consider page 310 3 We recommend that students only use the Proctored Browser for taking assignments and tests 4 When an assignment is taken in Proctored Browser mode all links to image files reference files and external URLs will be blocked When creating an assignment for which you require students to use a Proctored Browser you should take care to ensure that the questions do not use any such files See Also ProctoredBrowserPolicies page 35 Limiting Student Access to Assignments Setting IP Address Host Name Restrictions You can restrict access to an assignment to specific IP addresses or Host Names If your system administrator has defined any IP address groups for your institution these will be listed here You can also create a custom IP address restriction To restrict access to certain IP addresses or Host Names do one or more of the following e Select one or more IP address groups from the list provided if it exists 54 Creating and Managing Assignments e Enter your custom IP address or Host Name restrictions IP addresses must be entered according to the following rules e IP addresses can be given individually or by using patterns e Enter one IP address per line e Patterns can be entered in Netmask format or using wildcards for example 10 10 2
199. board by the Cut and Copy commands Cancel C Equation object Mindows OLE graphic Help Translation to other language text Translator MathML 2 0 ho namespace Description MathML 2 0 no namespace translator v1 00 by Design Science Ine File MathML no namespace tal Include translator name in translation Include MathType data in translation your math expression using MathType Select the expression use Ctrl A to select all elements Copy the highlighted expression to the Windows clipboard use Ctrl C Paste the MathML expression into your plain text script file use Ctrl V Save your qu script file according to the system requirements Editing with the Equation Editor page 231 MathML in the Questions 239 Authoring Mathematical Questions Open your qu plain text script file and position the cursor at the location for the MathML expression Open your class web site and use the Question Editor to upload and install the new question bank with MathML intact MathML is used by the system for both the display of complicated math expressions as well as for content in math expressions mathematical meaning For small expressions you can use the mathml f function to create inline MathML expressions in effect to force the system to render an Example 2222 PPP expression defined in calculator syntax as a typeset math expression mode For
200. book page 288 System Overview Table 1 1 System Overview of Components Class User e Register users into your For more information see Registering Users page 10 Deleting an Instructor page Manager class 17 Deleting a Proctor page 20 and Class Rosters page 12 e Remove users from your class 2 Getting Started e Upload a class roster e Export a class roster Class Manager Edit your class For more information see Locking and Unlocking Class Registration page 11 Required information Registration Information page 9 and Shared Classes page 15 Lock registration for your class Allow anonymous access Share your class content with others Assignment Create and publish For detailed information see Creating and Managing Assignments page 23 and Set Editor assignments Policies Tab page 48 Set rules and policies Question Create questions to use in For detailed information see Question Repository page 82 and Repository your tests quizzes and assignments Cloning Questions page 90 Store manage and edit questions Clone questions Import questions Gradebook View individual and class For detailed information see Overview of the Gradebook page 288 and Forced results Grading page 307 Export to an external Gradebook Force grade incomplete assignments Additional Change your password For detailed information see Changing Your Password page 310 The Class File Tools M
201. boxes e Click Add as items e Click Select all at the top to select every question in the topic Individual questions are included in every version of the assignment served to a student You can control the weight of each question individually W Y Multiple Choice W BY Short Phrase Exact Match C El Dynamic Figure Labels Economics it Ea Maple Formula Plot Question Add as items Add as group Group Name Figure 3 5 Adding Questions to the Assignment 32 Creating and Managing Assignments 4 To add a group of questions a Select questions using the check boxes b Enter a name for the Group name and click Add as Group as shown below W Y Multiple Choice W BY Short Phrase Exact Match O BY Dynamic Figure Labels Economics Yi Ea Maple Formula Plot Question Add as items Question groups provide the option of having the system randomly select questions from the group according to the criteria you specify For example choosing three of seven questions from the group each time a new assignment 1s created for a student When assigning question weighting for a question group you set a single point value that controls the weighting of all questions drawn from the group See Figure 3 6 5 Optional e Change the default question weighting one point per question to match your requirements e Select the check box to scramble the sequence of question delivery when assignments are created e Reorder questions within y
202. by using the escape sequence as follows e Insert the symbol by using the escape sequence as follows Important When saving elements remember to click Finish to save changes If you change a value by simply typing content and do not click Finish your changes will be lost Authoring in the Question Designer Instructions To create a Question Designer question 1 From the Class Homepage select the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 4 96 Authoring Question Types On the Question Type list click Question Designer a Itis recommended that you enter a description in the Question Description text field The description is used to label the question in the topic If excluded the question type is used b You can add algorithms or feedback For more details see Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 and Adding and Editing Feedback page 75 c To proceed to the Question Details screen click Finish On the Question Details screen In the text box enter the question statement fas b Click Insert Edit Response Area c The Edit Response Area dialog opens Under the Choose Question Type list click on the appropriate question type see Essay Questions in the Question Designer page 96 Free Body Diagram Questions in the Question Designer page 97 List Questions in the Question Designer page 97 Maple graded Questions in the Question Designer page 101 Math App Question
203. c QUEsti n Sonce SCA basa 355 Question Designer Question Example using Various Embedded Questions c ccc cc ecc cence eee ee ea eeeee eee seeeseeeneeaenens 355 Short Phrase QUESOS OUEN E a ec een ca N leach ceca ctl 358 Truc or rabe Question Soure SCDE nds 358 List of Figures Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 Figure 3 17 Figure 3 18 Figure 3 19 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Figure 4 6 Figure 4 7 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Figure 5 9 Figure 5 10 Figure 5 11 Figure 5 12 Figure 5 13 Figure 5 14 Figure 5 15 Figure 5 16 SY Stemi ROME PACS cack cecariseuabar sarc A A 3 Glass Homepace MA i IIE 25 5452 ects t sc es lie ds 4 InihentsC Ontent rom A Featured CLASS ria da dd A A decades 8 Loek Class RC O1S TAO TA A oe alm wis cic lve ice clo ies eee 12 Exportine a Class ROSET ra a caos 14 Add Ail mstructor TO Our Clas as 17 Proctor E A dese eesti eae si EAA T appeared A EA 18 Adda Proctor to YOU LAS Seea E nenamulen cin 19 Clas tilo Matas Eiana E o el 20 A anO RATE MRE Meee ae ere ee RL eR SeEY MOR Ae ST ACE en ree amen E
204. c TEETER 305 Adame External Grades UR A e e cata 305 Addie Extemal Grades India to ie e 306 Modity me External Assi nment Grades ena od 307 RA A NN 307 Admiten Maple VA ad 310 SLEMEN UPON Esana Re ON 310 8 2 Chape ina Your PassWord acia 310 BS Deletie SA En TRC COL S NAS ERA AAA AT EAS ETE TO 310 SA oce yI SSES Es AAA a a a a a a a a e Ala cette en Coed Gea 310 LEa aere cos eal eE AORE EAEE EE EA E A E A AAE E E S E E AE ATE AE 311 Student Accoun Mana cemento 311 Proctor d EXA nina E SA ARE SR EA A ARE ARES 311 PLOCTOLEA TGC Wy Se Re tl A 311 85 5 Integrating Maple T A with an LDAP Server si nats nda dete A sowie nat Gata A Sededaseweeden 312 LDAP Overview for INS MUCIOrS una a a 312 Login and Forgotten Passwords With LDAP a NAAA dg em TT eae a 312 Contents User Managers Add Users with LACA a a a A r 313 User Manager Import wit LDAP a a diia 313 A A A A ON 314 Course Modules OVV W naia A lolas 314 Technical Information Expected Behaviors of Course Modules ooocococccccconcncocononcnconononcnnoncnnnnononnnnoncnnnnancnnnnnncnnnoo 315 92 Creatine ASC OUESE Module tn ASA AAA ias 315 Course Module Creation and Shared Class Inheritance of Questions and Assignments oooooccccononcncononcncnnononcnnononcnnonanoss alg eo ks MOLINO a Ou Se Ml a ae eee ee eas hE nate sain 317 9 Imporine and Iastallmora Course Module a 317 R duire Menis ar NN A cid 318 Additional Notes SN OS 318 o gt Nicwine Details Of a Coure Mode
205. can delete an assignment but only if you are prepared to lose all of the results for the assignment from the Gradebook Using Proctored Browser You can require students to take the assignment in a mode called Proctored Browser Proctored Browser is a full screen mode that blocks the student from accessing external web sites or other programs on the computer while taking an assignment It can only be used when students are taking a Proctored Exam assignment type provided you also selected Require use of Proctored Browser when generating the assignment policies For more details see ProctoredBrowserPolicies page 35 This requirement will be indicated in the policies link beside the assignment name Also note that it is good practice to preview and test your created assignments in Proctored Browser mode to ensure they behave as expected Important The Proctored Browser mode can be used in Google Chrome or Mozilla Firefox only It is not compatible with Internet Explorer If a student attempts to take an assignment outside of the supported web browsers the following message appears Y MapleTA e Proctored Browser This assignment requires the use of Google Chrome or Mozilla Firefox Please try again in either of these browsers Close assignment window Figure 3 16 Proctored Browser Compatibility 53 Creating and Managing Assignments Taking an Assignment using the Proctored Browser To take an assignment in Proctored
206. can include other algorithmic functions and variables You can use the following mathml x a sqrt x n 1 Numeric Arguments to the mathml function mathml expr 0 returns MathML with no lt math gt tags mathml expr 1 the default returns MathML with lt math gt tags See Also Simplified Math Expressions page 241 mathml f page 268 MathML Authoring with MathType The Maple T A system can display and process MathML expressions as part of questions answers and feedback However creating MathML expressions in a plain text or HTML editor is extremely complicated so this topic discusses how to use Design Science MathType Version 6 9 to create expressions that can then be exported into MathML expressions for importing into your Maple T A content Microsoft Windows and Mac OS X users can use the Design Science MathType Version 6 9 to create MathML expressions To do so follow these steps 1 Launch MathType 2 Set the MathType MathML translator to export MathML as follows a From the menu select Preferences gt Translators to set MathML export b Set the options exactly as indicated in the MathType Dialog box below then click OK e Select Translator MathML 2 0 no namespace radio button Create See Also e Clear Include translator name in translation check box e Clear Include MathType data in translation check box I x Please choose the type of data that will be placed on the Clip
207. can only include content that is local to the source class e Content inherited from another class cannot be included e The course module creation screen will not show any inherited content See Also Shared Classes page 15 9 3 Exporting a Course Module Use the Export button to save the selected course module from your source class to your hard drive This is a required step if you want to redistribute or install your course module into a new class To export a course module 1 Create a course module 2 Select the course module you want to save to your hard drive by selecting the check box adjacent to it in the list of available course modules in your class 3 Click the Export button The next page displays all the related URL information that is referenced in the course module you have selected You will see a message about the URLs as follows Your questions will be scanned for URLs beginning with the following strings These references will be replaced with a system independent string that will make your module relocatable to classes on other servers When the course module 1s saved it replaces the source class specific URL information with relative references that are then localized upon reinstallation Typically you will not want to make changes to the system default behavior for URL replacements 4 Click OK to continue The course module is prepared for download 5 When prompted start the download A file download box
208. can specify whether you want the image saved as a GIF or JPEG Maple animations are animated GIFs so you must use GIF for an animation For example Smyanimation plotmaple plots animate sin a x x Pi Pi a 1 4 plotdevice gif Note You must use the long form name for Maple package functions You can see a plot immediately using the Algorithm Editor Algorithm a range 1 5 Edit the code for your algorithm in the text box below or click s show Designer to use the algorithm designer The algorithm designer tool allows Variable Value you to define algorithms for your a 2 question by completing a form show Designer Refresh algorithm preview myplot Figure 6 4 Plot with Algorithmic Variables 244 Authoring Mathematical Questions Example Using a Label on a Plot Labels can be added to Maple plots using the same method as adding labels to graphics For detailed infomation on adding labels see Questions with Labeled Images page 79 Enter the following in the Algorithm field Swave plotmaple plot sin x x 0 10 plotoptions height 130 width 200 In the Question Text section click Source LE source Include the following code lt div class labelledImage style height 130px width 200px float none gt Swave lt div style left 70px top 20px class centered gt crest lt div gt lt div style left 120px top 120px class centered gt trough lt div gt lt d
209. cedure checks if two angles are in the same quadrant proc al a2 tol evalb a1 gt tol and a2 gt tol and al lt 90 tol and a2 lt 90 tol or a1 gt 90 tol and a2 gt 90 tol and al lt 180 tol and a2 lt 180 to1 or a1 gt 180 tol and a2 gt 180 tol and a1 lt 270 tol and a2 lt 270 tol or al gt 270 tol and a2 gt 270 tol end proc Maple will replace the third argument with the question s angle tolerance value Instructions To create a Free Body Diagram question 1 From the Class Homepage select the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 On the Question Type list click Question Designer 4 Enter the question in the text box 5 Click Insert Edit Response Area 6 Under the menu options Choose Question Type select Free Body Diagram The Edit Response Area window is shown in Figure 5 9 Edit Response Area Choose Question Type Essay Free Body Diagram List Maple graded Math App Mathematical formula Multiple Choice Numeric Sketch 110 Authoring Question Types Free Body Diagram Weighting L x Angle 2 0 tolerance Background Browse Image Show Yes instructions _ Fg Gravity C N Normal JT Tension _ Fs Spring Force fs Static Friction 7 fk Kinetic Friction Select forces Generic Generic Force Define a new type of force Abbr Name Update force selection list below Add control points control point
210. cified by lt coord_name gt discont s Setting s to true forces plot to call the function discont first to determine the discontinuities of the input or fdiscont if discont fails or if the input is not an expression and then breaks the horizontal axis into appropriate intervals where the expression is either continuous or contains only removable discontinuities filled truefalse If the filled option is set to true the area between the curve and the x axis is given a solid color This option is valid only with the following commands plot contourplot implicitplot listcontplot polarplot and semilogplot labels x y This option specifies labels for the axes The values of x and y must be strings The default labels are the names of the variables in the original function to be plotted if any The strings must be entered using left single quotes 278 Authoring Mathematical Questions labeldirections x y This option specifies the direction in which labels are printed along the axes The values of x and y must be horizontal or vertical The default direction of any labels is horizontal The value can be in lowercase or uppercase legend s A legend for a plot can be specified by either a string or a list of strings When more than one curve is being plotted then they must be specified as a list and not a set and there must be a legend for each curve where the ith curve is associated with the ith legend The strings must be entered
211. cify acceptable formatting for student responses See Figure 5 61 Specify input format E Accept 1000 separator Select the style of negative numbers you want to accept E Accept scientific notation 4234 0 or 1234 0 A Accept signs E Accept arithmetic Figure 5 61 Specify Acceptable Answer Format in a Numeric Question Accept 1000 separator Students responses containing commas as a separator are graded correct 212 Authoring Question Types Accept scientific notation Student responses specified using scientific notation for example 2 OE2 are graded correct Accept signs Student responses containing a leading dollar sign are graded correct Accept arithmetic Student responses specified using the arithmetic operators that is and are graded correct Select the style of negative numbers Negative responses must be specified by using a negative sign by enclosing in parentheses 0 or by using either notation to be graded correct Note If you select the Accept arithmetic check box then you cannot allow parentheses to be used to indicate a negative response See Also Controlling Answer Format in Numeric Questions page 225 Setting the Answer Tolerance in Numeric Questions When working with Numeric questions in the Question Editor you can specify the e Precision of student responses that is the number of digits e Acceptable margin of error for stude
212. class Course Module Description Contains material on functions and quadratic equations Figure 9 1 Create Import Export or Delete Course Modules Note Legacy course modules are created using an older format prior to Maple T A 9 They had limited functionality compared to the modern course modules 314 315 Course Modules The following options are available for working with course modules New Create a new course module View Details Select one or more existing course modules from the list and view their individual contents questions assignments and resources Import Upload a course module as a ZIP file from your hard drive Export Select one or more existing course modules from the list and save them to your hard drive Delete Select one or more existing course modules from the list and delete them Import HTML Content Upload a ZIP file containing one or more HTML pages and related image files The advantage of using course modules rather than question banks or featured classes to manage content between classes on one or more Maple T A servers is that the questions assignments and web resource folders are entirely portable and can be installed in a new class even at another institution very easily After you create and export a course module you can send it to other instructors who can upload it into their class and use it in its current state or alter it to suit their needs Technical In
213. component again and select and select Edit Click Action Replace the existing text with Actions RestartGame Save the code and close the code editor 188 Authoring Question Types gee Properties Mame Text rea2 Tooltip Visible Character Width Visible Rows Contents Options Automatic Text Wrapping 52 Draw border Password Embedded Plot Window Quadrant I Quadrant II Quadrant III Quadrant IV No Quadrant From the Edit menu select Startup Code Insert the following commands into the Startup Code region DoPlot end if else DocumentTools Do TextArea2 value Please try again num_incorrect Num 1 0 end if return NULL end proc QuadrantSelect RestartGame proc x RandomTools Generate integer range 10 we 10 33 RandomTools Generate integer range EO 7 StartTime 1 Num 0 DoPlot x y DocumentTools SetProperty RadioButton5 value true DocumentTools Do TextArea2 value Go 3 num_incorrect Array 1 10 fill 1 return NULL end proc RestartGame DoPlot proc x i local p if x then p 4s prLot IJT empty plot else p plots pointplot Ix Yl point symbol solidcircle red symbolsize 20 end if DocumentTools Do Plot0 plots display p view 10 10 10 10 gridlines font Times New Roman thickness 2
214. correct image element by clicking the appropriate hot spot Essay Questions page 129 An Essay question type is typically used for a long answer response in Maple T A which could include mathematical proofs long answer questions and essays Free Body Diagram Questions page 108 Free Body Diagram questions can be used to ask a student to draw forces from one or more starting points called control points over a background image This question type is available through the Question Designer question type Fill in the Blanks Questions page 130 The Fill in the Blanks question type has been deprecated Use the Question Designer question type instead See Question Designer Questions page 92 List Questions in the Question Designer page A List question is a Fill in the Blanks question offered in the Question Designer exclusively It 97 offers some advanced features including the ability to give partial credit to certain answers List questions can be used to present a drop down list or a free response area In both cases you set a single response object in the question To include multiple response areas in a single question use the Question Designer question type Maple graded Questions page 153 A Maple graded question uses the Maple mathematical software to generate algorithmic variables in questions generate plots and evaluate student responses The Maple graded question type gives you access to the computational power of Maple Yo
215. cript authoring by adding this code to the question field or any HTML field in the question definition in the qu script file Behavior The question contains a link called Click here for instructions When you click the link a new window of size 450x650 pixels opens containing the instructions html file contents To change the description of the content in the HTML file the filename or the window size edit the sample code in the example above Using a Maple Repository You can access your personal Maple library archives from within your Maple questions To do this you must first upload your archives files into the class file space on the server When you create a Maple graded question you then specify the location of the archive as part of the question definition When executing the Maple code associated with that question the Maple libname variable will automatically be set to access the archive files specified Important When setting up multiple archives inside the same directory ensure that there are no name conflicts If you want to share your question bank with another class you must share the Maple files and the test bank files Uploading a Maple Repository A Maple repository is a mla file To use a repository you must upload the mla file 1 Select the Questions menu 2 Select New Question The Question Editor is displayed 3 On the Question Type screen select Maple graded 4 Click Optionally import a Maple
216. ct from best average most recent earliest all best all most recent or all earliest If you let students attempt an assignment multiple times you can select which result to include in your report For example if you select all best the search results display each attempt but only the best grade is used when computing the mean median and item statistics e Progress show completed assignments assignments in progress or assignments that need to be reviewed Tip To find assignments that contain ungraded essay questions search for To Be Reviewed assignments For more information on grading essay questions see Changing Grades and Adding Feedback page 294 e Custom User Field customize the search field to your own criteria For an example see Figure 7 2 page 291 Custom User Field Program equals Science Figure 7 2 Custom User Field Search User search for a user by login name Date from and Date to specify a date range Assignments completed within that date range are included Setting View Criteria The View Panel is used to specify what data is included in the results It is used as an Filter Results After performing a search you can change the options in View Panel and refresh the view without performing another search Customize the display of the search results using these options Style Style is a drop down menu that indicates the presentation style for grades numberic percentage or
217. ct the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 On the Question Type list click Essay 4 On the Edit Response Area screen e Enter the Question Name e Enter the Question Text e To add an Algorithm or Feedback to the question see Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 and Adding and Editing Feedback page 75 for more details e To proceed to the Question Details page click Finish 5 On the Question Details screen e To edit Hints and question details see Adding and Editing Hints page 74 and Editing Question Details in the Question Respository page 84 for more details e Click Finish to place a copy of your question in the web site cache and to preview your question Example 1 From the Class Homepage click the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 In the Question Type list click Essay 4 Enter the following for Question Name Degree of Polynomial Proof 1 5 Enter the following for Question Text A polynomial has 153 real zeros What does this tell you about the degree of the polynomial 6 Click Finish 7 Click Preview to view the question See Figure 5 18 130 Authoring Question Types Preview Question Degree of Polynomial A polynomial has 153 real zeros What does this tell you about the degree of the polynomial Proof 1 E Source O A Em He im B I U X x TEE E 2 222 r A Fo Size Ae Os This question will not be graded by the computer it wall be reviewed by your inst
218. ct values in both cells to receive full credit e Correct answers can be specified with a margin of error or range of tolerance e Algorithmic variables can be created for use in the question statement answer hint feedback and solution fields e The system automatically grades equivalent numeric expressions correct 4 Click Finish to save and preview the question Numeric Weighting Numeric Part Units Part Numeric Format Required with W Acce pt 1000s separator W Acce pt scientific notation EJ Accept sign W Accept arithmetic 1 234 0 1 2ME 3 23 1257 Absolute accuracy EN Absolute accuracy Set figures Margin of error Margin in nth digit Percentage margin Figure 5 8 Numeric Response Area in the Question Designer To edit further details in the Question Repository within the Question Designer see Editing Question Details in the Question Respository page 84 108 Authoring Question Types See Also Question Types Supported in the Ouestion Designer page 93 Sketch To create a Sketch question l SE Enter a title for the question under the Question Name panel 2 Enter a question in the Question Text 3 Click Insert Edit Response Area 0 4 5 Select the Sketch question type Complete the fields in the Edit Response Area dialog For more information on each entry see the following Weight Properties in Sketch Questions page 114 Axes Properties in Sketch Qu
219. cted course modules 3 Select the components to be deleted and click Delete 4 You can select all the questions assignments or web folders included in the course module by selecting the check box adjacent to the Name column headings Important When you use this method to delete elements from a course module the system deletes the selected element questions assignments or web resource folders are physically deleted from the system and are unrecoverable Note If the elements you have deleted from one course module are used in another course module installed in your class they will not be permanently removed from your course but will be removed from only the selected course module To delete only the index file containing the record of the course module contents from the list of the available course modules click the Delete button Why Delete Only Part of a Course Module If you install a course module given to you by a colleague but want to duplicate only certain parts of the contents of that course module for example install only questions and web folders but not install the related assignments you first install the entire course module and then use the steps outlined above to remove the assignments 9 7 Deleting a Course Module The Delete button removes the index file that stores the record of what is included in the course module without actually deleting the class elements Deleting the course module index file remove
220. ction on that question type in Authoring Question Types page 91 For Maple syntax questions the instructor specifies Symbol mode or Text mode for responses in the question itself For more information see Maple graded Questions page 153 Controlling Answer Format in Numeric Questions Note You can use the Question Editor s on screen dialog boxes to set the answer format For more information see Setting the Answer Format in Numeric Questions page 211 226 Authoring Mathematical Questions Student responses do not need to be formatted identically to your answer to be correct You can specify notations that the student is allowed to use Number Style Use the numSty1e field to set the acceptable formatting for student responses List the acceptable number styles in a space separated list as the value The available number styles are e thousands responses containing commas as a separator are graded correct e scientific responses specified using scientific notation for example 2 0E2 are graded correct e dollars responses containing a leading dollar sign are graded correct e arithmetic responses specified using the arithmetic operators that is and are graded correct For example numStyle thousands dollars allows students to correctly enter responses using comma separators or leading dollar signs Negative Number Style Use the negStyle field to set the acceptable fo
221. d define a new type of force by assigning it an abbreviation Abbr and a force name Name Click Add Force Type to have the customized force added to the bottom of the list Once you have finished adding forces click Update force selection list below Add control points Enter the Control Point Label and then click Add Automatically the control point will be added to your free body diagram To move it click the control point and drag it to 1ts new location Once the control point label has been added click Update Label to modify it or Delete to delete it Multiple control points can be added to the free body diagram from which multiple forces can be drawn Add a force Select a force from the drop down menu A force can be selected multiple times Assign an Angle in degrees and if applicable a control point as its Origin to each force and click to add the force to the free body diagram preview 112 Authoring Question Types Note Valid angles are between 180 and 360 degrees inclusive Half angles are accepted as well for example 100 5 degrees List of forces All forces added to the diagram appear in a table at the bottom Selecting a force To select a force use one of the following methods e Click the force in the diagram e Click the force within the table Both options result in the force being highlighted blue Also a blue point or handle appears at the tip of the drawn force To change the angle of a selec
222. d Keys for Entering Chemistry Expressions Expression Superscripts and Subscripts Arrows in Equations Other Operators Physical States Ion charges and Parentheses To create a Chemical Equation question 1 From the Class Homepage click the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 In the Question Type list click Mathematical Formula 4 Enter the following for Question Name Reaction Enter superscripts using the caret character and subscripts using the underscore _ Use the text gt lt lt gt for arrows Use for the center dot operator Use the sign in equations Use the sign to indicate ion charges No other operations are allowed in equations Be sure to include physical states in parentheses if your equation requires them Use the and characters for polarity and ion charges Use parentheses to clarify interpretation of groups of characters 5 Enter the following for Question Text Enter the reaction of sodium hydroxide NaOH with hydrochloric acid HCl 6 Enter the following for Correct answer NaOH HCI gt NaCl H 20 7 In the Type of expression accepted list select Chemical equation 8 Click Finish 9 Click Preview to view the question See Figure 5 38 153 Authoring Question Types Preview Question Reaction Enter the reaction of sodium hydroxide NaOH with hydrochloric acid HCI This question accepts chemistry formulas and equations Help
223. d arithmetic expressions and functions Note In the Question Editor on the Maple graded question screen the Select the type of expression you want to accept field lists the Maple graded Formula option as simply Formula Example The following example source script creates a Maple graded question using the Formula subtype qu 1 topic Maple Formula Question Example Script qu 1 1 question What is the derivative of x 2 with respect to x qu 1 1 maple evalb SRESPONSE diff x 2 x qu 1 1 type formula qu 1 1 mode Maple qu 1 1 allow2d 1 qu 1 1 comment The correct answer is 2 x qu 1 1 name Derivative Maple Formula qu 1 1 editing useHTML qu 1 2 question What is the integral of 2 x with respect to x qu 1 2 maple evalb diff SRESPONSE x 2 x qu 1 2 type formula qu 1 2 mode Maple qu 1 2 comment The correct answer is x 2 qu 1 2 name Integral Maple Formula qu 1 2 editing useHTML To return feedback to a student if the response is incorrect you must use the comment field For more information see Using the comment Field in a Maple Question below See Also Maple graded Questions page 153 Plotting a Student Response page 230 Tutorial Maple based Algorithmic Question Authoring page 285 Question Modes Question Types page 328 Using the Comment Field in a Maple Question The following example source script returns feedback to the student including a comment in a Maple formula question top
224. d in the Select Questions Tab page 45 area in section 3 4 Deleting Questions from Branches To delete questions from a branch do the following 58 Creating and Managing Assignments 1 Click the branch name you would like to delete questions from The selected branch appears white compared to the other dark gray branch es After the above step deleting questions from a branch follows the same procedures as deleting questions from a non adaptive assignment These procedures can be found in the Select Questions Tab page 45 area in section 3 4 Defining an Exit Strategy How a student finishes an adaptive assignment is called an exit strategy A student can finish in a number of different ways To define an exit strategy for an adaptive assignment do the following 1 To define how a student completes the adaptive assignment select the Policies button 2 Choose at least one grading trigger that will dictate when a student is finished the assignment There are three options to choose from which can be used by themselves or in conjunction with each other e lt integer gt questions seen the student is finished the assignment after seeing a predefined number of questions It does not matter if they got these questions correct or incorrect e lt integer gt correct responses the student is finished the assignment after correctly answering a predefined number of questions e lt integer gt incorrect responses the stud
225. d is the patch style without the grid lines symbol s Symbol for points in the plot where the value s is one of box circle cross diamond or point The value can be lowercase or uppercase Note If the style is set to point the default symbol is plot device specific symbolsize n The size in points of a symbol used in plotting can be given by a positive integer This does not affect the symbol POINT The default symbol size is 10 thickness n This option specifies the thickness of lines in the plot The thickness n must be a non negative integer The default thickness is 0 tickmarks m n If m is an integer then this option controls the number of tickmarks that are placed on the x axis If m is a list of numeric values then tickmarks are placed only at the specified values If m is a list of equations v t where v is a numeric value and t is a name or string then a tickmark with the label t is placed at v If m is the name default then the default tickmark placement is applied Similarly n specifies the placement of y axis tickmarks This option can be replaced by the xtickmarks m or ytickmarks n option if you wish to specify tickmarks for one axis only title t The title for the plot The value t must be a character string The default 1s no title You can create multi line titles for standard plots Use the characters n in the character string to denote the start of a new title line The strings must be entered using left single quot
226. d lists and can include embedded images or media objects Instructors can author the following question types in the Question Designer 1 Essay Questions page 129 can be used for long answer responses 2 Free Body Diagram Questions page 108 can be used to ask a student to draw forces from one or more starting points called control points over a background image These forces are automatically graded 3 List Questions in the Question Designer page 97 including text or menu input styles exact or relaxed graders multiple correct or incorrect responses can be specified partial credit can be defined for each response 4 Math App Questions page 176 allow an instructor to embed a worksheet that a student will interact with The worksheet itself will be graded by the final state the student leaves it in 5 Mathematical Formula Questions page 137 provide full access to the formula mode math grading behaviors including configurable grading of equivalent symbolic algebraic and equation expressions The six sub modes within the Question Designer are e Mathematical Formula Formula Subtype page 139 e Formula that Matches Responses to within C Subtype page 142 e Vectors of Formulas page 149 e Equation Subtype page 144 e Formula without Simplification Subtype page 103 e Chemical Equation Subtype page 151 Note For specific information on each subtype see Mathematical Formula Question Types Comparison Table page 1
227. de is displayed in the Score column 5 You can add comments or notes in the Comments column Class Homepage and Rubric Tables When you return to the Class Homepage after linking assignments and rubrics you will see a new section called Rubrics as shown in Figure 7 11 Class Homepage Class Details Courtney Jones courtneyjones maplesoft com Class Info Add Child Class Class File Manager Ass ig nments Nothing found to display Rubrics Rubric Name Points Rubric Test 20 Figure 7 11 Class Homepage Rubric This tab displays the Rubric Name and Points assigned to that rubric You can click on a rubric to proceed directly to External amp Rubrics 7 7 Adding an External Assignment You can add external assignment grades to your Maple T A gradebook There are two ways to add external grades by uploading a list of grades or through the Gradebook interface Adding External Grades using a Roster Grade rosters are an efficient way to add a large number of grades at once By uploading a file you can add multiple external assignments at once To upload external grades 1 Create a text file in the specified format e The first column identifies the users This can be login names email addresses or student IDs e The remaining columns provide assignment data Assignment data consists of the following in order the assignment name the total points the passing score and the student scores For the correct format see Fig
228. dents must be registered in the class You can configure the number of questions on a page create test instruction sheets and headers and set policies for restricted access repeated attempts and other options e Students answer questions one at a time and the system records their responses between questions e Jumping from question to question within an assignment is allowed until students complete all questions or choose to ignore the warnings to do so and submit their responses for automatic grading e For Homework Quiz and Proctored Exam assignments individual student results are recorded in the Gradebook For a summary of assignment attributes see Table 3 1 Table 3 1 Assignment Attributes Gradebook Available Proctored Exams Study Session Homework or Quiz Assignments Description e Students are presented with an assignment consisting of any number of instructor selected questions e Questions are delivered either in an instructor specified or scrambled sequence e Student responses during sessions are recorded but not graded after every question so assignment sessions can be interrupted and returned to upon next login 41 Creating and Managing Assignments e By default homework or quiz assignments can be attempted multiple times for credit If you want to limit the number of attempts a student can make on a particular assignment configure the assignment properties e Results for every attempt at a Homework
229. dered List 137 328 Uploading Multiple files 21 77 Saved Question Bank File 324 Single files 20 77 URL Class Homepage 4 Use HTML 94 For Question Creation 320 To Create Question 320 User Manager LDAP 313 Register students 10 14 User Roles 2 Username 312 Using a Rubric Table to Assign Grades 304 Using a Rubric to Grade an Assignment 303 Using Formula Syntax 231 Using Hints 331 Using Images File naming rules 77 Using Information Fields 331 Using Script Files Author Questions 334 Using Scripts 345 Create Multipart Questions 352 Create Multiple Choice Questions 354 Create Multiple Selection Questions 354 Create Numeric Questions 355 Feedback in Maple Question 348 Using Source Scripts Create Short Answer Questions 358 V Variable 222 258 260 270 275 Display 281 Names 262 Names with braces 253 Variable Data 259 Algorithmic 335 In Algorithmic Questions 259 Tutorial Algorithmic Questions 282 With range 271 Variable group 283 Variables Conditions 264 e 262 In Questions 271 List based 282 Lists of variables 274 Index Setting conditions 263 Within variable statements 281 Vector 137 Vectors 328 Versioning Randomize questions 48 View Question Details 84 Viewing Details of a Course Module 318 Viewing files 21 Visible assignment property 52 W Wb 247 Web References in Course Modules 320 Weber 247 Weight Sketch Questions 114 Weighting Free Body Diagram
230. ding on your requirements and preferences This table summarizes functions related to random number generation Table 6 12 Random Number Generators rint n rint 3 Returns a random integer between 0 and n 1 inclusive Generates n 0 1 or 2 variations rint m n as rint 3 6 Returns a random integer between m and n 1 inclusive Generates n m 3 4 or 5 A variations rint m n k m m k m 2k m q k where rint 3 12 3 Returns a random integer between q is the largest integer such that i Bone m and n 1 inclusive in steps of k m q k lt n k FRESE Generates approximately n m k variations range n eF range 3 When n is a positive integer returns a random integer between 1 and n 1 2 or3 ue inclusive Generates n variations range m n m m 1 m q where q is the range 3 6 Returns a random integer between m floor of n m k and n inclusive Generates n m 1 3 4 5 or 6 variations range m n k range 3 12 3 Returns a random number between m and n inclusive in steps of k 3 6 9 or 12 asia Generates approximately n m k 1 variations rand m n a rand 0 5 9 5 Returns a random real number between m and n inclusive all real numbers between 0 5 and 9 5 inclusive rand m n k m n expressed to k significant rand 0 5 9 5 3 Returns a random real number between figures m and n inclusive expressed to k significant figures 263 Authoring Mathematical Qu
231. diting an existing rubric 302 Rubric Tables 302 Rubrics 302 grading an assignment 302 Linking an Assignment 304 Rules 131 231 Mastery assignments 43 Naming variables 262 S S 247 Save back up questions to hard drive 88 Saved Question Bank File Opening 324 Saving assignments 56 Saving shared assignments 27 28 Scenario based variables 283 Scheduling assignments 51 School Name 9 Scientific notation 209 222 222 Script files Authoring 334 Script Files 334 Search for Questions 82 Security Proctors 310 Student account management 310 Select forces Index Free Body Diagram Questions 111 Select Questions tab 45 Add Branches to Adaptive Assignments 57 Add questions as group 46 Add questions to assignments 45 Adding Questions to Branches 57 Changing Properties of Branches 57 Defining An Exit Strategy 58 Defining Branch Switching Procedures 58 Deleting Branches from Adaptive Assignments 57 Deleting Questions from Branches 57 Merging questions into question groups 47 Points column 47 Randomize questions 48 Select Test Bank 46 Self Registration 2 2 11 Send email reports 49 Sequence of listed assignments 29 Sequencing Parts 197 Set Policies 48 Advanced Options in Assignments 38 Advanced Policies Editor for Assignments 38 Set Advanced Policies for Assignments 38 Set Criteria for Assignments 38 Set Policies tab 33 Advanced options 48 54 Advanced Policies 54 Advanced Policie
232. ditor see Adding and Editing Hints page 74 As an instructor e You define hints in questions e You can optionally define how much a student is penalized for using a hint e You enable the display of hints in Step 3 Rules amp Policies of the Assignment Editor so that a student can view them during an assignment e You can enable the display of hints in any assignment mode The system also displays hints after grading if a student response is incorrect e If you do not enable hints they are displayed only as feedback when a question is graded incorrect Plain Text Script Authoring e You can create any number of hints for a question e Important When creating questions that have a specific number of significant digits in the correct answer it is recommended that you use the sig function to create algorithmic variables By using these variables in the question statement feedback hints and solution ensure that values are displayed with the correct number of significant digits If you provide hints on an assignment student can view the hints for a question at any time during an assignment session prior to submitting questions for grading by clicking the links for the numbered hints for example Hint 1 and Hint 2 The hints will appear as hyperlinks below the question answer region Example mode formula question What is the derivative of x lt SUP gt 2 lt SUP gt 3x 1 answer 2x 3 hint 1 Differentiate the expressi
233. domly select a set of data from lists and present to students a scenario with related variables For example you can create an astronomy question that randomly selects a planet in our solar system and then automatically assigns the acceleration due to gravity at the planet s surface to the answer variable See the tutorial on this topic Tutorial List based Variables page 283 You can use more than one type of variable in a question You can use any combination You can place conditions on variables For example you can specify that the value of a variable not exceed that of another Note You can create or edit variables and algorithmically generated data using the Algorithm Designer in the Question Editor Alternatively you can create questions without variable data using the Question Editor and then export the plain text script file with the file extension qu to your hard drive Add variables by editing the questions directly in your text or HTML editor See Also Generating Random Numbers in Questions page 262 Mathematical and Logical Operators in Algorithms and Answers page 275 The Algorithm Designer page 70 Using Script Files to Author Questions page 334 Functions within Algorithms Algorithmic definitions of variables are of the form qu x y algorithm Svariablel expression Svariable2 expression e The use of the semicolon at the end of the variable definition is optional if there is only one variabl
234. ds them to the web site If the selected file is not a zip file then the program does not upload any file 5 Click OK to perform the upload and return to the list of files on your web site The uploaded extracted files appear in the web site explorer Viewing or Deleting Files To view a file click the view icon beside the filename To delete a file 1 Click the delete icon fp beside the filename 2 A confirmation message is displayed Click OK to delete the file Working with Folders in the Class Web Site Creating Subfolders To create a subfolder 1 Click the Create new subfolder icon next to the class name 2 Enter the name of the subfolder When creating the name use letters numbers or underscores and dashes in the name but not spaces 3 Click OK 4 The program adds the subfolder at the top of the web site folder and opens it If the web site has more than one subfolder the program arranges them in alphabetical order Each subfolder has its own icons for creating a new subfolder and for uploading files Use these to create and upload files to nested folders 22 Creating and Managing Classes Closing Subfolders To close a subfolder 1 Click the triangle icon by the name of the subfolder You return to the root level 2 Click the triangle icon again to open the subfolder and work on its files Deleting Subfolders To delete a subfolder 1 Click the delete icon fp beside the folder 2 A c
235. e of question delivery produces multiple versions of assignments Using algorithmically generated questions within assignments creates multiple versions of questions as well Set Policies Tab Setting Assignment Types Homework or Quiz is the system default assignment type It delivers an assessment style session that does not require proctor authorization It records student session results in the class Gradebook To change the assignment mode select one of the other options under Type of Assignment in the Set Policies tab of the Assignment Editor For information on each assignment type see e Anonymous Practice Assignments page 43 e Homework or Quiz Assignments page 40 Proctored Exams page 42 e Mastery Assignments page 43 e Study Session Assignments page 44 Note If you select Mastery dialog assignment you should proceed to the Mastery Policies page to specify the criteria for your assignment 49 Creating and Managing Assignments Setting Mastery Policies If you select the Mastery type for the Assignment you can set learning objectives or competency levels that must be met before a student is allowed to proceed with the assignment To establish policies for your assignment 1 In the Set Policies tab of the Assignment Editor click the Edit mastery policies link below the Mastery dialog option The Set Policies Mastery Policies screen opens See Figure 3 14 2 Use the drop down fields to establish rule
236. e Syone qu 1 5 question What is the equation of the straight line passing through the points Sxone S yone and xtwo Sytwo lt br gt qu 1 5 answer y m x b You can also generate MathML using Maple qu 1 5 mode Equation f qu 1 5 name lt b gt Equations with algorithmic MathML feedback lt b gt qu 1 5 comment Use the slope intercept form of the line to find the equation as Solution qu 1 5 editing useHTML qu 1 5 algorithm xone decimal 1 rand 0 10 xtwo decimal 1 rand 0 10 condition ne xone xtwo Syone decimal 1 rand 0 10 Sytwo decimal 1 rand 0 10 m ytwo Syone xtwo xone Sb m xone Syone Solution maple printf MathML ExportPresentation y m x b qu 1 5 question 241 Authoring Mathematical Questions What is the equation of the straight line passing through the points Sxone yone and xtwo S ytwo lt br gt qu 1 5 answer y m x b See Also Inline Display of Formatted Math Expressions page 237 MathML Authoring with MathType page 238 Simplified Math Expressions When you use the mathml f function to easily render typeset mathematics expressions the system also engages a set of automatic simplification rules as follows e Simple addition subtraction and multiplication are performed For example x 2 3 are set as x 5 and 2 3 x as 6x e Additions and subtractions of zero are disregarded
237. e a c ne a d ne b c ne b d ne c d ne e f 6 Click Refresh algorithm preview to preview the variables you defined as shown in Figure 5 59 Algorithm a 2 rint 10 2 b 2 rint 10 2 Edit the code for your algorithm c 2 rint 10 2 in the text box below or click d 2 rint 10 2 show Designer to use the e 2 rint 10 1 algorithm designer The f 2 rint 10 1 algorithm designer tool allows condition ne a b ne a c ne a d ne Sb c ne Sb d ne c Sd ne Se_ f you to define algorithms for your question by completing a form Show Designe gar Saga eo sata oe eer Variable Figure 5 59 Multiple Selection Example 2 Algorithm Value 7 Enter the following for the Question Text Which of these numbers are even 8 Click Add Choice three times under Choices for the answer 9 Enter the following six choices e Sa 208 Authoring Question Types e b e c e d e e e f 8 Select the check box next to the correct answers These are as follows e a e b e c e d 9 The default option for Change the order of the choices is yes Do not change the default This means the selections are permuted each time they appear 10 The default option for Allow more than one selection is yes Do not change the default 11 To add an Algorithm or Feedback to the question see Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 and Adding and Editing Information F
238. e 91 Required Question Elements Each question must contain the following elements e Question mode e Question statement e Answer In the following descriptions the variables x and y represent the topic and question numbers Question Mode Format qu x y mode lt question_type gt The required mode statement declares the type of question You must include it as part of the opening statement for the question Question Statement Format qu x y question lt question_text gt The required question statement holds the text of the question Question statements can include any combination of HTML tags for formatting text integrated HTML graphic or web media references or MathML expressions Answer Format qu x y answer lt correct_answer gt The required answer statement specifies the correct answer value for the question For more information on this field see The answer Field page 330 Example qu 1 topic Basic Topic 1 mode Multiple Choice question What is the sum of 5 and 7 Q answer 1 choice 1 12 choice 2 35 22922 Plain Text Script Authoring qu 1 1 choice 3 2 qu 1 1 choice 4 11 qu 1 1 choice 5 2 See Also Question File Structure Details page 324 The name Field Using Question Descriptions The name field allows you to provide a description for each question A descriptive title will help you identify individual questions from lists of questions shown in the Question Editor and
239. e Equation Editor a MathML expression is parsed the syntax checker is run to ensure the answer is of type formula and then a Maple statement 1s generated Student Responses You do not need to explicitly check that the student response is a formula For example you do not need to check whether factor expr is a command that calculates the expression for the student However a student response like factor x 2 1 would be interpreted as implicit multiplication and converted to a c t o r x 2 1 As such the student response will be marked as wrong You may need to write Maple code for responses that are interpreted as formulas by Maple T A but are Maple commands For example if you ask for the value of sin Pi 4 you must use code to ensure that the student does not simply enter sin Pi 4 which the Maple T A syntax checker accepts and passes to Maple The correct response is for example sqrt 2 2 which is also a Maple T A formula and a Maple command Variables The variable e should not be assigned as a global variable in Maple code It can be used however as a local variable 157 Authoring Question Types See Also Maple graded Formula Question Source Script page 347 Maple Syntax Introduction Maple Syntax is a subtype of the Maple graded question type In this subtype the student is required to e Respond using Maple commands and expressions e Enter syntactically correct Maple expressions In a Maple
240. e Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 In the Question Type list click Maple graded 4 Enter the following for Question Name Determinant 5 At the bottom of the page click the add icon Si and enter the following Algorithm n int rand 2 4 matrix maple randomize LinearAlgebra RandomMatrix n n generator rand 9 10 m maple printf MathML ExportPresentation matrix Click Refresh algorithm preview to preview the variables you defined as shown in Figure 5 43 164 Authoring Question Types Algorithm n int rand 2 4 matrix maple randomize LinearAlgebra RandomMatrix n n generator rand 9 10 Edit the code for your algorithm m maple printf MathML ExportPresentation matrix in the text box below or click algorithm designer The algorithm designer tool allows Variable Value you to define algorithms for your question by completing a form de S Show Designer matrix Matrin 2 241 1 6 1 2 10 2 1 8 2 2 6 datatype anything storage Refresh algorithm preview 7 rectangular order Fortran_order shape 6 10 m E 5 hb Figure 5 43 Maple graded Example 4 Algorithm 6 Enter the following for Question Text Calculate the determinant of m 7 Enter the following for Correct answer LinearAlgebra Determinant matrix 8 Do not change the default Grading code The following default Grading code is provided evalb ANSWER SRESPONSE 0
241. e Tutorial Maple based Algorithmic Question Authoring page 285 See Also Tutorial Algorithmic Question page 282 Tutorial List based Variables page 283 Tutorial Maple based Algorithmic Question Authoring page 285 6 18 Functions and Arguments The system contains numerous built in functions for creating algorithmic variables You can create random integers or real numbers perform operations on lists of items or set conditions on variables This section describes the built in functions and gives the syntax and purpose of each function Most of these functions are for use in authoring questions but cannot be used in student responses For more information see Mathematical and Logical Operators in Algorithms and Answers page 275 condition x condition x Imposes the condition defined by statement x which is typically constructed using one or more other functions For example Sa range 10 10 condition ne a 0 This generates a random non zero integer between 10 and 10 inclusive decimal n x sig n x int x decimal n x 264 Authoring Mathematical Questions Returns x expressed as a floating point number rounded to n decimal places When decimal 0 expression is used with an expression the system automatically inserts commas to separate thousands Trailing zeros are truncated and not displayed For another option see numfmt fmt x page 269 sig n x Returns x expressed as a float
242. e correct but 2 500001 is incorrect Margin of Error toler perc toler abs The numeric value of the student response must be within perc of answer num For example if perce 5 and answer num 2 5 any response between2 5 0 95 and2 5 1 05 is correct In particular 2 38888888 is correct The numeric value of the student response must be within err of answer num The error can be specified as a numeric value or algorithmic variable For example iferr 0 25 and answer num 2 5 any response between 2 25 and 2 75 inclusive is correct In particular 2 333333333 is correct Precision and Margin of Error toler_sigd See Also The numeric value of the student response must be within err in the digitth significant digit of answer num inclusive and have digit significant digits The error can be specified as a numeric value or algorithmic variable For example iferr 2 digit 3 and answer num 2 5 the responses 2 48 2 49 2 50 2 51 and 2 52 are correct All other responses for example 2 499 and 2 5 are incorrect For example iferr 1 digit 3 andanswer num 27 18 the responses 27 1 and 27 2 are correct Although 27 3 is within 0 1 of 27 18 rounded to 3 significant digits it is incorrect because it is not within 0 1 of 27 18 Setting the Answer Format in Numeric Questions page 211 Controlling Answer Format in Numeric Questions page 225 Setting the Answer Tolerance in Numeric
243. e defined in the algorithm statement e The syntax of formulas and the use of operators in variable definition statements is similar to the standard graphing calculator syntax used in the system with the addition of some new functions Therefore the system s usual arithmetic operations and functions can be used in the expression portion of the code statement e However unlike most other programming languages variables cannot be redefined in terms of themselves for example the statement a a 1 is invalid The following additional functions and operations are also available for use in variable definitions in algorithms Random Number Functions Random integer generation integers in a specified range in steps of k e Random Integer Generation rint n rint m n rint m n k page 272 e Random Integer Generation range n range m n range m n k page 271 Random real number generation to k significant digits e rand m n rand m n k page 270 261 Authoring Mathematical Questions Operations and Modifiers condition x See condition x page 263 See eq a b ge a b le a b ne a b page 264 See not a page 269 See gt a b It a b page 266 See if a b c page 266 decimal n x See decimal n x sig n x int x page 264 int x sig n x See Also Rules for Naming Variables page 262 Inline Variable Expressions You can include a computed expression anywhere with
244. e eee ene een es 142 Example gt Equatotr SUB IVC haces hots oy Sie hacee a docs 144 Example 6 Unordered List of Formulas SUBIDO s ca esis toriari A da 146 Example Ordered Eist of Formulas SUD evn nintuen eaten dns O dEl 148 Examples Vectors or Formulas SUDD rereua ee ts 149 Example 9 Chemical Equation Subtype anaraccdhaiccchneubacetdunl peat cita 151 NEXE STPS uti AT AE ST AS 153 o Maple UE AA O 153 PESCO O a A E a Ie Te eee Aaa dn Renee 153 Maple eraded Question Type OV GrVICW nerne ek a ea A E broach leanten A E N 154 Maple oraded ROTA A eo ne er a eS Ore reer mes oe meee 156 Maple Ma eco 157 AO A aio o o dd 158 TiS OUCH O NS la a iaa 158 Copying Content from the Maple Worksheet to Maple T A 2 0 00 cece cece cece eee nee e ence een ence ee ee enc ea ee need EEE EE EE EEE 159 Example PA Maple rada A e Coc Da oe e ds 160 Example 1B Maple graded Formula and Plotting ui A A 161 Example 2 Maple srad d Maple Syntax OPON ics ieuiecc abl shal nre e a A r e e e 161 Example 3 Designing a Maple graded Question to Accept Mathematically Equivalent Responses ccceceeeneneeees 162 Example 4 Maple oraded Determinant OF a Matrix i 163 Example Sy Maple eraded CoscHici nt Mati id 165 Example 6 Maple graded Matrix Question with Infinitely Many Correct Responses ccccecececeeseceseeeeseaeeeneeaens 167 Example 7 Maple graded Using the InertForm Package to Avoid Simplification ooocococon
245. e exact Compute the exact values of sin F COS 3 and tan Z values NN o o This question accepts lists ofterms separated by commas The entries can be numbers or formulas The entries must be given in the correct order Help Preview Figure 5 35 Ordered List of Formulas Example Preview Example 8 Vectors of Formulas Subtype The vectors of formulas subtype requires a vector of formulas a sequenced list in correct responses Use this for questions with vectors of formulas or numbers You can use the full range of functions in the formulas that is all trigonometric functions log In abs and sqrt To create a Vectors of Formulas question 1 From the Class Homepage click the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 In the Question Type list click Mathematical Formula 4 Enter the following for Question Name Find the minimum point 5 Click the add icon ON and enter the following Algorithm a rint 1 6 b rint 2 10 bottomrange a 2 toprange a 2 plot plotmaple plot x Sa 2 b x bottomrange toprange plotoptions width 250 height 250 6 Click Refresh algorithm preview to preview the variables you defined as shown in Figure 5 36 150 Authoring Question Types Algorithm a rint 1 6 b rint 2 10 Edit the code for your algorithm bottomrange a 2 in the text box below or click Stoprange a 2 Show Designer to use the Splot plotmaple plot x 5a
246. e instructors can have classes on the same server or on other Maple T A servers It is an ideal method for content management of entire classes full of related questions assignments and web references and allows you to include all or only specific parts of those classes in the course module package Using course modules is similar to the share class capability in that it allows you to share your class content however after a course module is distributed and installed in a new class location it does not maintain any synchronization with the original source class or its materials Course modules ensure transportability of content from one class to another archiving of entire class contents and even portability of entire classes from one Maple T A server to another When you create a course module the web reference URLs inside your questions are converted to a portable format so that when you install the course module in a new class these can be automatically set to the new class web site address by the system as part of the installation process Access Course Modules from the Class Homepage by selecting the Questions menu and then selecting Course Modules In the Course Modules screen a list of the currently installed course modules for your class is displayed The list 1s empty initially See Figure 9 1 Course Modules New View Details Import Export Delete Import HTML Content The following course modules are installed in your
247. e module Click OK 5 Enter a name for the module Optionally enter a description for any of the items you have included in the module Click OK The course module now appears in the list of course modules for your class To open a module you need to import it and install it To import a course module 1 Log in as an instructor and click on the class in which you want to import the content 2 Click Questions then Course Modules 3 Click Import 4 Click Browse to locate the course module file zip on your computer 5 Click Import The system will display the content from the course module If there are items that use the same name as those in your class they will be highlighted in yellow on the upload screen 6 Select the check boxes beside the items you want to install and click Install The selected items are installed in your class Question Fields Each question must contain mode question and answer statements In addition there are many optional fields that can be added to questions to enhance functionality add feedback or hints or otherwise define or expand the capabilities of the question Table A 1 lists selected available question fields and summarizes related information Table A 1 Question Fields qu x y Required or optional Can include Field Type HTML or lt field name gt MathML mode required type required in Maple graded questions allow2d optional in Maple graded questions n
248. e optional exact grader style that can be specified in List questions and Blanks questions modifies the above rules to recognize and enforce capitalization punctuation and other characters but still applies the above algorithm for handling spaces Again assuming the answer field value is Albert Einstein then the following answer is graded correct e Albert Einstein However e aLBert eiNsteiN or albert einstein or a lbert Ein stein 1s graded wrong Palette Grader Rules The Palette question type is intended for use in chemistry content areas and applies a modified exact grader designed to recognize and enforce superscripts and subscripts as well as the order of certain superscript and subscript operators 132 Authoring Question Types Math Grader Rules Each of the Formula question varieties as well as the Numeric question type apply question specific grading rules and support methods for setting margin of error and tolerance and equivalent unit dimensions at the level of the question Instructions To create a Fill in the Blanks question 1 From the Class Homepage select the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 On the Question Type list click Fill in the Blanks 4 On the Edit Response Area screen a In the text box under Text of correctly filled out answer enter the entire question statement including the correct answer b Select the radio button Textboxes or Menus corresponding to the appropriat
249. e plotting features to graph student responses or a function derived from a student response For more information see Plotting a Student Response page 230 Plotting Options for 2 D and 3 D Maple Plots Many options are available when generating a 2 D or 3 D Maple plot For more information see Setting Plot Options page 277 Displaying a Maple Plot To display a plot within a question use the plotmaple command 1 From the Question Editor screen expand the Algorithm section 2 Enter the plotmaple algorithmic variable using the structure 243 Authoring Mathematical Questions Salgorithmic_variable_name plotmaple plotstatement libname filename lib plotdevice gif jpeg plotoptions options 3 Click Refresh algorithm preview to preview the plot image See Figure 6 4 4 In the text field for the question type enter the text of the question including the algorithmic variable name defined in step 2 Note The algorithmic variable can also be used in the feedback or hints section Using plot options you can specify the height and width of the image without losing any quality in the image For example Smyplot plotmaple plot sin x x Pi Pi plotdevice gif plotoptions height 250 width 250 You can use another algorithmic variable in the plot command For example Sa range 1 5 Smyplot plotmaple plot a sin x x Pi Pi plotoptions height 250 width 250 With the plotmaple command you
250. e question presentation Each one is described below 1 Menus allows the student to select the appropriate response from a drop down menu For this option you can add distractors incorrect responses by clicking Add Choices To add additional text fields click More For instructions and details on creating a Fill in the Blanks Menus question click Fill in the Blanks Example 1 Menus page 132 11 Textboxes allows the student to enter a response in a text field For this option you cannot add distractors For instructions and details on creating a Fill in the Blanks Textboxes question click Fill in the Blanks Example 2 Textboxes page 134 c Click Next d Select the words that will be replaced by blanks in the question Then e To designate a word as a blank click the dots on either side of the word e To designate a phrase words must be adjacent as a blank click the dots on either side of the phrase Note If the designated word or phrase is followed by punctuation insert a space between the word or last word in a phrase and the punctuation mark e To remove a blank from a word or phrase click one of the words in the highlighted blank e Click Finish to place a copy of your question in the web site cache f Click Preview to view your question Example 1 Menus To create a Fill in the Blanks Drop down menu example 1 From the Class Homepage click the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 In the Ques
251. e student response for a Maple graded question type or display a plot for any question type You can also use 94 Authoring Question Types functions and routines that are contained in a separate Maple Repository Maple Library You can access your personal Maple library archives from within your Maple questions 7 Multiple Choice Questions in the Ouestion Designer page 104 one answer can be authored in a fixed order or randomized Answer choices can also be displayed horizontally or vertically 8 Numeric Questions in the Ouestion Designer page 106 can be defined to require a number and a unit dimension or simply a number as the answer You can set grading tolerance and answer precision using one of four methods 9 Sketch Questions in the Question Designer page 108 can be used to create and or operate on various sketch types Using the Question Designer you can enter the question text and the correct answers wherever they appear Questions can contain multiple response cells that may all be different types For more details on authoring each question type in Question Designer see Authoring in the Question Designer page 95 Grading Question Designer questions are graded individually depending on the types of questions embedded The Question Designer supports all the features offered with that individual question type for example margin of error significant figures and tolerance For more details see the grading policies fo
252. e the answer to be left in unsimplified form the student would leave their answer in the form 4x x rather than simplify to 5x Example To create a Formula without Simplifcation subtype question l From the Class Homepage click the Questions menu 2 Click New Question oA In the Question Type list click Question Designer 4 Click Insert Edit Response Area In the Edit Response Area dialog a Weighting specify the weight of this response area in the overall question b Under Sub type select Formula without Simplification C Answer enter the correct answer See Figure 5 6 below 104 Authoring Question Types My Homepage Help Courtney Jones Algebra 2 Class User Manager Proctor Tools Assignments Guestions Gradebook _ Edit Response Area Choose Question Type gt Mathematical formula Essay Free Body Diagram Weighting 4 List Maple graded SubAype Formula without simplification Math App Mathematical formula Answer Multiple Choice AX X Numeric Sketch Figure 5 6 Formula without Simplification in Question Designer d Click OK 5 Enter a title for the question under the Question Name panel 6 Enter a question in the Question Text Optionally enter the question using symbolic math by clicking the Equation Editor 2 jicon The Equation Editor opens See Formatting Tips page 94 7 To add an Algorithm or Feedback to the question s
253. e the following pedagogical approaches e For Mastery assignments instructors create carefully structured collections of questions grouped by learning objectives These assignments usually draw from a large pool of assignment material often algorithmically generated to produce limitless question permutations Mastery assignments require a login and password and results are recorded in the Gradebook e For Study Sessions students control the study process by practicing question after question Questions can provide hints and full solutions that are available to students while they work Results are displayed one question at a time and are not recorded in the Gradebook Mastery Assignments For Mastery assignment types you first create an assignment by selecting questions Step 2 as with other for credit assignments However when selecting questions for a mastery assignment you must give careful pedagogical consideration to structuring questions by learning objective Question groups can be especially important in the instructional design of Mastery assignments In Step 3 Setting Policies you create rules that establish the minimum number of questions in each learning objective that must be answered correctly before the student can move to the next learning objective For students the graded results of their responses on individual questions at each level of learning objective determines their progression through the assignment When students
254. e true 1 algorithm h1 int rint 35 5 Sh2 int rint 35 5 Sml rand 10 70 3 m2 sig 3 m1 h1 h2 qu 1 1 name Physics Applet Question qu 1 1 editing useHTML 1 1 1 sL ea 1 1 1 GAC EGECECECEG EGE Applet Question Authoring There are three steps to creating an Applet Question Steps 1 and 2 require some familiarity with Java programming 1 Create and deploy the Java applet 2 Create and deploy a Java class grading 3 Author the question Step 1 Create and Deploy a Java Applet The applet is required to do three things 1 Provide a getResponse method which can be queried to find the current student response 2 Call method getParameter response to read the response parameter for a string containing any previous attempt at a response to this question and initialize the applet to display that state 3 Call method getParameter locked to read the locked parameter and disable user modifications 1f the flag is set You can also make additional getParameter paramName values to read any additional parameters for initialization These are passed to the param fields in the question see Step 3 After creating the applet place it in the applets directory or an appropriate subdirectory if packages are used on the Maple T A server Step 2 Create and Deploy a Java Class for Grading This is a server side grader module that accepts the student response as prepared by the applet and compares it a
255. e used a different addressing scheme You might also want to delete strings 1f there are addresses you do not want to be replaced For example 1f you intend to always refer to the copies of images stored on that particular class that is you are not copying the images you might want to leave the URLs like http server name classes yourclass in place 9 9 Importing HTML Content for Question Creation The Import HTML Content button is used to create a new question designer question from an HTML page To use the Import HTML Content feature Create a ZIP file containing one or more HTML pages and related image files From your Class Homepage select the Questions menu and then select Course Modules From the Course Modules screen click Import HTML Content Click Choose File Navigate to the ZIP file on your hard drive a network drive or an Internet resource and click Open Click Import to initiate the file upload YJ A WNW A Ww N Ra On the next screen select the HTML pages to upload e Warning messages notify you of links in the HTML page to files that are not found in the ZIP file 8 Optionally select Create an assignment from this package to create an assignment Specify a name for the assignment 9 Click Install 10 A question designer question is created for each of the web pages The confirmation page lists the names of each created question as well as a new assignment if applicable and uploaded resource f
256. each selected incorrect answer 2 Sum these scores If this result is negative then it is replaced by 0 3 Divide by the total number of correct answers 205 Authoring Question Types 4 Multiply by the total points for the question defined during assignment creation That is for a multiple selection question the score 1s given by the following formula selected correct answers selected incorrect answers Total of correct answers AOON e OPORE with the exception that if the numerator is less than 0 it is set to 0 For example if the correct answers are a and b and the incorrect answers are c and d then selecting all four would score 0 and selecting a b and c would score 50 If the multiple selection question is included as a part of a multipart or question designer question the question score is multiplied by the question part weighting to determine the grade for the question Question part weighting is set in the question definition Instructions To create a Multiple Selection question 1 Select the Questions menu then New Question The Question Editor is displayed 2 On the Question Type screen a Select Multiple Selection b It is recommended that you enter a description in the Question Description text field The description is used to label the question in the topic If excluded the question type is used c You can add Algorithms Information Fields Hints or Feedback For more details s
257. ed to 4 significant digits is 3 142 However 3 143 is graded incorrect because it is not within 0 001 of 3 14159 Example 2 5 To specify a percentage margin of error use grading toler_perc and perc lt percentage gt where lt percentage gt is the percentage margin of error This question grades correct any answer within 0 1 of 3 14159 question Estimate pi to within 1 answer num 3 141594 answer units showUnits false grading toler perc perc 0 1 mode Numeric name Pi 0 1 editing useHTML EEE Applet Questions Your question banks can integrate interactive learning objects in the form of J ava applets Question Mode Applet Question file qu syntax qu x y mode Applet The Applet question presents a Java applet Students are required to interact with the applet using the mouse and or keyboard to alter the applet or identify hot spots in the movie to produce the correct answer qu 1 1 mode Applet qu 1 1 question The left hand ball has mass of ml kg and the right hand ball has mass m2 kg The center mass of the left ball is hl meters above the ground Move the right hand ball to the height that gives it the same potential energy as the ball on the left Plain Text Script Authoring answer h2 Q applet applets sliderBall SliderBall width 100 height 200 param right 2 param left h1 grader class gateway question grader StringMatch 1 grader param ignoreCas
258. editing useHTML qu 1 3 algorithm InitialSize int rint 2 10 1000 DoublingTime rint 5 10 S NumDays rint 2 4 DeltaTime int NumDays 24 SExponent 1n 2 SDoublingTime Size int InitialSize e SExponent DeltaTime qu 1 3 question A bacterial culture is initially of size InitialSize If the doubling time is DoublingTime hours what is the size of the culture after NumDays days qu 1 3 answer Size 1 qu 1 3 tolerance 1 0E 9 293 For general information on algorithmic variables see Overview of Algorithmic Question Capabilities page 258 Example 1 4 You can use margins of errors with complicated answers Enclose the answer in parentheses when there is a percentage margin of error Otherwise the percentage error multiplies only the last term in your answer mode Formula name Absolute margin of error in sum comment The total area is AreaSquare SAreaCircle editing useHTML 1 4 algorithm length rand 2 15 2 S diameter rand 3 10 2 SAreaSquare length S length SAreaCircle decimal 2 pi diameter 2 2 qu 1 4 question What is the total area of a square with sides of length length and a circle with diameter Sdiameter qu 1 4 answer S length 2 pi diameter 2 2 1 0 01 qu 1 4 tolerance 1 0E 9 hhh 4 4 4 4 20922 Important e The exact answer is enclosed in parentheses so that the margin of error applies to both terms in the sum If the ans
259. ee Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 and Adding and Editing Information Fields Hints or Feedback page 74 d Click Finish 3 On the Question Details screen a In the text box enter the question statement b In the Choices for the answers text fields enter the possible choices and select the radio buttons corresponding to the correct answers To add additional choice boxes click Add Choices c Click Finish to place a copy of your question in the web site cache and preview your question Example 1 Creating a Simple Multiple Selection Question To create a simple Multiple Selection question 1 From the Class Homepage click the Questions menu Click New Question In the Question Type list click Multiple Selection Enter the following for Question Name Fictitious forces Enter the following for Question Text Which of the following are examples of fictitious forces Click Add Choice two times under Choices for the answer NY DO a A W N Enter the following five choices e Centripetal force e Centrifugal force e Frictional force e Coriolis force e A force experienced by an observer in a non inertial reference frame 206 Authoring Question Types 8 Select the check box next to the correct answers These are as follows Centrifugal force Coriolis force e A force experienced by an observer in a non inertial reference frame 9 The default option for Change the order of the choices is yes
260. ee Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 and Adding and Editing Feedback page 75 8 To proceed to the Question Details screen click Finish 9 To view and test the question click Preview Next Steps To edit further details in the Question Repository within the Question Designer see Editing Question Details in the Question Respository page 84 See Also Mathematical Formula Question Types Comparison Table page 137 Multiple Choice To create a Multiple Choice question 1 Enter a title for the question under the Question Name panel 2 Enter a question in the Question Text 3 Click Insert Edit Response Area 3 4 Select the Multiple Choice question type in the Edit Response Area dialog Multiple Choice Weighting H Selection 2 Single Permute Choices Display 2 Vertical Choices Mon permuting Source 1 choice 1 2 choice Figure 5 7 Multiple Choice Response Area in the Question Designer 4 Select Single for one correct answer or Multiple for multiple correct answers Multiple Permuting Horizontal 5 To rearrange the order of the displayed choices select Permuting 6 Select the display format of the choices in a table Vertical or Horizontal 7 For Choices enter the text that defines the choices for the question Source 2 1 ABC 2 DEF body ol li 105 Authoring Question Types 106 Authoring Question Types 8 Click OK The Edit Response Area dialog ope
261. ee Also Essay Questions page 129 Plain Text Script Authoring Question Modes Question Types page 328 Fill in the Blanks Question Source Script The blanks question type has been deprecated Use the Question Designer question type instead For a sample Question Designer question see Question Designer Question Example using Various Embedded Questions page 355 Flash Questions Question Mode Flash Question file qu syntax qu x y mode Flash The Flash question presents a Flash movie of the question Students are required to interact with the movie using the mouse and or keyboard to alter the movie or identify hot spots in the movie to produce the correct answer 1 mode Flash 1 movie lt path to your swf file gt 1 question Move the red disk to the point x S y 1 answer x Sy 1 width 400 1 height 400 1 algorithm x range 1 8 y range 1 8 4 1 1 name Graph Coordinates 1 1 editing useHTML PPP PP PP PEEL EEE Flash Question Authoring To create a Flash movie you will need Flash development software for example Adobe Flash CS3 and some familiarity with Flash programming Your flash movie must implement the following features e A pair of variables called response and locked should be declared e Whenever a student interacts with the movie and brings it to a new state that state should be translated into a text string and assigned to the variable response You are free to dec
262. ee Maple graded Formula page 156 The student responds using other Maple T A formula question syntax e A student is required to use Maple commands and expressions in a response to a question generated using Maple Syntax with the Text entry response option For details see Maple Syntax page 157 Difference Between Maple graded Formula and Maple Syntax with Text Entry Mode in Syntax Checking These two subtypes are distinguished by syntax checking of the student response e The system verifies the syntax of a student response for a Maple graded Formula question using a basic syntax checker For details see Maple graded Formula page 156 e The system does not verify the syntax of a student response for a Maple Syntax question As the author you can verify whether the student 1s using a Maple command to calculate the answer For details see Maple Syntax page 157 Difference Between Text Entry and Symbolic Entry for Student Response in Maple Syntax Questions With a Maple Syntax question you can choose whether the students enter responses using Text mode or Symbol mode In both cases the response 1s sent to Maple where you can apply sophisticated grading methods to evaluate the student response e A student can enter math expressions including Matrices in a natural way using Symbol mode For example a student can enter a Matrix using a palette e A student is required to use Maple commands and expressions in a response to a qu
263. een e nee c ence cece cece eee eee e seas eee e eae eee es 84 Table 5 12 Different Question Types Available 1m the System ld Laas 91 Table 5 2 Ditierent Types of Graphs Available an Maple TA acco Gace cate eunes a a 116 Table 53 Subcuryes Avarlable tm Maple TA calada aaa 119 Table 4 Propentes 0 Lan adapte lua ere 121 Table 5 5 Mathematical Formula Subtypes Comparison Table a a da Ca 137 Tables3 6 Rules a d Keys for Enterine Chemistry EX PESOS ecis A a a E iE 152 Table 5 Maplescraded Question with Partial Credit aca aaa aaa aaa aaa 158 Table Guidelines for Entera Chemisty Expressions ta 229 Table 62 Koyboard Shortcuts tor the Equation Editor a A A A EEEN 232 Tablezo 3D titi Pates A o 235 Table 6 4 Options TOP the mata ME PU od add Sos de 242 Table 6 Mathematical Punctionsand Operas acia 246 Table 0 6 Hyperbolic and Inverse Hyperbolic LUCIO a a 246 Table G fe VAP le NOTO NR a 247 T bles0 s Base units recognized by Maple LA a cda tal listos 247 Table GI Derived units Tecoonized Dy Maple LA ii 248 Tablex6 10 Other Units recosnized by Maple DA A eS 251 Table GAT Formaltine Numbers WI DIM a A ias 256 Tabie o P Random Number Generators tabs dr sa aa leas 262 Table 6 15 Maple Randomizaron COS a e recat a st eae eeae 263 Tablet IA Options Tor Gir and JPEG POS di dl Ata e dd a oe 270 Table 6 15 Mathematical Functions that Students Can US lis 275 Table 6 16 Mathematical Functions Reserved for Instructor Use incoaci n aaa eons al
264. efault e To unselect all assignments click Clear Selection under the Select Assignments tab e To reselect assignments hold down the Ctrl key Command on Macintosh to select more than one assignment Specify additional search criteria In the View Panel tab select the data to include in the search results N Nn A Click Search to perform the search To start a new search from the menu bar select Gradebook gt Search again and then select Class Grades or Item Statistics Setting Search Criteria The Filter Results panel shown in Figure 7 1 is used to request data from the database My Homepage Help Courtney Jones Instructor Logout statistics 100 Class User Manager Proctor Tools Assignments Questions Gradebook Gradebook Filter Results Classes All Default Clear Selection List All students Iv User Results Best Date from Progress Completed Date to Custom User Field Any field equals Enter Custom Field valu Figure 7 1 Filter Results in Gradebook To perform a search you must specify the assignment or assignments to include You can select assignments by name or by assignment type To include all assignments click AH If desired customize your gradebook search using the options in the Filter Results panel e List specify whether to show all enrolled students students with grades or other users with grades 291 Working with the Gradebook e Results sele
265. efault each new question in your assignment is added with a weight of one point To change the weighting of individual questions change the point value in the Points column for the question This is shown in the image below Assignment Questions Delete Merge UnMerge Generate a new question order a Never L 1 wv Determinant Qudstion L 2 w Binomial Coefficient Total Points otal Questions Points The Total Points at the bottom of the column automatically adjusts as you change individual question weights 48 Creating and Managing Assignments Note The question score values you assign here apply only to Assessment style assignments such as Homework or Quiz Anonymous Practice and Proctored Exam Mastery and Study Session Assignments do not use these settings because they employ other pedagogical scoring models Randomizing Question Delivery In Step 2 Select Questions it is possible to automatically scramble the sequence of questions delivered each time a new assignment is presented to a student Use the drop down menu shown below to select Never On the first attempt or Every attempt Assignment Questions Delete Merge UnMerge Generate a new question order Points g 1 a E 2 Binomial Coefficient 3 A Total Points 5 Total Questions 2 Note In the Review Finish tab random question ordering is referred to as Versioning This term is used because scrambling the sequenc
266. eld set then you can use the id tag to refer to the response the student provided to that question during an assignment e To refer to the student response to one question in another question use the variable Sresponse foobar where foobar is the id field from the first question Example In this example the first question has id 123456 The second question refers to this question using response 123456 in both the question field and answer field Ha topic Question Chaining mode Blanks 1d 123456 name Chaining Question 1 editing useHTML question Pick a number between 1 and 7 lt l gt blank 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 grader 1 formula extra PRPRPPRPPP Pe PPRPPRPRPP Pe mode Numeric name Chaining Question 2 editing useHTML question What is the sum of response 123456 and 177 algorithm x 0 answer num S response 123456 17 answer units showUnits false grading exact_value CIC RARARARR Pp NNNNNNDNND Details on Question Chaining The referring questions does not need to be in the same question bank but they must use the correct ID code The contents of Sresponse foobar is a string Note response foobar can be used only in in line dynamic text it cannot be used in the algorithm section of a question because the algorithm 1s initialized before the assignment is started Questions frequently have multipart responses For example suppose foob
267. elect whole number from the list 10 Enter 1 and 10 as the minimum and maximum values for the range 11 Enter 1 in the in steps of field 12 Click OK 13 In the Choose Worksheet section click Choose Worksheet then select the ParameterTest worksheet that you created in the first part of this example 14 In the Initialization Parameters section assign a as the value for parameter val In other words val a 15 Under the heading Select the type of grading used select Grading Algorithm in Math App 16 Click Finish Example 1 Exploring a Series Expansion 1 d n k Enter the expression gt x 4 K 0 K 2 2 Right click the expression and select Explore The Explore dialog box opens 3 In the Explore dialog box enter 1 for the lower end of n Beside the variable x check the skip box on the right this will keep the variable x in the solution When you are finished click Explore 4 A new table is created inline with the expression and a slider for n Move the slider back and forth to see its effect on the expression Tip When you are entering value ranges for the variables you would like to explore be sure they are mathematically acceptable e g avoid causing a value of zero in the denominator Example 2 Exploring an Integral Numerically l x Enter the expression a sin b x dx 0 2 Right click the expression and select Explore The Explore dialog box opens 184 Authoring Question Types 3 Use the
268. em it performs a set of validation routines to ensure that the questions function Occasionally you may encounter an error with a variable name or definition upon uploading The following is a summary of the system s analysis of variables upon initial loading of a question bank file e For variables displayed within HTML text for example in a question statement or feedback area a problematic variable does not produce a data value generated from its definition Instead its variable name is displayed highlighted in red e For variables appearing in non displayed field parameters for example the answer to a question the variables SANSWER and SRESPONSE default to 0 All others have the variable name passed See Also Exporting Work to Your Hard Drive page 88 Creating and Opening Modules If you want to share not just your questions but also images and assignments that you have created based on those questions you should use course modules Once you create a course module you can send it to other instructors who can upload it into their classes and use it as is or alter it to better suit their needs Course modules can be uploaded to other installations of Maple T A not just the one at your institution To create a course module 1 Log in as an instructor and click on the class that contains the content you want to share 2 Click Questions then Course Modules 3 Click New 4 Select the content that you want included in the cours
269. ement and refresh the values in the algorithm text box click OK 3 Repeat the above steps to add other statements For detailed information see the appropriate section e Generating Random Number Variables page 70 e Generating Condition based Variables page 71 e Using Maple to Generate Random Number Variables page 71 e Establishing Conditions Between Variables page 72 Generating Random Number Variables is arandom whole number between and in steps of var expr expr expr Figure 4 4 Create a Random Number Variable 71 Managing Questions You can use the Algorithm Designer to create range based variables 1 Enter the variable name in the first cell You do not need to use the or notation 2 Select the type of number to generate whole number or decimal number generation with 1 to 8 decimal places 3 Enter the minimum and maximum values for the range and the increment step Note For each expression you can enter a e Variable name for example x or monthly totals You do not need to use the or notation e Number for example 5 or 2 67 e Math expression or formula for example x 2 1 4 To add the variable definition to the algorithm text box click OK 5 You can use the Algorithm Designer to generate multiple variables Generating Condition based Variables is setto be if equals ll otherwise fs setto var 7 expr 7 expr 7 expr 7 expr You can also
270. ens ON 291 Powie a set ala SealGl ar ir io eau id Data 291 Pga TA Grade Data Scar iia ida 292 igure 7o Summary Data CAC STE SAS AAA AS AAA AA daa sado 292 Figure 7 6 Grade Reports and Available Assignments A ai 300 Pigute AT Reorderine ASS AMES ed 301 Fiore 7 0 Rubric Table Editor baii 303 Foure 797 Delete RUDO a AS AA AAA AAA AAA 303 Preure 7105 Rubro Lale cicle 304 igure KIT Class Homepa e DO ld nd 305 Figure 7 12 Import External Grades into the Gradebook from a File 0c cece cece renee ence cence eee ence ene ee Enea ea EEE EEE 306 Figure 8 1 Authorization tor Proctored BEOWSEL sd ASE AA AKE nals SRE hanes wg ans 311 Figure 9 1 Create Import Export of Delete Course Modules 2c iote actos hin eae isto waite a a 314 Fistite 9 2 Create Course Module a A beh fd cr ca a eclectic Ipecac ee Aa 316 Figure A 1 Input Field For A Multipart Formula Question did id 352 List of Tables able Ie System Overview OL COMPONEN IS serrat rasias l ME a A O E E 40 Table 4 1 Examples of HIML Tags to Use for Formatting Le a a dew ea daa 76 Table 4 2 Question Repository Available Actions through the Drop down Menu cccccec eee ceecec eee eeee eee eee ease eeseneeneenens 83 Table 4 3 Question Repository Available Actions using Bottom Buttons ccc ccc cece eee e nce e ence eee eee e eee eee e eases ease ene eaees 83 Table 4 4 Question Repository Available actions in the question edit screen cece cece cece
271. ent gt Sketch the graph of the function lt math xmlns http WWW w3 org 1998 Math MathML display inline gt lt mi gt y lt mi gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt msup gt lt mrow gt lt mi gt x lt mi gt lt mrow gt lt mrow gt lt mn gt 2 lt mn gt lt mrow gt lt msup gt lt mo gt amp 8725 lt mo gt lt mn gt a2 lt mn gt lt math gt lt p gt da Oe 2 gridlines 4 qu qu 1 2 axes xmax xmax 4 4 qu 1 2 axes labeled true gqu 1 2 axes background ImageBase Q qu 1 2 example x 2 S a 1 0 0 a 1 x 2 qu 1 2 answer check goes_through 1 0 0 amp amp goes_through 1 a 1 amp amp goes_through 1 a 1 amp amp slope_at 1 0 0 amp amp decreasing restriction 1 x 0 amp amp increasing restriction 1 0 x amp amp concave_up 1 qu 1 2 info See Also Question Modes Question Types page 328 Key Word or Phrase Question Source Script There is no Question Editor interface for Key Words or phrase questions To create a key word question you must use a text or HTML editor to produce script files In Key Words questions the text of the student response is checked for key words The system ignores other text extra white space and capitalization in the student response In the correct answer identify keywords by enclosing them in parentheses The complete text of your correct answer omitting parenthes
272. ent is finished the assignment after incorrectly answering a predefined number of questions Grade Assignment When bh 10 Questions Seen 10 Correct Responses _ 10 incorect Responses Figure 3 18 Defining An Exit Strategy Defining Branch Switching Procedures To define how a student will move from branch to branch within an adaptive assignment do the following 1 Click the Policies button shown below Assignment Editor 1 Choose Name 2 Select Questions 3 Set Policies 4 Review amp Finish Policies stat Y el ES 59 Creating and Managing Assignments 2 Under the Grade Policy and under Adaptive Policy select the Basic radio buttons as shown below The basic options you select define how a student moves between branches by specifying the number of correct or incorrect responses permitted before the system jumps to a more or less difficult branch Grade Policy Basic O ELO O Algorithmic Adaptive Policy Basic O Algorithmic Increase difficulty when 1 v non consecutive Correct Responses Decrease difficulty when ind non consecutive Incorrect Responses Figure 3 19 Defining Branch Switching Procedures 3 Using the Algorithmic option you can customize exactly how a student will move from branch to branch using Maple syntax Set Policies Tab When creating an adaptive assignment the set policies tab is similar to the set policies tab when creating a regular assignment
273. ents You can add questions to your assignment by e Adding individual questions by using Add as items or e Adding questions as a group by using Add as Group You can use any combination of selection methods when creating an assignment You can combine any number of individual questions and question groups in a single assignment Adding Individual Questions To add individual questions 1 In the Assignment Editor Select Questions tab select a source question using the radio buttons 2 Expand groups into individual questions by clicking on a group subgroup name 3 Select questions using the check boxes 46 Creating and Managing Assignments Y Y Multiple Choice A YY Short Phrase Exact Match El Dynamic Figure Labels Economics Ye El Maple Formula Plot Question Add as items Add as group 4 Click Add as items to place the selected questions into your assignment Add Questions as a Group Questions added as a group are loaded into a single question pool You can use the drop down menu to specify the number of questions to be selected by the system from this pool during your assignment Question groups are useful in designing a Mastery assignment To add questions as a group 1 In the Assignment Editor Select Questions tab select a source question using the radio buttons 2 Expand the groups into individual questions by clicking on a group subgroup name 3 Select questions using the check boxes 4
274. ents on or off control access to hints during assignment sessions before grading or withhold feedback until after the assignment due date has passed Hints and Feedback You can allow access to question hints if they exist in any assignment type Hints and Question Feedback contained in the Feedback field of a question are not always present in the source questions in the question repository You can add hints or feedback by using the Question Editor and editing these fields for individual questions If you choose to display hints and feedback and your source questions lack them the system ignores the display settings but otherwise provides a grading report to students In a grading report the system displays question feedback from the Feedback field if it exists or if not shows the correct answer value as defined in the Answer field Note To display hints during an assignment or custom feedback after grading your questions must contain content in hint fields or the feedback field Selecting Feedback Options To display hints during an assignment select Show hints To display the current score at the top of the screen during an assignment select Show current grade at top of assignment To allow students to resubmit responses to questions during the assignment select Allow students to resubmit answers to questions Note Resubmission of answers is always allowed for Anonymous Practice Mastery and Study Session assignments types This
275. er experience Mobile accessible With Maple T A 10 students can take tests and assignments from their iPad Android tablets and more e Students can access everything they need including class homepages assignments and the gradebook from both desktop computers and tablets e All math and Maple based questions are fully supported on tablets including standard math notation in questions and responses as well as the full range of visualization options New Equation Editor No Browser Plug in Required Maple T A 10 includes a new equation editor that works directly in the browser eliminating the need for students and instructors to have a Java plug in for their browsers e The new equation editor works directly in any supported browser including iPads e Students can start working on assignments immediately without being distracted by the need to install or update a Java plug in e The equation editor which is powered by HTMLS loads significantly faster than the previous editor so there is no delay before it can be used Customizable Interface Maple T A 10 includes more options to customize what students see when they are in the Maple T A environment e Instructors can specify what information appears at the top of their class pages such as class announcements office hours tutorial times and locations and welcome videos e Administrators can change the look and feel of Maple T A using CSS and custom HTML such
276. er the following for the Correct answer In the Number field enter 2 77 e Inthe Units field enter m Note To require a unit with the answer enter the correct unit dimension m for meters in the Units Part field Since units are specified the students are presented with two cells one for the number part and one for the unit dimension Students must enter correct values in both cells to receive full credit for the question If you do not specify units students are only presented with one answer cell 6 Leave Precision and Input format as their default settings 7 Click Finish 8 Click Preview to view the question as shown in Figure 5 64 You can test the question by selecting various responses Preview Question gt Rounding Round 2 76789 m to three significant digits Number Units Close Figure 5 64 Numeric Example 2 Example 3 Numeric and Algorithmic Variables 1 From the Class Homepage select the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 On the Question Type list click Numeric 4 Enter the following title for the Question Name Degree of a polynomial At the bottom of the page click the add icon Si and enter the following Algorithm a range 2 5 poly maple randomize randpoly x degree a displaypoly maple printf MathML ExportPresentation poly 215 Authoring Question Types 5 Click Refresh algorithm preview to preview the variables you defined as shown in Figure 5 65
277. er to the final answer The student will receive reduced credit for answering the question that way This question is created in the Question Editor as an Adaptive Question Designer question The question presented to the student will ask What is the derivative of x cos x w r t x If the student answers the question correctly they receive full credit and the question is complete However if the student answers the question incorrectly the next section of the question will be presented This section steps through the process of differentiating the given expression 67 Managing Questions To create the question 1 From the Class Homepage select the Questions menu 2 Click New Question The Question Editor is displayed 3 In the Question Type list click Adaptive Question Designer 4 Enter the following for Question Name Adaptive Question Derivative 5 Enter the following for Algorithm Seqn x cos x ON Click Refresh algorithm preview to preview the variables you defined 7 In the Question Text field enter the following What is the derivative of x cos x w r t x 8 Click Insert Edit Response Area 0 9 The Edit Response Area dialog opens a Select the Maple graded question type b In the Answer region enter the following diff eqn x c In the Grading Code region ensure the grading code is is SANSWER SRESPONSE 0 d In the Expression Type field select Formula e Click OK
278. erify the student s identity and then enter the proctor password to allow the student to begin or to grade the test A proctor can enter his or her password at the student s workstation local authorization Proctors also have the ability to authorize the student from their own computer remote authorization The benefit of using remote authorization 1s that the proctor does not need to enter his or her password in front of the student When a student attempts a test that is proctored an Authorize screen is displayed This screen indicates that the student requires authorization Typically a proctor is physically present in the same computer lab during testing sessions When notified by the student 18 Creating and Managing Classes proctors can also conveniently authorize a student exam session from their own work station using Proctor Tools Proctors can then notify the student s they are giving permission to See Figure 2 5 Proctor Tools User Search Search Search for students registered in Records PerPage 25 7 his class Search Reset Fields Authorize Which Assignment re rmission to be Given Extend end date unti Grant additional time Select Students m select an set Permission User Login FirstName LastName Email Student ID Holds Permission End Date Time Limit Assignment pparker Peter Parker pparken email edu 20239501 bwayne Bruce Wayne bwaynegemail edu 20491849 ckent Clark Kent ckentimemail edu 20593920 3 items
279. es view xmin xmax ymin ymax This option indicates the minimum and maximum coordinates of the curve to be displayed on the screen The default 1s the entire curve See the description for the tickmarks option ytickmarks n See the description for the tickmarks option See Also plotmaple text page 269 3 D Plot Statement Options Options to the Maple plot 3d function are given after the first three arguments as equations of the form option value 279 Authoring Mathematical Questions For example plotmaple plot3d sin x y x Pi Pi y 1 1 lightmodel light1 The options described below are supported Table 6 18 Option for 3 D Plots ambientlight r g b This option sets the red green and blue intensity of the ambient light for user defined lighting The values of r g and b must be numeric in the range 0 to 1 This option specifies how the axes are to be drawn where f is one of boxed normal frame or none The default value is none The value can be in lowercase or uppercase This option defines a color value or function Note that color specification takes precedence over shading specification regardless of the order of the options in the command This option specifies the number of contours or a list of contour values where n is a positive integer or a list of contour values The default value is 10 This option specifies the coordinate system to be used The default is Cartesian If the
280. es If the file 1s not a zip archive the system does not upload the file The system returns to the Class File Manager screen The uploaded file s appear in the web site explorer 6 To upload additional files repeat steps 3 to 5 Important The maximum size of a file that can be uploaded is 5 MB Example of Reference to Image on the Class Web Site To include an image in a question using the Question Editor 1 Create or edit a question in the Question Editor 2 In the field where you want to include the image question text feedback or hints click the image icon 4 from the menu bar 3 Under the Image Info tab click Browse Server and select the image You will be shown a preview of the image 4 Click OK to add the image To use an HTML reference to an image file you have uploaded to your class web site use lt img src classes myclassurl question image gif gt where myclassurl is the unique identifier in your class URL and quaestion image gif is the name of the image file 78 Managing Questions If you have created subfolders in your class web site use lt img src classes myclassurl subfolder question image gif gt where subfolder is the subfolder or subfolders specifying the subfolder path Example of Link to File on the Class Web Site To include a link to a file for example a PDF in a question using the Question Editor 1 Create or edit a question in the Question Editor 5 In the
281. es is used as feedback if the student response 1s incorrect The following example source script creates a Key Words question qu 1 topic Key Words Question Example Script qu 1 1 mode Key Words qu 1 1 name lt b gt Translation into French four houses lt b gt qu 1 1 question lt b gt Translate into French lt b gt lt p gt four houses lt p gt g gt qu 1 1 answer The French phrase for four houses is quatre maisons j Plain Text Script Authoring See Also Question Modes Question Types page 328 Labeling Graphics in Questions Source Script The following example source script creates a Numeric question with a labeled graph Suppose you have uploaded an image file to your class and its URL is web MyClass Public_Html ball gif qu 1 1 mode Numeric qu 1 1 question lt p class noindent gt A ball is thrown upward from the top of a 40 foot high tower at an initial velocity of 64 feet second The graph of the height of the ball versus time is shown below What is the maximum height of the ball in feet Express your answer to an accuracy of at least 3 significant figures lt div class labelledImage style height 250px width 200px float none gt lt img src web MyClass Public_Html ball gif gt lt div style left 120px top 10px class centered gt time seconds lt div gt lt div style left 10px top 100px class centered gt height meters lt div gt lt div gt 1 answer
282. esigner can be edited See Also Question Designer Questions page 92 Adaptive Question Designer Questions page 121 Grading Assigning partial credit in multipart questions is closely related to establishing point values for the individual parts during construction of the question in the Question Editor As you build a multipart question in the Question Editor you can assign a question weight to each part of the question In this way you control partial credit in multipart questions See Also Partial Credit and Weighted Scoring page 198 Instructions You can create a multipart question in the Question Editor by selecting questions for its parts from a question group To create and organize the parts for a multipart question Create a question group in the Question Repository that will contain the questions that will form the parts of your multipart question It is necessary to add the questions to a group 1 If necessary create or import questions 2 If necessary reorder the questions To create a Multipart question Important In order to start creating a Multipart question the questions you want to use must be in groups For more information see Multipart Questions Sequencing Parts page 197 1 From the Class Homepage select the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 On the Question Type list click Multipart question 4 On the Import Questions screen a Select the radio button corresponding to the gro
283. ess Students who try to start the assignment while it is locked are notified with a warning message See Also Assignment Types Overview page 40 Options in the Assignment Editor Active Order Assignment Points 0 1 y era edit r 2 w pa 63 0 y p Copy hide Maple graded 1 0 print summary Figure 3 2 Options in the Assignment Editor From the list of assignments in the Assignment Editor you can modify and manage existing assignments To view the options click the assignment name The options are as follows e Edit assignments by clicking edit e Copy assignments by clicking copy e Delete assignments by clicking delete The delete option is not available for shared assignments e Hide assignments from student view in the Class Homepage by clicking hide e Print displays a preview of the assignment To print the assignment use your web browser s print controls button icon or menu e View a summary of the assignment by clicking summary e Force grade a locked assignment by clicking force grade The force grade option is only available for locked active assignments Creating New Assignments To create a new assignment 1 From the Class Homepage select Assignments menu 2 Click New Assignment 3 The Assignment Editor screen opens See Figure 3 1 26 Creating and Managing Assignments The Assignment Editor organizes assignment creation into a four step process e Naming your assignment e Select
284. essage WARNING The course module you have uploaded contains resources which will overwrite components that you already have installed The components which will overwrite your existing course components are highlighted in the table below If you do not want these course components erased and replaced with new ones press Cancel or ensure that they are not selected in the table below To proceed select the components that you want to install from the table below and press Install 6 At this point you can install the new components in your class overwriting the original components or you can clear the check box adjacent to the duplicate element in the course module details prior to proceeding You can also select or clear other elements of the course module for installation into your class The default installation behavior is to install all course module elements however by clearing individual parts you can choose the specific elements you want to install Click Install to copy and install all the selected course module elements into your destination class 7 The new course module appears in the list of available course modules for your class and all of the elements you selected appear in their respective areas throughout your class web site Questions are listed in the Question Repository assignments appear in the Assignment Editor and web resources are displayed in the Class File Manager Requirements e Course modules are files with a
285. estion generated using Maple Syntax with the Text entry response option For details see Maple Syntax page 157 Guidelines for Using Maple Code for Maple graded Questions e A Maple graded question must use valid Maple code to evaluate the answer Complete each line of code with a semicolon e The last line of your question code must evaluate to a Boolean value true or false or a floating point number between 0 0 and 1 1 for partial grading In many cases it is recommended that you use the Maple evalb command e Use the long form name for all package functions for example VectorCalculus ArcLength For an example that uses partial grading see Applying Partial Grading to Maple graded Questions page 158 Providing Feedback to Students e To display the correct answer as feedback for a student response you must enter the correct answer in the Enter Maple code that evaluates to the correct answer field e For open ended questions such as Give and example of an increasing function on the interval 0 10 it is recommended that you include a comment for a graded response Otherwise no comment is displayed as feedback to the student if the response is incorrect Feedback is entered in the Edit Response Area screen For more details see Adding and Editing Feedback page 75 Maple graded Question Type Help Pages The Algorithm Designer page 70 156 Authoring Question Types Using a Maple Repository page 81 Mathematical
286. estions all real numbers between 0 5 and 9 5 inclusive expressed to 3 significant figures For details on each of these functions see Functions and Arguments page 263 In addition to Maple T A s built in functions you can access Maple commands Maple provides many randomization commands The following table lists selected randomization commands in Maple For more information on Maple functions that can be used to generate random numbers refer to your Maple documentation Table 6 13 Maple Randomization Commands Maple Function generate a random 12 digit non negative integer or a random integer within a specified range inclusive randpoly random polynomial generator LinearAlgebra RandomMatrix construct a random Matrix LinearAlgebra RandomVector construct a random Vector RandomTools Generate generate a particular random object For example return a random complex number with real and imaginary parts of a specified flavor or choose one of the entries in a collection with equal probability Note When using Maple s random number generator rand you must include randomize as the first part of the call This sets the initial state of the random number generator using a number based on the system clock instead of the default seed in Maple Without randomize each call to rand will produce the same sequence of values using the default randomization seed For an example that uses Maple randomization commands se
287. estions page 114 Tickmark Properties in Sketch Questions page 114 Grid Properties in Sketch Questions page 115 Background Function Properties in Sketch Questions page 115 Group Plot Properties in Sketch Questions page 115 For Correct Answer use the sketch tools provided to plot the correct response Click OK and then Finish to save and preview the question See Also For more details on Sketch questions see Sketch Questions page 113 For Sketch question examples see Sketch Question Examples page 120 To edit further details in the Question Repository within the Question Designer see Editing Question Details in the Question Respository page 84 For more information on plotting with Maple see Plotting Using Maple page 242 Free Body Diagram Questions Description Free Body Diagram questions can be used to ask a student to draw forces from one or more starting points called control points over a background image Grading Students are graded on their ability to correctly answer i The type of force 2 The number of forces 3 The control point or points 4 The correct angle or angles 109 Authoring Question Types No partial marks are assigned however you can specify a question wide tolerance on the angles By default this tolerance is five degrees You can also customize how angles are matched on a per force basis For more details see Customizing How Angles Are Matched page 109
288. et Policies tab set the criteria by clicking Advanced near the top of the page Advanced policies can only be modfied if an assignment is inactive When you have completed your assignment rules and policies proceed to Step 4 Review amp Finish Criterion 1 has passed Calculus Assignment Add altemative criterion Remove criterion Add additional criterion Figure 3 12 Set Criteria for Assignments 39 Creating and Managing Assignments After setting Advanced criteria under the Set Policies tab a note appears in the Assignment Properties panel saying The Assignment has Advanced Polices set up Max of attempts allowed value can be set modified only from Advanced Policies Editor This message is shown below Assig nment Max attempts allowed Y Properties _ Assignment is only visible to students when the advanced policies are met Assignment Editor Step 4 Review amp Finish In the Review amp Finish tab of the Assignment Editor you can review assignment summary information including e Assignment Type e Questions Selected e Scheduled Availability e Rules and policies you established Previewing Questions To preview a question click the related link while in the Assignment Editor Editing Options e If you want to make a change clicking the link for each category returns you to the appropriate Assignment Editor tab e If your assignment is ready to save click Finish to return to the A
289. examples 1 From the System Homepage select the class called Maple T A Readiness Class 2 From the Assignments panel click Sketching Questions as shown in Figure 5 13 below Note Alternatively you can view Free Body Diagram questions individually through the Question Repository by selecting the group called Sketching Questions Readiness Class Class Homepage Proctor Tools Class Details John Smith jzivkug maplesoft com a Assignme nts Assignment Name Availability Attempts Best Score Unlimited 0 Unlimited Mot yet completed Student Readiness Test Unlimited 0 Unlimited Mot yet completed Demonstration Assignment Unlimited Unlimited Practice test Demonstration of Question Types Unlimited Unlimited Practice test Free Body Diagram Questions Unlimited 0 Unlimited Not yet completed Figure 5 13 Sketching Questions in the Readiness Class 121 Authoring Question Types Next Steps To edit further details in the Question Repository within the Question Designer see Editing Question Details in the Question Respository page 84 See Also Question Designer Question Example using Various Embedded Questions page 355 Adaptive Question Designer Questions page 121 Plotting Using Maple page 242 5 3 Adaptive Question Designer Questions Description Adaptive Question Designer questions can be used to create an adaptive multipart question in which the student 1s presented with one subquestion or section at a
290. f Error in Non numeric Questions page 227 For related plain text script file examples see Answer Tolerance Source Script page 336 Note It is recommended that you develop a policy for the tolerance in responses at the beginning of a project so that every numeric question uses similar policies See Also Tutorial Setting Margin of Tolerance in Non numeric Questions page 256 lsu n x page 267 decimal n x sig n x int x page 264 Setting a Margin of Error in Non numeric Questions Note Use the Question Editor s on screen dialog boxes for setting the margin of error in numeric and numeric with unit questions For more information see Setting the Answer Format in Numeric Questions page 211 For an introduction to the concept of margin of error see Controlling Answer Tolerance page 226 The exact answer is not always required In Maple T A you can specify a margin of error within which student responses are graded correct for any mathematical question type You can specify a margin of error for answers that are static or defined using algorithmic variables Use in the answer field to set a margin of error The plus or minus operator represents in ordinary math notation You can specify an absolute tolerance For example to accept2 5 0 25 that is any response between 2 25 and 2 75 inclusive use 2 5 0 25 You can also specify a percentage tolerance To accept 5 12 5 that is an
291. faster respond faster and use less memory Scoring Rubrics Some types of assignments such as oral presentations obviously cannot be completed inside Maple T A However with new scoring rubrics instructors can use Maple T A to communicate the expectations for that assignment record student grades provide students with their results and automatically include those grades in their overall results for the course e Create assignment rubrics in Maple T A for offline assignments and presentations e Present criteria expectations and rating values for each level in a standard rubric table e To grade the assignment simply click on the achieved rating level for each criterion and Maple T A calculates the final grade and stores the results e View rubrics from the students class homepage and view graded rubrics from the student and instructor gradebooks Enhanced Usability Streamlined Interface The Maple T A interface has been completely redesigned incorporating customer feedback from both instructors and students to create a more streamlined workflow e Improved assignment navigation offers next question and submit assignment buttons that are always visible e Easier question creation eliminates the need for page flipping by putting all the elements of a question together on a single page Preface e Page layout menus navigation and general appearance have been enhanced and streamlined to create a smoother us
292. fication of multiple correct answers and the ability to return partial credit for answers that are not 100 correct Authoring Free Response Questions The easiest way to create Blanks free response questions is by using the Question Editor but you can also author List questions using plain text scripting methods Key Word or Phrase Questions Although similar to these question types key word or phrase questions use a different grading approach for evaluating student responses in which student responses are evaluated for the presence of an identified word or phrase anywhere within the student response See Also Palette based Symbolic Editor Questions page 217 Key Word or Phrase Question Source Script page 345 List Questions in the Question Designer page 97 Mathematical Formula Question Types Comparison Table page 137 See Also List Questions in the Question Designer page 97 137 Authoring Question Types List Question Source Script page 346 Setting the Answer Tolerance in Numeric Questions page 212 Next Steps To edit further details in the Question Repository within the Question Designer see Editing Question Details in the Question Respository page 84 5 7 Mathematical Formula Questions Description Mathematical Formula questions allow instructors to compare a student response generally a mathematical expression to a specified answer Mathematical Formula is the general term encompassing nine differe
293. figuration System Homepage Your first step is to log into the Maple T A system using the username and password provided by the system administrator or course coordinator Logging into the system brings you to the System Homepage Once you are logged into the system you can create a new class if you have sufficient privileges You can upload a student roster or set open registration so that system users can enroll themselves in your class For details on creating a class see Creating a New Class page 6 If you have created any classes they are listed next on the System Homepage My Homepage Help Courtney Jones Instructor create Logout Class Manager System User Manager System Admin My Homepage Classes where my Class Name Parent Class role is Instructor Algebra 2 Maple TA Demonstration Class Statistics 100 Figure 1 1 System Homepage 4 Getting Started Additionally any classes in which you are a student or proctor are also listed under their own sections From the System Homepage click on a class name link to open the Class Homepage The Class Homepage To use Maple T A for homework management and online testing in your class you begin by creating a class After a class is set up users can access assignments quizzes proctored tests and results through the Class Homepage Students can register in your class 1f you allow for open enrollment otherwise you can add students by uploading a student roster
294. formation Expected Behaviors of Course Modules 1 Course modules encapsulate from the source class and allow you to reinstall questions in the destination class e Relative paths to resources are preserved and reinstalled e All question types including those requiring outside resources are preserved Note Different releases of the system may support different question types and earlier system releases may not support all question types 2 Course modules encapsulate from the source class and allow you to reinstall assignments in the destination class e Assignment behaviors and policies are preserved e Links to all source content and related resources are preserved 3 Course modules encapsulate from the source class and allow you to reinstall resource objects in the destination class e Relative paths are preserved for folders and subfolders of the class web site Underlying folder structure is preserved e Connections with questions and assignments through annotations are preserved 9 2 Creating a Course Module To share content using a course module first create a course module by choosing the items you wish to include After you have created the course module save the course module to your computer as a ZIP file You can then share the course module with others To create a new course module 1 From your Class Homepage select the Questions menu and then select Course Modules 2 Click the New button 3 A table displays all
295. fresh Figure 5 55 Multiple Choice Example 2 Example 3 Derivative of a Simple Expression To create a Derivative of a Simple Expression question 1 From the Class Homepage click the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 In the Question Type list click Multiple Choice 4 Enter the following for Question Name Derivative of a simple expression 5 Enter the following for Algorithm a 2 rint 7 b at 1 ab a b ba b a 6 Click Refresh algorithm preview to preview the variables you defined as shown in Figure 5 56 203 Authoring Question Types Algorithm a 2 rint 7 b a 1 Editthe code for your algorithm Sab a b in the text box below or click S ba b a Show Designer to use the algorithm designer The algorithm designer tool allows you to define algorithms for your Variable Value question by completing a form a 8 Show Designer Refresh algorithm preview 3 9 ab 72 ba 17 Figure 5 56 Multiple Choice Example 3 Algorithm 7 Enter the following for Question Text The derivative of a x b a is 8 Click Add Choice two times under Choices for the answer 9 Enter the following five choices b x 1 a b a x ba a b a x 1 a b x ba a b x b a 10 Select the radio button next to the answer In this case the correct answer is b x 1 a 11 The default option for Change the order of the choices is yes Do not change the default 12 The default option fo
296. g Flashcard style learning Not recorded Figure 3 7 Setting the Assignment Type 35 Creating and Managing Assignments Proctored Browser Under the Type of Assignment tab you can require that students use the Proctored Browser for a Proctored Exam assignment type This full screen mode blocks students from accessing external web sites or other programs on their computers while taking the assignment Proctored Browser must be enabled in the Assignment Editor by selecting Require use of Proctored Browser as shown in Figure 3 8 below Assignment Editor 1 Choose Name 2 Select Questions 3 Set Policies 4 Review amp Finish Advanced Type of Assig nment Type of Assignment Results gt Anonymous practice No session results are recorded Not recorded O Homework or Quiz All session results are recorded Recorded Additional attempts are allowed Reuse previously generated algorithmic variables _ Keep response and check mark indicator for correctly answered questions Generate a new question order Never _ Offer printable version of assignment IN Proctored exam Requires proctor authorization to grade Recorded W Also require proctor sign in to start session Require use of Proctored Browser 05 Mastery dialog Control progress question by question Recorded Edit mastery policies C Study session dialog Flashcard style learning Not recorded Figure 3 8 Enabling Proctored Browser Important It is good practice
297. gainst the correct answer you will set in Step 3 Your grader class should implement three methods 1 An init String paramName String paramValue method with void return type This method receives a set of name value pairs which it can use for initialization These are passed from the grader param fields in the question see Step 3 2 A grade String correctAnswerText String studentResponseText method with a double return type value between 0 0 and 1 0 where 1 0 is full credit The method should compare the text of the student response with text representing the correct answer Note The student response text is delivered from the applet s getResponse method In many cases grading will be performed by judging whether the response is the same as the correct answer text However in some cases the correct answer text may only provide general guidelines for grading For example the correct answer might be up and to the left and the student response might be a point 76 145 that the student clicked on 3 A generateResponseMatchingAnswer String correctAnswerText method with String return type This method is called to get a sample correct answer to display as student feedback The method must use the answer text to generate a string which the applet will display as the correct answer when passed the string as a response parameter Plain Text Script Authoring Note In many cases it will be enough to simply return the answer text in u
298. ge 42 e Mastery Assignments page 43 Assignment Options e Reuse Previously Generated Algorithmic Variables Option page 41 e Keep Response and Check Mark Indicator for Correctly Answered Questions Option page 41 e Generate A New Question Order Option page 41 e Proctored Exams page 42 e Setting Mastery Policies page 49 Practice Assignment Types Results Are Not Recorded There are two assignment types that allow students to practice For practice assignments graded results are not recorded in the Gradebook Students cannot return to view their results later e Anonymous Practice Assignments page 43 e Study Session Assignments page 44 Assignment Editor 1 Choose Name 2 Select Questions 3 Set Policies 4 Review amp Finish Advanced Ty pe of Assig nment Type of Assignment Results im Anonymous practice No session results are recorded Not recorded Id Homework or Quiz All session results are recorded Recorded 2 Additional attempts are allowed C Reuse previously generated algorithmic variables _ Keep response and check mark indicator for correctly answered questions Generate a new question order Never C Offer printable version of assignment Proctored exam Requires proctor authorization to grade Recorded L Also require proctor sign in to start session L Require use of Proctored Browser Mastery dialog Control progress question by question Recorded Edit mastery policies Study session dialo
299. gnment Name The name you give your assignment in the Choose Name tab of the Assignment Editor is displayed to students on their Class Homepage Name assignments using unique and informative terms that make it easy for students to identify each assignment and its instructional objective For example although the rules for grading and access are enforced automatically you may want to indicate the type of assignment in the name for rapid identification Assignment Instructions This feature is useful for providing instructions viewed by students during an assignment 1 In the Assignment Editor select the Choose Name tab 2 In the Text to show at the head of each page field enter the text that will appear at the top of every page in your assignment 3 You can also enter information to be shown on the results page Enter text or instructions in the Text to show on the Results Page field This information is displayed to students after grading as part of the graded assignment report they receive The Assignment Editor allows you to format your text as well as include images links and color enhancements See Also Configuring Feedback Options page 49 Select Questions Tab Selecting a Source Question Bank Use the radio buttons to select a source question bank Your choice of sources are e Your current class e All of your classes e The sample question bank provided with Maple T A e The Maple T A Cloud Add Questions to Assignm
300. gral p Right click the expression and select Explore A new Explore dialog box appears From here you can set the range of values you would like to explore as well as select which variables you would like to skip When you select skip that parameter remains as a symbolic unknown in the expression no slider will be created to control that value Enter 5 for the lower values of a and b and 5 for the upper values Beside the variable x select the skip box This will leave the variable x unchanged in the expression When you are finished click Explore A new table is generated inline with a math container for the expression and sliders for the indeterminates a and b Move the sliders back and forth to see how they change the solution Calling the Explore Command General steps for calling the Explore command l Enter the expression Explore my_expression where my expression is the expression you want to explore and press Enter The Explore dialog box opens Enter lower and upper values for the parameters you want to explore Select the skip box beside any variables or parameters you don t want to change Click Explore A new table is created inline with the expression and sliders for your indeterminates Move the sliders back and forth to see how they change the solution 179 Authoring Question Types 4 You can now save the assistant for future use with File gt Save Example Explore an expansion of powe
301. graph To indicate which region on the graph represents the solution set l y Click Choose Region ES This enables you to select a region on either side of a single line or select a region bounded by two lines 2 Click anywhere inside the region that represents the solution set to the problem The region is automatically shaded To delete this shaded region click Delete 4 and then click anywhere in the shaded area that you want to delete 4 To save changes in the Edit Response Area click OK Using solid or dashed lines l A Click Toggle Solid Dashed This enables to you to switch between solid and dashed lines interchangeably 2 Click on a line If the line was solid then the entire line becomes dashed To change the line back to solid click the line again and it will revert back to its original state To delete the solid or dashed line click Delete i and then click on the line you want to delete 4 To save changes in the Edit Response Area click OK Adding Multiple Graphs to the Sketch Board More than one graph can be placed on the sketch board for instance two lines and a parabola By default each graph added 1s treated as a Separate mathematical relation and drawn with a different color 119 Authoring Question Types To treat multiple graphs as belonging to the same relation 1 In the Group Plots drop down menu select Yes 2 Click Update Use this option in particular when constructing a sketch that represe
302. group zip My Homepage Help Courtney Jones Instructor Logout Algebra 2 Class User Manager Proctor Tools Assignments Questions Gradebook Question Repository New Question Select source Current class O All of my classes O Sample University O Maple T A Cloud Course Modules Import Question Bank Search Term Subjects Groups Assignments B All Questions O Damo Chah Cantica Bank N Select all Filter questions Sort by Weight wv Questions not in groups Question w A O Question Designer List v New Group _ Question Designer List v OY Multiple Choice 7 BY Short Phrase Exact Match vi Dynamic Figure Labels Economics v Vie Maple Formula Plot Question OY Axioms of Probability Distribution 2 3 Next Figure 4 7 Exporting Questions You can also export a single question by clicking the drop down menu next to 1t and clicking Export Why Export Your Questions You may want to have your own local copy of your questions which normally reside on the Maple T A server You may also want to share your content with others who are not part of your institution If you save your questions as a group zip file and share that file with another instructor that instructor can import the group zip file or course module into the Question Repository for their class in their instance of Maple T A 89 Managing Questions See Also Opening a Saved Question Bank File page 324 Sharing Questions Sha
303. gt lt math gt gqu 1 1 answer n x n 1 See Also Overview of Algorithmic Question Capabilities page 258 Question Modes Question Types page 328 Algorithmic Multiple Selection Question Source Script The following example source script creates a Multiple Selection question with algorithmically generated data 1 topic Multiple Selection Question Example Script 1 1 mode Multiple Selection 1 1 name lt b gt Multiple selection lt b gt 1 1 editing useHTML 1 1 algorithm Sa int 2 rint 10 Sb int 2 rint 10 c int 2 rint 10 2 d int 2 rint 10 2y ara a 2 2 Se int 2 rint 10 1 f int 2 rint 10 1 condition ne a b c d ne e f Q qu 1 1 question Which of these numbers are even qu 1 1 answer 1 2 3 4 eee ees See Also PPRPPP Pe Plain Text Script Authoring choice 1 Sa choice 2 Sb choice 3 Sc choice 4 Sd choice 5 Se choice 6 Sf Overview of Algorithmic Question Capabilities page 258 Question Modes Question Types page 328 Answer Tolerance Source Script The following questions define mathematical questions that accept student responses to a specified precision or margin of error For more information on precision and margins of error see Controlling Answer Tolerance page 226 Formula Mathematical Questions For formula question types including subtypes you must use the opera
304. h do the following 1 To change the properties of a branch you need to first select the branch whose properties you want to change To do this click the name of the branch The selected branch appears white compared to the other dark gray branch es 2 Underneath the heading Assignment Questions you will see the following three options e Scramble Questions if checked questions shown from this branch will be picked at random e Recycle Questions if checked questions that a student has already answered will have the possibility to be shown again to the student e Branch Weight the value entered here is what each question from this branch will be worth Deleting Branches from Adaptive Assignments To delete a branch do the following 1 Locate the branch you want to delete from your assignment and click the E icon 2 A warning dialog will appear confirming you want to delete this branch Click OK to confirm the deletion of the branch or Cancel to cancel the deletion of the branch Note Deleting a branch also deletes all questions within that branch Adding Questions to Branches To add questions to a branch do the following 1 Click the branch name you would like to add questions to The selected branch appears white compared to the other dark gray branch es After the above step adding questions to a branch follows the same procedures as adding questions to a non adaptive assignment These procedures can be foun
305. h the system places a copy of your question in the class web site cache If you do not interact with the system for about 30 minutes the system logs you out of your session and purges the question data losing any changes that have not been added to the web site cache When you log in you revert to the cached version of your question If the system server is restarted the cache is purged You revert to the last installed version of your question You can also upload a saved version of your question from your hard drive to your client Important If you stop interacting with the system for more than a few minutes it is recommended that you save your question to the repository The question persistence time is controlled by the system administrator To change its value contact your administrator Creating and Editing Question Source Files It is not recommended that you use the New question from source functionality when editing a question until you are familiar with the source file structure If you are an experienced user of the system you can modify a question by editing the source Do this by selecting Edit Source on the question summary page In this editing window you can change any aspect of the question script including text content for any data field Important If you introduce a syntax error for example invalid field or value data the question will be unusable In particular it is not recommended that you change the quest
306. h algorithm preview to preview the variables you defined as shown in Figure 5 54 Algorithm Sa range 10 b range 10 Edit the code for your algorithm condition ne a b in the text box below or click sum a b show Designer to use the product a b algorithm designer The condition ne sum product algorithm designer tool allows you to define algorithms for your question by completing a form Show Designer Refresh algorithm preview variable value a 3 b 1 sum 3 product 2 Figure 5 54 Multiple Choice Example 2 Algorithm 7 Enter the following for the Question Text What is a b 8 Click Delete next to one of the three empty choices to the right of Choices for the answer 9 Enter the following two choices e sum e product 10 Select the radio button next to the answer In this case the correct answer is sum 11 The default option for Change the order of the choices is yes Do not change the default 12 The default option for Allow more than one selection is no Do not change the default e Authoring Question Types 13 To add an Algorithm or Feedback to the question see Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 and Adding and Editing Information Fields Hints or Feedback page 74 202 Authoring Question Types 14 Click Finish 15 Click Preview to view the question as shown in Figure 5 55 y ManteTA Preview Question Algorithmic addition What is 97 Grade Re
307. he different question types see Authoring Question Types page 91 Difficulty You can view the difficulty of the question You can also choose a difficulty for this question Easy Medium or Hard using the drop down menu When using the Filter questions feature in the question repository the difficulty can be filtered Authors You can view the authors of the question If you have made a revision to the question you can click Edit my attribution to edit your authoring attribution If you have imported content you will see who the original authors were Also the environment in which the question was created is displayed 86 Managing Questions Privacy You can view the privacy of the question or choose what type of privacy you want it to have using the drop down list e If you select class instructors only instructors of this particular class will see the question in their question repository e If you select all instructors at this school all instructors of your institution will see the question in their question repository e If you select all Maple T A instructors and click Publish then all Maple T A instructors will see the question in the Maple T A Cloud through the question repository If you click Publish it will automatically set the privacy to all Maple T A instructors and publish the question to the Maple T A Cloud If you set the privacy to all Maple T A instructors but you do not click Publish the question will
308. he parabola not necessarily on a point that was used is bounded to the left gt to define the curve to discard what lies left of it Restrict a curve to a half bounded interval that ox Click at any location on the parabola not necessarily on a point that was used is bounded to the right y to define the curve to discard what lies right of it Restrict a curve to a fully bounded interval Perform a Snip Left operation at one location on the curve and a Snip Right at another Restrict a curve to a pair of half bounded ra Click at two locations on the curve to discard what lies in between intervals Lae Indicate whether an endpoint is itself included in Click on an endpoint to toggle between open and filled the subcurve 2 Subcurve types and graphing instructions This section provides detail on each subcurve type and how to specifically use it Removing a Portion of a Line or Parabola to the Left or Right of a Point To remove a portion of a line or parabola ot Pi i 1 Click Snip Left El or Snip Right iz These tools enable you to remove a portion to the left or right respectively of a location on the parabola 2 Click on the portion of the parabola you want to keep If you selected Snip Left in the previous step the portion of the parabola to the left of your cursor is removed Similarly 1f you selected Snip Right in the previous step the portion of the parabola to the right of your cursor 1s removed 3
309. he student is using a Maple command to calculate the answer For more information see Using Maple Code to Prevent Cheating in Maple Syntax Questions page 228 158 Authoring Question Types Maple Syntax with Symbolic Entry Response Option qu x y mode Maple type maple allow2d 2 Syntax Maple T A parses the student response entered in Symbol mode to convert the entered expression into Maple syntax which 1s sent to Maple Note that since a translation of the symbolic entry into a Maple Input expression takes place the technique of using SRESPONSE to check whether students entered a specific command may not be appropriate This technique is only recommended for Maple Syntax questions with the Text entry response option Variables The variable e should not be assigned as a global variable in Maple code It can be used however as a local variable Grading The Maple graded question type allows for questions with complicated answers questions with different possible answers and questions requiring a powerful answer equivalence checker You can also modify them to allow for grading between 0 0 and 1 0 for partial credit Note Grading must be done using a floating point number Rational numbers are not accepted Table 5 7 shows a simple application of the partial credit feature Table 5 7 Maple graded Question with Partial Credit Text for the question Solve for x in the following equation 3x 6 12 Maple code that ev
310. hen it is answered correctly or when the maximum number of attempts has been reached e You can opt to display or hide a section when it is finished e Adaptive questions support partial credit Table 5 4 Properties of an Adaptive Section Attempts Number of attempts allowed for the section positive integer Allow Skip Determines whether the I Give Up button appears for the section allowing students to move on without completing all attempts at this section Passing Score Passing score for the section 122 Authoring Question Types Penalty Penalty to apply for each incorrect attempt at the section number between 0 0 and 1 0 Correct Weight Relative weighting of the section in the overall adaptive question if answered correctly number between 0 0 and 1 0 Correct Show Answer Determines whether the correct answer is displayed when the section is finished and answered correctly Correct Display Determines whether to display the section after it is finished and answered correctly Correct Question Complete Determines whether the question is designated as complete when this section is finished and answered correctly in which case no more sections are shown or whether to continue to the next section Incorrect Weight Relative weighting of the section in the overall adaptive question if answered incorrectly number between 0 0 and 1 0 Incorrect Show Answer Determines whether the correct answer is dis
311. her standard web content For more information see Authoring When to Use Maple T A Plain Text Script Files page 322 Authoring When to Use the Question Editor Use the Question Editor to e Create new questions or edit existing questions The Question Editor allows you to author many varieties of questions in the system e Author a limited number of new questions Scripting may be faster for large projects Use another method when authoring advanced question types involving interaction with for example applets Authoring When to Use Maple T A Plain Text Script Files Use Maple T A qu Plain Text Script Files e For full access to the power and flexibility of the system question banks and algorithm syntax contained e For authoring all question types e For full support of HTML including image references tables and JavaScript To write script files use a text or HTML editor See Also Using Script Files to Author Questions page 334 A 2 Question Banks What is a Question Bank Question banks are plain text files with a qu extension which store sets of Maple T A questions Question banks are organized into topics which contain individual questions Use topics to organize questions for example to match the structure of your course Topics can also indicate learning objectives key topics or other organizational schemes Using the questions in question banks you can create assignments 322 Plain Text Scr
312. here q is the largest integer such that m q k lt n k That is rint n rint 0 n rint 0 n 1 Examples rint 3 returns 0 1 or 2 rint 1 3 returns I or 2 rint 0 7 3 returns 0 or 3 rint 0 8 3 returns 0 or 3 rint 0 9 3 returns 0 3 or 6 Note The range function returns random integers in the range 0 n inclusive See Also Random Integer Generation range n range m n range m n k page 271 rand m n rand m n k page 270 Generating Random Numbers in Questions page 262 Statistical Operations binomial n r Computes the rth binomial coefficient of degree n This corresponds to the number of ways of choosing r objects from a set of n ignoring order It is used in system performance statistics but 1s also available for use in internal directives algorithms and answers For example 273 Authoring Mathematical Questions binomial 22 3 returns the coefficient of x in 1 or 1 540 erf z Computes the cumulative probability probability that a variate assumes a value less than or equal to z for a standard normal distribution that is with mean 0 and variance 1 For example erf 0 0 500000000000000 erf 1 0 841344746068543 erf 2 0 977249868051821 erf 3 0 998650101968370 Other normal distributions can be modeled by re normalizing that is erf z m s is the probability distribution of a normal distribution with mean m and standard deviatio
313. his value is automatically determined when you select a rubric from the drop down menu above Passing Score Input a numerical value that represents the passing score for the assignment User Search To grade a rubric for a specific student it may be useful to find the student In this situation the quick User Search may be useful Just start typing the user login name email or student ID and the list will show only students that match your criteria Using a Rubric Table to Assign the Student a Grade To assign the student a grade an instructor can use the rubric table to assign a grade to the student 1 The Assignment Grades tab specifies the students listed in class Their student name and student ID is displayed As soon as a rubric is assigned another column is added in the middle of the table called Rubric See Figure 7 10 Ass ignme nt Grades Student Student ID Rubric Score Comment Bruce Wayne 20491849 Clark Kent 20593920 Peter Parker 20239501 Figure 7 10 Rubric Table Click the rubric icon to view the rubric You have the ability to assign the student a grade and add comments to the rubric directly 305 Working with the Gradebook 3 Click Save to retain the changes made You will receive a confirmation message to confirm the saved changes To disregard the changes you made to the rubric click Cancel 4 The student s grade is automatically calculated from the weighing assigned in the rubric Their gra
314. hm and answer statements as in the following examples a Single Index Case with Sixteen Scenarios 1 Use a single variable k as an index k rint 15 2 Create individual variables for the first related property of each of the sixteen scenarios In this case the first related property is an image file depicting the molecular structure Create a new variable Smoleculel that uses the index to select the appropriate indexed data value in this case the correct image Smolecule1x00 lt img src classes myclass chap15 image01 gif gt Smolecule1x01 lt img src classes myclass chap15 image02 gif gt Smolecule1x02 lt img src classes myclass chap15 image03 gif gt Smolecule1x15 lt img src classes myclass chap15 imagel16 gif gt Smoleculel switch k moleculel1x00 moleculelx01 S moleculelx02 moleculelx15 3 Define the second related property for each scenario Create a new variable that uses the index to select the appropriate indexed data value Spropertyl1x0 O value S property1x01 value Spropertylx15 value aa Spropertyl switch k property1x00 property1x01 S property1x15 4 Define additional related properties for each scenario and then select using the index and assign the appropriate values to new variables 5 The final set of variables is the answer field assuming that each different case has a different answer Select the appropriate answer using the index S
315. i gt x lt mi gt lt mn gt n lt mn gt lt msup gt lt mi gt dx lt mi gt lt math gt part 2 part 1 answer x Snplus npluse pod 1 1 part 3 question The geometric argument in the first part was based on the fact that lt math gt lt msup gt lt mi gt x lt mi gt lt mn gt n lt mn gt lt msup gt lt math gt is an lt l gt function part 3 extra Sothertype part 3 editing useHTML part 3 blank 1 S type part 3 mode Complete Sentence h ee zk pd 1 1 ICAC See Also Multipart Questions page 196 Plain Text Script Authoring Plain Text Script Authoring Question Modes Question Types page 328 Multiple Choice Question Source Script The following example source script creates a Multiple Choice question topic Multiple Choice Question Example Script mode Multiple Choice name Type of Point editing useHTML question For f x x 4 x 1 x 3 classify the point with x coordinate 2 3 1 3 37 1 2 answer 2 choice 1l global minimum choice 2 local minimum Choice 3 inflection point Choice 4 local maximum choice 5 global maximum choice 6 none of the above Petree ee eee See Also Multiple Choice Questions page 198 Question Modes Question Types page 328 Multiple Selection Question Source Script Question Mode Multiple Selection Non permuting Multiple Selection Question Editor question type Multiple selection Question file qu
316. ic Maple Comment Example Script question What is the greatest common divisor of a and b maple evalb RESPONSE SANSWER 0 maple_answer gcd a b type formula mode Maple ELTEL Plain Text Script Authoring allow2d 1 Q comment Try again editing useHTML qu 1 1 algorithm a int rand 3 100 Sb int rand 3 100 gcd maple gcd a b 222 See Also The Algorithm Designer page 70 Maple Syntax Question Source Script Question Mode Maple Question Editor question type Maple graded Question file qu syntax qu x y mode Maple type maple Example Uses The Maple Syntax subtype is particularly useful when the answer is to be expressed as a e Definite integral int f x x a b e Derivative diff f x x e Limit Limit f x x 0 e Differential equation for example diff y x t t t c 2 diff y x t x x e Set for example 1 4 9 l 2 3 Matrix for example The following example source script creates a Maple graded question using the Syntax subtype and using the text entry student response area topic Maple Syntax Question Example Script 1 question What is the Maple syntax for the derivative of x 2 with respect to x Do not include the railing semicolon 1 maple evalb S RESPONSE diff x 2 x or evalb SRESPONSE Diff x 2 x 1 type maple 1 mode Maple 1 allow2d 0 ad 1 h oe ee He Ha 1 comment The correct answe
317. ickable Image question creation or editing in the Question Editor e Note on Uploaded Questions If you upload a third party question you may need to edit the image reference URLs in the qu script file before installing it Also you must upload any image or reference files to your class web site e Note on the Proctored Browser When an assignment is taken in the Proctored Browser mode all links to image files reference files and external URLs will exit the fullscreen mode When creating an assignment for which you require students to use the Proctored Browser you should take care to ensure that the questions do not use any such files It is recommended that you always preview and test an assessment in Proctored Browser mode to ensure it behaves as expected before administering it For more information on the Proctored Browser including information on how to preview an assignment in the Proctored Browser see Using Proctored Browser page 52 79 Managing Questions See Also The Class File Manager page 20 Questions with Labeled Images You can include a GIF or JPG image with labels in a question The labels can be static or use algorithmically generated variable data You must first upload an image to the class web site See Images and Reference Files in Questions page 77 To add an HTML label to an image in a question through the Question Editor use the Edit Source functionality and include the following HTML code in your quest
318. ickmark every two units y axis The y range is from 10 to 10 It is divided into four equally spaced intervals resulting in major tickmarks and labels at 10 5 0 5 and 10 and Each interval is further divided into five equally spaced subintervals resulting in a minor tickmark every one unit Grid Define whether the gridlines are displayed true or not displayed false Background functions This allows the author to pre populate the sketch board with some curves drawn in the background purely for display purposes Background functions are not graded Example setting background functions For instance if you would like to show the sine curve and the main diagonal as dashed then set the background functions to the following x dashed Math sin x Important Use a semicolon separated list In addition functions need to be in JavaScript syntax e g Math pow x 2 as opposed to x2 Group plots Use the drop down menu options Yes or No to specify whether all your curves belong to one mathematical relation for example a piecewise function or separate functions See Adding Multiple Graphs to the Sketch Board page 118 for more information Important The Axes Tickmarks Grid and Background functions properties can be changed or updated by clicking Update The exception is Group plots which should be specified before sketching questions using the sketch board Correct answer You must graph the correct response
319. ide for yourself how this translation is done e When the Flash movie starts it reads the variable response and finds a string that was returned by a previous call to GetVariable response You must program the movie to initialize its appearance to the state consistent with that response e The Flash movie also reads the variable locked This variable determines when a student is allowed to modify his her response When the value of locked is equal to true this signals to the Flash movie that the question is in feedback mode in this case the movie should present in a form suitable for feedback After creating the Flash movie upload it to a folder on the class web site as described in Flash Movies and Java Applets in Questions page 80 Finally you need to host the Flash movie in a Maple T A question using the Flash question type Flash questions must be authored in a plain text script file For example the demonstrated code above is for a Flash question which asks students to move the disk to a specific point on the Cartesian plane Plain Text Script Authoring See Also Question Modes Question Types page 328 Formula Form Variant Question Mode Formula with form grading Question file qu syntax qu x y mode Formula qu x y grading form The Formula Form Variant question type is a restricted grading variant of the Formula question type In this mode the student response 1s required not only to be mathema
320. ields Hints or Feedback page 74 12 Click Finish 13 Click Preview to view the question as shown in Figure 5 60 MapteTA Preview Question Even numbers Which of these numbers are even 14 16 m a a a u a Partial Grading Explained Grade Refresh Figure 5 60 Multiple Selection Example 2 209 Authoring Question Types Next Steps To edit further details in the Question Repository within the Question Designer see Editing Question Details in the Question Respository page 84 5 14 Numeric Questions Description A Numeric question compares a student s response to a given number This question type accepts e Pure numbers without physical units in decimal form or scientific notation e Numbers with units Details e You cannot use equations or algebraic formulas in the correct answer e Equivalent numeric expressions and units are recognized The system recognizes default unit equivalents You can also create a question bank specific table of equivalent units e Students are prompted to enter responses in scientific or numeric format with or without physical units e You specify the inclusion of units in the correct answer using the answer units question field If you do not assign a value to the answer units statement the correct answer is dimensionless e Using the optional showUnits field you control whether the system displays the question with the Units text field e You can control
321. iew Rms Tal al ls iaa coa 59 Amando no OUCSHONS a ea da a ate do o a e a O AO 60 41 Navigatine the Question REPOSO odds 60 4 2 Question Authoring in the Question Editor AAA AAA TA AAA AS AAA IA AAA 60 Creatine a New Question or Editing an Existing Question A a AS 60 Introduction to Question Types in the Question Editor ii 62 QUESO DE do a r a a a ae acho E EN 64 Adaptive Question Destoner remui nTa EAE A ETO E 65 4 5 Additional Options in the Question Editor icare anen aa e r E Cased T a A ORTE 70 Tig eA eo Omit in EVE SOM A a a tee Se a a a a a a a a oes 70 Adding and Editine Altas cialis 73 Adding and Editing Information Fields Hints or Feedback 2 0 0 0 ccc cece cence ee nee ene nee ence ence ee nc eG eee ne EE EEE EE EE EEE ES 74 Deletino Tntormation Fields Tints OP Feedback gcse chee Gel tene a es elos 75 TAO ESO O o ed RENNES OT SPELT Renae 76 Redefine Question Pesa oasis 76 Testine the Gradimo Ob a QUESIOA AAA AAA A AA ade ARS RA 76 Maple Pl a Cala eae Carman 76 Imac es and Reference Files 1m QUESHONS A dns 77 Questions with Labeled mass tbc aid 79 Flash Moyiessan a Java Applets im QUESTIONS A AS A AAA AE 80 Creatine Popup Relerences 1m O e o eo 80 Use a Maple REPOSO raa do dera de ee eee eee ds 81 44 Orsanizine and hats QUESOS a 82 QUESO REPOSO A AAA ida 82 Searching tor Q estions in the Question Repository a Maa ekg ewe i 82 Editing Question Details in the Question Repository a AS 84 Organizing Questions in the Que
322. ight 86 Statistics 85 Subjects 86 Question Statement 329 Question Text Question Repository 84 Question Type Question Repository 85 Question Types 91 328 Authoring 91 in the Question Editor 60 Maple graded 154 Mathematical Formula 137 Matrix 351 Summary 91 Question weighting 47 197 Questions 275 Cloning 82 Managing 60 Organizing 82 save to hard drive 88 Sharing 82 89 Questions menu 60 R r Biserial 298 Rad 247 Random Integer 262 Random Integer Generation 272 Random number generation 262 270 271 Randomize questions 48 Randomized Formula 328 Range 271 rank 271 Reals 255 Redefining Question Types 76 Reference Files 77 Register students in a class 10 Using class rosters 12 Using the User manager 14 Registering a New Class 9 Registration Locked 9 Registration code 15 Relaxed Grader Rules 131 Release xvi Report Question to Administrators Question Repository 86 Reports d Value 298 p Value 298 Resequence questions 197 Resequence topics 197 Response Area Properties 95 Response Areas 64 Response specific 198 325 332 Hints 331 Response Specific 198 198 Restricted Formula 328 Review amp Finish tab 39 Canceling assignment 56 Finishing and Saving assignments 56 Reviewing assignment details 56 Reviewing Assignment details 56 Revisions Question Repository 85 Rint 262 270 272 Roster 12 Roster add External assignment 305 Rubric creating 302 e
323. ignments To show questions in a different order on each attempt for an individual student Select the Every attempt option from the Generate a new question order drop down list e When an individual student takes an assignment whether only once or multiple times the order of the questions will always be different Printable Assignments Option To make your assignments printable Select the Offer printable version of assignment option e With this option selected students login and the system generates a new assignment with algorithmically generated variable data where appropriate At the next step however students are offered the option to generate a printable version of the test suitable for printing and working offline e Printable assignments operate like a homework session that was interrupted before grading The student can log in again and enter responses for automatic system grading and recording scores in the Gradebook Or instructors may prefer to have students submit their completed assignments on paper for hand grading by instructors or teaching assistants Associated Assignment Properties You can set the passing score and time limit for an assignment These properties are set under Assignment Properties in the Set Policies tab e If there is a time limit set for the test in the assignment definition a pop up window warns students as they approach the time limit They are not allowed to answer additional questions once
324. iles All links to the images inside the web page will be fixed to point to the correct image inside the class 321 Course Modules Initially the created question will not include any response areas but instead be purely informational To modify the created question 1 Click the question name to see the question details in the Question Repository Alternatively in the Question Repository search for the question Click the question name 2 Click Edit 3 Make changes to the question such as adding a response area 23 This makes the question into one that requires a student answer 4 Click Finish to save your changes See Also Creating a New Question or Editing an Existing Question page 60 Question Designer Questions page 92 Appendix A Plain Text Script Authoring Project Elements page 322 Question Banks page 322 Using Script Files to Author Questions page 334 Library of Source Scripts page 334 A 1 Project Elements There are two methods for authoring question banks in the system 1 Question Editor The Question Editor also called QE is the primary question authoring and editing method for small to medium projects involving a limited number of questions See Authoring When to Use the Question Editor page 322 2 Maple T A qu plain text script files These are plain text script files containing questions formatted according to the Maple T A syntax These can contain HTML MathML and ot
325. in a question statement comment or hint e Inline variable expressions can contain computations involving functions or algorithmic variables defined elsewhere in the question e The syntax is to enclose the expression in For example you can include expressions like n 1 in place of defining a separate variable to hold n 1 This simplifies complex algorithms Example qu 1 1 question What is the derivative of x n qu 1 1 answer n x n 1 qu 1 1 algorithm n range 2 10 Q See Also mathml f page 268 Inline Display of Formatted Math Expressions page 237 Simplified Math Expressions page 241 262 Authoring Mathematical Questions Rules for Naming Variables Follow these rules when naming variables e A variable name must be of the form name or name e The string name can consist of letters a z and A Z numbers 0 9 and underscore characters _ e The first character of name must be an alphabetic character a z or A Z e Ifthe name form is used spaces can also appear in name This allows you to use multiple word names without the underscore character Note The variable e should not be assigned as a global variable in Maple code It can be used however as a local variable See Also Functions within Algorithms page 260 6 17 Generating Random Numbers in Questions The algorithm syntax in the system allows you to generate random numbers in a variety of ways depen
326. in an answer The matching items are defined using pairs of statements field term i lt label_i gt w term i def 1 lt correct_ match of label i gt w where the values of i in a question must start at 1 and be consecutive Essay questions do not contain an answer field They are not graded by the system If a student response 1s incorrect the default system behavior 1s to display the answer field value For more information on this behavior see Tutorial Displaying Answers vs Formulas for Answers page 253 To display custom feedback use the comment field See Also The Answer Field Evaluation and Requirements page 280 Basic Math Syntax in the System page 222 The info Field The info field allows you to add information subfields to a question to indicate subtopic learning objective level of difficulty authorship ownership or other information The info field is not required The info field values e Allow sorting and filtering in the question repository and during assignment creation e Facilitate performance reporting by information field category for example assignment results by learning objective Example qu 1 1 info subtopic Subtraction difficulty Easy learningobj Subtraction of two small integers instructor John Smith course Math 100 Hints Coaching and Performance Feedback In a hint field you can enter a hint that is displayed in assignments For information on adding hints using the Question E
327. ing matching on the palette created expression For details see Rules for Grading Fill in the Blanks Questions page 131 Instructions To create Palette based Symbolic Editor questions that integrate your customized palette 1 Create a question bank in plain text script format and define a palette definition at the beginning of the question bank For information on specifying a palette definition see Equation Editor Requirements and Syntax page 235 You should also include at least one question in the question bank This question is simply a place holder at this point 2 Import the question bank 3 From the Class Homepage select the Questions menu 4 Click New Question 5 On the Question Type list click Palette based Symbolic Editor 6 On the Edit Response Area screen e Enter the Question Name e Enter the Question Text e Enter the Correct Answer e Select a Grading Mode from the drop down menu e To add an Algorithm or Feedback to the question see Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 and Adding and Editing Feedback page 75 for more details e To proceed to the Question Details page click Finish 7 On the Question Details screen e To edit Hints and question details see Adding and Editing Feedback page 75 and Editing Question Details in the Question Respository page 84 for more details e Click Preview to view your question Example Evaluate to an exact value 1 From the Class Homepage select
328. ing point number rounded to n significant digits In cases of possible ambiguity scientific notation is used to display the value int x Returns the integer part of x For example decimal 3 20 8571 returns 20 857 sig 3 20 8571 returns 20 9 int 20 8571 returns 20 eq a b ge a b le a b ne a b eq a b Returns 1 0 if a and b are equal Otherwise it returns 0 0 ge a b Returns 1 0 if a is greater than or equal to b Otherwise it returns 0 le a b Returns 1 0 if a is less than or equal to b Otherwise it returns 0 0 ne a b Returns 1 0 if a and b are not equal Otherwise it returns 0 0 For example 265 if eq a b Red Green returns Red if a b and Green otherwise if ge a b Red Green returns Red if a gt Sb and Green otherwise if le a b Red Green returns Red if a lt b and Green otherwise if ne a b Red Green returns Red if a and b are not equal and Green otherwise See Also if a b c page 266 fact n fact n Returns factorial n If n is not an integer returns fact int n If n is negative returns 1 For example fact 4 returns 24 frac a b frac a b e Authoring Mathematical Questions The frac a b structure typesets x y as a fraction in its lowest terms For example the fractions 4 8 and 2 6 are presented as 1 2 and 1 3 in simplest form frac a b returns a string th
329. ing questions e Establishing rules and policies e Reviewing finishing and publishing assignments to your class 4 When the Assignment Editor screen opens the Choose Name tab is active 5 The following steps outline the options in each tab of the Assignment Editor More advanced options are described in detail later in this chapter Step 1 Choose a Name for the Assignment Begin by giving the assignment a name For detailed information see Assignment Editor Step 1 Choose a Name for the Assignment page 29 Step 2 Select Questions for the Assignment 1 View and add questions to your assignment 2 Set question weighting 3 Scramble question sequence upon delivery Step 3 Set Policies 1 Select the type of assignment and set assignment options Control feedback upon grading Set assignment properties Control assignment scheduling Nn E W Create rules between assignments Step 4 Review and Finish Assignment 1 Review assignment content rules and policies 2 Save the assignment by clicking Finish Important The Assignment Editor does not save partially completed assignments until you click Finish in the Review amp Finish tab If you begin to create an assignment and then abandon it without clicking Finish your additions and changes will be lost For a detailed tutorial on creating an assignment see Tutorial Using the Assignment Editor page 29 Copying Assignments To copy an assignme
330. ing useHTML qu 1 1 algorithm 1 1 weighting 1 1 1 1 1 numbering alpha 1 1 part 1 question In the first part use a geometric argument to decide whether lt math gt lt msubsup gt lt mo gt amp Integral lt mo gt lt mn gt Sa lt mn gt lt mn gt Sa lt mn gt lt msubsup gt lt msup gt lt mi gt x lt mi gt lt mn gt n lt mn gt lt msup gt lt mi gt dx lt mi gt lt math gt is CAC qu 1 1 part 1 editing useHTML qu 1 1 part 1 answer Sk qu 1 1 part 1 mode Multiple Choice qu 1 1 part 1 choice 3 zero qu 1 1 part 1 choice 2 negative qu 1 1 part 1 choice 1 positive qu 1 1 part 2 part 2 question Use the indefinite integral above to compute lt math gt lt msubsup gt lt mo gt amp Integral lt mo gt lt mn gt Sa lt mn gt lt mn gt Sa lt mn gt lt msubsup gt lt msup gt lt mi gt x lt mi gt lt mn gt n lt mn gt lt msup gt lt mi gt dx lt mi gt lt math gt 1 part 2 weighting 1 1f 1 part 2 question the second part check your answer by computing the integral gae Ho pa part part 2 editing useHTML 2 numbering roman part 2 part 1 mode Formula Mod Cf part 2 part 2 mode Formula part 2 part 1 editing useHTML part 2 part 2 answer Sa Snplus S a Snplus Snplus part 2 mode Multipart part 2 part 2 editing useHTML 1 1 part 2 part 1l question Evaluate lt math gt LEE lt mo gt amp Integral lt mo gt lt msup gt lt m
331. ion To edit the source of a question click Source source in the toolbar of the text editor region of the question Include the following code lt div class labelledImage style height IMAGEHEIGHTpx width IMAGEWIDTHpx float none gt lt img src IMAGEURL gt lt div style left LABEL_LEFT_OFFSETpx top LABEL_TOP_OFFSETpx class centered gt LABEL_CONTENT lt div gt lt div gt where e The height and width parameters IMAGEHEIGHT and IMAGEWIDTH specify the dimensions of the image in pixels To determine the height and width of the graphic use a third party graphics application for example Microsoft Paint e The image parameter IMAGE_URL specifies the path and filename of the image file e The size parameter value specifies the number of labels You can specify zero or more labels e The class centered tag is optional and centers the label If omitted the label will be left aligned to your left offset You can create multiple labels for one image by adding multiple lt div gt labels The location and contents of each label are specified using three parameters l The left parameter LABEL _LEFT_OFFSET specifies the horizontal offset in pixels of the middle of the i label from the left side of the image 2 The top parameter LABEL_TOP_OFFSET specifies the vertical offset in pixels of the baseline of the i label from the top of the image 3 The LABEL_CONTENT specifies the content of the label I
332. ion type for a question To create a question source 1 From the Class Homepage click the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 In the left pane click New question from source as shown in the image below 62 Managing Questions Question Repository The Question Type Question Designer Adaptive Question Designer New question from source Clickable Image Essay Fill in the blanks Maple graded Math App Matching Mathematical formula Multipart question Multiple choice Multiple selection Numeric Palette based symbolic editor Truefalse 4 Add the complete source script for the question 5 Click Finish to save all changes 6 Sample source scripts are available in the Library of Source Scripts page 334 Important If you introduce a syntax error for example invalid field or value data the question will be unusable In particular it is not recommended that you change the question type for a question Introduction to Question Types in the Question Editor To access the Question Editor select your class then click the Questions menu and select New Question In Maple T A the Question Editor allows you to create and edit the following types of questions Authoring Page Subtypes If Applicable Question Designer Questions page 92 Essay Questions in the Question Designer page 96 Free Body Diagram Questions in the Question Designer page 97 List Questions in the Q
333. ions that have been deleted are not automatically deleted from the Maple T A database You can still view these deleted questions by selecting Deleted Questions Once in that group you have the option to Undelete a question or Permanently Delete a question You will also see your inherited questions from your parent class To perform a search type the keywords into the search field You will notice that as you type in your keywords the results will update accordingly The search results are shown in the right panel of the question repository screen The search feature in Maple T A searches the question title text description hints and feedback See Figure 4 6 83 Managing Questions Math Question Types No description click here to add one Share with all Maple T instructors Publish By clicking publish you are agreeing to the Maple T A Cloud Terms of Service Select all Filter questions Sort by Weight Chemistry Question E Inline Question E Multiple Formula Responses Export Clone Remove from group Delete 0 per page Figure 4 6 Search Results in the Question Repository You can now click on the drop down menu beside the question name to perform actions on that particular question Table 4 2 lists actions that are available for a single question within your current class Table 4 2 Question Repository Available Actions through the Drop down Menu Clone the question creates a copy of a question Ex
334. ipt Authoring Planning Your Question Bank Project To start a new project Create a question bank Because of the range of question types supported by Maple T A you can include a much wider range of classroom tested assignment materials including sophisticated free response questions for Mathematics and Science Once you have selected the source for your questions adapt the source question material into Maple T A questions e Decide what type of Maple T A question mode works best for your source material e Decide what feedback comments hints and related links are appropriate e You may also consider the range of tolerance margin of error and required format for correct answers Use information fields to tag your questions with information indicating authorship level of difficulty key topic related topics page reference or other outside link information Because the information fields are entirely user specified consider how you might want to use your questions interrelate them in assignments and what performance reporting dimensions might be useful If your question takes advantage of the system s powerful algorithmic variable generation capabilities you must use appropriate variable definitions data ranges parameters and other limiting conditions for each variable e Maple T A is automatically configured to recognize equivalent responses for numeric algebraic and numeric with unit dimension student responses however yo
335. is Ouestion imithe QUESO DES IOE narri ea ec TE A TEEN AAE AE AISA AE E ATA EAE 100 Maple graded Response Area in the Question Designer ccc cece cence ence ence ence eee ene EEE EEE EE EE EEE EE EE EERE EE EEE 102 Formula without Simplification in Question Designer 60 0 6 c0seececcaes ees canae and a aia 104 Multiple Choice Response Area in the Question Designer ccc cece ccc e cence ence een eee cence eens deen tease see ea eG EEE EE EES 105 Numenc Response Area in the Question DES a A ada 107 Free Body Wier ina ANO A OS 110 Free Body Diagram Questions inthe Readiness lata es 112 Edit Responce Arca Tor a S Ke Ich QUESO cdas 114 okete MING eC OLE CCU IN CS PONSE deal 116 Sketchine Ouestions m the Readiness CASS a A aeuateb ela Meola eae ene esees 120 A A E o O Annas A EE abene 123 Clickable mas eure win Core co RESONS ad 126 Clickable Image Figure with COTE RS OA ed o a ais 127 xii Figure 5 17 Figure 5 18 Figure 5 19 Figure 5 20 Figure 5 21 Figure 5 22 Figure 5 23 Figure 5 24 Figure 5 25 Figure 5 26 Figure 5 27 Figure 5 28 Figure 5 29 Figure 5 30 Figure 5 31 Figure 5 32 Figure 5 33 Figure 5 34 Figure 5 35 Figure 5 36 Figure 5 37 Figure 5 38 Figure 5 39 Figure 5 40 Figure 5 41 Figure 5 42 Figure 5 43 Figure 5 44 Figure 5 45 Figure 5 46 Figure 5 47 Figure 5 48 Figure 5 49 Figure 5 50 Figure 5 51 Figure 5 52 Figure 5 53 Figure 5 54 Figu
336. is reversed it 1s impossible to receive full credit See Also Rules for Grading Fill in the Blanks Questions page 131 Fill in the Blanks Questions page 130 List Question Source Script page 346 Instructions To create a List question 1 Select the Questions menu then New Question The Question Editor is displayed 2 On the Question Type screen select Question Designer 3 Enter the Question Name 4 Enter your question in the Question Text 5 Click Insert Edit Response Area 13 In the Edit Response Area dialog a Under Choose Question Type select List b Weighting specify the weight of this response area in the overall question 99 Authoring Question Types c Matching Type e To apply strict grading case sensitive and literal string matching as your grading mode set the matching type to Exact text match e To invoke a less stringent grader that ignores case sensitivity and punctuation select Ignore case text match e You can also select Regular expression match to customize the grading routine When the display type is Text field you can set the grading standards d Display Type e The default Display Type is Text field which presents students with a blank response area and allows you to set the grading standards e Select Drop down menu to present students with a drop down menu of choices Note Permute list will create a different order each time the drop down list is generated e Enter the ans
337. ithm designer tool allows ans 9 9 3 anything storage rectangular order Fortran_order shape you to define algorithms for your question by completing a form Show Designer Refresh algorithm preview Figure 5 45 Maple graded Example 5 Algorithm 6 Enter the following for Question Text Give the coefficient matrix of the following system YPly 371 1X P2x 4 To enter the system of equations click the Equation Editor 2 icon in the toolbar and enter the expressions 7 Enter the following for Correct answer printf MathML ExportPresentation ans Note This generates MathML for the matrix presenting 1t in a nice format for students For the purpose of grading the student response however you must use the ans variable not the MathML expression 8 Enter the following for Grading code LinearAlgebra Equal SRESPONSE Sans Important The default Grading code evalb S ans SRESPONSE 0 is not sufficient when working with matrices To check for matrix equality use the command LinearAlgebra Equal 9 Ensure that the Accepted expression type is Maple syntax 10 Under Text Symbolic entry choose Student can choose 11 Click Finish 12 Click Preview to view the question See Figure 5 46 167 Authoring Question Types ManleTA Preview Question Coefficient matrix Give the coefficient matrix of the following system g 2y dz z y 2z 4 This question accepts numbers or formu
338. iv gt The resulting plot is shown in Figure 6 5 trough Figure 6 5 Plot with Labels Example Using an Essay Question Type The following is the source file for an Essay question type that displays a plot mode Essay editing useHTML algorithm wave plotmaple plot sin x x 0 10 question Discuss the following wave lt br gt Swave Example Using a Randomly Generated Variable The following is the source file for a Maple graded Formula question type that displays a plot question Determine the expression in the following plot lt br gt Sgraph maple evalb SANSWER SRESPONSE 0 QQ maple_answer x S n type formula mode Maple name Displaying a Plot 245 Authoring Mathematical Questions editing useHTML algorithm n maple randomize rand 1 10 graph plotmaple plot x n x 2 2 0 Example Using the Maple Tubeplot Command The following is the source file for a True False question type that displays a tube plot mode True False name tube plot editing useHTML algorithm Salgorithmic_variable_name plotmaple plots tubeplot t cos 3 Pi t t sin 3 Pi t t t 0 4 radius 05 numpoints 70 question lt p class Listing gt This displays a tube plot using the Maple long form name for the plots package lt p gt lt p gt algorithmic_ variable name lt p gt Q answer 1 choice 1 True choice 2 False fixed Q Important You must test your plot c
339. k New Question On the Question Type list click Numeric 2 3 4 Enter the following for Question Name Multiplication 5 Enter the following for the Question Text What is 326 multiplied by 7 6 Enter the following for Correct answer In the Number field enter 2282 214 Authoring Question Types e Leave the Units field blank since units are not required with this answer 7 Leave Precision and Input format as their default settings 8 Click Finish 9 Click Preview to view the question as shown in Figure 5 63 You can test the question by selecting various responses Y MapleTA Preview Question Multiplication What is 326 multiplied by 7 2 Number Grade Close Figure 5 63 Numeric Example 1 Example 2 Creating a Simple Numeric Question with Units in the Question Designer This example describes how to create a simple question that accepts a numeric response in decimal form along with the accompanying units This question is created in the Question Editor as a Numeric question 1 From the Class Homepage select the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 On the Question Type list click Numeric 4 Enter the following for Question Name Rounding 5 Enter the following for the Question Text Round 2 76789 m to three significant digits e To add an Algorithm or Feedback to the question see Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 and Adding and Editing Feedback page 75 for more details 5 Ent
340. k Submit Preview the imported data Click Save External to save the external assignments to the gradebook You can now view this data in the Gradebook Adding External Grades Individually To add an external assignment manually NN nA A WO N me From the Class Homepage select the Assignments menu Select External amp Rubrics In the External Assignment panel use the drop down menu to choose an assignment or manually enter the assignment name Use the drop down menu to select a Rubric Table Specify the assignment s Total Points and Passing Score In the Assignment Grades panel enter the following information for each student Score the score they received on the external assignment Comment optional add a comment Click Save to save this data to the gradebook You can now view this data in the Gradebook Modifying External Assignment Grades You can modify an external assignment in the gradebook 1 In the gradebook perform a search for the assignment 2 Click the name of the assignment to edit the external grades 307 Working with the Gradebook 3 Modify the assignment name total points passing score 1f desired Modify student grades or feedback 4 Save the results See Also RubricTables page 302 Linking an Assignment and a Rubric page 304 7 8 Forced Grading To force the grading of an assignment There are two ways to force grade an active assignment They are described
341. ke x and X or v and V in answers match the case of the variables in questions Operator and Function Syntax For multiplication use an asterisk Alternatively simply write e Two letters with a space for example x y e A letter and a number with or without a space for example 2x or 2 x Note that two letters without a space represents a single variable name e For Maple graded questions you must include an asterisk for example 2 x and not 2x x y and not xy or x y and not x y which will be marked as incorrect 224 Authoring Mathematical Questions For e Exponentiation use the caret e Euler s Constant 2 718 use the letter e The exponential function is e x For Maple graded questions use the exp function exp 1 and exp x for e and e x e Scientific notation use the upper case letter E For example 0 078 is 7 8E 2 e The trigonometric constant 3 141 use pi For Maple graded questions use Pi In the Equation Editor MathML Editor select Pi from the palette e Common mathematical functions use the standard abbreviated names for example sin cos and tan e The arguments of trigonometric functions remember they are measured in radians e The square root function use sqrt x Alternatively use x 1 2 or x 0 5 In Text entry mode the square root function is sqrt x Alternatively you can enter x 1 2 or x 0 5 In the MathML Editor select the square root symbol from the palette
342. ksheet into the question The final state of the worksheet is what is graded Note The Question Designer is the recommended method for authoring Math App questions Grading You can grade a Math App question directly inside of Maple T A The Math App will be presented to students in the form of a question A student will then have the ability to manipulate the Math App in order to get credit for this particular question in Maple T A When the student finishes the question the final state of the Math App question is graded You can choose which type of grading to use There are two options to choose from a Grading Algorithm in Math App The worksheet itself contains a grading procedure called Actions Grade This grading procedure must return a value between 0 0 and 1 0 which represents the student s grade b Grading Algorithm in Maple T A The grading code is specified in the question in Maple T A The specified Maple code used to grade the student response should return a value between 0 0 and 1 0 which represents the student s grade How to Make a Math App Question Gradeable through Maple General Steps for making a Math App gradeable through Maple the Math App itself 1 Define an Actions module with a module export Grade in your Math App This module is recommended for communication with Maple T A Note If you put the Grade procedure in a module with a different name it will not work properly The Actions module can op
343. l Functions that Students Can Use Sin cos tan arcsin arccos arctan csc sec cot hypsin hypcos hyptan jabs sart archi archypcos archyptan log ln exp Reserved Operations The following functions are only available as internal system directives in variable definitions and statements These functions are not available to students Table 6 16 Mathematical Functions Reserved for Instructor Use invstudentst studentst decimal sig int ava fam O eq ge le ne ee I o i o O See Also Mathematical Functions amp Operations page 246 6 20 Question Chaining Variables Question chaining is an authoring technique in which you create reference objects in one question that are called into display in the next question By using question chaining you can capture a student s response to the first question in an assignment and then include that response as part of other questions in the same assignment 276 Authoring Mathematical Questions To use question chaining you must 1 Author questions that use the special variables response and or grade described below 2 Create assignments that use these questions in sequence Note The questions that use chaining must have an algorithm If this is not needed you can define a dummy variable This is demonstrated in the example See the line qu 1 2 algorithm x 0 To use question chaining variables e Use the id field If one question has the id fi
344. label Add a force Select a Force Origin J angle Please select an origin and angle to proceed List of forces Clear All Figure 5 9 Free Body Diagram Authoring 111 Authoring Question Types Edit Response Area Weighting Specify the weight of this question in the overall assignment Angle tolerance Define the angle of tolerance in degrees When the question is graded the acceptable answer is within a tolerance range of whatever is specified The default is 5 0 degrees Background Image This is mandatory To upload a background image click Browse to select an image from the Class File Manager Creating a subfolder 1 Right click on Files to create a subfolder 2 Enter a name for the new folder and click OK 3 Click Upload to load new images into the folder 4 Double click on the image to select it 5 Scroll down to confirm that the image was added to the diagram Note The drawing board is 600 by 450 pixels If you upload a background image whose width exceeds 600 pixels or whose height exceeds 450 pixels the image will be scaled down aspect ratio preserved to fit the drawing board Show instructions Specify whether Maple T A should display its default introductory instructions for this tool to students by choosing Yes the default or No from the drop down menu Select forces Select the check boxes beside the forces you want to include in the free body diagram To add a force that is not liste
345. las Flot Help Switch to Equation Editor Preview Refresh Figure 5 46 Maple graded Example 5 Coefficient Matrix Example 6 Maple graded Matrix Question with Infinitely Many Correct Responses This example describes how to create a question that asks for an invertible matrix The grading of the student response checks whether the determinant of the student s matrix is non zero 1 From the Class Homepage click the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 In the Question Type list click Maple graded 4 Enter the following for Question Name Invertible Matrix 5 Enter the following for Question Text Give an invertible matrix 6 Enter the following for Correct answer M Matrix 1 2 3 4 printf MathML ExportPresentation M 7 Enter the following for Grading code x LinearAlgebra Determinant RESPONSE evalb type x numeric and x lt gt 0 168 Authoring Question Types 8 Ensure that the Accepted expression type is Matrix Syntax 9 Under Text Symbolic entry choose Symbolic entry only 10 Click Finish 11 Click Preview to view the question See Figure 5 47 Preview Question Invertible Matrix Give an invertible matrix Equation Editor This question accepts formulas in Maple syntax Flot Help Figure 5 47 Maple graded Example 6 Matrix Question with Infinitely Many Correct Responses See Also Maple graded Question Type Overview page 154 Mathematical Functions amp
346. lay a Units text field in the question Note To display the Units text field in a question for which the correct answer has no units edit the question source to specify showUnits true To not display the Units text field in a question for which the correct answer has units edit the question source to specify showUnits false See Creating and Editing Question Source Files page 61 e Specify the precision or margin of error for the grading of a student response Important When creating questions that have a specific number of significant digits in the correct answer it is recommended that you use the sig function to create algorithmic variables By using these variables in the question statement feedback hints and solution you ensure that values are displayed with the correct number of significant digits For more information see Setting the Answer Tolerance in Numeric Questions page 212 and decimal n x sig n x int x page 264 e Specify the acceptable input formats for student responses See Setting the Answer Format in Numeric Questions page 211 6 To edit Hints and question details see Adding and Editing Hints page 74 and Editing Question Details in the Question Respository page 84 for more details 7 Click Finish to place a copy of your question in the web site cache and to preview your question Setting the Answer Format in Numeric Questions When working with Numeric questions in the Question Editor you can spe
347. lay two lists A student must match each element of the first list with an element in the second list Matching question types allow only one to one matches in the correct answer The elements can be HTML compatible reference objects for example images The system displays the elements of the first list in rows of three by default Each element has a drop box that contains numbers relating to the elements from the second list which are listed below Matches of one element to many are not available in the system As an alternative consider using Multiple Selection Questions page 204 or Multiple Choice Questions page 198 questions Grading The Matching question type only allows allows only one to one matches in the correct answer As a result the question will be marked correct or incorrect Instructions To create a Matching question 1 From the Class Homepage select the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 On the Question Type list click Matching 4 On the Edit Response Area screen a Enter a title under Question Name b In the Question Text field enter an appropriate description of the matching question To include complicated mathematical expressions click the Equation Editor gt icon c Enter an item to be matched in The Item field d Enter the matching information in the Matches with field e Click Add Match The matching items are displayed in a shaded background beneath the Display this question in _ colu
348. lculated value of the answer field e formula used to define the answer Depending on your instructional objectives you can display one or both Displaying the answer Field Formula In some cases you may feel that there is extra instructional benefit to be derived from showing the student the correct formula instead of the final answer If you do not use the comment field in your question definition the default system behavior after grading 1s to display the value of the answer field To return the formula assign it to the answer field If the answer field is defined by a formula using variables the system displays a formula with algorithmically generated data substituted for the variables Example 1 If a student gives the wrong answer to the question 1 topic Displaying Answers vs Formulas for Answers 1 1 mode Formula 1 1 name Kinetic energy of random object 1 1 algorithm mass decimal 1 rand 1 10 Svelocity decimal 1 rand 10 15 qu 1 1 question An object of mass mass kg is moving at a speed of velocity m s What is its kinetic energy in joules qu l 1 answer 1 2 mass velocity 2 qu qu qu qu the system displays the correct answer as Correct answer 1 2 5 4 11 3 2 assuming that the randomization set mass 5 4 and velocity 11 3 Displaying the Calculated Final Answer In some cases you will prefer to return only the final answer To return only the final answer 1 Do not use
349. le page 242 When editing a question in the Question Editor you can add or edit algorithms To add or edit algorithms 1 In the Question Editor screen expand the Algorithm area 2 The Algorithm Editor opens See Figure 4 5 The buttons above the algorithm text box perform the following tasks e Show Designer displays the Algorithm Designer After you click Show Designer the system replaces it with Hide Designer Clicking Hide Designer hides the Algorithm Designer Only one of these two options is visible at a time e Refresh algorithm preview evaluates your variable definition and control statements and returns a value for each variable in the Variable Value region located below the algorithm text region If you define a plot in the Algorithm Editor the plot image is displayed You can verify the plot statement is correct and edit it if necessary Algorithm Edit the code for your algorithm in the text box below or click Show Designer to use the algorithm designer The algorithm designer tool allows you to define algorithms for your question by completing a form show Designer Refresh algorithm preview Figure 4 5 Algorithm Editor 3 Add or edit algorithm statements variable definitions and variable control statements e If you know the system algorithm syntax directly add or edit statements in the algorithm text region e If you don t know the system syntax click Show Designer to display the Algorithm Designer You ca
350. le underneath the existing one click Add Table Tables Table 7 3 and Table 7 4 explain the symbols to create a rubric table Table 7 3 Creating Columns For a Rubric Table Column Symbols g eve to the left Table 7 4 Creating Rows For a Rubric Table Row Symbol Move row up me a u_e Cr Move row down 5 To revert the rubric table to its original form since the last save click Reset 6 Click Save to retain all changes made to the rubric table or Cancel to cancel the changes made since the last save Editing an Existing Rubric 1 In the top toolbar under the Class Homepage click Gradebook 2 Select Rubric Tables 303 Working with the Gradebook 3 To find an existing rubric to edit search the Rubric Table The rubric name number of points as well as the date and time the rubric was last modified is displayed in the Rubric Table 4 Click the title of the existing rubric you want to modify as shown in Figure 7 8 test class Class User Manager Proctor Tools Assignments Questons Gradebook Rubric Table Editor Rubric tables Rubric Table Points Modified New Rubric Table Test Rubric F 8 0 2014 05 21 14 20 33 79 Preview Edit Delete Copy Figure 7 8 Rubric Table Editor The options displayed are as follows e Preview opens the rubric in another window In preview mode you do not have the ability to make additional changes but you can test the rubric by clicking on the boxes to assign grades f
351. ledge of HTML Table 4 1 Examples of HTML Tags to Use for Formatting Text Redefining Question Types In the Question Editor when creating a new question you can change the question type any time before you click Finish When you click Finish the system adds the question to the question repository To change the question type after you click Save you must edit the question source using the Edit Source facility Important It is not recommended that you change the question type for a finished question If you introduce a syntax error when changing the question type the question will be unusable Testing the Grading of a Question 1 Preview the question by clicking the hyperlink of the question in the left pane of the Question Editor 2 Enter a response to the question as 1f you were a student 3 Click Grade 4 The system grades the question and displays the result 5 Click Back to return to the Display Question screen If there is algorithmic variable data the random values are regenerated when the question is re displayed 6 To check the form of the question with different algorithmic variable data values click Refresh in the preview window Maple Plots Use the Maple computer algebra system to generate sophisticated 2 D and 3 D plots in your questions and feedback See Plotting Using Maple page 242 You can add a Maple plot using any authoring method See Also Plotting a Student Response page 230 Pl
352. lgorithmically generated variable to the Math App define the variable first using the Algorithm Designer then assign the value of the parameter to this algorithmic variable in Initialization Parameters 6 Click Finish Example Editing a Math App Variable through Maple T A Defining the InitParams procedure in the Math App In the first part of this example you will create a Math App called ParameterTest to be used in Maple T A for a Math App question 182 Authoring Question Types 1 Open a new Maple worksheet 2 Place one text area embedded component onto the worksheet then place another text area embedded component onto the worksheet just below the first text area embedded component By default they will be called TextArea0 top and TextAreal bottom 3 Place a slider component on to the worksheet beside TextAreal 4 Right click on the Slider component and select Component Properties from the context menu 5 Enter 0 in the Value at the Lowest Position field 6 Enter 10 in the Value at the Highest Position field 7 Enter 2 in the Spacing of Major Tick Marks field 8 Enter 1 in the Spacing of Minor Tick Marks field 9 Click OK 10 Add the following text beside the top text area embedded component The parameter passed in from Maple T A is 11 Next above the slider embedded component add the following text Move the slider to this number See Figure 5 52 The parameter passed in from Maple T A is M
353. llow you to display free response entry cell blanks inside the HTML question statement This method of presentation can provide inline student response cells anywhere within the question The question in Figure 5 24 demonstrates the power and flexibility of the question designer question type There are 6 individual response cells included each of which requires a different type of student response Notes e Response cells can appear anywhere within the formatted question statement including within tables e Response cells can consist of any individual question mode including response cells that handle text lenient or stringent string matching numbers formulas or any other question variety e Partial credit can be allowed for exact graded text or menu style entry cells Here is a question using a symbolic formula blank Let y xo What is the derivative of y with respect to x E Enter ony the expression tor the derivative omitting y Tey it The answer is gx Here is a numeric blank style of question 3 8 Numenc questions can specify margin of error and significant figure precision The following numeric blanks question reqires a number and a unit dimension in its response Ifa cat walks 0 in rn how fast is the cat walking Num Units Most standard equivalent unit dimensions are graded corecti by the system or you can specify your own table of unit equivalents to appi to a question This next ques
354. llowing 1 Find the question s you want to put in another group or subject 2 With those questions still selected navigate to the group or subject you want to add these questions to 3 Click the lt lt link next to the group or subject you want to add these questions to Note If you delete a group the questions in that group are no longer associated with a group To find such questions select Questions not in groups Deleting Questions from the Question Repository In the question repository you can delete a question To delete a question click the drop down menu next to the question and click Delete Alternatively select the check box next to the question you want to delete and click Delete at the bottom of the question repository To view the deleted questions in the Question Repository select the Deleted questions group In addition to the standard actions there are these actions e Undelete e Permanently Delete e Cleanup Undelete restores the selected deleted questions The questions are restored to their original groups Permanently Delete removes the selected questions shown on the current page of the search results Note A question that is referenced by an assignment or by test results will not be removed You must use the Assignment Editor to delete the reference to the question see Assignment Editor Step 2 Select Questions page 30 and then save the assignment see Assignment Editor Step 4 Review amp
355. lls students to enter a list of formulas separated by commas enclosed in parentheses Formula without Simplification can only be authored in the Question Designer It is used to leave the expression in its unsimplified form The system would grade the unsimplified form as correct The Chemical Equation subtype accepts the following characters in student answers superscripts subscripts _ arrows gt dot operator sign ion changes and physical states For a detailed example of each subtype of Mathematical Formula see 1 Mathematical Formula Formula Subtype page 139 Formula without Logs and Trig Subtype page 140 Formula with Physical Units Subtype page 141 Formula that Matches Responses to within C Subtype page 142 Unordered List of Formulas Subtype page 146 Ordered List of Formulas Subtype page 148 Vectors of Formulas page 149 2 3 4 5 Equation Subtype page 144 6 7 8 9 Formula without Simplification Subtype page 103 10 Chemical Equation Subtype page 151 138 Authoring Question Types 2 4 8 16 2 4t 7t 1 NaOH HCI gt NaCl H 20 2H 2 0 2 gt 2H 20 Note The Question Designer is the recommended method for authoring Formula questions See Also Question Designer Questions page 92 Adaptive Question Designer Questions page 121 Grading Student responses must contain a mathematical expression including numbers or mathematic
356. m matrix of text fields each of which accepts a number or formula Matrix questions must be created in a plain text qu file You must specify a unique matrix as the correct solution Note It is recommended that you use the Maple Syntax question type for questions that will have a matrix response Maple Syntax questions provide more flexibility than the Matrix questions in question authoring and grading With the Maple Syntax question type e Rather than showing the student with a specific size of matrix with a blank for each entry the student can select the appropriate size of the matrix in their answer for instance using a palette e By sending the entire matrix to Maple for grading you can evaluate properties of the matrix such as whether it is invertible or symmetric e Partial grading is possible See Also Question Modes Question Types page 328 Multipart Formula Question Mode multipart formula Question file qu syntax qu x y mode multipart formula The multipart formula question type behaves as a multipart question in which each part is a formula question It displays multiple text fields for multiple student responses Note A multipart formula question displays multiple individual text fields while a multi formula question requires a student to enter multiple formulas in one text field as its correct answer Multipart formula questions must be authored in script files To identify multiple correct an
357. mail notification select the Send email reports to check box and enter your email address Restricting Feedback You can restrict feedback so that feedback details are not displayed until a certain date Check the Restrict feedback until check box and click the calendar icon to choose a date See Also Security Issues to Consider page 310 Configuring Assignment Properties Assignment properties are configured in the Set Policies tab of the Assignment Editor These include e Setting a Passing Score page 50 e Setting a Time Limit page 50 e Setting the Number of Questions per Page page 51 e Setting the Maximum Number of Attempts page 51 Setting a Passing Score If you select the Practice Homework or Proctored Exam assignment types you can set a Passing score for the assignment If you set a score the system assesses each try at the assignment as either Pass or Fail and records this information in the Gradebook automatically The field shows the total available score for the assignment for example out of 10 which varies according to the composition of your assignment For Homework and Proctored Exams if you choose to set a passing grade and you have selected to receive email notifications when students complete the assignment the emails will included information on whether the student meets the passing criteria You can customize the message students receive by clicking the Edit feedback messages link You can use the dro
358. men EANO e a aE 25 Creatine A TARR AEAT E EE A T a 25 CODYN SS TNE TNS acct cp crn is lg a saeco hls ints once e Gee 26 Pekine ASTM a ade eet hanes ata o ito bay o ah ale 27 EIN ASS Kea ie cite 27 Previewing SPOTS te tient cs ga O treme ian A doe tae A kc etn on 28 Pants ASOMAN mee eG 28 Controlling the Sequence OL Listed A SS1OMiMCIts da ic ica 29 SA A Mad utanep ace senaiaa tactics 29 3 2 Tutora Usma the Assi sien ts EO aerer ne eles eb A cise aprons Wb ua egw ede eee eae 29 ASSiomment Editor Step 1 Choose NaMe A A aoe a wR a ee ae eae 29 Assioninent Editor Step Selec Questions lolo ad e o bdo 30 Assienment Editor Step Stma PON CICS cie 33 Assionment Editor Step Review amp EAS da a armed wane 39 Bye PS A A O O E 40 Ii IPES OVENI E W oean e UE E poner ainien saanelad TA 40 Homework or QUZ AS A a dia n 40 PROCESO Exam aca dd ao pida 42 Anonymous Pracie e ASS OME MIS A o 43 Study session and Mastery ASS OMS ta a lados 43 MA ea dese 43 SEU YS CSS1OM AS AMES de a da a aia 44 111 Contents 324 Details on Usine the Assioniment Edo 45 Choose Name TaD rarena a A AR ER AE ica aca 45 Sel cor OUCSHONS Lt E ett ttt Meee a eaa a e 45 SEE OCT Tar at uh os eee gate ca ia acidos 48 Review Finish Tabs aio ala S6 3 5 Details on Using the Adaptive Assignment Editor AAA AAA AA AAA A AAA 56 Create New Adaptive ASS MA A A el Coase el ears S6 COOS Name ride di di id oa 57 SClECE QUCSIIONS TaD iii doi acia 57 SEO CICS Lair ARS A SAA 59 Rev
359. ments 44 331 333 Study Session and Mastery 43 Subjects Question Repository 86 Success rate 298 Sum 274 Summary Support 4 Switch 274 283 Symbol mode Index in student response 157 224 System Homepage 2 3 System Time outs During Authoring Sessions 61 T Table Assignment types overview 40 Physical Unit Equivalents 247 Technical Support 4 Telsa 247 Test Bank 324 Test Bank in Assignment Editor 30 Add questions as a group to assignments 46 Adding individual questions to assignments 45 Testbank qu 88 Testing Grading 76 Text Formatting within Questions 76 Text mode in student response 157 224 Text strings within variable statements 282 Tickmarks Sketch Questions 114 Time outs During Authoring Sessions 61 Tips Formatting 94 Tolerance 209 212 226 227 256 267 325 336 Topic 325 329 Open 325 Topic Structure 322 Topic Structure within Question Banks 323 Trademark xix Trigonometric Functions 246 True or False Questions Source Script 358 True False Questions 328 Creating 220 Question Editor 220 Tutorial Adaptive question 66 Algorithmic question 282 Basic Gradebook Searches 289 Formatting integers 255 List based variables 283 Maple based algorithmic variables 285 Margin of tolerance 256 Providing answers 253 U Unevaluated forms 157 246 Ungraded Question 320 Unicode HTML 333 Units 209 222 226 227 Equivalents 247 Unlocking class registration 11 Unor
360. meric characters or underscore and dash characters A file name may contain periods but it may not start or end with a period In addition it is important to retain the file extension when naming it The system uploads the file to your class web site giving it the name that you specify along with the file extension 5 Click OK to perform the upload and return to the list of files on your web site The uploaded file appears with the list of files in the web site explorer Uploading Multiple Files You can upload multiple resource files to your class web site if you package them in a compressed zip file first The Zip Archive option is useful if you have many files to upload Note only zip archives are supported File names must not have spaces and consist of up to 255 letters numeric characters or underscore and dash characters A file name may contain periods but 1t may not start or end with a period To upload multiple files 1 From the Class File Manager navigate to an appropriate subfolder on the web site or click the Create new subfolder icon to create a subfolder When creating the name use letters numbers or underscores in the name but not spaces For maintainability it is recommended that you place files in a subfolder 2 Click the Upload files s to this point icon 3 Click Browse to locate and select the zip file 4 Select Zip archive The program extracts all of the files from the selected zip file and uploa
361. mns field Note If you click Finish the system displays the following message A matching question makes no sense without at least two items Click OK f Enter the number of columns in which to display the information in the Display this question in _ columns field g Add more matching questions by repeating steps 5c 5f h To add an Algorithm or Feedback to the question see Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 and Adding and Editing Information Fields Hints or Feedback page 74 1 Click Finish to place a copy in the web site cache and preview your question Example 1 Triangle Types 1 From the Class Homepage click the Questions menu 171 Authoring Question Types 2 Click New Question 3 In the Question Type list click Matching 4 Enter the following for Question Name Matching Triangle Types 5 Enter the following for Question Text Match each of the triangle types with its definition using the drop down menus 6 Enter the following six Matches Obtuse One angle greater than 90 degrees Acute Three angles less than 90 degrees Right One angle equal to 90 degrees Note By default you will see three matching response areas Click Add Match three times to add more matching response area 7 Ensure that Number of columns to display the question is set to 2 8 To add an Algorithm or Feedback to the question see Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 and Adding and Editing Information Fields Hints
362. mula name Fractions editing useHTML algorithm 00 00 00 00 Sa range 1 8 num mathml x 2 a Sans Sa 2 qu 1 8 question Solve for x 240 Authoring Mathematical Questions lt br gt Snum qu 1 8 answer Sans For larger expressions you can include the MathML code for the expressions directly in questions answers hints and feedback in your question bank Example The following is an example of MathML code used to create an expression inside a question script qu 1 5 mode Equation qu 1 5 name lt b gt Equations with algorithmic MathML feedback lt b gt qu 1 5 comment Use the slope intercept form of the line to find the equation as lt math gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt mi gt y lt mi gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt mn gt Syone lt mn gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt mfrac gt lt mrow gt lt mn gt Sytwo lt mn gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt mn gt Syone lt mn gt lt mrow gt lt mrow gt lt mn gt Sxtwo lt mn gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt mn gt Sxone lt mn gt lt mrow gt lt mfrac gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt mi gt x lt mi gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt mn gt Sxone lt mn gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt math gt qu 1 5 editing useHTML qu 1 5 algorithm xone decimal 1 rand 0 10 xtwo decimal 1 rand 0 10 condition ne xone S xtwo Syone decimal 1 rand 0 10 Sytwo decimal 1 rand 0 10 m Sytwo Syone xtwo xone Sb m xon
363. n 5 Click Preview to view the question as shown in Figure 5 40 Notice there is a Plot link under the student response area 10 10 Figure 5 40 Maple graded Example 1B Formula and Plotting Example 2 Maple graded Maple Syntax Option 1 From the Class Homepage click the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 In the Question Type list click Maple graded 4 Enter the following for Question Name Intersection 5 Enter the following for Question Text What is the intersection of the sets a b c and b c d e Enclose your response in braces 6 Leave Correct answer empty 7 Enter the following for Grading code evalb S RESPONSE a b c intersect b c d e 162 Authoring Question Types 8 Ensure that the Accepted expression type is Maple syntax 9 Under Text Symbolic entry choose Text entry only 10 Click Finish 11 Click Preview to view the question See Figure 5 41 Preview Question Intersection What is the intersection of the sets a b c and b c d e1 Enclose your response in braces This question accepts formulas in Maple syntax Plot Help Preview Figure 5 41 Maple graded Example 2 Maple Syntax Option Example 3 Designing a Maple graded Question to Accept Mathematically Equivalent Responses tan x sin x This example will create a question that asks for L sec x It should accept sec x tan x x dx cos x cos x or anything equivalent as correct 1
364. n 281 qu files 88 322 qu files for question banks 334 2 D plot options 277 2 9E8 246 3 D plot options 278 operator 256 275 330 A Absolute Value Function 246 Accessing the Assignment Editor Screen 23 Adaptive Assignment Editor Details 56 Adaptive Assignments Add Branches 57 Adding Questions to Branches 57 Changing Properties of Branches 57 Create New 56 Defining An Exit Strategy 58 Defining Branch Switching Procedures 58 Deleting Branches 57 Deleting Questions from Branches 57 Details on Using the Adaptive Assignment Editor 56 Adaptive question Tutorial 66 Adaptive Question Designer Math 121 Adaptive Question Designer Questions Question Editor 121 Adaptive Questions 65 121 Flow 121 Partial Credit 123 Adaptive Section Properties 65 121 Add a Force Free Body Diagram Questions 111 Add External Assignment 305 Adding and Deleting Elements in a Course Module 319 Adding Control Points Free Body Diagram Questions 111 Adding Questions in Assignment Editor Add individual questions 45 Add questions as a group 46 Advanced options Set Assignment Policies tab 54 Advanced Options in Assignments 38 Set Policies 38 Algebraic Symbols 333 Algorithm Question Repository 85 Algorithm authoring 259 271 Algorithm Editor 259 Algorithmic Question Capabilities 258 Algorithmic Variable Expressions Defined Inline 261 Algorithmic variables Details evaluation 280 Algorithmically generated
365. n Algorithmic Question Work in an Assignment Authoring Create a static question a version of the question in which the variables have fixed values Edit the question All three authoring methods support algorithm authoring Click Edit in the Algorithm region Add variable s and click Save On BB DD N e Click Next and replace the fixed values with variable names in the question Variable names must start with the dollar sign character 6 Save your question Assignment Creation 1 Select algorithmic questions for inclusion in an assignment in the same manner used for other questions 2 In the Assignment Editor each time you preview the question the system regenerates the variable values To preview the question with new variable values preview it again 3 Save your assignment Assignment Use 1 Each time the assignment is instantiated generated for a new session by Maple T A new variable values are created in all the algorithmic questions New assignment sessions occur either when the same student is making a new attempt at the same assignment or when different students request sessions from the same assignment 2 Until an assignment is submitted for grading variable data that is created for that particular session persists throughout the assignment session even when students navigate between questions 3 To give individual students the ability to return and rework an assignment with the same algo
366. n Editor inserts each question part in the same order in which it appears in the source topic See Also Multipart Questions page 196 Working with Multipart Questions This section describes e Editing General Information page 197 e Adding and Editing Individual Question Parts of a Multipart Question page 197 e Partial Credit and Weighted Scoring page 198 Editing the Top Level of a Multipart Question 1 In the Question Editor select the multipart question to edit Click Edit 2 On the Question Type screen edit the description feedback or other options Click Next 3 On the Question Details screen you can e Edit the text to appear at the top of the question e Specify preferences for numbering the parts using the Numbering style drop down menu e Set question weighting for the parts 4 Click Finish Adding to and Editing Individual Question Parts of a Multipart Question If your question includes variables you must edit the plain text script file for it to preserve your variable definitions You can edit the script file by using the Question Editor Edit Source facility To edit using Edit Source 1 In the Question Editor select the multipart question to edit Click Edit 2 On the Question Type screen click Edit Source 3 Edit the file 4 To save your changes click OK 5 On the Question Type screen click Next 198 Authoring Question Types 6 On the Question Details screen click Finish Setting Pa
367. n only add not edit statements using the Algorithm Designer 4 When you have finished adding and editing variable statements click Finish to save your changes and return to the Question Details screen Note When refreshing the algorithmic variable with a plot statement you need to change the plot statement in order for the new image to appear Changing a plotdevice or plotoption entry will not update the plot See Also Overview of Algorithmic Question Capabilities page 258 Plotting Using Maple page 242 74 Managing Questions Adding and Editing Information Fields Hints or Feedback Adding and Editing Information Fields When editing a question in the Question Editor you can add or edit information fields Information fields allow you to add information subfields to a question to indicate subtopic learning objective level of difficulty authorship ownership or other information The information field values allow sorting and filtering in the question repository and during assignment creation and they facilitate performance reporting by information field category To add or edit the info fields 1 In the Question Editor screen click Edit or click here to add one link in the Information Fields area 2 Enter or edit field names and corresponding values in the Field and Value text boxes 3 Each question can contain any number of information fields To add rows click Add Row 4 Click Save to save all changes See Als
368. n s It is used in producing performance statistics within the system but is also available for use in internal directives algorithms and answers Note that the erf z function in Maple TA produces the same results as the Statistics CDF Normal 0 1 z numeric function in Maple inverf p The inverse function of erf z Let Z be a standard normally distributed random variable Then inverf p is the value of z for which P Z lt z p For example inverf 0 99 returns the value of z with probability 0 99 that Z lt z invstudentst k x Computes the inverse of the cumulative probability density of the Students t distribution with k degrees of freedom For example invstudentst 2 0 9 returns the value of x with probability equal to O 9 studentst k x Compute the cumulative probability distribution at x of the Students t distribution with k degrees of freedom 274 Authoring Mathematical Questions For example studentst 2 1 55 returns the probability that X lt 1 55 strcat a b c d strcat a b c d Returns the concatenation of the strings in the list For example strcat a and Sb returns cats and dogs when Sa cats and b dogs sum varname start stop expr sum varname start stop expr Sums the expression expr with respect to the dummy variable varname between the values start and stop For example sum i 1 20 i 2 evaluates 1 2 2 2 342
369. n the Question Details screen To edit Hints and question details see Adding and Editing Hints page 74 and Editing Question Details in the Question Respository page 84 for more details Click Finish to place a copy of your question in the web site cache and to preview your question See Also Authoring Mathematical Questions page 222 Mathematical Formula Question Types Comparison Table page 137 Understanding the Math Capabilities page 224 Example 1 Formula Subtype To create a Formula subtype question 1 From the Class Homepage click the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 In the Question Type list click Mathematical Formula 4 Enter the following for Question Name Find the derivative 5 Click the add icon and enter the following Algorithm n rint 20 2 6 Click Refresh algorithm preview to preview the variables you defined as shown in Figure 5 25 140 Authoring Question Types Algorithm n rint 20 2 Edit the code for your algorithm in the text box below or click show Designer to use the Variable Value algorithm designer The n 3 algorithm designer tool allows you to define algorithms for your question by completing a form Show Designer Refresh algorithm preview Figure 5 25 Formula Example Algorithm 7 Enter the following for Question Text Let y x What is the derivative of y with respect to x Enter only the expression for the derivative omitting y
370. n the Readiness Class 113 Authoring Question Types Next Steps To edit further details in the Question Repository within the Question Designer see Editing Question Details in the Question Respository page 84 Sketch Questions Description Sketch questions can be used to ask students to e Graph one or multiple lines or curves e Indicate which region represents the solution set cases single line or curve multiple lines or curves e Make the line solid or dashed to indicate whether the line is in the solution set e Remove the portion of the line or curve that does not belong e Use an open or closed circle to indicate whether the endpoints belong e Add asymptotes to logarithmic and exponential curves Sketch questions do not currently support algorithmically generated sketches Grading When one curve is graded Sketch questions are graded correct or incorrect No partial credit is assigned However if there are multiple curves graphed the student may receive partial credit for having a partially correct response For example partial grading of inequalities as follows e If there are n lines then n 1 points are given e One point is given for each line assuming both the slope and the strict nonstrict property are correct e One point is given for the region if all the lines are correct e These points are summed and divided by n 1 to produce a number from 0 to 1 Partial credit is also applied to exponential and
371. n the Set Policies tab click Advanced This can only be modified if an assignment is inactive 2 A new window with advanced policies opens as shown below 55 Creating and Managing Assignments Assignment Editor 1 Choose Name 2 Select Questions 3 Set Policies 4 Review amp Finish Back Please note that Adaptive Assignments treat the passed criteria the same as made one or more attempts a Criterion 1 Calculus Assignment Add alternative criterion 3 A Criterion 1 rule based field opens Specify the desired criteria 4 Save Changes to Criterion After you have specified the desired criteria click Back to save changes made to the criteria and return to the Set Policies tab Criterion Options e The first drop down list gives a choice between has and has not e The second drop down list provides a range of conditions as shown below Please note that Adaptive Assignments treat the passed criteria the same as made one or more attempts a Criterion 1 has Calculus Assignment made one or more attempts at made two or more attempts at made three or more attempts at made four or more attempts at made five or more attempts at made an attempt today at im received special permission for Add altemative criterion emove criterion 7 Add additional criterion e The drop down list on the right contains all of the assignments for the class including the assignmen
372. n x c In the Grading Code region ensure the grading code is is SANSWER SRESPONSE 0 d In the Expression Type field select Maple Syntax e In the Text Symbolic entry field select Text entry only f Click OK 17 In the Question Text field enter the following text beginning on a new line What is the derivative of x cos x w r t x 18 Click Insert Edit Response Area 3 19 The Edit Response Area dialog opens a Select the Maple question type b In the Answer region enter the following diff eqn x c In the Grading Code region ensure the grading code is is ANSWER RESPONSE 0 d In the Expression Type select Formula e Click OK Next define the section divisions and the properties for each section The overall question layout with section boundaries is shown in Figure 4 3 69 Managing Questions El Source GA Ace e B I U ae x x Mi 111 Hi hiili hil a gt a gt oBozsol z la What is the derivative of x cos x wrt x Maple Edit Edit Differentiate the function x COS x in the following steps apply the product rule Maple Edit apply the power rule Maple Edit e apply the cosine rule Maple Edit Edit Whatis the derivative ofx COS wrtx Maple Edit Edit Figure 4 3 Adaptive Question with Three Sections 20 Insert the first section division in the desired location by clicking Insert Edit Adaptive Section
373. nd you have create privileges the student will be added to the system and registered in the class 13 Creating and Managing Classes e Update the Maple T A database with any new information in the roster by uploading a new class roster for an existing class e Remove multiple students from a class To create and upload a class roster 1 From the Class Homepage select the Class User Manager from the top menu bar 2 Select Roster then click Import Users From Roster 3 Find the Select Roster File tab then click Browse to find the text file containing the class roster The text file for example txt and rst can contain fields delimited by comma or tab characters You can upload an Excel spreadsheet which has been saved to a text file The file must have e One line for each student e A header for each included column that matches the specified headers Note If your university uses LDAP authentication the usernames in the import file should be their LDAP usernames In this case the passwords will be the LDAP passwords See LDAP Authentication page 312 4 Click Submit The records are displayed If there are any errors these are displayed at the top of the page 5 Click Update Roster The students are added to the system if appropriate AND registered in your class Print this list to record login and password information or click Create CSV to save this information to a file Important If this page is not printed
374. ned Formula 328 Dimensioned Number 328 Disable vs Delete assignment 27 Displaying 281 Answers vs Formulas 253 Backslash symbol 282 Plot 242 drawMaplePlot 242 Duplicating Questions 90 E E Maple questions 157 e 246 Naming variables 262 Edit Class Information 11 Edit HTML 94 Edit Question 82 Edit Question Details 84 Edit Response Area 95 Edit Insert Response Area 95 Editing assignments 27 Existing Class 10 existing questions 322 New question from source 61 Profile 310 Questions 60 61 With the Equation Editor 231 Editor for Math Expressions 94 Electromagnetism 247 Email notification Passing score 49 Empty Class 6 Entering Chemistry Expressions 229 Equals condition 264 Equation 137 328 Equation Editor 94 Palette 233 Requirements and Syntax 235 Equation Question Types 222 Equation Questions 222 Equivalent Answers 330 Equivalent Units Creating New Table 252 Erf 272 Error Margin 227 Essay Question Source Script 342 Essay Questions Adding Essay Annotations 294 Grading 294 Question Editor 129 Removing Annotations 294 Euler s Constant 222 Exact Grader Rules 131 Example Numeric and Algorithmic Variables 215 Numeric question 213 Numeric Question with Units 214 Numeric Question with Units and Algorithmic Variables 216 Exception to Max Number of Attempts 51 Exporting Course Module 317 Grades 292 Question Bank File 82 External Assignment 305 Extra credit
375. nerate variable or plot 3 Enter the Maple commands used to define the random variable or enter the plot statement The plot statement accepts plot device options See Setting Plot Options page 277 for a list of plot options Guidelines for Maple Commands in Maple based Variables 1 To generate a random number using Maple you must use the multiple commands randomize lt random_command gt for each random variable Otherwise the same output is generated in each instantiation of the question 11 When entering multiple commands ensure that all except the last have a trailing colon The last command must not have a trailing colon 111 You must use the or notation when including variables in a Maple command iv When referencing negative random variables in a maple variable definition be sure to place the negative variable in parentheses otherwise an error message will return 4 To add the variable definition to the algorithm text box click OK 5 You can use the Algorithm Designer to generate multiple variables You can also use a Maple repository when generating random variables Click Maple Repository to import and link to a Maple repository Establishing Conditions Between Variables Ensure the variables always satisfy the condition equals expr 7 expr 7 You can also use the Algorithm Designer to set conditions that must be met when the system generates variable values 1 Enter the conditi
376. nes a tolerance of 5 of 2 is different from 2 2 1 0 05 which defines a tolerance of 5 of the sum 4 See Also Answer Tolerance Source Script page 336 Controlling Answer Tolerance page 226 6 14 Overview of Algorithmic Question Capabilities Algorithmic question generation allows you to write questions in which specified variables are assigned random values according to defined ranges and conditions each time the question is reused in an assignment Using algorithmically generated variables within questions allows you to generate multiple question permutations from the same question stem Thus you can write a single stem or template question that can be reused The numbers and wording change to use new randomly determined values in different assignment attempts by the same student or different students The system allows you to create variables that use mathematical logical arguments to generate random numbers in questions where the data used in a question is determined by random selection from an entire scenario s data and the variables are based on lists or to use a combination of mathematical logical and list based variables to produce a randomized question See Also Rules for Naming Variables page 262 259 Authoring Mathematical Questions Tutorial Algorithmic Question page 282 Tutorial Maple based Algorithmic Question Authoring page 285 Tutorial List based Variables page 283 6 15 How Does a
377. ng Question The Question Editor allows you to e Create questions e Edit existing questions e Add Algorithms Hints Feedback and Information Fields to questions For more details see Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 and Adding and Editing Information Fields Hints or Feedback page 74 respectively To create a question 1 On the Question Repository page select New Question The Question Editor is displayed 2 From the list click the type of question you want to author 3 Enter the content of your question 4 Once you have completed the question click Finish You will be taken to a question summary page 5 Click Preview to preview the question Provide an answer and click Grade to see how the question is graded Click Edit to continue refining the question if necessary To edit a question 1 In the Question Repository search for the question 2 Click the question name to display the question summary page 60 61 Managing Questions 3 Click Edit to enter the Question Editor 4 Make your changes to the question 5 Click Finish to save your changes To share or clone a question To share or clone a question see Sharing Questions page 89 and Cloning Questions page 90 Avoiding System Time outs during Authoring Sessions While you are working on a question the system client holds your changes to the working copy of the active question While authoring or editing a question if you click Finis
378. nits A O O TO COCO O CO ooo eo o O oe CON TAN CN CO TAO TN OS CT ANI CTC CO TAN CN O CIT O A Wo CI CO CTN O C Ss OOO St e CIN 7 TEN Ss O is Ss ns 251 Authoring Mathematical Questions Derived Units 6 02214199 10 Table 6 10 Other units recognized by Maple T A Other Units 252 Authoring Mathematical Questions Custom Table of Equivalent Units You can specify a table of custom equivalent units which you can use in any Numeric question in the question bank You can define new units or add additional names or symbols for base units Defining a Table of Equivalent Units for a Question Bank To define a table of units for a question bank you need to create a question bank in plain text format and include an equivalent units table at the beginning of file This table requires the following structure qu env numeric lt tablename gt lt table definition gt where lt tablename gt is a string of lower case letters without spaces identifying the table Once the table of units is defined you need to upload the question bank Table Structure A table of unit definitions lt table_definition gt has the general structure lt new_unitl gt lt new_unit2 gt lt numeric_multiplierl gt lt old unitl1l gt descriptionl lt numeric_multiplier2 gt lt old unit2 gt description2 For example lm grain metric 0 00006479891kg grain troy gr Gr Note All unit definitions
379. nments on the Assignment Editor page Additionally unavailable assignments will appear in a student s past results page if the student completed them 52 Creating and Managing Assignments Notes e You can also choose to withhold grades and feedback until after the assignment due date by setting these policies under Feedback in the Set Policies tab in the Assignment Editor e Students must complete their assignment sessions by submitting their work to be graded before the time and date specified in the assignment schedule e You can also set time limits for assignment sessions If there is a time limit set for the test in the assignment definition a pop up window warns students as they approach the time limit They are not allowed to answer additional questions once they exceed the time limit however they can submit their work up to that point for grading e By default the system does not establish a scheduled start or end time for assignments See Also Configuring Feedback Options page 49 Assignment Visibility Clearing the Visible check box excludes the assignment from the list of assignments displayed to students on your class homepage Alternatively e In the Assignment Editor you can access this option by clicking the name of the assignment and selecting hide e You can set the schedule for the assignment to exclude a particular period of time which also restricts the assignment s availability to students e You
380. nmodified form However when the answer text only provides qualitative grading criteria up and to the left 1t is more difficult to generate a sample response In that case it may be a good strategy to provide an example answer as a grader parameter in the testbank For example set the answer text to be up and to the left and set grader param example 140 27 After your grader class is created create a JAR file and place it in the WEB INF lib directory so it is accessible to the class loader Then restart the Maple T A server Step 3 Author the Maple T A Question The last step is to host your Java applet in a Maple T A question using the Applet question type Applet questions must be authored in a plain text script file For example you can enter the sample code above for a question with slider balls in a plain text file then save the file as filename qu See Also Question Modes Question Types page 328 Clickable Image Question Source Script Question Mode Clickable Image Question Editor question type Clickable Image Question file qu syntax qu x y mode clickable image The following example source script creates a Clickable Image question qu 1 topic Clickable Image Question Example Script qu 1 1 mode Clickable Image qu 1 1 name Click a region on the graph qu 1 1 editing useHTML qu 1 1 algorithm gp rint 2 Ssign switch gp positive negative Sregion gp 3 qu 1 1
381. not be graded at this time Cancel Important If a student is actively in the process of taking an assignment you cannot force grade the student s assignment If you attempt to force Force El grade an assignment that any active users are currently taking a list of active users 1s displayed with the message that those assignments will not be force graded The second method to force grade an active assignment 1 From the Class Homepage click the Assignments menu 2 Select Assignments a 3 A list of assignments will be displayed If there are active assignments there will be a locked icon next to the assignment title indicating that it is active For more information see Overview The Assignment Editor Screen page 23 4 If you click the assignment name of an active assignment you can view the options and choose to force grade it To force grade a locked assignment click force grade Note This option is only available for active assignments 5 A message will appear asking you to confirm the force grade Click OK Important If a student is actively in the process of taking an assignment you cannot force grade the student s assignment If you attempt to force grade an assignment that any active users are currently taking a list of active users is displayed with the message that those assignments will not be force graded 309 Working with the Gradebook See Also Changing Grades and Adding Feedback
382. ns Select the correct values Please select the correct value s Use Response Specific Feedback 9 Click OK Text of the question E Source E O la BA tE il ae B 7 U ws xX x iS E Z ZZ At A Fon size ud Bso iz Q ABC DEF Edit body p 4A 10 Click Finish to save and preview the question To edit further details in the Question Repository within the Question Designer see Editing Question Details in the Question Respository page 84 Numeric with or without required unit dimensions To create a Numeric question 1 Enter a title for the question under the Question Name panel 2 Enter a question in the Question Text 107 Authoring Question Types 3 Click Insert Edit Response Area 53 4 Select the Numeric question type in the Edit Response Area dialog e Numeric questions can accept numbers without units as valid responses The correct answer must be expressed as a number The student response can be an expression such as 1 2 3 4 e Numeric responses can be expressed in decimal form or scientific notation for example 3 244 e To require units enter a unit in the Units Part field for example m for meters If you do not enter a required unit dimension the system displays only a single response cell that accepts only numbers If you do enter a unit dimension students are presented two cells one for the number part and one for the unit part The student must enter corre
383. nt In the Assignment Editor click the name of the assignment to be copied Six option buttons are displayed See Figure 3 2 Select copy Copy of lt original assignment name gt appears under the Assignment heading Click this copied assignment link and select edit from the drop down menu Enter a new name in the Assignment Name field Make changes as necessary to the question set Select Questions tab and policies Set Policies tab SY A Nn A Q N e Click the Review amp Finish tab and then Finish to save the assignment with the new name and updates 27 Creating and Managing Assignments Deleting Assignments Considerations BEFORE you delete an assignment e After scheduled assignment deadlines have passed the assignment is listed on the student s view of the assignment menu for your class but cannot be selected e Hiding an assignment or scheduling an assignment for a specific time period may allow you to achieve most of your objectives for deleting an assignment To delete an assignment 1 In the Assignment Editor click the assignment to be deleted Six option buttons are displayed 2 Click delete and a confirmation prompt appears 3 If you click OK the program removes the assignment from the list in the Assignment Editor screen and from lists of assignments elsewhere in the system Students will not be able to select the assignment from the Class Homepage and you will not be able to view their
384. nt responses e Precision and margin of error for student responses See Figure 5 62 For examples of the related plain text script files see Answer Tolerance Source Script page 336 Specify precision Require absolute accuracy O Figures 1 The student answer must be presented with exactly this number of significant figures Accept err E g To accept any number between 2 74 and 2 76 set erto be 0 01 J Accept kin nth place K nmi E g Set kto 2 and n to 3 to accept only 2 73 2 74 2 75 2 76 and 77 Accept perc So E g To accept any number within 10 ofthe correct answer enter 10 for perc Figure 5 62 Specify Answer Precision and Tolerance in a Numeric Question Specifying Precision To require that the student response exactly matches the value of the correct answer to floating point limits approximately 8 decimal places select Require absolute accuracy For example if the correct answer is 2 77 the response 2 7701 is graded incorrect e To require that the student response contains a specific number of significant digits and exactly matches the value of the correct answer select Figures and then select the number of significant digits from the drop down menu Student responses that are correct up to the specified number of significant digits receive 50 credit Important Figures does not specify a margin of error If you specify a correct answer value in the answer value text field
385. nt subcategories of formula type questions Table 5 5 discusses these nine subtypes in detail and provides an example responses of each Mathematical Formula Question Types Comparison Table Table 5 5 Mathematical Formula Subtypes Comparison Table Question Type Description Example Responses yp 1 Formula The Formula subtype accepts numbers and formulas It does e sin not accept equations that is expressions consisting of two components separated by an sign Formula without Logs and Trig Formula without Logs and Trig accepts numbers and 1 sqrt 2 formulas that do not include trigonometric functions or logarithms Formula with Physical Units The Formula with Physical Units subtype accepts a combination of numeric quantities algebraic formulas unit dimensions and physical units It also recognizes equivalent physical units For example if 500g is specified as the correct answer 0 5kg is also graded correct cos x m s Formula that Matches The Formula that Matches Responses to within C subtype x In x Responses to within C accepts numbers and formulas It also accepts two answers as equivalent if they differ by a constant number x In x 1 Wo Equation The Equation subtype specifically allows for the use of an sign in the equation It grades equivalent equations as correct Note The expression given as the correct answer must consist of a single variable on the left hand side of the equation and a formul
386. nts a piecewise function The pieces themselves can be created as subcurves as described in CreatingSubcurves page 119 Important Whenever you are specifying the Group Plots option you must do so before adding any graphs to the sketch board Controlling the drawing tools buttons students receive As you add graphs to the sketch board Maple T A automatically decides on an appropriate set of drawing tools buttons for students to work with and how many of any given curve type they can draw This is done to prevent students from cheating by drawing more of a given type of graph compared to what the the author has drawn For example if you draw two lines then students will be given the line tool and be able to draw up to two lines Students are also given the Delete 4 icon Maple T A stores this information in Options under Visible buttons In the rare case where you want to override this setting click Edit source Options and then change the Visible buttons Creating Subcurves The graph of any line or parabola can be restricted either to an interval or to a pair of half bounded subintervals Endpoint s of the resulting subcurve s can be filled or open circles to indicate whether they are included or excluded Table 5 3 describes the different options available Table 5 3 Subcurves Available in Maple T A Subcurve Construction Tool s Used How to Use Them Restrict a curve to a half bounded interval that ny Click at any location on t
387. nts on the coordinate grid After you plot two points on the grid a line is drawn through these points 3 To change the line you can move either of the two points anywhere on the grid You can also move the entire line by clicking and dragging on the line To delete the line click Delete 4 and then click the object you want to delete 5 To save changes in the Edit Response Area click OK To graph a parabola l 1 Click Draw Parabola NE This enables you to plot points on the coordinate grid that can be moved to shape and position the parabola 2 On the coordinate grid plot the vertex first followed by another point on the parabola 3 You can change the parabola by dragging either of the two points anywhere on the grid This will stretch compress reflect or translate the parabola To delete the parabola click Delete 4 and then click on the object you want to delete 5 To save changes in the Edit Response Area click OK To graph an absolute value l Y Click Draw Absolute Value NA This enables you to plot the vertex and an additional point on the coordinate grid 2 Plot the vertex first followed by an additional point on the grid The absolute value graph is drawn automatically 3 You can change the absolute value graph by dragging either of the two points anywhere on the grid This will stretch compress reflect or translate the absolute value 118 Authoring Question Types 4 To delete the absolute value graph
388. num lt numeric part of the answer for example 3 gt qu 1 1 answer units lt units part of the answer for example m s gt qu 1 1 showUnits lt true or false whether to display the question with a Units text field gt qu 1 1 grading lt grading mode see below gt qu 1 1 units lt optional reference to external table of units see below gt qu 1 1 digit lt sig digits positive integer required for exact_sigd and toler_sigd grading modes gt qu 1 1 err lt error tolerance required for toler_sigd and toler_abs grading modes gt qu 1 1 perc lt percentage error tolerance required for toler_perc grading mode gt See Also Numeric Questions page 209 Question Modes Question Types page 328 Question Designer Question Example using Various Embedded Questions This is an example of a question designer question containing response objects within the question statement Note The Question Designer question type supersedes the Inline question type Description Question Designer questions are multipart questions You control question weighting You control formatting of the entire question including tables Blanks can be inserted inside tables to create fill in the blanks tables of data Multiple Choice and Multiple Selection Questions are set with response choices displayed horizontally rather than following the question This enables you to create survey style questions Individual response cells are indicated by
389. o The info Field page 331 Adding and Editing Hints When editing a question in the Question Editor you can add or edit hints To add or edit the hints 1 On the Question Editor screen click Add in the Hints area to see the following screen Edit Hint Name Order 1 Penalty 0 0 Source AA Biux xx amp Bo E 2 Enter the following information e Name enter the name of the hint 75 Managing Questions e Order if you are authoring multiple hints they can be sorted in a specific order Use the drop down menu to specify the order e Penalty Define a penalty for the question if you want students to be penalized for using a hint during an assignment Assign a weight between 0 and 1 for the penalty By default the penalty has weight of 0 0 which means a student will not be penalized if they use the hint 3 In the textbox provided enter your comment for the hint Hints can include text HTML formatted text symbolic math expressions algorithmic variables inserted objects JavaScript code variables and more To add or edit HTML formatted text click Source El Source in the menu bar 4 Click Save to save all changes 5 Each question can contain any number of hints To display an additional repeat steps 1 4 6 Once a hint has been added the Add button will change to Edit Click Edit to edit the hint See Also Hints Coaching and Performance Feedback page 331 Adding and Editing Feedback
390. o give authorization remotely the proctor must login and access the Proctor Tools menu See Also Adding a Proctor page 19 Managing Proctors page 17 Anonymous Practice Assignments Anonymous Practice assignments are similar to Homework or Quiz assignments however results are not recorded in the Gradebook Any number of questions can be included and the assignment is delivered in an instructor specified sequence or scrambled Graded assignment reports are produced upon conclusion of the assignment but results are not recorded in the Gradebook Students can view their results at the end of the session no permanent record is maintained Results can be printed but are only available for as long as a student displays them Study Session and Mastery Assignments Study Session and Mastery assignments usually draw from a large pool of assignment material often algorithmically generated to produce limitless question permutations There is no pre established number of questions for either Mastery or Study Session assignments questions are drawn from pools throughout the study session Assignments are delivered one question at a time and the student submits each question for grading individually and immediately instead of having the entire test graded at the end These assignments are also sometimes described as learning dialogues because of their question answer next question style Mastery and Study Session assignment types emphasiz
391. o the Set Policies tab of the Assignment Editor 2 Enable the Visible check box under Assignment Properties or reset the scheduled availability so that it appears again on the Class Homepage Alternatively click the hidden assignment in the Assignment Editor and select show Editing Assignments To edit an existing assignment 1 Click the assignment name and select edit 2 The Assignment Editor menu opens with the Choose Name tab active Operations within the Assignment Editor are identical whether you are creating a new assignment or editing properties of an existing assignment All tabs are accessible 28 Creating and Managing Assignments From within the Assignment Editor you can e Change the name of the assignment e Add or delete questions e Group organize or sequence question delivery e Attach or edit policies Finalizing Changes To finalize your changes 1 Select the Review amp Finish tab 2 Verify your edits 3 Click Finish You are returned to the Assignment Editor listing all the assignments for your class Tip From within the Assignment Editor you can move between tabs in any order The numbers on the tabs are merely a suggested sequence See Also Finishing and Saving an Assignment page 56 Editing Shared Assignments You cannot make changes to inherited assignments in the same way as you edit any assignment in your class You can control some assignment policies for inherited assignments h
392. ocean bane aan eaeoat ean tentnomn oleae 196 PSS CI OUD td ee ea Se ialanas 196 SA se ae ce a ee ct act a a cette aa nN clk cha eat oat cea ead bhel ea 196 TOSCO a ia a ees rac re Teese Te Or 196 Multipart Questions SC GuemCin On Paila 197 Working with MultipattQuUestONS pai IR SA AR ea a eee alee aire athe mabe 197 Next CS PS ce sah hae et eae A A AN ate te asec ia cal nabs tN outeiade tees 198 512 VII ICC OIC OU CS OMS O ea ACen do 198 EVES CHOI ol coco 198 TAO i a A da Sees a tea ah aaah Se edt ache es ea dene nes we Bal seo Ss ale 199 MASS AU UTS ch ae barrel arg EN th AE ON ratchet et ett E A Rh ede is ld etek au eel atcha chen are ate 199 Example 1 Creatine a Simple Multiple EA id 199 Example 2 Creating a Multiple Choice Question with Algorithmic Addition ooooccconcncncononcncononcncononcnconononcnnnncncnnnnos 200 Example gt Derivative Of a simple EXPONE A ea ln 202 Next STEPS ASA A tl Sete te ane a ds ourmctll eect 204 ls Multiple Selecion Questions A eee A Gesu E 204 DESIDIA oli la alles tenio alado aloe 204 TAO i ia EE E A A esco de e 204 MANS AUC OS lali 205 Example 1 Creating a Simple Multiple Selection Question 2 0 2 0 cece cece eee e nee een e eee e eee e eee ene ede E need ee EE EE EE EEE EE EES 205 Example 2 Using an Algorithm for a Multiple Selection Question cccc ccc cece eee e nee e cence eee eee e eee teens ease neon en eee es 207 NEXT SE Bea see seis ral al dabas 209 Da PAIN UTM TIC US SIONS ects sl
393. ode prior to publishing assignments Maple T A does not display error messages 1f the plot does not work correctly The drawMaplePlot command Important The Maple drawMaplePlot command has been superseded by the plotmaple command Questions created using the drawMaplePlot command will continue to function However it is recommended that you use the plotmaple command To display a plot with a question using the drawMaplePlot command 1 From the Question Editor Select Name and Type screen select the Use HTML formatting for the question text option 2 Click Next 3 In the text field for the particular question type click the Source button and enter the HTML script tags and structure illustrated below lt script gt drawMaplePlot maplecode width height libname lt script gt lt script gt drawMaplePlot plot sin x x 0 10 400 400 lt script gt The script requires the following syntax e lt script gt and lt script gt tags e drawMaplePlot command e Expression enclosed parentheses e Maple code to create plot enclosed in quotes e Closing semicolon width optional specifies plot width e height optional specifies plot height e libname optional specifies path to Maple libraries 246 Authoring Mathematical Questions To use multiple libraries place all libraries in the same directory and specify the path using the Libname option See Also plotmaple text page 269 Maple graded Questi
394. on by a Entering two expressions b Selecting the relation Notes i Each expression you use must be a e Variable name for example x or monthly totals You do not need to use the or notation e Number for example 5 or 2 67 e Math expression or formula for example x 2 1 11 You must define variables referenced in the condition before defining the condition statement 2 To add the condition statement to the algorithm text box click OK 3 You can use the Algorithm Designer to define multiple condition statements See Also Overview of Algorithmic Question Capabilities page 258 Generating Random Numbers in Questions page 262 Mathematical and Logical Operators in Algorithms and Answers page 275 Working with Variable Data page 259 73 Managing Questions Adding and Editing Algorithms For every question type you can use algorithmically generated variables in question statements answers hints or feedback Using variables in questions you can generate variations on a single template question To create a question that uses randomly generated data in a question you must define variables Maple generated plots to be included in questions are also defined in the Algorithm Editor using the plotmaple command When you define a plot in the Algorithm Editor you can use Preview to see the plot image verify the plot statement 1s correct and edit 1t 1f necessary For more information see Plotting Using Map
395. on term by term hint 2 The derivative of x lt SUP gt 2 lt SUP gt is 2x hint 3 The derivative of the constant term is zero eee ee x MM MM X KKK KKK See Also Configuring Feedback Options page 49 Comments and Performance Feedback Providing performance feedback is a two step process in the Maple T A system Step 1 Create content using the comment field for each question For information on adding a comment using the Question Editor see Adding and Editing Feedback page 75 This topic discusses this necessary first step Important When creating questions that have a specific number of significant digits in the correct answer it is recommended that you use the sig function to create algorithmic variables By using these variables in the question statement feedback hints and solution you ensure that values are displayed with the correct number of significant digits For more information on the sig function see decimal n x sig n x int x page 264 Step 2 When creating an assignment specify if and how feedback is displayed in Step 3 Set Policies of the Assignment Editor You can display information including the e Final grade for the test e Correct answer for each question e comment for each question You can also exclude question by question grading and question specific feedback from the final assignment reports displayed to a student Step 1 Details The comment Field To return custom feedback
396. oncncncncncnnnnononononcncncnnnnnnnos 169 Contents NS US PS ek Spe casera eae hin erecta E needa ate het encase tom ata ncaa as evened bee veloc E seahcne eames tesh anes 170 39 What Chine QUES OASIS A A OS 170 DESCIPTIN dr eR Ee 170 AO A a a AN 170 Tasic UOS ia a a a aa a a a a a E N 170 Example oane E PESA ANA AS TEETE A ae 170 Example 2 ld 172 NO AiO 176 A O Ne 176 DESCH DUON nt O O A NA tarada 176 SN A A A A a N eGo tela ete taal eked anu 176 General Overview on Creating Math App Questions in Maple T A ooooccccoconcncncononcncononcncnnononcnnononcnnnnonnnnnncnnnnancnnnos 177 TANS RUC HONS iai a a a a a A Eg INGE SC Pacina a ads e E N EE E E E E OEN 177 Create a Mati ADA Worksheet aordena o e eaten Seah 178 Initializing Parameters ina Math App QUESTION A A A a 181 Example k Explotino a Series Expansion eere 183 Example 2 Explorne an Integral N mercally eroris ria AAA AA RA TA E 183 Example gt Explorme a2 D Pl idad 184 Example 4s Explormo d DIO a a a a a Seale htc en eae ea ieee Omearae 184 Example 5 Greating the Quadrant Gamo Math APP os 185 Example 6 Making the Quadrant Game Math App Gradeable through Maple T A ccccc cece cece cence c ee eeeeeeeeeeesenenes 190 Example Creatine an Imeractivo Plot OF a Circle boca os 19 Example 8 Making the Interactive Plot of a Circle Math App Gradeable through Maple T A cc ccc cceseee eee eeeeees 194 SE MONDA AOS A cet tenes ec ce cere est a creme unseen
397. onfirmation message is displayed Click OK to delete the subfolder 3 Creating and Managing Assignments The Assignment Editor page 23 Tutorial Using the Assignment Editor page 29 Assignment Types page 40 Details on Using the Assignment Editor page 45 3 1 The Assignment Editor Assignments are created by selecting questions from the Question Repository The Assignment Editor allows you to create new assignments edit the content properties or appearance of existing assignments and copy print or delete assignments Assignment creation options enable you to create assignments in which Maple T A reorders questions generates questions or displays a subset of questions Each student viewing your assignment can potentially complete a unique set of questions The Assignment Editor lists assignments created for your class If you began your class registration by selecting a template or a shared class not an empty class 1t may already be populated with a series of assignments based on testing materials or other shared questions If not you will see a blank list here initially To access the Assignment Editor 1 From the Class Homepage click the Assignments menu 2 Select Assignments 3 A list of assignments will appear as shown in the image below My Homepage Help Courtney Jones Instructor Logout Algebra 2 Class User Manager Proctor Tools Assignments Questions Gradebook Assignment Editor Ass game nts
398. ons Description Clickable Image questions can only be authored in the Question Editor and require J ava A Clickable Image question presents an image with a number of hot spots where students are required to identify the correct image element by clicking on the appropriate hot spots Using the Question Editor in the system you can create these interactive questions by working with an image and identifying hot spot response regions by painting regions with the mouse All clients require a Java enabled browser Specifically instructors require Java Runtime Environment IRE 1 6 or Java Runtime Environment JRE 1 7 to create a Clickable Image question and students require Java 1 6 or Java 1 7 to take an assignment that contains a Clickable Image question Grading Clickable image questions are graded correct or incorrect There are no partial marks allotted Instructions To create a Clickable Image question 1 From the Class Homepage select the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 On the Question Type list click Clickable Image a It is recommended that you enter a description in the Question Description text field The description is used to label the question in the topic If excluded the question type is used b To add an Algorithm or Feedback to the question see Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 and Adding and Editing Feedback page 75 c To proceed to the Question Details screen click Finish
399. ons Study Session Assignments oooococoncncccononccconononnonononnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnrn nn nnnnnnnnnnnanannnnanannnnanos 333 Special Chardeters ALOE e os 333 A gt Usine Script Filesto Author QUESOS ti isis 334 Ad TAD O SOMOS cp tao 334 Algorithmic Mathematical Formula Question Source SCTript oooocococoncncocononconononconononcnnononcnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnoncnnnnonnnnnnnns 335 Algorithmic Multiple Selection Question Source dc 335 Answer Tolerance SOULCe SCM arieni a NS nates Acie dos 336 Apper QUESTIONS ener mt or Pane neo Cea rin RI Wee EET a Ene OY Ee ae eee EE eee eee Oe 339 Clickable lima se Question Source S CHIP L a AAA AAA AA ssh eta ia Reale eae as 341 Essay QUESO SA ral ee Coord 342 Fillanthe Bl nks Question Source SOrDi eaii a a a haat hnl acess eden shana Mase E 343 TE VAS Phe SS CLO NS icc erik certo ca ese a api 343 Pormula Forn Varias tanneries SS NE AS IATA RR 344 Graph Skctehine QUESO SOULE CU 344 Key Word om Phrase Question Source Capi id 345 Labeline Graphics in Questions SOULCE EP ba 346 Teast QUESHON SOUTCE SEDE AAA AA AAA LAT AAA AS 346 Contents Maple eraded Formula Question Source CUP ds 347 Maple Syntax Question Source Script a AAA RA A nat Aha een eee ae Gio Ris 349 Mat hin OSS OUT CS CII OU ida 350 Matti cada nds reina inci a ies DS io io Nidos 351 Maltipar cormtla atlas 351 Multipart Question Source SCENES AAA AS 352 Multiple Choice QUESOS E ae 354 Multiple Selection Question Source CAE doi 354 Numeti
400. ons page 153 Tutorial Maple based Algorithmic Question Authoring page 285 6 9 Mathematical Functions amp Operations The following tables provide a reference of mathematical functions constants and operators Table 6 5 contains general functions and numbers that can be used for both Maple T A and Maple questions Table 6 6 provides the function names for Maple T A and Maple questions for the hyperbolic and inverse hyperbolic functions Note that Maple T A and Maple use different notation for these functions e Table 6 7 contains exclusive Maple notation For a complete list of Maple functions refer to Maple documentation Some Maple commands take unevaluated forms For a discussion on student use of unevaluated forms see Maple Syntax page 157 Table 6 5 Mathematical Functions and Operators Arithmetic Trigonometric Functions a E CTO gt AN eones ro inver eine a e e TO O OO O lt lt 2 558 sien nation 290 000 000 eat fong ratos re inver ect e ot fee iversecoseent 9 rara agar E a toto vale fami O Table 6 6 Hyperbolic and Inverse Hyperbolic Functions Maple T A Notation Maple Notation Maple T A Notation Maple Notation hyperbolic sine inverse hyperbolic sine cosine hyperbolic tangent hyptan tanh inverse hyperbolic archyptan arctanh tangent secant 247 Authoring Mathematical Questions Function Maple T A Notation Maple Notation Maple T A Notation Maple Notation cosecant hy
401. onstrained The value can be in lowercase or uppercase 280 Authoring Mathematical Questions Option SSCS NN This option specifies how the surface is colored where s is one of xyz xy z zgrayscale zhue or none The default is device dependent The value can be lowercase or uppercase Note that color specification takes precedence over shading specification regardless of the order of the options in the command The value can be in lowercase or uppercase style s This specifies how the surface is to be drawn where s is one of contour hidden line patch patchcontour patchnogrid point or wireframe Some of the options may not be available on some devices The default style is patch for colored surface patch rendering The value can be in lowercase or uppercase symbol s This option defines the symbol for points in the plot s is one of box circle cross diamond or point The value can be in lowercase or uppercase Note If the style is set to point the default symbol is plot device specific symbolsize n The size in points of a symbol used in plotting can be given by a positive integer This does not affect the symbol point The default symbol size is 10 thickness n This option specifies the thickness of lines in the plot The thickness n must be a non negative integer The default thickness 1s 0 tickmarks m n p If m is an integer then this option controls the number of tickmarks that are placed on the x axis If m is a
402. or Feedback page 74 9 Click Finish 10 Click Preview to view the question See Figure 5 49 172 Authoring Question Types VManteTA Preview Question Matching Triangle Match each of the triangle types with its definition using the drop down menus Types Y Right Y Scalene Acute Y Isosceles Y Equilateral Obtuse 1 One angle greater than 90 degrees 2 Three angles less than 90 degrees 3 Three sides of equal length One angle equal to 90 degrees 5 Wo sides of equal length om Two sides of equal length Grade Close Figure 5 49 Matching Triangle Types Example Question Example 2 Slope Fields 1 From the Class Homepage click the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 In the Question Type list click Matching 4 Enter the following for Question Name Matching Slope Fields 5 At the bottom of the page click the add icon a and enter the following Algorithm Sp plotmaple DEtools DEplot diff y t t sin t y t 1 y t t 0 4 y 0 2 y 0 0 Ly 0 1 y 0 1 y 6 12 arrows THIN linecolor green thickness 2 Note For more details on adding an Algorithm see Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 6 Click Refresh algorithm preview to preview the variables you defined See Figure 5 50 173 Authoring Question Types Algorithm p plotmaple DEtools DEplot diff y t t sin t y t 1 y t t 0 4 y 0 2 y 0 0 y 0
403. or each category in the rubric Note In preview mode these grades will not be saved In order to assign and save grades in rubric tables see Using a Rubric to Grade an Assignment page 303 e Edit allows you to make changes to the rubric Note Remember to click Save to retain the changes e Delete allows you to delete the selected rubric You will receive a message to confirm the deletion as shown in Figure 7 9 Message from webpage Pa O Are you sure you want to delete Test Rubric F Figure 7 9 Delete Rubric Click OK to delete the rubric table e Copy will clone the rubric and assign it a default name Copy of Using a Rubric to Grade an Assignment 1 In the top toolbar on the Class Homepage click Assignments 2 Select External amp Rubrics 304 Working with the Gradebook Linking an Assignment and a Rubric External Assignment Chooose Assignment Select an existing assignment to grade using the rubric from the drop down menu or select Create new assignment Assignment Name For a new assignment give the assignment a name Rubric Table W Use the drop down menu and choose a rubric table to link to the assignment After a rubric is assigned an icon s appears next to the text field You can now preview the rubric you have selected Also an additional column is added to the Assignment Grades table Total Points The total number of points on the assignment graded by the rubric Note T
404. ormation see Cloning Questions page 90 To determine which method of obtaining questions is appropriate for your class take the following behaviors into consideration and choose the method that makes the most sense for you e When an instructor inherits a question the instructor should expect it to be modified by the question owner at any time without notice However the question is likely to be a valid question with all resources images etc in place e When an instructor clones a question the instructor becomes the full owner of the clone and can be certain that it will not be edited by anyone else However there is a danger of losing resources images etc because the cloning process does not copy the resource files to the class web site therefore it is possible that the resources files may be deleted by the original author at any time To share a question 1 In the Question Repository find the question you wish to share and use the drop down menu to edit the question 2 Find the Privacy option You can choose what type of privacy you want it to have using the drop down list e If you select class instructors only instructors of this particular class will see the question in their question repository e If you select all instructors at this school all instructors of your institution will see the question in their question repository e If you select all Maple T A instructors and click Publish then all Maple T A instructors
405. ormula lt br gt kinetic energy 1 2 mass velocity lt sup gt 2 lt sup gt lt br gt In this case the kinetic energy is lt br gt 1 2 mass velocity lt sup gt 2 lt sup gt or Sans qu 1 3 editing useHTML qu 1 3 algorithm mass rand 4 8 2 Svelocity rand 10 20 2 Sans sig 2 1 2 mass S velocity 2 qu 1 3 question What is the kinetic energy of a body of mass mass kg moving at velocity m s qu 1 3 answer Sans the system displays the correct answer as Correct answer This answer is derived according to the general formula kinetic energy 1 2 mass velocity In this case the kinetic energy is 1 2 7 6 197 or 1 400 255 Authoring Mathematical Questions assuming that the algorithmically generated variables set mass 7 6 and velocity 19 Consider another example Example 4 qu 1 4 mode formula qu 1 4 algorithm Sa rint 12 1 Sb rint 12 1 c rint 12 1 qu 1 4 question Find the solution of the linear equation S a x b c qu 1 4 answer c b S a The above code chooses random integer coefficients a b and c between 1 and 12 The formula for the answer is calculated in the answer field Note Braces variable is used to enclose the variable names in expressions This structure allows you to use variable names directly adjacent to other letter characters Although the above example does not cause errors there are several side effects
406. ot plot RESPONSE x 0 10 Q type formula mode Maple name 2D Maple plot editing useHTML The following is the source code for a Maple Syntax question that plots the student response using the Maple tubeplot command Students must use Maple syntax in their response question Enter a set of spacecurves using Maple syntax for example cos t sin t 0 maple true maple _answer plot plots tubeplot SRESPONSE t 0 4 radius 05 numpoints 70 type maple mode Maple name Tube Plot editing useHTML Important You must use the long form name for Maple package functions You must test your plot code prior to publishing assignments Maple T A does not display error messages if the plot does not work correctly See Also Maple graded Questions page 153 Tutorial Maple based Algorithmic Question Authoring page 285 6 5 Using Formula Syntax In the Maple T A system you can create questions that use mathematical formulas or expressions In the Question Editor you can enter formulas using standard mathematical notation In general the system accepts the same formulas as a graphing calculator Thus the system accepts x 2 2x 1 2sin x x 2 1 e x 2 Note The most common mistake is to forget parentheses For example 1 x 1 is different from 1 x 1 which the system interprets as 1 x 1 See Also Basic Math Syntax in the System page 222 Mathematical Functions amp Operations page 2
407. otting Using Maple page 242 77 Managing Questions Images and Reference Files in Questions You can use image files in GIF JPEG or PNG formats in questions To place an image in a question first upload the file to your class web site Then include a reference to the image in the question You can also link to a file that has been uploaded to your class web site The following file formats are supported htm html gif jpg png pdf xls class jar js css shtml exe zip swf lib Uploading Images and Reference Files to the Class Web Site 1 From the Class Homepage select Class File Manager 2 Navigate to the appropriate subfolder on the web site or click Create new subfolder to create a new subfolder For maintainability it is recommended that you create a subfolder and place your images in it 3 Click Upload file s to this point 4 To the file to upload click Browse 5 You can upload a single file or a zip archive To upload a single file a Select Single File b To specify a new name for the uploaded file on the web site enter it in the Save As text field It is important to retain the file extension in the name The default name is the file name on your computer c Click OK to upload the file To upload a zip archive a Select the Zip Archive b To extract the files from the selected zip archive and upload them to the web site click OK This is the recommended method for uploading multiple fil
408. our Maple T A server a 4 5 6 From your Class Homepage select the Questions menu 7 Click New Question 8 In the Question Type list select Math App 9 Enter a question name 10 Enter instructions in the Question Text text field for example Using the slider draw the plot of e 2x4 4 11 In the Choose Worksheet section click Choose Worksheet to upload your Math App 12 Click upload file s to this point 13 Click Choose File to find the Math App on your machine 14 Select Single File and provide a name for the Math App 15 Click OK 16 Click the worksheet icon next to the Math App you want to use in your question 17 Under the heading Select the type of grading used select Grading Algorithm in Math App 18 Click Finish to save the question 19 To see how the question works click Preview Example A Math App Question gradeable through Maple T A that asks students to display a plot of a specific quadratic expression This example again uses the Math App worksheet that you created in the section Example Explore a Quadratic Expression 1 Log in to your Maple T A server and then go to your Class Homepage 2 From your Class Homepage select the Questions menu 3 Click New Question 181 Authoring Question Types 4 In the Question Type list select Math App 5 Enter a question name 6 Enter instructions in the Question Text text field for example Using the slider draw the plot of e 2x 4 7 In the
409. our assignment See Randomizing Question Delivery page 48 for more details e Merge individual questions to form new question groups in your assignment 33 Creating and Managing Assignments Assignment Questions Delete Merge UnMerge Generate a new question order L Never v Points Wl 4 Question Group 1 3 C Randomly pick 3 of 4 questions in this group 1 L Short Phrase Exact Match 2 7 short Phrase Key Word Matching 3 M Multiple Choice 4 v _ Fill in the blank Drop down Box O 2 M matching 1 C 3M Essay 1 el O 4 Y Multiple Selection 1 Total Points 12 Total Questions 6 Figure 3 6 Select Questions Specify Order and Weighting of Questions When you have completed these steps proceed to Step 3 Setting Policies Assignment Editor Step 3 Setting Policies In the Set Policies tab of the Assignment Editor screen you can e Select the type of assignment e Decide when to make the assignment available to your class e Set feedback options for the assignment e Establish other grading policies Type of Assignment Assignments for Credit Results Are Recorded There are three assignment types that record student results These are assessment style sessions that record performance in the class Gradebook after students click Grade 34 Creating and Managing Assignments e Homework or Quiz Assignments page 40 default assignment type e Proctored Exams pa
410. ove the slider to this number 70 Figure 5 52 Parameter Test for Math App Question The next step 1s to add startup code to the worksheet 12 Open the Startup Code code editor from the Edit menu select Startup Code 13 Add the following code to the code editor Actions module export InitParams Grade Num 3 InitParams proc val posint lt bk Num val DocumentTools Do TextArea0 Num end Grade proc if Document Tools Do Slider0 Num 1 0 0 0 end end module mm DocumentTools Do TextArea0 l i i e 7 Document Tools Do TextAreal Inside the Actions module the InitParams procedure defines a variable Num that is used in TextArea0 Num takes the value val which will be passed as a parameter from Maple T A 14 Save your code in the code editor 183 Authoring Question Types 15 Save your worksheet as ParameterTest mw Defining the Variable in Maple T A Next you will define a variable in Maple T A that 1s passed to InitParams through the val parameter _ Log in to your Maple T A server and then go to your Class Homepage From your Class Homepage select the Questions menu Click New Question In the Question Type list select Math App Enter a question name Expand the Algorithm section Click Show Designer to display the Algorithm Designer Enter a as the name of the variable O 0 ADO nO A W N Next s
411. owever you cannot delete or modify them To modify an inherited assignment create a copy of the assignment When you copy a shared assignment your copy of the assignment automatically appears under its new name in the Assignment List Note that the original assignment inherited from the shared or template class also appears in the list If you do not want the original assignment to appear remove it from view by clearing the Visible check box under Assignment Properties in the Set Policies tab of the Assignment Editor Important It is possible to break the link to a parent assignment by uploading a course module that has a question with the same name For more information see Importing and Installing a Course Module page 317 Previewing Assignments You can preview an assignment from the student s perspective 1 From your Class Homepage click on an assignment The assignment opens in a new window 2 Your results are recorded in the Gradebook but the data is not included in statistical reports since you are an instructor Previewing Questions To preview individual questions within an assignment use the Assignment Editor See Previewing Questions in Assignments page 47 Printing Assignments To print an assignment 1 In the Assignment Editor click the assignment name and select print The system displays the list of questions in the browser 2 Review the assignment 29 Creating and Managing Assignments 3
412. p down menu to specify when the feedback is displayed Always Never or If the final grade is shown Setting a Time Limit You can set a time limit for an assignment or test under Step 3 Setting Policies 51 Creating and Managing Assignments If you set a limit the program shows the student the time remaining during the course of the test If the time limit expires during the test the system informs the student and does not allow the student to answer any more questions However the student can submit the test for grading Time limit minutes Questions per page 1 Scheduling Eastern Standard Time _ Start clear _ End clear Assignment is only visible to students when the date time restrictions are met Figure 3 15 Setting a Time Limit in Assignments Note The timer does not stop until the student runs out of time or clicks Submit Assignment The timer will continue to run even if the student clicks Quit amp Save Setting the Number of Questions per Page By default the program displays one question per page when presenting an assignment to students You can use this option to deliver more than one question per page If you set the number of questions to be greater than 5 a warning dialog will appear Note Mastery and Study Session assignments automatically serve one question at a time This is part of their instructional design and this setting cannot be changed for these assignment types Tip If you a
413. page click the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 In the Question Type list click Fill in the Blanks 4 Enter the following for Text of the correctly filled out answer In calculus the chain rule tells us how to differentiate a composition of functions 5 Using the radio button next to Responses from select Textboxes 6 Click Next 7 Click the dots on both sides of the word chain Notice that it is now highlighted yellow See Figure 5 22 To remove a blank from a word or phrase click one of the words in the highlighted blank In calculus the chain rule tells US how to differentiate a composition of functions Figure 5 22 Fill in the Blanks Example 2 8 Click Finish 9 Click Preview to view the question Y ManleTA Preview Question Fill in the Blanks In calculus the Po rule tells us how to differentiate a Example composition of functions Figure 5 23 Fill in the Blanks Example 2 Preview See Also Question Designer Questions page 92 List Questions and Blanks Questions There are two types of Text based free response or fill in the blank questions in the system Each evaluates student responses by comparing the student response text string to that of the correct answer as coded into the question 135 Authoring Question Types e list questions e blanks questions Input Style and Options 1 Inline Blanks Both List and Blanks questions a
414. page 52 8 5 Integrating Maple T A with an LDAP Server LDAP Overview for Instructors The LDAP integration in Maple T A allows you to integrate Maple T A with your campus database for user authentication making the instructor s class administration even easier LDAP integration allows Maple T A users to log in with a username and password that are managed by your university s IT group in a central repository an LDAP Server Your Maple T A system administrator can give you more information on whether LDAP is used at your institution What LDAP means to the Maple T A course administrator 1 There is no student Maple T A username or Maple T A password Students only need their university username and university password to log in to Maple T A 2 As the Maple T A administrator you don t have to worry about usernames passwords or resetting passwords Your IT group will do that Basic user profile information comes from the LDAP directory Your system administrator configures which information in the LDAP profile will be made available to Maple T A Login and Forgotten Passwords with LDAP Login Anyone in the LDAP directory can use Maple T A The user simply logs in to Maple T A using his or her university username and password 1 A user enters his or her username and password 2 Maple T A presents these credentials to the LDAP server and the LDAP server performs authentication 3 If the credentials are rejected b
415. perbolic cotangent hypcot coth inverse hyperbolic archypcot arccoth cotangent Table 6 7 Maple Notation integral 3 exponential function Calculates the value of e to power of x where e is the base of the natural logarithm 2 718281828 Note The variable e should not be assigned as a global variable in Maple code It can be used however as a local variable See Also Maple Syntax page 157 6 10 Using a Table of Units Default Table of Physical Unit Equivalents The system recognizes many but not all units To use equivalent units that are not recognized create a custom table of units for your question bank The following tables give the default units recognized by the system Table 6 8 Base units recognized by Maple T A CU AE TN AAA sa Cr EEN VA AI A 2 248 Authoring Mathematical Questions Table 6 9 Derived units recognized by Maple T A Derived Units IE A TO gt mooo 17 CO STO TIT TS CO AA 1 e Qoe O h de e e O VA TN mete CU CAR em TUN E e eemtimene eminente IO ECT WN TAN CO A CU Rift o ining A A o G oooO inepos 2 E O O para SSCS 5280 feet miles statute miles statute miles statute 0 rte O CIAO O O C CI TA CTC 249 Authoring Mathematical Questions Derived Units mites Sg SS O TN AN CO CU A Cr CUA CS min h E hr h h Bor m Pe me S N J a a a a Pa 250 Authoring Mathematical Questions Derived U
416. pic Differentiating exponentials 1 mode formula 1 question What is the derivative of e lt SUP gt x lt SUP gt 1 answer e lt SUP gt x lt SUP gt OND 2229220 Question File Structure Details Questions are stored with embedded HTML and MathML tags in a text file called a question file qu plain text script file that consists of a list of topics In each topic is a list of questions Each question file contains one or more topics Each topic has a corresponding topic statement in the script file qu x topic lt topic_name gt e x is the topic number The other statements in a question script file define questions Each question consists of a series of related statements all containing the same prefix which indicates the topic and question numbers They are of the form qu x y lt field_name gt lt data gt e x is the topic number e y is the number of the question within the topic e Each question has a number of fields that specify for example the text of the question the correct answer additional feedback displayed when graded and hints Some fields are required others are optional e Question fields are populated with data that can span several lines of text The end of each data field statement must be marked with an character e Questions and topics must be numbered consecutively and arranged in increasing order That is x starts at 1 and y starts at 1 for each new topic See Also Question Fields p
417. plate Shortcuts A second set of keyboard shortcuts handles the insertion of templates e The Tab key cycles the cursor through the open template blanks in an expression e Enter the first few characters of an expression or symbol name and select Ctrl Space Command Space on Macintosh to insert the expression or symbol name or to display a list of commands to complete the entry Equation Editor Palette The Maple T A system uses a Equation Editor for creating and displaying symbolic characters and expressions The palette question type enables you to use customized Math editor toolbars and palettes in creating student response objects Using the Equation Editor Palette The palette is used to insert equation templates and symbols The standard palette contains one main panel organized into four categories layout templates expression templates relational palettes and symbol palettes See Figure 6 3 To display the options available in each panel click the mouse over a template A list of options displays Continue to click the available palettes or scroll the mouse over the sub templates To insert a template click the mouse over a highlighted template The templates and character palettes are broadly organized by theme such as calculus templates or arrow symbols Spend a few minutes exploring the toolbar to familiarize yourself with the available templates and symbols Layout templates The left side of the toolbar consists of popup
418. played when the section is finished and answered incorrectly Incorrect Display Determines whether to display the section after 1t 1s finished and answered incorrectly Incorrect Question Complete Determines whether the question is designated as complete when this section 1s finished and answered incorrectly in which case no more sections are shown or whether to continue to the next section Presentation of an Adaptive Question An adaptive question in an assignment has the following presentation First a student is presented with this first section of the adaptive question A note is displayed telling the student that this is an adaptive question and the number of attempts allowed is shown The student answers the displayed question and presses Verify Depending on the question s design and whether the student response is correct or incorrect one of the following occurs The student is given another attempt at this section This section is finished and the student is presented with the next section of the adaptive question The question is complete The student can navigate to the next question on the assignment by pressing Next at the top of the assignment If many attempts are allowed on a section you may decide to offer an I Give Up button to enable a student to move past one section of the adaptive question without completing all possible attempts If this button is shown a note is displayed telling the student that
419. ple 103 Ordered List of Formulas Subtype 148 Question Editor 137 Unordered List of Formulas Subtype 146 Vectors of Formulas Subtype 149 Mathematical Formula Questions 335 Mathematical Functions 275 Mathematical Questions Authoring 222 Mathematics Question Types 222 Mathematics Questions 222 Answers 280 Mathml 94 MathML 237 325 333 Authoring 238 mathml f 268 MathType 238 Matrix 328 351 max 268 Merging questions into question groups 47 Metadata 325 331 Min 247 min 268 Misc 247 Modified Question Repository 86 Mol 247 Move Up Move Down 29 Multipart 196 328 351 authoring 196 Question Editor 196 Multipart Questions 196 197 352 Editing 197 Multipart questions 197 Multiple Choice 328 Question Editor 198 Multiple Choice Question Source Script 354 Multiple Choice Questions 198 Multiple Selection 328 Authoring 204 Question Editor 204 Multiple Selection Question Source Script 354 Multiple Selection Questions 204 354 Source Script 335 My Profile 310 Name 325 330 Natural Logarithm 246 New Class Create 6 Edit 10 New Question Create 60 Nm 247 Non Permuting Answers Multiple Choice 104 198 Multiple Selection 204 NOT Celsius 247 not equal to condition 269 Not equals condition 264 not a 269 Ns 247 Index Nth item 274 Nth place least significant unit 267 Ntuple 328 Number 209 222 227 262 328 Numbers Random 270 Numbers within Questions 281
420. plesoft com 615 Kumpf Drive Waterloo Ontario CANADA N2V 1K8 See Also Security Issues to Consider page 310 5 Getting Started 2 Creating and Managing Classes Class Manager page 6 Managing Instructors page 16 Managing Proctors page 17 The Class File Manager page 20 2 1 Class Manager Creating a New Class You begin using Maple T A by creating a class Within your class you have access to the question repository and assignments resource files and the Gradebook for the class It also gives you access to several system tools Note Your administrator may have already created a class for you If this is the case after you login you can access your class by clicking the link under the Classes where my role is Instructor tab Use one of the following options to create your new class Create a New Empty Class Note that you can only create a class if you have been given the correct privileges by the Administrator If you cannot create a class contact your Administrator To create a new class in the system 1 From the System Homepage select the Class Manager menu 2 Click Add Class 3 Complete the class registration form For more information see Required Registration Information page 9 4 To save changes click Submit 7 Creating and Managing Classes My Homepage Help Courtney Jones Instructor create Logout Class Manager System User Manager System Admin Administer Classes Class
421. ponses The range of question types includes questions that accept and grade symbolic and numeric mathematics chemistry expressions and a variety of text based responses The student s response is evaluated against the correct answer defined for the question By default text based fill in the blanks question types including Key Word Questions and List Questions apply standard rules when grading student responses Standard grading behavior applies the relaxed grader style Relaxed Grader Rules The process for evaluating student responses against the correct answer 1s as follows With the student response and correct answer e Change uppercase Roman letters to lowercase Roman letters e Remove punctuation characters e Do not change lowercase Roman letters or numbers 0 9 e Replace all other characters with the ASCII space character e Convert strings of spaces to a single space character e Compare the modified student response to the answer field string indicated in the question Spaces in the response must correspond to spaces in the answer value For example if the answer field value is Albert Einstein then the following responses are graded correct e Albert Einstein albert einstein e a lbert Ein stein However e Alber t Einstein is incorrect as is Aleister of course Note The relaxed grader rules are not appropriate for international languages since non Roman characters are removed Exact Grader Rules Th
422. port the question to a zip file to save to your computer Not all these options are available for all questions Inherited questions can only be previewed from this drop down menu Table 4 3 lists options that may be available for each question within your current class Table 4 3 Question Repository Available Actions using Bottom Buttons Export the question to a zip file to save to your computer Clone the question creates a copy of a question 84 Managing Questions Remove from group Removes the question from the group Delete the question You can select multiple questions at once and perform the above actions Not all of these options are available for all questions Inherited questions cannot be deleted However you can clone an inherited question to create a local editable copy of the question You can also export an inherited question to save to your computer You can click Select All to select all questions that are shown You can click Filter questions to perform an advanced search using keyword language difficulty question type or information fields You can choose how to sort questions by clicking the drop down menu that displays Sort by Weight by default The other sorting options include Sort by Date Created Sort by Date Modified and Sort by Name Editing Question Details in the Question Repository You can edit details of a single question by either clicking the question name itself or by clicking Edit
423. proctored exams tutorial sessions homework and quizzes The system can report on individual student performance performance across a class section or across multiple sections of a class and a statistical item analysis of questions The system can be configured to enable easy sharing of class content and assignments across sections of large classes Assignments Maple T A assignments automate common learning activities that involve questions and problems You can create assignments for a range of purposes including e Self study practice e Mastery e Homework e Quizzes e Proctored exams requiring proctor validation When an assignment is created you specify the rules and policies for assignment access and due dates grading parameters and feedback options After determining the content questions rules and policies you publish an assignment to the class web site for use by students Students can review the results of their previously completed assignments in the Gradebook Gradebook After students complete an assignment you can view the results in a Gradebook or create downloadable performance reports that can be viewed in third party gradebook programs or Microsoft Excel With Maple T A you can generate comprehensive performance reports for individual students individual class sections or multiple class sections You can also perform a statistical item analysis of questions For detailed information see Working with the Grade
424. pus computer lab where the use of other devices or materials is controlled it prevents students from accessing external aids during the assignment e By pairing the assignment type Proctored Exam with the use of the Proctored Browser you can utilize both human monitors and a structured computer setting to maintain additional control over the testing environment e Initially the student receives a message saying that they are entering full screen mode which they must authorize to proceed For more details see Figure 8 1 ha y Proctored Browser This assignment requires the browser to be full screen If you switch applications during the assignment you will need proctor authorization to continue the assignment Go full screen and begin assignment Figure 8 1 Authorization for Proctored Browser 312 Administering Maple T A e After the authorization screen if a student tries to bypass the restricted settings of the Proctored Browser for example by pressing a combination of keystrokes that will exit the full screen Ctrl Alt Delete Esc etc this will be detected The student sees a message telling them an email has been sent to the class instructor The student must then be re authorized into the assignment by a proctor or instructor Important Proctored Browser is only compatible with Google Chrome and Mozilla Firefox It does not work in Internet Explorer For more information see Using Proctored Browser
425. quations e Spaces are ignored in expressions e Parentheses may be used to clarify physical states compound groupings and application of ion charges Use the formula preview link to preview your expressions e In grading equations any characters you enclose in parentheses for example ion charges superscripts subscripts etc are associated with the preceding term not the next term Example Pb 2 is Pb For numbers that are not super or subscripted that precede a compound or element the grader associates the number with the term that follows Example 2H_ 20 is 2H20 See Also Chemical Equation Subtype page 151 Plotting a Student Response Maple T A uses Maple plotting features to graph student responses or a function derived from a student response for example the definite integral of the student response Maple provides many ways of representing data and mathematical expressions graphically using plots Plotting a student response is available only with the Maple graded question type Plotting a Student Response When entering code for plotting in the Question Editor use only one Maple plot command It must be the last command entered You must use the long form name for Maple package functions Example The following is the source file for a Maple graded Formula question that plots the student response 231 Authoring Mathematical Questions question Enter an expression in x maple true maple_answer pl
426. r Allow more than one selection is no Do not change the default 13 To add an Algorithm or Feedback to the question see Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 and Adding and Editing Information Fields Hints or Feedback page 74 14 Click Finish 15 Click Preview to view the question as shown in Figure 5 57 204 Authoring Question Types Preview Question Derivative of simple 2 expression The derivative of 2 2 is 1 322 l 3 2 y ze 3 312 322 2 7 Figure 5 57 Multiple Choice Example 3 Next Steps To edit further details in the Question Repository within the Question Designer see Editing Question Details in the Question Respository page 84 See Also Multiple Choice Question Source Script page 354 5 13 Multiple Selection Questions Description Multiple Selection questions are similar to Multiple Choice questions However questions can have more than one correct answer You can create as many choices as necessary In Multiple Selection questions the selections are permuted each time they appear In non permuting multiple selection questions however the selection order is static Grading A multiple selection question is graded fully correct if the student selects all the correct answers and no incorrect answers The grader applies negative credit for selecting incorrect answers The score is calculated using the following algorithm 1 Score 1 for each selected correct answer and 1 for
427. r import existing Maple T A content into Maple for further modifications and testing e The Maple environment even supports the development of non Maple based question types by providing Maple equivalents of commands built into Maple T A Questions that use these commands can be developed and tested in Maple and then the efficient Maple T A commands will be called when inside the Maple T A environment e New commands in Maple can be used to examine exactly what the student enters as a response preventing any automatic simplification so questions can require students to respond using a particular form of the correct answer Copyrights and Trademarks Copyrights e Copyright Maplesoft a division of Waterloo Maple Inc 2014 Trademarks e Maplesoft Maple Waterloo Maple and Maple T A are trademarks of Waterloo Maple Inc e Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds e Red Hat is a registered trademark of Red Hat Inc e SUSE is a registered trademark of Novell Inc e Microsoft Excel Internet Explorer Windows and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation e Macintosh Mac OS and Safari are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Computer Inc Preface e Firefox is a trademark of the Mozilla Foundation e Google Chrome is a trademark of Google Inc e Java all Java based marks and Sun are registered trademarks of Oracle and or its affiliates e W3C is a trademark registered in numerous count
428. r is diff x 2 x Q name Derivative Maple Syntax 1 1 editing useHTML a28 2222 00 qu 1 2 question What is the Maple syntax for the integral of 2 x with respect to x Do not include the trailing semicolon qu 1 2 maple evalb S RESPONSE int 2 x x or evalb SRESPONSE Int 2 x x 1 2 type maple mode Maple 1 1 allow2d 0 pa N pa N name Integral Maple Syntax 1 2 editing useHTML Q a22 222 1 2 comment The correct answer is int 2 x x Q Plain Text Script Authoring To return feedback to a student 1f the response 1s incorrect you must use the comment field For more information see Using the Comment Field in a Maple Question page 348 See Also Maple graded Questions page 153 Plotting a Student Response page 230 Matching Source Script The following example source script creates a Matching question This algorithmically generated Matching question uses images not text for matching pairs H topic Matching Example Script mode Matching name pKa sort by matching 1 editing useHTML 1 1 algorithm Sa switch rint 4 2292 2 lt img src classes myclass pka pka0la01 gif gt gif gt gif gt lt img src classes myclass pka pka01a02 lt img src classes myclass pka pka01a03 lt img src classes myclass pka pka01a04 Sb switch rint 4 lt img src classes myclass pka pka02a01 lt img src classes myclass pka pka02a02 lt img
429. r of n m range m n k The range m n k function where n m k 0 generates a random integer in the rangem m k m q k inclusive where q is the floor of n m k That is range n range 1 n range 1 n 1 Examples range 3 returns 1 2 or 3 range 2 3 returns 2 or 3 range 0 7 3 returns 0 3 or 6 range 0 8 3 returns 0 3 or 6 range 0 9 3 returns 0 3 6 or 9 Note The rint function returns random numbers in the range 0 n 1 inclusive See Also rand m n rand m n k page 270 Random Integer Generation rint n rint m n rint m n k page 272 Generating Random Numbers in Questions page 262 rank n a b C d Returns the nth largest element item from a list Numbering starts at 1 For example rank 3 2 4 6 5 7 returns 5 272 Authoring Mathematical Questions See Also indexof k a b c d page 266 switch n a b c page 274 Random Integer Generation rint n rint m n rint m n k The rint function return random integers rint n The rint n function generates a random integer in the range 0 n 1 inclusive There are n numbers in that range Hence it is a selection of one number from a choice of n rint m n The rint m n function generates a random integer in the rangem n 1 inclusive rint m n k The rint m n k function generates a random integer in the rangem m k m q k inclusive w
430. r the respective questions within the Question Designer Authoring Tips Formatting Tips The Question Designer makes it easy to apply formatting to your question in many of the same ways you use your word processor There are a few limitations and requirements unique to the editor These tips are offered to help you achieve the best results As with other web content you may observe differences in the display of your question in various operating systems and browsers Character Formatting e Use the toolbar buttons to apply character formatting e HTML tags are allowed and will be rendered as HTML Math expressions in Questions Use the Equation Editor to enter expressions by clicking the 2 icon as shown in Figure 5 1 e Right click Control click Macintosh in the input field to display palettes See Figure 5 2 Question Text E sore 0 R EA 2 E7 B I U x x I E 1 BORE II MI ll Ml de a gt A 57M Figure 5 1 Access the Equation Editor in the Question Designer 95 Authoring Question Types Equation Editor a Equation Editor TELL O ab d a b a E a b b al ad n b Y Y a OPP PP Pee eee eee eee ee eee eee Or eee ee Figure 5 2 Equation Editor Palettes Algorithmic Variables in Questions e Insert variables by typing their name Use the required at the beginning of the variable name variable Displaying the Sign and the Symbol in Questions e Insert the sign
431. ram Questions page 111 Adding Control Points in Free Body Diagram Questions page 111 e Add a Force in Free Body Diagram Questions page 111 6 Click OK and then Finish to save and preview the question See Also e For more details on Free Body Diagram questions see Free Body Diagram Questions page 108 e For Free Body Diagram question examples see Free Diagram Question Examples page 112 e To edit further details in the Question Repository within the Question Designer see Editing Question Details in the Question Respository page 84 List Question Description A List question is a Fill in the Blanks question offered in the Question Designer exclusively It offers some advanced features including the ability to give partial credit to certain answers List questions can be used to present a drop down list or a free response area In both cases you set a single response object in the question To include multiple response areas in a single question use the Question Designer question type List questions provide the following features e You can define multiple correct and even incorrect but expected answers e For each specified answer you can control the amount of credit awarded for each specified answer e For each specified incorrect answer you can define response specific feedback e You can define the display style for the student response input cells either text or menu style display for student response objects
432. rance Source Script page 336 Significant Digits in Maple Questions The Maple Digits environment variable controls the number of digits that Maple uses when calculating with software floating point numbers e The default value of Digits is 10 e The value of Digits is changed by using the assignment operator For example Digits 20 Using the evalf Command to Set the Value of the Digits Variable The parameter n which can be given as a second argument evalf expr n sets the value of Digits for a single computation To round the exact answer assign the exact answer to a dummy variable and then use the evalf expr n command in the evalb command to compare the student response to the rounded answer Example Calculate the quadratic mean of the following list of data 695 607 511 588 710 500 682 515 709 478 497 657 652 634 488 615 714 579 589 493 584 484 503 711 622 695 The answer requires 5 significant digits 1 First calculate the exact numeric answer 2 Round it to the required number of significant digits For example exact _answer evalf Statistics Mean lt 695 607 511 588 710 500 682 515 709 478 497 657 652 634 488 615 714 579 589 493 584 484 503 711 622 695 gt rounded_answer evalf exact_answer 5 evalb SRESPONSE rounded_answer Using Maple Code to Prevent Cheating in Maple Syntax Questions As the author you can verify whether a student is using
433. re 5 55 Figure 5 56 Figure 5 57 Figure 5 58 Figure 5 59 Figure 5 60 Figure 5 61 Figure 5 62 Figure 5 63 Figure 5 64 Figure 5 65 Figure 5 66 Figure 5 67 Figure 5 68 Figure 5 69 Figure 5 70 List of Figures Chickable Image Example Questa a nad 128 Essay Example QUESO ni A A A A AI 130 Pillcmahe Blanks Question Ed A 133 Fila the Blanks Example cs iS Sd das 133 Filin the Blanks Example k Previa oia 133 Fall tr the Blanks Exa lez A AAA AAA SAA AT ERA AI AAA 134 Pilin the Blanks Example 2 Provis Wa aces Sica odo 134 Demonstration of Various and Fill in the Blanks Questions 0 cece ccc cece eee ec eee ee eee eeeeeeeeeeneeeseeeeeeteaeeneeaens 135 Formula Example a FX 8 a 101 pee isabel 140 Formula Example Preview ARS A Gm RANE oer eee ee 140 Formula without Logs and Trig Example Preview a ti ai 141 Formula with Physical Units Example Prev Wi A A Ad 142 Formula that Matches Responses to within C Example Algorithm ooooooccococoncncncononcncononcncnnononcnnononcnnoncnnnnnnos 143 Formula that Matches Responses within C Example Preview ooocococcccoconcncononcnconononcnnononcnnnnoncnnnnoncnnnnoncnnnos 144 Eatin Example A VO enn etic chee ite eo 145 Equation Example Pre do eh Lis 146 Unordered Listot Formulas Example Algorithmi a 147 Unordered Listof Formulas Example Preview AAA AAA ne ea 148 Ordered Last of Form tas Example Preview savers A ee A a A aegis 149 Vectors ot Formulas Example Also
434. re are two ways to enter the answer to a question of the chemistry question type Text Mode The system default mode is Text Mode in which you enter symbolic or numeric math expressions in a simple keyboard notation much like a graphing calculator Table 6 1 Guidelines for Entering Chemistry Expressions ate O mts Superscripts and Subscripts Enter superscripts using the caret H 20 H O A character and subscripts using the underscore 230 Authoring Mathematical Questions Other Operators Use for the center dot operator Use the sign in equations Note No other operations are allowed in equations You can use the sign to indicate ion charges see below Ate mts Physical States Be sure to include physical states Ca2 aq CO _3 2 aq gt CaCO 3 s Ion charges and Parentheses in parentheses if your equation requires them Use the and characters for polarity and ion charges Use parentheses to clarify interpretation of groups of characters For chemistry formula questions you can also use Symbol Mode entry which allows you to enter formulas ina WYSIWYG What you see 1s what you get editing window You can pick arrows symbols or operators from a palette and see your expressions appear as you type Select Equation Editor in the Edit Question window of the Mathematical Formula question type to display the symbol palette Symbol Mode Rules for Chemistry Expressions and E
435. re concerned about students ability to access complicated questions over a slower online connection it is recommended that you accept the default setting for questions per page which is one at a time Loading one question at a time usually allows a student to move through the assignment effectively but also saves each question response as it 1s completed Setting the Maximum Number of Attempts You can set the maximum number of times a student may take an assignment If the student attempts more than the maximum amount a message 1s displayed indicating the restriction It is possible to allow an exception in a particular case to the maximum number of attempts restriction To authorize an exception when the student sees the restriction message the student clicks Exception A proctor or the instructor can then provide authorization Scheduling Assignments Using the calendar function under Scheduling in the Set Policies tab you can set Start and End times for each assignment These times govern the availability of the assignment to students in your class Scheduled times refer to your system s time zone setting indicated in the Scheduling section and set by your System Administrator Before and after the indicated availability window the assignment is displayed in the assignment list viewable by students on your Class Homepage however it cannot be selected Note that for the instructor unavailable assignments appear in the list of assig
436. repository 5 Click Maple Repository to select the repository The Class File Manager screen is displayed 6 Select a folder location to which to import the Maple repository e You can expand an existing folder by clicking the arrow icon e To create a new folder click the icon next to the instruction new folder The folder arrow points down The repository will upload to this folder location 7 Click the icon next to instruction upload files s to this point The Upload Files screen is displayed 8 Click Browse to locate the mla file 9 Select Single File or Zip Archive 10 Click OK The file is now saved in the Class Web Site 11 Select the file on the Class Web Site screen The Question Statement amp Answer screen opens with the mla path and filename in the LIB location field Linking to a Maple Repository To use an existing repository you must link to the mla file 1 Select the Questions menu 2 Select New Question The Question Editor is displayed 82 Managing Questions On the Question Type screen select Maple graded Click Optionally import a Maple repository Click Maple Repository to select the repository The Class File Manager screen is displayed Expand the folders containing library files by clicking the arrow icon NY DO OA A Q Select the file on the Class Web Site screen The Question Statement Answer screen opens with the mla path and filename in the LIB location field e If
437. ressions Fundamental Capabilities Integrated mathematics parser and Math Syntax for expressions Maple graded expressions Graded free response mathematics questions containing numeric responses equations formulas physical units and combinations of numbers formulas and units MathML support Inline expression rendering from graphing calculator syntax to formatted MathML expressions System evaluation of equivalent symbolic numeric equation and unit expressions Automatic recognition of scientific notation in the answer field and in student responses Control over precision significant digits and margin of error tolerance in questions Support for questions using Maple Support for questions that use plots generated by Maple Mathematics Question Types Maple T A offers 14 varieties of mathematical and scientific free response question types including formula numeric and questions that use the Maple mathematical software to grade and plot student responses Symbolic and Equation Question Types Maple graded Formula page 156 Maple Syntax page 157 Mathematical Formula Formula Subtype page 139 Formula without Logs and Trig Subtype page 140 Formula with Physical Units Subtype page 141 Unordered List of Formulas Subtype page 146 Ordered List of Formulas Subtype page 148 Vectors of Formulas page 149 Numeric Question Types e Numeric Questions page 209 including numbers with physical units e Matrix page
438. ries of the World Wide Web Consortium marks of W3C are registered and held by its host institutions MIT INRIA and Keio e MathType is a trademark of Design Science Inc e MathML Mathematical Markup Language is a trademark of the World Wide Web Consortium e Blackboard Building Blocks the Blackboard Learning System and WebCT are trademarks registered trademarks of Blackboard Inc in the United States and or other countries Usage by permission e Moodle is a registered trademark of the Moodle Trust All other brand names or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies 1 Getting Started Introduction to Maple TA page 1 How Maple T A Works page 2 Getting Help page 4 AAA 1 1 Introduction to Maple T A Introduction to Questions Assignments and Gradebook in Maple T A There are a variety of question types including sophisticated math and science questions that use the Maple computer algebra system along with a range of assignment modes powerful tools and reports the system can generate This makes Maple T A an ideal productivity enhancement for instructors while giving students an individualized learning experience Question Repository With Maple T A you create self scoring assignments with questions drawn from the question repository The system s assignments can help automate common learning activities that involve questions and problems in classes such as practice and
439. ring content makes a wider range of questions available to all users You can share questions from your class with your other classes you instruct other instructors in the system or even users all around the world with the Maple T A Cloud Questions belong to a class The creator of a question becomes the owner of the question Questions can only be modified by the owner Instructors can obtain questions in two ways 1 Inherit a question from a parent class Child classes automatically inherit questions from their parent class Instructors can use an inherited question in their assignments but cannot modify the question Only the original owner creator of the question can modify the question and those changes will be automatically propagated to all subscribers question groups This is similar to the Question Bank inheritance rules in Maple T A 4 0 2 Clone a question public or private from the question repository or Maple T A Cloud This operation creates a local copy or clone of the original question and sets the owner to the instructor who made the clone Instructors who clone a question can edit the cloned question No one other than the instructor who created the cloned question will be able to modify the clone Changes made to the original question will not be visible in cloned questions When you inherit or clone a question it is available in the question repository for your class and you can use it in assignments For more inf
440. rithmically generated variable values for each repeated attempt use the Reworkable option for homework in Step 3 of the Assignment Editor 4 Algorithmically generated variable values are recorded permanently in the graded session results stored in the class Gradebook At any time following grading students and instructors can return and review the exact assignment with the variable values used and student responses entered in the assignment 6 16 Working with Variable Data For each type of question supported you can include algorithmically generated random variables in question statements answers hints and feedback Using variables in questions you can generate variations on a single template question Types of Variables Maple based variables You can use any Maple function to generate variables See the tutorial on this topic Tutorial Maple based Algorithmic Question Authoring page 285 e Range based variables You can specify mathematical ranges set by declaring minimum and maximum data values and increments for randomly generated data Range based variables are defined by a formula and can include mathematical 260 Authoring Mathematical Questions operations For example you can specify a variable x that is a random integer between 0 and 30 in steps of 3 using the variable definition x range 0 30 3 See the tutorial on this topic Tutorial Algorithmic Question page 282 e List based variables You can ran
441. rmatting for negative student responses Set negStyle to one of minus paren or both e minus Negative responses must be entered using a negative sign e paren Negative responses must be entered using parentheses 0 e both Negative responses can be entered using a negative sign or parentheses Note If you set numStyl1e to include arithmetic then you cannot allow parentheses to be used to indicate a negative response That is negStyle must be set to minus See Also Numeric Questions page 209 Setting the Answer Format in Numeric Questions page 211 Controlling Answer Tolerance There is not general agreement on how to grade numeric answers with respect to the number of significant digits For example if the correct answer to 3 significant digits is 2 77 some instructors grade the response 2 77021 incorrect Other instructors grade 2 77021 correct because they think that the inclusion of extra digits does not make a response incorrect In Maple T A you control how numeric responses are graded For example you can e Accept only 2 77 and not 2 77021 For more information see Setting the Precision e Accept all answers that agree with the correct answer to 3 or another positive integer significant figures that is any response between 2 765 and 2 775 is correct For more information see Setting a Margin of Error For Maple graded questions see Significant Digits in Maple Questions page 228 Setting
442. rs l 2 n Enter the expression Pee ee f 5 dl and press Enter 2 In the Explore dialog box enter 1 for the lower value of n Beside each of the variables x and y check the skip box on the right this will keep these variables in the solution When you are finished click Explore 3 A new table is created inline with a math container for the expression and a slider for n Move the slider back and forth to see how 1t changes the expansion Create a Math App with Embedded Components To create Math Apps using components you first have to expand the Components palette to insert them into your worksheet After you have chosen all the components you would like to use in your Math App you can edit the Startup Code to link all your components together Example Explore a Quadratic Expression Start with a new Maple worksheet 1 From the Components palette click the Plot and Slider Components to add them to your document Right click the Slider component and select Component gt Component Properties Change the Value at Lowest Position to 5 Change the Value at Highest Position to 5 Change the Spacing of Major Tick Marks to 5 Change the Spacing of Minor Tick Marks to 1 NY DD On A W N Check the boxes for the following Options e Enable Input e Visible e Show Track e Show Axis Labels e Show Axis Tick Marks e Update Continuously while Dragging 8 Click OK 9 Right click the Slider component and select
443. rta tl ada 150 Vectors OF Formulas Example Preview dabas 151 Chemical Equation Example Preview orinter irii oare aas EEE se aie noel AAE EE eRe nea ETER 153 Mapleseraded Example TA Form l Sn deat e e ee Soe 0 160 Maple graded Example 1B Formula and Plotting ooooocococnconoconcnnocononnocancnnocanonnonnnonnnrncnnnnnncnnnnnncnnnnnnos 161 Maplessraded Example 2 Maple Syntax O cas 162 Maple graded Example 3 Designing a Maple graded Question to Accept Mathematically Equivalent Responses 163 Mapleseraded Example AO Opal s 164 Maple staded Example 4 Determinant of a Matrix ii MAO Ragnar s 165 Maple craded Example o Algorithme its 166 Maple eraded Example 5 Coeficient Matrix as a Ada 167 Maple graded Example 6 Matrix Question with Infinitely Many Correct Responses oo oocooccccocococonononcncncncncnnnnnoo 168 Maple graded Example 7 Using the InertForm Package to Avoid Simplification ooococccononcncncncncnnonononanononcnooo 169 Matching Triangle Types Example QUESO aii 172 Matchine Slope Fields Preview A le Ori tnt ta ii a ata didas 173 Matching Slope Fields Example Question a sat Sie detect arg en Siete cealeoh cna Date toes ae te cea sae ees 173 Parameter Test for Math App Question a O A Suecane heeded a a 182 Multiple C holce Example lui bla 200 Multiple Choice Example 2 Alportin aa AAA RANA A A AAA AS 201 Multiple Choice Example co 202 Multiple Choice Example 3 Alo OT a A GS 203 Multiple CGholcs
444. rtial Credit and Question Weighting in a Multipart Question You can set the weighted scoring of individual question parts in a multipart question To set the weighting for each component part of a multipart question 1 In the Question Editor select the multipart question to edit Click Edit 2 On the Question Type screen click Next 3 On the Question Details screen update the weighting The part weighting is relative The default setting is to equally weight each part That is if there are x parts in the question each part is weighted 1 x of the total value assigned to the question in an assignment To change the relative weighting of question parts use the plus and minus buttons in the Weighting column 4 Click Finish Example Assume you have a multipart question with 3 parts Initially each part is assigned a weight of 1 which indicates that 1 3 of the total value is assigned to each question You determine the total question value during assignment definition To update the weighting of the first part of the question to 5 times that of the other two parts set the weightings to Part 1 5 that is 5 7 of the total question value Part 2 1 that is 1 7 of the total question value Part 3 1 that is 1 7 of the total question value If you add the question to an assignment and set its value in the assignment as 10 points the value for the question parts would be Part 1 5 7 x 10 total points 7 14 points Part 2 1 7
445. ructor who will assign a grade at a later date rare Figure 5 18 Essay Example Question See Also Essay Question Source Script page 342 Changing Grades and Adding Feedback page 294 Next Steps To edit further details in the Question Repository within the Question Designer see Editing Ouestion Details in the Ouestion Respository page 84 5 6 Fill in the Blanks Questions Description The Fill in the Blanks question type presents students with a question and a response object or entry cell in which to express their response Two types of blank questions can be created by using the Fill in the Blanks question type in the Question Editor 1 The text type produces a text field in the question The student enters a response in the text box 2 The menu type produces a drop down menu containing the correct response and any number of incorrect responses The student must select a response from the drop down menu To create a blanks formula question use scripts 131 Authoring Question Types Important The Fill in the Blanks question type has been deprecated Use the Question Designer specifically the List question type instead See Question Designer Questions page 92 and Mathematical Formula Questions page 137 Grading The system provides many styles of automatically graded free response question types that differ in terms of presentation accepted response types and the graders applied to student res
446. ructors the ability to create user accounts Contact your system administrator for more information Locking and Unlocking Class Registration You can close registration for your class to prevent students from registering in it To lock class registration 1 From the Class Homepage select Class Info 2 Click Edit 3 Select the Registration Locked check box This is selected by default See Figure 2 2 4 Click Submit To allow open registration for the class you can leave the class unlocked for the first two weeks of class and then lock it If you do not want to allow open registration you can lock the class from the start 12 Creating and Managing Classes My Homepage Help Courtney Jones Instructor create Logout Class Manager system User Manager System Admin Administer Classes gt Class Details Instructor Courtney Jones Change Instructor Instructor Email courtneyjones maplesofi com Course ID Class Name Class Short Name School Registration Locked Featured Class LJ Inherit content from None Default Role In Class Student Default Student role Descri pti on URL Link destination htip Awww_ maplesoft com A hyperlink to be displayed on the class homepage Link text Maplesoft lt i Figure 2 2 Locking Class Registration Figure Class Rosters You can use class rosters to e Upload a class roster to the system from a text file If a user is not in the system a
447. s Study Session assignments draw from a bank of questions They allow students repeated practice one question at a time These assignments are primarily a teaching tool whereas other types of assignments might be considered testing tools although all assignment types do both to some degree This assignment type is ideal for anonymous student driven self paced review Although you can create a specific content structure for study session assignments you can also allow the system to randomly select from a pool of questions Consequently Study Session assignments typically draw from Question Groups Students work at their own pace on questions drawn from a pool of instructor selected questions If hints and feedback are part of the question content students can use them during Study Sessions Grading Questions are graded one at a time and results are not recorded in the Gradebook When the system grades a question it does not reveal the correct answer It simply indicates whether or not they answered the question correctly If students answered correctly it proceeds to the next question If they answered incorrectly they can view the Hints and then return to make another attempt at the question or they can view the question s feedback and proceed to the next question Students can also skip questions and leave the test at any time 45 Creating and Managing Assignments 3 4 Details on Using the Assignment Editor Choose Name Tab Assi
448. s The field text provides guidelines Penalties apply to the selected topic and also to any preceding or controlling topics on which the selected topic depends The system returns students to the earlier topics where a learning need has been demonstrated until they reach your required level of competency Example Consider an assignment in which Topic B depends on Topic A Both have a basic requirement of 3 correct questions and Topic B has a penalty of one additional question for every wrong answer If the student answers three questions correctly in Topic A and then moves to Topic B but gets a question wrong both topics now have a requirement of 4 correct questions so the student no longer meets the requirements for Topic A The system returns to Topic A and the student must answer an additional question correctly in order to proceed again to Topic B Note When delivering Mastery assignments the system gives students information about their progress towards meeting the requirements for the assignment It updates this information with every question that it grades See Also Limiting Student Access to Assignments Setting Assignment Requirements page 54 Configuring Feedback Options You can specify which feedback elements are displayed to students when they grade an assignment See Figure 3 10 The default system behavior is to show the final assignment grade as well as question feedback but you can switch either of these elem
449. s Editor 54 Assignment options 49 Feedback options 50 Proctored Browser 35 Scheduling assignments 51 Set assignment type 48 Setting the Answer Format in Numeric Questions 211 Share Question 82 Shared assignments Saving 27 28 Shared content icon 23 Shared class 15 Behavior 15 Create 6 Creating 15 Removing 15 Shared content icon 15 23 Sharing Questions Setting Privacy 86 89 Sharing questions 89 Short Answer Questions 358 Short Phrase 328 Short Phrase Question Source Script 358 Show instructions Free Body Diagram Questions 111 Sig 255 281 Sigma 94 Significant Digits 228 267 Controlling 226 Significant figures 264 Simplified Math Expressions 241 Sketch Questions Axes 114 Background Functions 115 Creating 113 Customizing Tolerance 113 Grid 115 Group Plots 115 Question Editor 113 Tickmarks 114 Weight 114 Sketch questions Creating subcurves 119 Solution 325 Solution field 333 Sort Weight Question Repository 86 Source Script Library of Example Plain text script files 334 Maple Formula 347 Maple Syntax 349 Special Characters 333 Sgrt 222 275 Square Root 246 Static Order Answers Multiple Choice 198 Statistical Operations 272 Statistics Question Repository 85 strcat 274 Student Changing grades 294 Deleting student record 310 Student Menu Assignment name 45 Student Responses Grading 224 Plotting 230 Student result Adding feedback 294 Study Session Assign
450. s as arguments in variable definition statements Since the algorithm generation works linearly you must define variables before referencing them in other variable definition statements or control sequences Example qu 3 7 mode Formula qu 3 7 algorithm n rint 8 x rand 1 10 Sans sig n x qu 3 7 question Express the number x to n significant places qu 3 7 answer Sans See Also Controlling Answer Tolerance page 226 decimal n x sig n x int x page 264 rand m n rand m n k page 270 Random Integer Generation rint n rint m n rint m n k page 272 Displaying the Dollar Sign in Questions The use of the is reserved for variable definitions in algorithms in the Maple T A question syntax 282 Authoring Mathematical Questions To display a character in the text of your question use Displaying the Backslash Symbol in Questions The use of the backslash character is reserved in the Maple T A system question syntax To include a character in the text of your question use Text Strings in Variable Statements Statements defining variables can also include text strings Strings must be enclosed in double quotes Example qu 4 1 mode Formula qu 4 1 algorithm Sanimal switch rint 2 cat dog mass if int eq Sanimal cat rand 2 15 2 rand 10 30 2 Svelocity rand 2 5 2 qu 4 1 question A mass kg Sanimal is running at veloci
451. s in the Question Designer page 102 Mathematical Formula Questions in the Question Designer page 103 Multiple Choice Questions in the Question Designer page 104 Numeric Questions in the Question Designer page 106 and Sketch Questions in the Question Designer page 108 d Select a question type and define the properties for that question type Click OK e The properties are now displayed in the Text of the question panel f You can add multiple parts to a question using the Question Designer by inserting additional response areas Editing Information Fields Hints Feedback or Algorithms To add or edit Information Fields see Adding and Editing Information Fields page 74 To add or edit Hints see Adding and Editing Hints page 74 To add or edit Feedback see Adding and Editing Feedback page 75 To add or edit Algorithms see Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 To edit question details see Editing Question Details in the Question Respository page 84 g Click Finish to place a copy of your question in the web site cache and preview your question Essay Question To create an Essay question l 6 Enter a title for the question under the Question Name panel 2 Enter the essay question in the Question Text 3 Click Insert Edit Response Area 0 4 5 Select the Essay question type in the Edit Response Area dialog Indicate the number of rows and columns length of the response area for the es
452. s its advantages e Use textbook style presentation when you want to evaluate short or long text responses in true fi l in the blank style You can set the grader to exact and enforce an exact match between the student response and the correct answer or you can set 1t to relaxed a more lenient grading style in which capitalization and punctuation are ignored e Alternatively you may want to constrain student input and test general knowledge by providing a longer excerpt with isolated phrases blanked out but using the menu style presentation to require that a student select from a drop down list of possible answers 2 Traditional Blanks Presentation Because you control the HTML formatting inside the question as well as the position of the blanks inside a List or Blanks question you can also use those question types to present a response cell on a separate line by inserting paragraph or line breaks inside the question statement Comparison of Question Types Supported The List question offers the widest variety of response objects Question Mode Text Exact Text Relaxed Text Menu Mathematical Numeric Multiple Multiple Grading Formula Choice Selection Grading List Question Yes Yes Yes Yes Blanks Yes Yes Yes Question Comparison of List Questions vs Blanks Questions List and Blanks questions are very similar however List questions provide a greater diversity of graders that can be applied better control over the speci
453. s of Formulas subtype 1 From the Class Homepage click the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 In the Question Type list click Mathematical Formula 4 Enter the following for Question Name Find the roots 5 Click the add icon CN and enter the following Algorithm a rint 2 5 b rint 10 15 c rint 2 5 6 Click Refresh algorithm preview to preview the variables you defined as shown in Figure 5 33 147 Authoring Question Types Algorithm a rint 2 5 b rint 10 15 Edit the code for your algorithm c rint 2 5 in the text box to the right or click algorithm designer The algorithm designer tool allows you to define algorithms for your question by completing a form Show Designer Refresh algorithm preview Variable Value 3 4 b 12 C 2 Figure 5 33 Unordered List of Formulas Example Algorithm 7 Enter the following for Question Text What are the roots of the quadratic equation ax 2 bx c Enter only the expressions for the roots omitting x 8 Enter the following for Correct answer b sqrt b 2 4 a c 2 a b sqrt b 2 4 a c 2 a 9 In the Type of expression accepted list select Unordered list of formulas 10 Click Finish 11 Click Preview to view the question See Figure 5 34 148 Authoring Question Types Preview Question Find the roots What are the roots of the quadratic equation 2 qe 11 2 4 Enter only the expressions
454. s text field in the question Example 2 2 To specify that the student response must exactly match the value of your answer and contain specified number of significant digits use grading exact_sigd and digit lt n gt where lt n gt is a positive integer that defines the required number of significant digits qu 2 2 question A person counts 162 cars driving up a street in 1 00 hour How many cars drive up the street per minute Use the correct number of significant digits in your answer zZ eN 92 pe eagggeas DMN NN N N 2 answer num 2 70 answer units ShowUnits true grading exact_sigd digit 3 mode Numeric name 2 70 exactly 3 significant digits editing useHTML This question grades correct the response 2 70 but grades incorrect equal values responses with a different number of trailing zeros for example 2 7 and 2 700 Ensure that lt n gt is greater than or equal to the number of digits in the correct answer the value in the answer num field Otherwise all student responses are graded incorrect If the correct answer is dimensionless and you set showUnits true the system displays the question with a Units text field Example 2 3 To specify an absolute margin of error use grading toler_abs and err lt tolerance gt where lt tolerance gt is a floating point number This question grades correct any answer within 0 001 of 3 14159 222220022 NNNNNNNDNDNDN WWW W
455. s the record of the course module from the list of available course modules but does not actually remove its contents from the system To delete the course module index from the list of available course modules in your class 1 Select the course module you want to remove by selecting the check box adjacent to it You can select multiple course modules for this action 2 A warning message is displayed To remove this course module index from the list of installed course modules in this class click OK The course module is removed from the list of available course modules for this class 320 Course Modules To delete the contents of a course module you must delete individual components as described under Adding and Deleting Elements within a Course Module 9 8 Relative Web References in Course Modules When your questions are saved Maple T A does a global search and replace for the strings listed http server name Web yourclass Public_Html http server name classes yourclass classes yourclass It replaces all of them with __BASE_CLASS_URI__ When the questions are uploaded the string is translated to http server name classes yourclass so that your image references are correct If you add more strings to the list they must be replaced with __ BASE _CLASS_URI__ The strings listed are the most common ones for people to use in addressing images that are stored in their class but 1t 1s possible that you hav
456. say question and click OK e You can define the size of the essay blank using rows and columns A typical screen width size is 65 70 columns wide Rows directly correspond to the lines of text you want to provide in a typical response e Ifa student enters more text than will fit in the preconfigured text window the cell will automatically insert a scroll bar and allow the student to continue his or her response Click OK and then Finish to save and preview the question To edit further details in the Question Repository within the Question Designer see Editing Question Details in the Question Respository page 84 97 Authoring Question Types Free Body Diagram Question To create a Free Body Diagram question Enter a title for the question under the Question Name panel Enter a question in the Question Text Click Insert Edit Response Area 0 On the Choose Question Type list select Free Body Diagram a A o N e Complete the following fields Weighting Properties in Free Body Diagram Questions page 111 e Angle Tolerance in Free Body Diagram Questions page 111 e Upload a background image using Browse For more detailed information see Background Images in Free Body Diagram Questions page 111 e Show instructions in Free Body Diagram Questions page 111 e Use the check boxes to select the appropriate forces on the diagram For more information on selecting forces see Select forces in Free Body Diag
457. set variable values based on conditions and relationships to other variables 1 Enter the variable name in the first cell You do not need to use the or notation 2 Enter the expression defining the variable if the condition is satisfied 3 Enter the condition by a Entering two expressions b Selecting the relation 4 Enter the expression defining the variable if the condition is not satisfied Notes i Each expression you use must be a e Variable name for example x or monthly totals You do not need to use the or notation e Number for example 5 or 2 67 e Math expression or formula for example x 2 1 11 You must define variables referenced in the condition before defining the conditional variable 5 To add the variable definition to the algorithm text box click OK 6 You can use the Algorithm Designer to generate multiple variables Using Maple to Generate Random Number Variables and Generate a Plot isa variable defined by the following Maple command var 7 Optional import a Maple repository You can import and link Maple repositories to the server Click Maple Repository to access files OK Maple Repository LIB Location output feld 72 Managing Questions You can use Maple commands to define random variables using any Maple function 1 Start by adding the variable name in the first cell You do not need to use the or notation 2 Select the type of variable to ge
458. sh a grade report so students can view the report select the Visible check box next to the Report Name 10 Click Save to save the grade report Viewing a Grade Report To view a grade report 1 From the Class Homepage select Gradebook then select Grade Reports 2 From the Select Grade Report panel select the Grade Report you want to view 3 If applicable use the Filter Results panel to narrow the search 4 In the View panel select data to include in the results 5 Click Load In a grade report bonus assignments are indicated with the bonus icon YP Publishing a Grade Report for Students You can publish a grade report for student viewing To publish a grade report edit the grade report and select the Visible check box 302 Working with the Gradebook 7 6 Rubric Tables In Maple T A rubrics can be created to mark a student s offline assignment laboratory or presentation Rubrics are highly customizable and instructors can modify the names and weighting of each category Accessing Rubrics 1 From the System Homepage select a class to enter the Class Homepage 2 Click Gradebook in the top toolbar 3 Select Rubric Tables Creating a New Rubric 1 Click New Rubric Table 2 The Rubric Table Editor appears where you can add a title to the rubric add or delete categories assign weighting and add category names and descriptions 3 Next to the text box Name enter a rubric title 4 To add another tab
459. sic gradebook search you can click any grade in the search results to view the detailed results for that assignment attempt The student assignment details report shows a summary of the results for this assignment attempt including the student s score out of the total points the session start and end times and duration A summary for student is also shown with the number of completed in progress and passed assignments for the student along with the number of assignments that need to be reviewed In the Student Assignment Details view you can e View the student s response for each question As part of this you can view the instance of the question that the student received for algorithmic questions e Add instructor feedback e Update student grades if desired Changing Grades and Adding Feedback From the Gradebook you can modify student grades if needed You can e Grade essay questions e Change a student s grade on an individual question 295 Working with the Gradebook e Leave feedback for the student on an individual question Changing Grades and Grading Essay Questions You might want to change a student s grade for several reasons e The system does not automatically grade essay questions so you must enter a grade for any essay questions included in your assignment If an assignment contains questions that have not yet been graded such as essay questions then an icon appears to the left of the score
460. signments and make them worth 30 of the overall grade group quizzes worth 30 of the grade and make the final exam worth the remaining 40 You could save this and publish it allowing students to see their grade by your calculation Grade reports are also useful for providing snapshots of the grades to date or trying out alternative methods for weighing assignments With options for designating extra credit and dropping the lowest grades grade reports provide flexibility for you in assessing your class Grade reports allow you to e Group assignments 288 289 Working with the Gradebook e Set criteria within an assignment group such as drop the lowest grade and whether to ignore non attempts or mark as zero e Designate weighting for each assignment in a group e Designate weighting for each assignment group in the overall grade e Designate an assignment group as extra credit e Save the grade report e Publish the grade report for student viewing See Also Working with Grade Reports page 299 Rubric Tables Some types of assignments such as oral presentations obviously cannot be completed inside Maple T A However with new scoring rubrics you can use Maple T A to communicate the expectations for that assignment record student grades provide students with their results and automatically include those grades in their overall results for the course Rubrics are highly customizable and instructors can modify the names
461. src classes myclass pka pka02a03 lt img src classes myclass pka pka02a04 Sc switch rint 5 lt img src classes myclass pka pka03a01 lt img src classes myclass pka pka03a02 lt img src classes myclass pka pka03a04 lt img src classes myclass pka pka03a05 S d switch rint 6 lt img src classes myclass pka pka04a01 lt img src classes myclass pka pka04a02 lt img src classes myclass pka pka04a03 lt img src classes myclass pka pka04a04 lt img src classes myclass pka pka04a05 lt img src classes myclass pka pka04a06 Se switch rint 2 lt img src classes myclass pka pka05a01 lt img src classes myclass pka pka05a02 format columns 5 term 1 def 1 Sa term 2 2 ICI gif gt gif gt gif gt gif gt gif gt gif gt gif gt lt img src classes myclass pka pka03a03 gif gt gif gt gif gt gif gt gif gt gif gt gif gt gif gt gif gt lt git gt gif gt question Sort the molecules below from highest to lowest pKa term 1 1 lowest pKa Most acidic Plain Text Script Authoring term 2 def 1 Sb term 3 3 term 3 def 1 Sc term 4 4 term 4 def 1 Sd term 5 5 highest pKa Least acidic term 5 def 1 Se eee ee ee See Also Matching Questions page 170 Question Modes Question Types page 328 Matrix The Matrix question type generates an n by
462. ss File Manager from the Class Homepage The Class File Manager is found under the Class Details tab My Homepage Help Courtney Jones Instructor Logout Algebra 2 Class User Manager Proctor Tools Assignments Questions Gradebook Class Homepage Class Details Courtney Jones courtneyjones maplesoft com Class Info Add Child Class Class File Manager Ass ignments Assignment Name Availability Attempts Best Score Maple graded policies Unlimited Unlimited Practice test Demonstration of Question Types policies Unlimited 0 Unlimited Not yet completed Figure 2 7 Class File Manager Uploading Single Files To upload a single file 1 From the Class File Manager navigate to an appropriate subfolder on the web site or click the Create new subfolder icon to create a subfolder When creating the name use letters numbers or underscores in the name but not spaces For maintainability it is recommended that you place files in a subfolder 2 Click the Upload files s to this point icon 21 Creating and Managing Classes 3 Click Browse to locate and select the file The following file formats are supported htm html gif jpg png pdf xls class jar js css shtml exe zip swf lib 4 The radio button next to Single File with file name is selected by default The file is automatically assigned the name of the file on your computer Note File names must not have spaces and consist of up to 255 letters nu
463. ssay 93 Formula 93 Formula that Matches Responses within C 93 Formula with Physical Units 93 Formula without Logs and Trig 93 Free Body Diagrams 93 Grading 94 Maple graded 93 Math App 93 Mathematical Formula 93 Multiple Choice 93 Numeric 93 Ordered List of Formulas 93 Question Editor 93 Sketch 93 Unordered List of Formulas 93 Vector of Formulas 93 Question Designer Questions 64 92 Adaptive 65 Essay 96 Free Body Diagram 97 Free Body Diagram Question Examples 112 Free Body Diagram Question Tutorial 112 In the Question Editor Insert Edit Response Area button 96 List 97 Maple graded 101 Math App 102 Mathematical Formula 103 103 Multiple Choice 104 Numeric 106 Question Editor 92 Sketch 108 Sketch Question Examples 120 Sketch Question Tutorial 120 Sketch questions 118 119 Question Details Editing 84 Question Editor 60 62 322 Essay 129 Free Body Diagram 108 Introduction to Question Types 62 Popups 80 Sketch Questions 113 True False 220 Question Elements Required 329 Question Fields 325 Question Modes 328 Redefining 76 Question parts Sequencing Parts 197 Question Repository 82 Algorithm 85 Authors 85 Clean up 87 Created 86 Description 85 Difficulty 85 Feedback 85 Groups 86 Hints 85 Information Fields 86 Language 86 Modified 86 Privacy 86 89 Question Text 84 Question Type 85 Index Report Question to Administrators 86 Revisions 85 Sort We
464. ssignment Editor Your edits are immediately saved to your class records If you set up your assignment to be immediately available to students it appears in the list presented to them in the Class Homepage Assignment 1 Assignment Type Homework or Quiz send email to No mailing set Pass Fail Not pass fail Time permitted No time limit Every version of the assignment asks the questions in the same Display Show 1 question per page Versioning i i th start No start time specified End No ending time specified Questions Question 1 Matching Question 2 Fillin the blank Drop down Box Question 3 Short Phrase Exact Match Question 4 Short Phrase Key Word Matching Feedback show the final grade of the assignment show pass fail feedback when the final grade is shown Always show correct answers Always show comments Figure 3 13 Review Assignment Details 40 Creating and Managing Assignments See Also Setting Assignment Types page 48 Scheduling Assignments page 51 3 3 Assignment Types Assignment Types Overview You can create graded assessments homework quizzes or exams ungraded practice tests or quizzes or tutorial assignments with set criteria For details see e Homework or Quiz Assignments page 40 Proctored Exams page 42 e Anonymous Practice Assignments page 43 e Study Session and Mastery Assignments page 43 To take any assignment stu
465. stion Reposo 87 Deleting Q estions from the Question Repository 1 AAA AAA ATA AAA rex A A 87 Previ wine a OSI A cod 87 EXportino Work to Your Hard DES SS AA A Geese sti natiet eee ca uaGeas 88 Shatino Questions tilo acoles oc ee Te 89 AAU OPIN Oe Question Types 2 A A A A dem SMe Stee aes Salen hs 91 5 1 A Summary of the Question Types Available in Maple T A 2 0 0 0 ccc ccc cece cece eee e eee nee e nee e ee eee nee Ee E RE EE SEES EE EE EERE EES 91 2 Question Destoner QUESTIONS ii O e A a e e IA EOS 92 TICSCRID MOU yla tido eat ee a 92 Introduction Question Types Supported in the Question Designer cc cece cece eee eee e eee e cece cece ee eee ease eee ea ee ene enone 93 A ere one noe amR ee Me nau a a tanto DMN en Tere Damen Nap meer oye nan re eee cena ee oe ee an 94 ABONO O 94 Authoring mine Question Destinia ca 95 Eres Body Diagram QUESOS A A o a ande 108 SESSION AA AA A A A AA 113 30 Adaptive Question Destener Question S iii 121 TESORO a Mest acca baal act tes ba chee ae ater arene teat ea he Dances eat nga Selene heen ae statd a 121 SEAHAM se A aS cena cians Oe gD nes GOOF pe nih er gO aC eC TA Sea cco eA ese Sattler Eo 121 Contents Sections Orar Adap VE QUESTO col 121 Presentation ot ans Adaptive QUESO AS AS Ad 122 Partial Credit man Adapter tdci 123 Next Step ar ii in 123 54 Chickable Tina ey Quesos dai 124 DESTAPE eRe en ee rR a ree eee eee ee eRe eet ey eee eee ee ee ee eee 124 EA mane see eee cana er
466. stion Types e Click Finish to place a copy of your question in the web site cache and to preview your question Example 1 From the Class Homepage click the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 In the Question Type list click True False 4 Enter the following for Question Name Integral True False 1 5 Enter the following for Question Text When integrating a sum of two or more functions the integral of the sum is equal to the sum of the respective integrals provided they exist 6 For Correct Answer select True 7 Click Finish 8 Click Preview to view the question See Figure 5 70 VManteTA Preview Question Integral True False 1 When integrating a sum of two or more functions the integral of the sum is equal to the sum of the respective integrals provided they exist True Ps I k 3 False Ps I k Figure 5 70 True False Example Question See Also True or False Question Source Script page 358 Multiple Choice Questions page 198 Next Steps To edit further details in the Question Repository within the Question Designer see Editing Question Details in the Question Respository page 84 See Also True or False Question Source Script page 358 6 Authoring Mathematical Questions 6 1 Authoring Mathematical Questions Maple T A provides cross platform support for learning content that includes numeric or symbolic mathematics expressions and chemistry equations and exp
467. strict the number of retakes allowed For details see Setting the Maximum Number of Attempts page 51 e Set the feedback level to score only rather than giving out answers or solutions This approach penalizes the good students too For details see Configuring Feedback Options page 49 e If you are writing and using your own questions you can edit the Feedback field and mask the correct answer For details see Configuring Feedback Options page 49 2 Consider locking your class after an initial sign up period to prevent registration of students that are not in the class and the creation of fake accounts You can also delete unwanted accounts For details see Locking and Unlocking Class Registration page 11 and Deleting Student Records page 310 Proctored Exams e Proctors can authorize students to take and grade assignments of the type Proctored Exam This usually depends on class size and the number of teaching assistants available to act as proctors However this double checking approach keeps the testing environment controlled e Proctors can use the Proctor Tools utility to avoid entering their password in front of students For more information see Proctored Exams page 42 Proctored Browser e The Proctored Browser is a full screen mode that blocks the student from accessing external web sites or other programs on the computer while taking a Proctored Exam assignment When used in a monitored setting such as an on cam
468. students upon grading The comment i field provides response specific feedback in multiple choice questions The values of i ina question must start at 1 and be consecutive Yes display can contain variables Contains a hint The values of i in a question must start at 1 and be consecutive Yes display can contain variables Contains a worked solution Shown only in Study Session assignments No internal directive Contains descriptive information about the Plain Text Script Authoring qu x y Required or optional Can include Field Type Description Function HTML or lt field name gt MathML question Multiple user specified fields and corresponding values can be contained in this statement Definitions e Internal Directive fields are commands that are evaluated and performed by the system They cannot contain HTML or MathML tags and must conform to the system syntax for algorithms formulas math expressions or command switches e Display fields hold question information that is used in displaying the question or related feedback hints or solutions The topic and name fields cannot contain variable values because algorithmic variables are set at the level of the question Question Modes Question Types Every question must begin with a mode statement Using the mode statement Maple T A formats the question on the page e Different question types require different fields in their definition For ex
469. swers separate each with a semicolon in your answer field definition statement Include a trailing semicolon for the last answer in the list In a test the input field for the response appears as shown in Figure A 1 E Let A al Whatis the derivative of Y with respectto X This question accepts numbers or formulas Help Change Entry Style Preview y bl wWhatis Y AX This question accepts numbers or formulas Help Change Entry Style Preview Figure A 1 Input Field For A Multipart Formula Question See Also Question Modes Question Types page 328 Multipart Question Source Script Plain Text Script Authoring Multipart questions can consist of any combination of questions as parts including nested multipart questions The following example source script creates a Multipart question that contains a nested Multipart question Sn int rand 5 15 Sa int rand 1 10 Snminus int n 1 nplus int n 1 SisEven int eq n 2 int n 2 k if S isEven 1 3 Stype if isEven even odd Sothertype if S isEven odd even Q qu 1 1 question This question concerns the integral of the function lt math gt lt msup gt lt mi gt x lt mi gt lt mn gt n lt mn gt lt msup gt lt math gt qu 1 topic Multipart Question Example Script qu 1 1 mode Multipart qu 1 1 name lt b gt Full multipart question featuring nested multipart lt b gt qu 1 1 edit
470. syntax qu x y mode multiple selection qu x y mode non permuting multiple selection Multiple selection questions are similar to multiple choice items However they can require the user to identify more than one correct answer You can create as many choices as you want In multiple selection questions the selections are permuted each time they appear In non permuting multiple selection questions the selection order is static Example The following example source script creates a Multiple Selection question qu 1 topic Multiple Selection Question Example Script qu 1 1 mode Multiple Selection qu 1 1 name Characterization of function at a point qu 1 1 editing useHTML qu 1 1 question Classify f x x 3 3x 2 4 at the point with x coordinate 2 lt p gt lt i gt Choose all that apply lt i gt lt p gt qu 1 1 answer 2 5 w qu 1 1 choice 1 negative qu 1 1 choice 2 zero qu 1 1 choice 3 positive Plain Text Script Authoring qu 1 1 choice 4 increasing qu 1 1 choice 5 extremum qu 1 1 choice 6 decreasing qu 1 1 choice 7 concave down qu 1 1 choice 8 inflection point qu 1 1 choice 9 concave up See Also Multiple Selection Questions page 204 Question Modes Question Types page 328 Numeric Question Source Script The following example source script creates a Numeric question qu 1 topic Numeric Question Example Script qu 1 1 mode numeric qu 1 1 question lt question_text gt qu 1 1 answer
471. t lt btn gt times lt btn gt lt btn gt divide lt btn gt lt btn gt middot lt btn gt lt sub gt lt tb gt qu env palette greek lt tb gt lt btn gt SYMBOLPALETTE lt btn gt lt sub cols 3 gt lt btn gt alpha lt btn gt lt btn gt beta lt btn gt lt btn gt gamma lt btn gt lt sub gt lt tb gt 6 7 Using MathML to Create Formatted Math Expressions Inline Display of Formatted Math Expressions The algorithmic function mathml s accepts a string argument s which it treats as a formula in calculator syntax and typesets it as MathML that can be used inside algorithms Note When you create inline typeset math expressions using the mathm1 function the system automatically simplifies the expressions Example qu 1 1 question What is the derivative of mathml sqrt 1 x n 238 Authoring Mathematical Questions qu 1 1 answer 1 2 1 x n 1 2 n x n 1 qu 1 1 algorithm n range 2 10 Since you can also use algorithmic commands to generate inline expressions you can use the Smathm1 s command along with inline expressions of the form expression to display the following typeset math expression inside a question statement What is mathml x 1 sqrt x 2 1 This will generate What is hie a x21 This is a quick and easy way to place MathML in question banks that use a little math notation but are not heavily reliant on it In addition your expression
472. t I Quadrant II Quadrant III Quadrant IV No Quadrant Actions QuadrantSelect 4 e The fifth Radio Button component has Name RadioButton4 and Caption No Quadrant Insert the following code for Edit Click Action Actions QuadrantSelect 0 e The sixth Radio Button component has Name RadioButton5 and Caption placeholder Clear the Visible check box and click OK The RadioButton should now have disappeared from your worksheet Right click the left Label component and select Component Properties Change the Caption to x and click OK Right click the right Label component and select Component Properties Change the Caption to y and click OK 187 Authoring Question Types Embedded Plot Window Quadrant I Quadrant II Quadrant III Quadrant IV No Quadrant For the Text Area component next to x right click it and select Component Properties Ensure the Name of this component is TextArea0 Click OK For the Text Area component next to y right click 1t and select Component Properties Ensure the Name of this component is TextAreal Click OK For the Text Area component next to the Button component right click it and select Component Properties Ensure the Name of this component is TextArea2 Change the Visible Character Width to 50 and Visible Rows to 3 Click OK Now right click the Button component and select Component Properties Change the Caption to Restart Game Right click the Button
473. t can include algorithmic variables You can also add an HTML label to a question using plain text script authoring by adding this code to the question field or any HTML field in the question definition in the qu script file See Also Images and Reference Files in Questions page 77 Plotting Using Maple page 242 Overview of Algorithmic Question Capabilities page 258 80 Managing Questions Labeling Graphics in Questions Source Script page 346 Flash Movies and Java Applets in Questions You can use Flash movies or Java applets in questions The process 1s similar to using an image in a question In addition you can create questions where students are graded directly on their interaction with the Flash movie or the applet For more information on this advanced functionality see Flash Questions page 343 and Applet Ouestions page 339 To include a Flash movie in a question you must first upload the Flash movie to a subfolder on the Class web site Next you can include a reference to the Flash movie in your question To do this in the Question Editor follow these steps 1 Create or edit a question in the Question Editor In the field where you want to include the movie question text feedback or hints click the flash icon a from the menu bar 3 Under the General tab click Browse Server and select the movie you have uploaded to the Class web site You will be shown a preview of the movie 4 Click OK to add
474. t color JPEG rendering of the image e plotoptions optional specifies plot options available for the plot device specified see Table 6 14 Some examples plotmaple plot3d sin x y x 0 10 y 1 1 style patchnogrid lightmodel light1 plotdevice jpeg plotoptions width 250 height 250 plotmaple plot sin x x Pi Pi plotdevice gif plotoptions height 250 width 250 270 Authoring Mathematical Questions plotmaple plot sin x x Pi Pi plotdevice jpeg plotoptions height 250 width 250 Table 6 14 Options for GIF and JPEG Plots GIF plot options colors n Set the number of colors The default 256 colors height n Set the number of pixels in the height The default is 512 width n Set the number of pixels in the width The default is 512 height n Specify the height of the canvas The default is 360 quality n Set the JPEG quality level an integer value from 0 to 100 The default is 95 Settings greater than 95 generally have negligible visible effect width n Specify the width of the canvas The default is 480 See Also Setting Plot Options page 277 rand m n rand m n k rand m n Returns a random real number between m and n inclusive For example to generate random numbers between 0 5 and 9 5 use the formula rand 0 5 9 5 rand m n k Returns a random real number between m and n expressed to k k gt 0 significant digits k is truncated to an integer
475. t currently being created or edited e Adding an OR Criterion Click Add alternative criterion immediately below the list of assignments The program adds the list fields for another criterion e Adding an AND Criterion Click Add additional criterion at the bottom right of the form below the frame that encloses the criterion fields The program adds another criterion group in a separate frame e Deleting a Criterion To delete an OR criterion click on Remove criterion inside the frame for that criterion group The program deletes the last criterion from the group You may have to change the settings for the remaining criteria in the group to set the requirements that you want To delete an AND criterion group click Remove criterion at the bottom of the form 56 Creating and Managing Assignments below the last criterion group The program deletes the last group You may have to change the settings for the remaining groups to set the requirements that you want Review amp Finish Tab Finishing and Saving an Assignment Saving an assignment involves saving information in cached memory and in your class configuration To accept and publish the assignment you have created or modified click Finish in the Review amp Finish tab e If you have scheduled it for immediate availability your new assignment is available for students on the Class Homepage e The system does not save partially completed assignments until you click Finish in the
476. t grade The system still produces algorithmically varied versions of the assignment for different students but each student sees only one version of the assignment regardless of repeated attempts Targeted To keep response and check mark indicator for correctly answered questions on subsequent attempts Select the Targeted Keep response and check mark indicator for correctly answered questions check box e When an individual student takes another attempt at an assignment they will see their previous response and a check mark indicator for correctly answered questions Generate a New Question Order To show students the questions in the order the instructor chose when creating the assignment Select the Never option from the Generate a new question order drop down list e When an individual student takes an assignment they will see the questions in the order the instructor chose when creating the assignment If the student has multiple attempts at an assignment the order of the questions will not change To show questions in a different order for an individual student but not on subsequent attempts Select the On the first attempt option from the Generate a new question order drop down list e When an individual student takes an assignment for the first time the order of the questions will be scrambled If the student has multiple attempts at an assignment the order of the questions will not change 42 Creating and Managing Ass
477. te entries at a time lt btn gt name of the palette item lt sub cols gt number of columns in the palette lt sep gt palette separator P p p Table 6 3 Defining Palettes Palette Definition Palette lt btn gt SYMBOLPALETTE lt btn gt lt sub cols 3 gt lt btn gt pi lt btn gt lt btn gt e lt btn gt lt btn gt i lt btn gt lt btn gt I lt btn gt lt btn gt infin lt btn gt lt btn gt Sum lt btn gt lt btn gt Product lt btn gt lt btn gt int lt btn gt lt btn gt d lt btn gt lt btn gt 1t lt btn gt lt btn gt gt lt btn gt lt btn gt le lt btn gt lt btn gt ge lt btn gt lt btn gt equals lt btn gt lt btn gt ne lt btn gt lt sub gt lt sep gt 236 Authoring Mathematical Questions Palette Definition Palette lt btn gt LCGREEKPALETTE lt btn gt lt sub cols 3 gt lt btn gt alpha lt btn gt lt btn gt beta lt btn gt lt btn gt gamma lt btn gt lt btn gt delta lt btn gt lt btn gt lambda lt btn gt lt btn gt mu lt btn gt lt btn gt nu lt btn gt lt btn gt psi lt btn gt lt btn gt phi lt btn gt lt btn gt sigma lt btn gt lt btn gt Delta lt btn gt lt btn gt Gamma lt btn gt lt btn gt omega lt btn gt lt btn gt epsilon lt btn gt lt btn gt zeta lt btn gt lt btn gt eta lt btn gt lt btn gt theta lt btn gt lt btn gt kappa lt btn gt lt btn gt rho lt btn gt lt btn gt upsilon lt btn gt lt btn gt xi lt btn gt lt sub gt lt sep
478. ted force 1 Drag its handle on the diagram This approach also affects the arrow s length This however has no impact on the grading since force magnitudes are not considered 2 Enter an angle in degrees on the table and press Enter To change the type of a selected force or to move that force to a different control point if applicable use the corresponding drop down menus in the table row To delete forces click Delete Force Also the entire list of forces can be deleted by clicking Clear All Examples To view Free Body Diagram question examples 1 From the System Homepage select the class called Maple T A Readiness Class 2 From the Assignments panel click Free Body Diagram Questions as shown in Figure 5 10 below Note Alternatively you can view Free Body Diagram questions individually through the Question Repository by selecting the group called Free Body Diagram Questions M i T IN Readiness Class an e IX Class Homepage Proctor Tools Class Homepage Class Details John Smith jzivku maplesoft com Xq Assignments Assignment Name Availability Attempts Best Score Sketching Questions Unlimited 0 Unlimited Not yet completed Student Readiness Test Unlimited 0 Unlimited Not yet completed Demonstration Assignment Unlimited Unlimited Practice test Demonstration of Question Types Unlimited Unlimited Practice test Unlimited 0 Unlimited Not yet completed Figure 5 10 Free Body Diagram Questions i
479. ted with Maple T A the Proctored Browser no longer requires separate installation e Available for use inside course management systems where Maple T A has been integrated into the environment Customized Student Profiles Schools can now require additional information in student profiles e Administrators can add new fields to the student profile information such as their program or major e Fields are mandatory to ensure the information is collected even during self registration Enhanced Course Management Integration Maple T A can be seamlessly integrated into course management systems such as Blackboard Moodle and Desire2Learn using connector features and add ons These abilities have been enhanced in Maple T A 10 e The Moodle connector which is included with Maple T A has been updated to support the most recent releases of Moodle 2 6 and 2 7 e The web services API which allows institutions to build custom connectors to integrate Maple T A into virtually any course management or learning management system provides new tools for course administration Authoring Questions Maple T A 10 is based on Maple 18 and these two products work together to provide new options for authoring Maple T A question content e New tools in Maple 18 support the development and testing of questions in the rich Maple authoring environment before they are exported to Maple T A e Authors can start from scratch inside Maple o
480. tend Albert Einstein s General Theory of Relativity 2 mode List 2 editing useHTML ELEELE N sd lt I qa Example 3 List Question Menu Display Exact Grader Options Sets a question with a menu list response object that uses the exact grader Specifies credit for each option in the list and a comment for each qu 1 3 question Who first developed the General Theory of Relativity grader exact display menu answer l Sir Isaac Newton credit 1 0 3 comment 1 No Sir Isaac Newton formed the theory of Newtonian gravitation that preceded Albert instein s General Theory of relativity 3 answer 2 Albert Einstein comment 2 Correct credit 2 1 0 answer 3 Stephen Hawking credit 3 0 25 1 3 comment 3 Your answer is partially correct Hawking helped to extend Albert Einstein s General Theory of Relativity 1 3 mode List 1 3 editing useHTML PPP PP WWW Ww 3 a3 3 3 22282222002 PPRPPP Pe qa See Also List Questions in the Question Designer page 97 See Also Question Modes Ouestion Types page 328 Maple graded Formula Question Source Script Question Mode Maple Question Editor question type Maple graded Question file qu syntax qu x y mode Maple type formula Plain Text Script Authoring In Maple graded Formula question types students can enter a math formula that is an expression constructed of numbers variable names and the standar
481. the Assignment Editor The name field is not required however it is recommended The name field accepts HTML formatting Example qu x y name Travel time for block on inclined plane 1 Note If you omit the name field or leave the description blank the system substitutes the question type for the description This can result in questions that show many similar items for example Multiple Choice Multiple Selection Multiple Choice Multiple Selection and Multiple Selection The answer Field All question types in the system excluding Maple graded Matching and Essay must contain an answer field that indicates the criterion for grading the question The answer field is a command that the system evaluates and performs if necessary The output is compared against student responses for grading e Because the value of the answer field is processed by the system and compared to student responses the answer field must not contain HTML extraneous text not part of the required answer or special formatting e Answer field values for mathematics questions are processed by the system math parser and must be entered in proper system math syntax or MathML Student responses are processed by the parser and must reduce to mathematically equivalent values to be graded correct Table A 3 Answer Field Requirements by Question Type Question Type Answer Field Non Numeric mathematics question types Use the operator in the answer field
482. the answer The last line of your question code must evaluate to a Boolean value true or false or a floating point number between 0 0 and 1 0 for partial grading By default use the Maple command evalb SANSWER SRESPONSE gt 0 as indicated where RESPONSE represents the student response and ANSWER represents the correct answer If you choose to alter the default grading syntax complete each line of code with a semicolon Use the long form name for all package functions for example VectorCalculus ArcLength Use SRESPONSE to represent the student response in your code Before your code 1s processed by Maple SRESPONSE is replaced by the student response Use SANSWER to represent the correct answer as you have provided in the previous field From the Select the type of expression you want to accept field select Formula or Maple Syntax To learn about the differences between Formula and Maple Syntax expression types see Maple graded Question Type Overview page 154 If you selected Maple syntax from the Text Symbolic entry field select Text entry only if you want students to type their response in a text region or Symbolic entry only if you want students to use the Equation Editor to enter their response For more information on this option and the advantages of each entry mode see Maple graded Question Type Overview page 154 Optional Upload a Maple repository For instructions see Using a Maple Repository page amp 1
483. the correct answer is 3 141592 and perc 1 the range of correct responses is between 3 11017604 and 3 17300792 inclusive Specifying a Precision and a Margin of Error e To specify the margin of error as the tolerance in the value of a significant digit and require that same number of significant digits select Accept k in the nth place enter the floating point value or corresponding algorithmic variable of the tolerance in the k text field and then select the significant digit from the n drop down menu Student responses that are correct up to the specified number of significant digits receive 50 credit For example if the correct answer is 2 4 k 2 andn 3 the correct responses are 2 38 2 39 2 40 2 41 and 2 42 For example ifk 1 n 3 and the correct answer is 27 18 the responses 27 1 and 27 2 are correct Although 27 3 is within 0 1 of 27 18 rounded to 3 significant digits it is incorrect because it is not within 0 1 of 27 18 See Also Setting a Margin of Error in Non numeric Questions page 227 Answer Tolerance Source Script page 336 Controlling Answer Tolerance page 226 Tutorial Setting Margin of Tolerance in Non numeric Questions page 256 Example 1 Creating a Simple Numeric Question This example describes how to create a simple question that accepts a numeric response This question is created in the Question Editor as a Numeric question 1 From the Class Homepage select the Questions menu Clic
484. the movie To include an applet in a question 1 Create and deploy the Java applet 2 Create and deploy a Java class grading 3 Author the question For details on this process see Applet Questions page 339 Note While an applet question cannot be created in the Question Editor it is possible to embed an applet graph in a question that is created in the Question Editor using the Edit Source functionality to edit the source code directly See Also Applet Questions page 339 Flash Questions page 343 Creating Popup References in Questions To add a popup reference to a question insert and customize the sample HTML code from the example below in your question Example To create a popup HTML reference file in a question 1 Create an HTML file containing instructions or reference information For example instructions html 2 From System Tools Menu select Web Site Tools to upload this file to the class web site 3 Add the following sample HTML code to your question lt a href javascript window open classes yourclassURL instructions html1 instructions width 450 height 650 scrollbars focus gt Click here for instructions lt a gt where http www yourschool com classes yourclassURL is your class web site URL 81 Managing Questions To add HTML code through the Question Editor click Source El 3ource in the menu bar You can also add a popup reference to a question using plain text s
485. the radio button corresponding to the correct answer 9 The default option for Change the order of the choices is yes Note This means the choices will be permuted with each delivery of the question If you select no then the choice order will remain static 10 The default option for Allow more than one selection is no Note If you select yes then the radio button will change to check boxes Being able to make more than one response selection means you are using a Multiple Selection question type For more information see Multiple Selection Questions page 204 11 To add an Algorithm or Feedback to the question see Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 and Adding and Editing Information Fields Hints or Feedback page 74 12 Click Preview to view the finished question To add response specific feedback for the student 1 On the preview screen click Edit 2 Under the Question Details click Edit Source 3 On the Edit Source screen for each choice listed in the source add a comment line of the form comment lt n gt lt comment_text gt where lt n gt in the comment line is the same as in the corresponding choice line choice lt n gt lt choice_text gt at the end of the source code 4 Click Finish Example 1 Creating a Simple Multiple Choice To create a Simple Multiple Choice question 1 From the Class Homepage click the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 200 Authoring Question Types NY DO On A
486. the relative weighting of the section in the overall adaptive question The grade of a section is determined by how the weighted response areas are answered Show Answer controls whether the correct answer is displayed when the section is finished Display determines whether to show or hide the section when it is finished e Question Complete determines whether the question should be considered finished or if the next section should be displayed The question will also be complete when there are no more sections Edit Adaptive Section a section Correct Incorrect Attempts H Weight 1 0 Weight 0 0 Allow Skip El Show Answer a Show Answer El Passing Score 1 0 Display E Display rl Penalty 0 0 Question Complete E Question Complete FE Figure 4 2 Specify Settings for a Section in an Adaptive Question c In the question screen the section marker appears as a wide horizontal line The section begins at the beginning of the question or at the previous section marker For detailed information on Adaptive Question Designer questions see Adaptive Ouestion Designer Questions page 121 For a tutorial on creating a sample adaptive question see Tutorial Adaptive Question page 66 Tutorial Adaptive Question This tutorial describes how to create an adaptive question that asks for the derivative of x cos x If a student gets the question wrong he or she is taken through a sequence of subquestions that guide him or h
487. the text of the question gt qu 1 1 answer lt the text of the answer this is in MathML and is intended to be editable gt qu 1 1 toolbar lt ref to external toolbar definition gt See Also Equation Editor Requirements and Syntax page 235 Next Steps To edit further details in the Question Repository within the Question Designer see Editing Question Details in the Question Respository page 84 5 16 True False Questions Description True false questions are treated as a class of multiple choice question They only feature two choices true and false Grading Students must select the correct answer to get full credit No partial marks are allotted Instructions To create a True False question 1 From the Class Homepage select the Questions menu 2 Click New Question 3 On the Question Type list click True False 4 On the Edit Response Area screen e Enter the Question Name e Enter the Question Text e For Correct Answer use the radio buttons to select True or False e To add an Algorithm or Feedback to the question see Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 and Adding and Editing Feedback page 75 for more details e To proceed to the Question Details page click Finish 5 On the Question Details screen e To edit Hints and question details see Adding and Editing Feedback page 75 and Editing Question Details in the Question Respository page 84 for more details 221 Authoring Que
488. there may be a penalty for skipping the section A sample adaptive question 1s shown in Figure 5 14 123 Authoring Question Types Preview Question Adaptive Question Derivative Whatis the derivative ofr cos r wrtx El Next Part Attempt 1 of 3 Figure 5 14 Adaptive Question Partial Credit in an Adaptive Question You can give partial credit as well as penalty deductions for repeated attempts Like Question Designer questions an Adaptive Question is a shell which contain one or more Response Areas Each response area has 1ts own defined question mode and grading behaviors The total grade for an adaptive question is the sum of the grades for each adaptive section The grade of an adaptive section that is answered correctly is given by the formula RA Grade Correct Weight Incorrect Attempts Penalty where RA Grade is the total grade for the response areas within the adaptive section In the case where this formula gives a negative number the grade is given as 0 The grade of an adaptive section that is answered incorrectly is Incorrect Weight See Also Adaptive Question Designer Questions page 121 Question Designer Questions page 92 Tutorial Adaptive Question page 66 Next Steps To edit further details in the Question Repository within the Question Designer see Editing Question Details in the Question Respository page 84 124 Authoring Question Types 5 4 Clickable Image Questi
489. they exceed the time limit however they can submit their work up to that point for grading e When the student has completed the assignment and submitted it for grading the system displays a graded assignment report that includes the score for example 6 out of 8 as well as details on the grading of each question along with feedback for all of the questions These options can be configured Proctored Exams Proctored Exams are similar to Homework or Quiz assignments but with an additional security measure to confirm the identity of the student taking the test e All Proctored tests require a proctor to authorize students submitting their test for grading e You can require proctor authorization to validate student identity and grant assignment access at the start of a proctored exam Select the Also require proctor sign in to start session option in the Set Policies tab e Students must be registered in your class Types of Proctors There are two types of proctors Global and Local e Global proctors are defined by the System Administrator and can give authorization for any class e Local proctors are defined by the Instructor and can only give authorization for a particular class Location of Proctor Proctors can give authorization directly at the student s computer or remotely through Proctor Tools In both cases the proctor must sign in by giving a login name and password 43 Creating and Managing Assignments Note T
490. tically equal to the correct answer but also to be expressed in the same form Thus would be graded the same by a standard formula question However with the form submode set only the first two would be graded as equivalent Authoring of this question variant is not directly available using the Question Editor To invoke this grading variant you must create a formula question and then edit the source by adding a line grading form You can also specify it in the source for a question When editing the source include a line of the form qu 1 1 grading forme See Also Question Modes Question Types page 328 Graph Sketching Question Source Script The following example source scripts create Sketch questions qu 1 1 mode sketch gqu 1 1 question lt p class noindent gt Sketch the graph of the function lt math xmlns http WWW w3 org 1998 Math MathML display inline gt lt mi gt y lt mi gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt mi gt x lt mi gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt mn gt 1 lt mn gt lt math gt lt p gt qu 1 1 gridlines 4 Q qu 1 1 axes 2 2 2 2 qu 1 1 axes labeled true gqu 1 1 axes background ImageBase Q 22 222 i a2 Sxmax x Plain Text Script Authoring example 2 1 1 2 answer check linear 1 amp amp goes_through 1 0 1 info mode sketch algorithm a int rand 2 6 int a a int 2 Sa sqrt 2 a Q qu 1 2 question lt p class noind
491. time and the question behavior depends on whether the student answers the subquestion correctly You can use an adaptive question to give students another chance when they give an incorrect response perhaps by walking them through the steps of the problem letting them try a simpler version of the question before retrying the original problem or letting them try the same question again for reduced credit Adaptive questions are created in a similar way to question designer questions and support all features described in Question Designer Questions page 92 The only exception is that essay questions cannot be used in adaptive questions Grading For Adaptive Question designer questions the instructor organizes the questions by difficulty The questions students see are dependent on the correctness of their previous responses Sections of an Adaptive Question Authoring an Adaptive Question Designer question is done in the Question Editor through an editor window that is based on the Question Designer editor What differentiates Adaptive Question Designer question from a Question Designer question is the ability to add section divisions to the question Section divisions are inserted using the Insert Edit Adaptive Section button 2 e Adaptive sections are displayed sequentially unless the question is designated as complete when a section is finished e You can specify the number of attempts permitted on a section e A section is finished w
492. tion Type list click Fill in the Blanks 4 Enter the following for Text of the correctly filled out answer In calculus differentiable implies continuous but not conversely 5 Using the radio button next to Responses from select Menus Click Next aD Click Add Choices 8 In the text field type symmetric as shown in Figure 5 19 below 133 Authoring Question Types Question Editor Cancel More OK Enter additional terms for the drop down menus in the boxes below 1 2 9 A os IIII 2 gt gt Figure 5 19 Fill in the Blanks Question Editor 8 Click OK 9 Click the dots on both sides of the word differentiable This highlights the word To remove a blank from a word or phrase click one of the words in the highlighted blank 10 Click the dots on both sides of the word continuous This highlights the word See Figure 5 20 In calculus differentiable implies continuous but not conversely Extra blanks symmetric Figure 5 20 Fill in the Blanks Example 1 11 Click Finish 12 Click Preview to view the question See Figure 5 21 apleTAL Preview Question Fill in the Blanks in calculus Click for List limplies Click for List putnot Example conversely Figure 5 21 Fill in the Blanks Example 1 Preview 134 Authoring Question Types Example 2 Textboxes To create a Fill in the Blanks Drop down menu example 1 From the Class Home
493. tion grades input in the form of a text string and can also be set to accept multiple correct answers so Emstem or emstein will be sraded as correct as will Albert Emstein or aLbeRt ems TEIN Who first developed the General Theory of Relativity This question also awards partial credit F you answer Stephen Hawk ing This is the same question with the grader set te accept only an exact match of the answer text string however it too can be set to accept multiple correct answers so Eimstein or Albert Emstein will be graded as correct but einstein or aLbeRt ems TEIN wall be graded wrong Who first developed the General Theory of Relatraty This type of question also aiiows you to give some part a credit for certain responses so if you enter einstein or albert einstein you will get 2 credit for his question Tn the following question the student picks from a drop down menu of choices Partial credit can be set for some options full credit for others Who first developed the General Theory of Relativity Click for List in this case you get full credi for Alber Einstein and 22 credit for Stephen Hawking Figure 5 24 Demonstration of Various and Fill in the Blanks Questions 136 Authoring Question Types Both List questions and Blanks questions can be set to require students to enter text textbox style presentation or to select from a list of entries menu style presentation Each style ha
494. tionally define the following exports e InitParams can take arguments from Maple T A to initialize the worksheet with different parameters e Grade a procedure that returns a number in the range 0 1 e Answer can be used to show the correct answer 2 Create a Math App question in Maple T A using the Math App 3 Select the option to use the grading algorithm in your Math App worksheet 177 Authoring Question Types How to Make a Math App Question Gradeable through Maple T A l Ze 3 Define an Actions module in your Math App Export all the procedures and variables you would like to call from Maple T A Create a Math App question in Maple T A using the Math App Select Maple T A Grading and define the grading code to grade the student response General Overview on Creating Math App Questions in Maple T A l la DD Nn A W N Create your worksheet in Maple This worksheet will contain the Math App question content sliders math containers etc Create this question with or without grading scheme Upload your worksheet to Maple T A In Maple T A go to the Question Editor select a question of type Math App Enter text for the question As part of the question creation process browse to the uploaded Math App worksheet and select it Initialize any parameters in the worksheet optional Select Grading Scheme whether it s in Maple T A or in the worksheet Instructions To
495. tively by dragging which automatically adjusts the rest of the curve e Graph sketching questions can include curves that are part of the question itself such as showing a line and asking the student to draw a tangent to that line through a given point Free Body Diagrams Instructors in engineering and science can now ask questions that require students to draw free body diagrams and Maple T A automatically grades the results e Students answer a question by drawing force arrows at appropriate locations and angles on an image illustrating the problem such as aramp pulley cart truss bridge or other statics or dynamics problems e The student must specify the type of each force such as gravity normal or friction and show the direction of each force in relation to the object e The direction of each force is assessed within a specified tolerance Gradeable Math Apps Gradeable Math App questions were introduced in Maple T A 9 5 as a technology preview Now with Maple T A 10 this feature 1s a fully supported question type e Maple T A can automatically grade interactive Maple applications called Math Apps e With gradeable Math Apps instructors can provide students with specialized calculators ask them to manipulate parameters until they have found the desired solution give them interactive plots to explore and much more e With Maple T A 10 these questions no longer require the use of a Java plug in so they load
496. to this point Navigate to the desired folder and click Upload file s to this point Click Choose File to find the Math App on your machine Ji anteT Select Single File and provide a name for the Math App Class File Manager Click OK Upload files Enter the complete path of the file you wish to upload Choose File RISTO TOL Tee Save into as Single file with file name QuadrantGame mw Zip archive Click the worksheet name to select the Math App you want to use in your question Class File Manager View Files Demo Maple T A Class QuadrantGame mw Chapteri Demo_files Flash ImportedQuestions _thumbs Cancel Under the heading Select the type of grading used select Grading Algorithm in Maple TA Select the type of Grading Algorithm in Math App grading used The Math App contains a grading procedure called Actions Grade Grading Algorithm in Maple T A Insert the following command into the input box Enter Maple code to grade the student response The last line must evaluate to a Boolean value true or false or a floating point value between 0 and 1 The variable SRESPONSE is automatically initialized to the students add num_incorrect i i 1 10 10 0 response add num_incorrect i i 1 10 10 0 Click Finish to save the question Bh To see how the question works click Preview Example 7 Creating an Interactive Plot of a Circle Within a plot component you can define click and drag beh
497. to verify that the derivative of the student response is equal to x 3 This is recommended in place of comparing the student response which can have an additive constant with the integral of x 3 that is evalb SRESPONSE int x 3 xX If the student enters an incorrect response the system display the value in the comment field In Maple graded questions if there is no comment field the system returns the message Comment No feedback is provided with this question To change this question to an algorithmic question use the following plain text script question definition 2 question Enter an anti derivative of x Sexponent coeff x 2 maple evalb diff SRESPONSE x x exponent S coeff x 2 type formula 2 mode Maple 1 allow2d 1 2 name Maple AntiDerivative 2 comment Any function of the form Sanswer C where C is a constant is an anti derivative of x n 2 1 1 1 A aq A 1 1 xponent coeff x 1 egegeeees editing useHTML gqu 1 2 algorithm Sexponent maple randomize rand 2 5 Scoeff maple randomize rand 2 9 Sanswer maple int x exponent Scoeff x x Notes 1 You must follow the variable naming conventions 2 For a list of the guidelines for Maple commands in Maple based variables see The Algorithm Designer page 70 3 The variable exponent is assigned a value calculated by Maple using the rand function rand returns a random 12 digit positive integer rand
498. tor to define a margin of error The operator functions as a operator Example 1 1 You can specify an absolute margin of error using the form x y which accepts x y This question grades as correct any student response between 0 and 4 inclusive padue Note topic Non numeric Math Questions mode Formula name Absolute margin of error editing useHTML question Enter a number within 2 units of 2 answer 2 2 tolerance 1 0E 9 e For formula questions there is a tolerance of 1 0E 9 which represents the floating point limit in the system Example 1 2 You can specify a percentage margin of error using the form x 1 y where 100y is the percentage tolerance which accepts x x y This question grades correct any response within 5 of the correct answer qu 1 2 question What is the length of the shadow cast by a 10 foot wall when the sun is 30 degrees above the horizon 1 qqages Note 2 tolerance 1 0E 9 mode Dimensioned Formula name Percentage tolerance with units comment Using the formula 10 tan pi 6 foot the correct answer is 17 3 feet editing useHTML answer 10 tan pi 6 foot 1 0 05 e By using the comment field you return custom feedback to a student if the response is incorrect Example 1 3 Plain Text Script Authoring You can use a margin of error in questions that use algorithmic variables mode Formula name Algorithmic Variables
499. ty m s What is its kinetic energy qu 4 1 answer 1 2 mass velocity 2 In the test for the type of animal in the definition of mass it is required that the variable animal be enclosed in quotes Note The strings in the example above appear only as arguments to functions It is recommended that you do not mix strings and numbers in expressions 6 23 Tutorial Algorithmic Question Algorithmically generated variables are used in questions to generate random numbers in questions and create multiple permutations of questions from a single template The system uses a special field algorithm to contain variable definitions Variable definitions must be presented in the proper system syntax They can contain embedded functions and arguments Note For any question type you can use Maple commands and Maple T A to generate algorithmic numbers For more information see Tutorial Maple based Algorithmic Question Authoring page 285 This tutorial examines the process of converting a typical numeric question to an algorithmically generated question by using variables Consider a single example Substitute variable data for the mass and speed values in the following question each time the assignment is generated A ball of mass 0 8 kg is thrown at a speed of 12 6 m s a What is its momentum b What is its kinetic energy The plain text script for this question with no algorithms 1s qu 1 1 mode Multipart Formula 2
500. u can provide a question bank specific table of equivalent units or expressions as well See Also Question Types Available in the System page 91 Setting a Margin of Error in Non numeric Questions page 227 Tutorial Displaying Answers vs Formulas for Answers page 253 Controlling Display of Numbers within Questions page 281 Overview of Algorithmic Question Capabilities page 258 Default Table of Physical Unit Equivalents page 247 Topic Structure within Question Banks Each question bank consists of topics with questions organized by topic Questions consist of a series of related statements all containing the same prefix indicating the topic and question numbers e Topics must be numbered in ascending order starting at 1 e Questions and topics must be numbered consecutively e Each topic has a name which is a text string set using the line qu x topic lt topic_name gt e x is the topic number The following example shows a question bank with two topics There are two questions in the first topic and only one in the second topic In general question banks contain many questions in each topic Example qu 1 topic Differentiating polynomials qu 1 1 mode formula qu 1 1 question What is the derivative of x lt SUP gt 2 lt SUP gt 3x 17 Plain Text Script Authoring answer 2x 3 mode formula question What is the derivative of x lt SUP gt 3 lt SUP gt x 1 answer 3x lt SUP gt 2 lt SUP gt 1 to
501. u have access to many different kinds of mathematical objects This question type allows for questions with complicated answers questions with different possible answers and questions requiring a powerful answer equivalence checker You can even find common errors and assign partial credit Math App Questions page 176 A Math App question contains an embedded worksheet A student will leave the worksheet in a final state that will then be graded Matching Questions page 170 A Matching question displays two lists The student must match each element of the first list with an element of the second list 91 92 Authoring Question Types Mathematical Formula Questions page 137 A Mathematical Formula question allows instructors to compare a student response generally a mathematical expression to a specified answer It has several variants including Formula Formula without Logs and Trig Formulas with Physical Units Formula that Matches Responses within C Equation Unordered List of Formulas Ordered List of Formulas Vectors of Formulas O 0 YN WB Wn A QU N e Formula without Simplification 10 Chemical Equation Note To see specific information and examples for each subtype click Mathematical Formula Question Types Comparison Table page 137 Only available for authoring in the Question Designer For more information see Formula without Simplification Subtype page 103 Multipart Questions
502. uestion page 121 24 Insert the last section division in the desired location by clicking Insert Edit Adaptive Section 25 The Edit Adaptive Section dialog opens a Under the Correct heading set the Weight to 0 5 b Click OK 70 Managing Questions 26 Click Finish 27 Click Preview to view the question See Also Adaptive Question Designer Questions page 121 4 3 Additional Options in the Question Editor The instructor has options to add various components while developing questions in the Question Editor For more details click on the following e The Algorithm Designer page 70 e Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 e Adding and Editing Information Fields Hints or Feedback page 74 Deleting an Information Field Hint or Feedback page 75 e Text Formatting in Questions page 76 e Redefining Question Types page 76 e Testing the Grading of a Question page 76 e Maple Plots page 76 e Images and Reference Files in Questions page 77 e Flash Movies and Java Applets in Questions page 80 e Creating Popup References in Questions page 80 e Questions with Labeled Images page 79 e Using a Maple Repository page 81 The Algorithm Designer Use the Algorithm Designer to simplify adding algorithmic variables 1 You can add any type of algorithmic statement In the appropriate section of the Algorithm Designer enter and select the required information in the template 2 To add the stat
503. uestion Designer page 97 Maple graded Questions in the Question Designer page 101 Math App Questions in the Question Designer page 102 Mathematical Formula Questions in the Question Designer page 103 Multiple Choice Questions in the Question Designer page 104 Numeric Questions in the Question Designer page 106 Sketch Questions in the Question Designer page 108 Adaptive Question Designer Questions page 121 Essay Questions in the Question Designer page 96 Free Body Diagram Questions in the Question Designer page 97 63 Managing Questions List Questions in the Question Designer page 97 Maple graded Questions in the Question Designer page 101 Math App Questions in the Question Designer page 102 Mathematical Formula Questions in the Question Designer page 103 Multiple Choice Questions in the Question Designer page 104 Numeric Questions in the Question Designer page 106 Sketch Questions in the Question Designer page 108 Clickable Image Questions page 124 Essay Questions page 129 Fill in the Blanks Questions page 130 Maple graded Questions page 153 Maple graded Formula page 156 Maple Syntax page 157 Math App Questions page 176 Matching Questions page 170 Mathematical Formula Questions page 137 For a detailed example of each subtype of Mathematical Formula see Mathematical Formula Formula Subtype page 139 Formula without Logs and Trig Subtype page 140
504. uestions Maple code to grade student responses and prevent cheating Maple plot command that plots a student response or related function qu x y lt field name gt Required or optional Plain Text Script Authoring Can include Field Type Description Function HTML or MathML Available in all Maple graded questions grading units tolerance choice 1 comment of comment i info optional optional optional optional optional optional optional optional optional optional optional user specified No internal directive Defines grading mode in numeric questions Required in numeric questions internal directive Reference to a customized table of units internal directive Number of significant digits Required for exact_sigd and toler_sigd grading modes in numeric questions internal directive Percentage error or tolerance Required fortoler_perc grading mode in numeric questions internal directive Absolute error or tolerance Required for toler_sigd and toler_abs grading modes in numeric questions internal directive Absolute tolerance for formula questions including subtypes O O O O O Yes display can contain variables Contains the ith choice in a multiple choice or multiple selection question The values of i in a question must start at l and be consecutive Yes display can contain variables Contains feedback provided to
505. ultiple permutations of questions from a single template You can use either Maple T A or Maple to generate algorithmic variables You can use either or both types of variables in any question type The syntax for a Maple based variable definition is lt variable_i gt maple lt Maple_command gt Using a Text or HTML Editor To define an algorithmic variable in the plain text script file specify variable definitions or other variable control sequences in the algorithm field algorithm lt variable definition_1 gt lt variable definition_n gt Using the Question Editor In the Question Editor define variables by directly entering Maple based variable definitions on the algorithm screen or using the Algorithm Designer Tutorial 1 The following tutorial shows how to convert a static Maple Formula question to an algorithmically generated question by using variables assigned values by Maple commands 286 Authoring Mathematical Questions Maple graded Question Consider the following plain text script question definition which asks a student to enter an anti derivative of x 3 question Enter an anti derivative of x 3 maple evalb diff RESPONSE x x 3 Q type formula mode Maple allow2d 1 name Maple AntiDerivative comment Any function of the form x 4 4 C where C is a constant is an anti derivative of x 3 editing useHTML 2222220 Notes l This question uses Maple
506. up containing the questions to be used as parts Click Next b It is recommended that you enter a description in the Question Description text field The description is used to label the question in the topic If excluded the question type is used c You can add Algorithms Information Fields Hints or Feedback For more details see Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 and Adding and Editing Information Fields Hints or Feedback page 74 d Click Finish 197 Authoring Question Types 5 On the Question Details screen a In the text region enter the question statement the text to appear at the top of the question b In the Select questions and assign weightings box 1 Select the check boxes beside the questions to include as parts 11 Click the plus and minus buttons to assign the relative weighting of each c From the Numbering style drop down menu select the numbering style for the parts of the question d Click Finish to place a copy of your question in the web site cache and to preview your question Multipart Questions Sequencing Parts When creating a multipart question identify the source question for each part e To select questions as parts you can add them individually or select multiple questions from a single topic by using the check boxes beside the questions e If you select multiple questions from the same topic during the same authoring session the multipart question authoring tool in the Questio
507. ure 7 12 below Note uniquel unique2 unique3 etc represents students by their student identifier which can be modified in the Options panel step 6 below 306 Working with the Gradebook External Assignment Upload Import external assignment Quiz 1 Quiz 2 Quiz 3 grades into the totalpoints 19 20 50 Gradebook from a passingscore 5 16 Pile file uniquel 7 5 13 41 l uniquez a 17 46 Ta unigue3 8 16 37 Figure 7 12 Import External Grades into the Gradebook from a File A Uu A W N 7 8 e Save the file as a text file with fields delimited by comma or tab characters From the Class Homepage select the Assignments menu Select External Import Click Browse to find the text file containing the grade roster Using the drop down menu Select file format specify whether the file is comma separated or tab separated In the Options panel unique represents a unique student identifier use the drop down menu to choose the student identifier either Login Email or Student ID Existing external assignments use the drop down menu and set it to Override With this selection if the assignment exists already students existing record for the assignment is overwritten with the new data If the student does not have a record a new one is created The other option is Ignore which is if the assignment exists already then it will be ignored and no grades will be imported for that assignment Clic
508. using left single quotes linestyle n Controls the dash pattern used to render lines in the plot The linestyle can be specified as either an integer between 1 and 4 or a name from the following list SOLID DOT DASH or DASHDOT The value must be in uppercase numpoints n Specifies the minimum number of points to be generated The default is 50 Note plot employs an adaptive plotting scheme which automatically does more work where the function values do not lie close to a straight line Hence plot often generates more than the minimum number of points resolution n Sets the horizontal display resolution of the device in pixels the default is n 200 The value of n is used to determine when the adaptive plotting scheme terminates A higher value results in more function evaluations for non smooth functions A list of values which is to be used for the initial sampling of the function s When coupled with adaptive false this option allows explicit control over the function evaluations performed by plot Controls the scaling of the graph as constrained or unconstrained The default value is unconstrained The value can be in lowercase or uppercase style s The interpolation style must be one of line patch patchnogrid or point The default is line The value can be in lowercase or uppercase The point style plots points only line interpolates between the points patch uses the patch style for plots containing polygons and patchnogri
509. using the drop down menu beside a question Table 4 4 summarizes actions that are available when editing a question within your current class Click the respective link below for more details on the action Table 4 4 Question Repository Available actions in the question edit screen Sort Weight page 86 ae te fade Groups page 86 View or edit the questions group this question belongs to InformationFields page 86 View or edit the information fields for this question Report This Question to Administrators page Report the question to the administrator 86 Question Text 85 Managing Questions You can click Preview to view what the question looks like in a new window You can also edit the question in two different ways Click Source El Source to edit the source code of the question Click Edit to edit the question the same way you would create one When searching the question repository the question text is included in what is searched Preview This option allows the instructor to preview the question before it is finalized Edit Source You can view and edit the raw data fields of your question here Note If you enter invalid field or value data you may make your questions unworkable Description You can view the description of the question or click Edit to create or revise the existing description When searching the question repository the description is included in what is searched Statistics You can view
510. variable to return a statement that tells the student on the following question Your response was correct incorrect depending on the grade in the first question Answer Try if eq grade foo2 1 correct incorrect 6 21 Setting Plot Options 2 D Plot Statement Options The options to the Maple plot command are given after the function s horizontal range and vertical range as equations of the form option value For example plotmaple plot sin x x Pi Pi filled true title My Plot The options described below are supported Table 6 17 Options for 2 D Plots adaptive When plotting a function over an interval the interval is sampled at a number of points controlled by sample and numpoints Adaptive plotting where necessary subdivides these intervals to attempt to get a better representation of the function This subsampling can be turned off by setting the adaptive option to false By default this option is set to true and intervals are subdivided at most 6 times in trying to improve the plot By setting this option to a non negative integer you can control the maximum number of times that subintervals are divided axes f Specifies the type of axes one of boxed frame none or normal The value can be in lowercase or uppercase color n or colour n Allows the user to specify the color of the curves to be plotted coords lt name gt Indicates that a parametric plot is in the coordinate system spe
511. vidual elements contained within a selected course module You also use View Details as the first step to deleting parts from within a course module 1 Select the check box adjacent to the course module you want to work with 2 Click the View Details button on the Course Modules screen e A page is displayed that shows the questions assignments and web resource folders that are contained in the course module 319 Course Modules e A description of each component may also be included depending on whether the creator of the course module included this information e If you have selected multiple course modules for viewing each is displayed in sequence with the above information posted 9 6 Adding and Deleting Elements within a Course Module Adding Course Module Contents The current release of the system does not allow you to add course module contents to an existing course module Instead you should create a new course module that contains all the elements you want Deleting Course Module Contents You may want to remove specific questions assignments or web folders from within a course module 1 From the Course Modules screen select the course module you want to work with from the list of available course modules in your class You can select multiple course modules for this action 2 Click View Details to proceed to a page that lists all the questions assignments and web resource folders that are contained in the sele
512. w settings for your assignment and preview the assignment questions To change settings 1 Click the appropriate Assignment Editor tab to return to the tab where the option is set If you click on the highlighted link for a policy it will tell you where this setting can be accessed 2 Make the desired modifications and proceed to the Review amp Finish tab 3 5 Details on Using the Adaptive Assignment Editor With Maple T A you can create flexible adaptive assignments that let you separate questions into different branches or difficulty levels When a student takes an adaptive test each new question is selected from the appropriate branch depending on their earlier responses Create New Adaptive Assignment To create a new adaptive assignment do the following 57 Creating and Managing Assignments 1 From the Class Homepage select Assignments 2 Click New Adaptive Assignment Choose Name Tab For information on the assignment name assignment instructions and how to define what text is shown upon grading see Choose Name Tab page 45 Select Questions Tab Add Branches to Adaptive Assignments 1 To add a branch to an assignment click the icon which is located underneath the Select Questions tab 2 Give a name for the new branch click the dl icon If you would like to cancel the creation of the new branch click the E3 icon instead Changing Properties of Branches To change various properties of a branc
513. wer choices in the Item fields To add additional choices click Add Item To delete items click Delete Item f Edit the Weight in the table as desired using 1 fully correct or any decimal value between 0 and 1 for partially correct answers 6 Click OK 7 To add an Algorithm or Feedback see Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 and Adding and Editing Information Fields page 74 8 Click Finish to save the question 9 In order to view the question and test it by selecting various responses click Preview Example In this example you are guided through the creation of a list question using the Question Designer List questions serve two purposes to ask students to select from a list of entries or to fill in the blanks This example uses a list of entries This question is created in the Question Editor as a Question Designer question To create a List question 1 Select the Questions menu then New Question The Question Editor is displayed 2 On the Question Type screen select Question Designer 3 Enter the Question Name Question Designer List 4 In the Question Text field enter the following Who introduced the Arabic number system to Europe 5 Click Insert Edit Response Area 0 In the Edit Response Area dialog a Under Choose Question Type select List b Weighting specify the weight of this response area in the overall question c Under Matching Type select Ignore case text match d Under Display Type
514. wer were Slength 2 pi S diameter 2 2 1 0 01 the margin of error would be based on only the second term pi diameter 2 2 because the assumed multiplication is of higher precedence than the addition Numeric Mathematical Questions For Numeric question types you cannot use the operator to define a margin of error It is recommended that you use the Question Editor on screen dialog boxes for setting the margin of error in numeric and numeric with unit questions However once familiar with the syntax you may prefer to use a text or HTML editor For more information on setting the precision and margin of error in the Question Editor see Setting the Answer Tolerance in Numeric Questions page 212 Example 2 1 To specify that the student response must exactly match the value of your answer use grading exact_value qu 2 topic Numeric Math Questions zZ gr eeggeees NNNNNNDN ND PRPRPPRPPP Pe question Round 2 76789m to three significant digits answer num 2 77 answer units m ShowUnits true grading exact_value mode Numeric name 2 77m exact editing useHTML Plain Text Script Authoring This question grades correct the response 2 77m and equal valued responses with trailing zeros for example 2 770m and 2 7700m To specify the answer assign the numeric component to answer num and the units to answer units If you set showUnits false the system does not display the Unit
515. when a student enters an incorrect response each question type supports a comment field The comment is displayed after grading In the comment field you can include additional explanations about solution method or final answer You can create response specific feedback for multiple choice questions in which a distinct comment is displayed for each choice For more information see Multiple Choice Questions page 198 If you do not specify a comment for a question the system displays only the correct answer For details on using the feedback in assignments see Assignment Editor Step 3 Setting Policies page 33 Plain Text Script Authoring Using Complete Solutions Study Session Assignments Note Information in the solution field is available only in Study Session assignments To display feedback for example step by step solutions in all assignment modes use the comment field In the solution field you can enter a worked solution that is displayed in Study Session assignments For information on adding a complete solution using the Question Editor see Adding and Editing Feedback page 75 In these sessions the student can view the solution before entering an answer or after submitting the question to be graded When the system grades a question in a Study Session assignment it states whether the response was correct or incorrect It does not display the correct answer The solution can be an essential teaching component in
516. where n is the number of responses and F is the number of fully correct responses d Value The d Value measures the discrimination of an item To calculate it the dataset is divided into two groups based on the scores on the entire assignment The sets consist of those that scored greater than or equal to the median grade on the assignment and those that scored less than the median grade on the assignment The p Value for each set is calculated and the d Value is the difference of the p Value for the high scoring group and the p Value for the low scoring group _ Fl _ F2 nl n2 where nl number of assignments with scores median grade for the assignment n2 number of assignments with scores lt median grade for the assignment 299 Working with the Gradebook F1 number of fully correct responses on this item from the top scoring set F2 number of fully correct responses on this item from the bottom scoring set p Biserial The p Biserial is a correlation coefficient relating performance on an item and performance on the total assignment The p Biserial correlation coefficient is an index of discrimination that measures the extent to which students who score high on the assignment tend to get the item correct and those who score low tend to get the item incorrect where Y mean grade of assignments on which this item was answered incorrectly Y mean grade of assignments on which this item was answered fully correctly
517. will appear and the course module is saved by default to a ZIP file with the name of the course module Note It is strongly recommended that you rename the course module replacing the default name with a more meaningful name Maple T A uses unique question identifiers to identify questions When you export a question bank or a course module the questions unique question identifiers are saved along with the other data This allows question updates during subsequent QU file imports 9 4 Importing and Installing a Course Module Note In the following discussion the term destination class refers to the class that you want to install the course module into and the term source class refers to the originating class for the course module contents To install a new course module into the destination class 1 Ensure that you have access to the saved course module from the source class on your hard drive a network drive or an Internet resource 2 Click the Import button in the Course Modules screen 318 Course Modules 3 To select a course module click Choose File 4 Navigate to the course module on your hard drive a network drive or an Internet resource and click Open 5 Click Import to initiate the file upload The speed of the upload process depends on your internet connection e Elements contained in your uploaded course that are also contained in your class are highlighted in yellow background with red type with a warning m
518. will make the Quadrant Game Math App gradeable through Maple T A Before you create the question in Maple T A open the Quadrant Game e O Math App in Maple and delete the Restart Game button This will dd Quadrant 1 prevent students from restarting the game during an actual assignment ea Quadrant IV No Quadrant Log in to your Maple T A server and then go to your Class Homepage BE Demo Maple T A Class Class User Manager ProctorTools Assignments Questions Gradebook From your Class Homepage select the Questions menu Math App Click New Question Question Name Quadrant Game In the Question Type list select Math App ae El source 0 GLEA Enter a question name Enter the text for the question Demo Maple T A Class Class User Manager Proctor Tools Assignments Questions Gradebook Math App Question Name Quadrant Game Question Text You will see ten red points and you are required to identify what quadrant the red pointis residing in If you get the correct quadrant on your first attempt you will get a point Ifittakes you multiple attempts to get the correct quadrant no points will be given After see all the red points they are told thier score and how long ittook you to finish 191 Authoring Question Types In the Choose Worksheet section click Choose Worksheet to upload MathAppFiles f your Math App MathAppDefiningth JiParamsProcedure mw MathAppExploreQu Upload file s
519. with more significant digits than the number selected in the Figures drop down menu all student responses are graded incorrect For example if 213 Authoring Question Types you specify 2 771 as the correct answer value and select 3 in the Figures drop down menu 2 77 is incorrect because it does not have the same value as the correct answer value 2 771 and 2 771 is incorrect because it has more than 3 significant digits Example In a physics problem where the correct answer is 2 70 if you insist that a student enter the correct number of significant digits you must use the Figures option If you select Require absolute accuracy and enter 2 70 in the answer value text field 2 7 2 70 and 2 700 are graded correct which is not the desired behavior You must select Figures select 3 from the drop down menu and enter 2 70 in the answer value text field In this case the student responses 2 7 and 2 700 are graded incorrect Setting a Margin of Error e To directly specify the margin of error select Accept err and then enter the numeric value of the variance or corresponding algorithmic variable in the err text field For example if the correct answer is 3 142 anderr 0 001 the range of correct responses is between 3 141 and 3 143 inclusive e To specify the margin of error as a percentage of the correct answer select Accept perc and then enter the percentage in the perc text field For example if
520. wo pieces ofmathml behavior that can be controlled by a numeric argument e Whether to enclose the generated MathML in lt math gt tags the default is to do so e Whether to simplify math expressions the default is to do so Syntax mathml expr set expression in MathML using the defaults above mathml expr k set expression in MathML using the options from the table below Table 6 4 Options for the mathML Function rE o O O Include lt math gt tags Simplify math 0 Default AA A A Turning off the lt math gt tags allows you to generate a MathML snippet with mathml that is to be used within a larger math layout that is generated either in raw MathML or from LaTeX For example in the LaTeX macros you can write int_1 infty var mathml Sa b x 2 1 dx to display simplified algorithmic math inside an integral See Also Inline Display of Formatted Math Expressions page 237 mathml f page 268 6 8 Plotting Using Maple You can use Maple plotting features to display plots Maple provides many ways of representing data and mathematical expressions graphically using plots You can display a plot with any question type e Displaying a Maple Plot with the plotmaple Command Use the plotmaple command anywhere an algorithmic variable can be used that is in question text hints feedback solution and answer For more information see Displaying a Maple Plot e Plotting a Student Response Use Mapl
521. y Pes da A ES LARREA T A EEE 222 02 Basie Math yna 11 the SYSED is a a aa a a aa oats a e ea e ac REE 222 Wits Mathematical E xpressiOms ia 223 Wala Le Names strain ladra laicidad 223 Operator and Function SUL AAA AT AAA EA AAA AAA AA 223 6 3 Understanding the Math Capabiliti s nte System A ia 224 64 student Responses and Cragin is tias 224 Sdent Response Sena a Ga nnact ase a ea e goa tenets a aa a setae tanmatoene EE 224 Controlling Answer Format in Numeric Questions ooococcccononcnconononconononnnnononnnn no nn rn non nn nnnn nn rana nnnnnnnnnnnanarnnanannnns 225 Controle Answer Tolerancia ca 226 Setting a Margin of Error in Non numeric Questions A A A ecned 221 Sieniticant Dieits in Maple QUESOS da 228 Using Maple Code to Prevent Cheating in Maple Syntax Questions ooocococoncncononcnconononcnnoncnconononcnnnnoncnnnncnnnnnncncnnnnss 228 Entering Cactos 229 Potica suwdan Response id 230 63 USNE tormula Sata iodo 231 6 6 Using the Equation Editor to Create Formatted Math Expressions ooococococccocononcocononcnnonononcnnononnnnononcnnnncnnnnnncnnnnancnnnos 231 Fdtti o wath the Equatorial 231 Equatomlbdtor Palta a tail db AS 233 Equation Editor Requirements and Syntax arias 235 6 7 Using MathML to Create Formatted Math Expressions ooococcccononccconononconononconononnnnnnonnnrnnn nn nnn non nnnnnonnnnnnonnnnanannnnanos 237 Inline Display of Formatted Maty EXPTE eras 237 MatiiML Authorino wih Ati De SN SA A Ras 2
522. y response between 4 864 and 5 376 inclusive use 5 12 1 0 05 Note The operator cannot be used in an algorithmic variable definition or other algorithmic statement 228 Authoring Mathematical Questions For numeric and Maple graded questions you cannot use the operator For information on specifying a margin of error for a numeric question see Setting the Answer Tolerance in Numeric Questions page 212 To specify a margin of error in a Maple graded question use Maple code Consider the following when working with margins of error e Precedence of the Operator The operator is of the same precedence as and For example 2 3 0 5 is the same as6 0 5and2 3 0 5 isthesameas 6 1 e Units Because expressions with units have different dimensions from pure numbers you must specify a dimensioned margin of error for a dimensioned answer To specify 2kg with a tolerance of 0 1kg enter 2kg 0 lkgor 2 0 1 kg To specify 50cm within 5 enter 1 0 05 50cm Important The expression 50cm 2 is invalid It is a mixed expression The left hand side has dimension length The right hand side is dimensionless a pure number e The operator is not available to students A student cannot specify a margin of error The above issues do not arise for students For more examples and information see Tutorial Setting Margin of Tolerance in Non numeric Questions page 256 See Also Answer Tole
523. y the LDAP server login is denied If the credentials are accepted a If the user is already known to Maple T A profile information is acquired from the LDAP directory Maple T A s database is updated to reflect any changes b If the user is not known to Maple T A the user is added to the Maple T A database retrieving profile information from the LDAP directory Maple T A then displays a validation page for the user The user is given the opportunity to add profile information not supplied by the LDAP directory and must confirm the final profile information The login username and password are case sensitive You may use any combination of upper and lower case Maple T A stores the username as found in the LDAP directory and that username will appear in web pages and reports Forgotten Passwords If a user forgets his or her password the user must contact your university s IT group In an LDAP environment Maple T A does not manage passwords and the Maple T A course administrator cannot reset or retrieve passwords 313 Administering Maple T A User Manager Add Users with LDAP The Add User action on the Administer Users page allows you to locate individuals in the LDAP directory who are not in Maple T A and add them to Maple T A The effect 1s the same as if the user had logged in You can search for users by attribute username first name last name or email address You can use a as a wildcard For example Last Name
524. y within the Question Designer see Editing Question Details in the Question Respository page 84 178 Authoring Question Types Create a Math App in a Worksheet There are several different ways you can create your Math Apps using Maple l 2 J Create a Math App using the Exploration Assistant in Maple Create a Math App using Maple embedded components Download an existing Math App from the Maple Cloud and make modifications to it Create a Math App with the Exploration Assistant There are two ways you can use the Exploration Assistant l Ze Right click and select Explore from the context sensitive menus Call the Explore command Using the Context Menu General steps for invoking the Exploration Assistant through the context menu l 2 3 Enter your expression in a Maple worksheet Right click the expression and select Explore A new Explore dialog box appears Enter lower and upper values for the parameters you want to explore Select the skip box beside any variables or parameters you don t want to change Click Explore Anew table is created inline with the expression and sliders for your indeterminates Move the sliders back and forth to see how they change the solution You can now save the assistant for future use with File gt Save Example Explore an integral expression l Enter the expression tan x x cos x dx Tip You can use the Expression palette to insert the inte
525. you can leave it blank if there are no variables to initialize in the worksheet In the Select the type of grading used section choose which type of grading is going to be used to grade the final state of the worksheet To add an Algorithm or Feedback to the question see Adding and Editing Algorithms page 73 and Adding and Editing Feedback page 75 for more details Click OK and then Finish to save and preview the question For more details on Math App questions see Math App Questions page 176 Mathematical Formula To create a Mathematical Formula question l Za ND On A W Enter a title for the question under the Question Name panel Enter a question in the Question Text Optionally enter the question using symbolic math by clicking the Equation Editor jicon The Equation Editor opens See Formatting Tips page 94 Click Insert Edit Response Area Select the Formula question type in the Edit Response Area dialog Select a formula math grader by clicking Sub type drop down list Enter the answer in the Answer field Click OK and then Finish to save and preview the question Formula without Simplification There is one subtype of Mathematical Formula question that can only be authored in the Question Designer This is called Formula without Simplification where the answer must be left in its unsimplified form to be graded correctly In other words if the instructor states that they would lik
526. your question by completing a form Show Designer Refresh algorithm preview Variable zone yone m Figure 5 31 Equation Example Algorithm Value 145 Authoring Question Types 7 Enter the following for Question Text What is the equation of the straight line passing through the point xone yone with a slope m 8 Enter the following for Correct answer y m x xone yone 9 In the Type of expression accepted list select Equation 10 Click Finish 11 Click Preview to view the question See Figure 5 32 146 Authoring Question Types Preview Question Equation of a straight What is the equation ofthe straight line passing through the point 6 3 8 with a slope 5 line This question accepts equations E g y 2 5 x 4 1 Help Switch to Equation Editor Preview rere Figure 5 32 Equation Example Preview Example 6 Unordered List of Formulas Subtype The unordered list of formulas subtype accepts a list of numbers or formulas separated by semicolons The response is graded correct if the list of formulas matches the list in the correct answer when ignoring the ordering If the correct answer is 1 2 3 then any of the 6 permutations of the formulas for example 2 1 3 3 2 1 and 1 2 3 is graded correct To accept an ordered list of formulas use the ordered lists of formulas subtype For more details see Ordered List of Formulas Subtype page 148 To create an Unordered List

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

取扱説明書  Tuncmatik Digitech Pro 650VA  Belkin F1DN104K KVM switch  TMG10D - Toray Membrane  (kv-s1025c) manual de usuario kv  Equipment Solutions  TEX2 Tape to Digital Converter User Guide      LocalView  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file